Manual B30

B30 Bus Differential Relay
UR Series Instruction Manual

836770A1.CDR
B30 revision: 4.4x
Manual P/N: 1601-0109-J2 (GEK-112985A)
Copyright 2005 GE Multilin
GE Multilin
215 Anderson Avenue, Markham, Ontario
Canada L6E 1B3
Tel: (905) 294-6222 Fax: (905) 201-2098
Internet: http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin
g
GE Industrial Systems
Title Page
ISO9001:2000
G
E
M
ULT
I
L
I
N
R
E
G
ISTE
R
E
D
GE Multilin's Quality Management
System is registered to
ISO9001:2000
QMI # 005094
UL # A3775
Addendum
ADDENDUM
This Addendum contains information that relates to the B30 Bus Differential Relay relay, version 4.4x. This addendum
lists a number of information items that appear in the instruction manual GEK-112985A (revision J2) but are not
included in the current B30 operations.
The following functions/items are not yet available with the current version of the B30 relay:
N/A
Version 4.0x and higher releases of the B30 relay includes new hardware (CPU and CT/VT modules).
The new CPU modules are specified with the following order codes: 9E, 9G, and 9H.
The new CT/VT modules are specified with the following order codes: 8F, 8G, 8H, 8J.
The following table maps the relationship between the old CPU and CT/VT modules to the newer versions:
The new CT/VT modules can only be used with the new CPUs (9E, 9G, 9H), and the old CT/VT modules can only be
used with the old CPU modules (9A, 9C, 9D). To prevent any hardware mismatches, the new CPU and CT/VT modules
have blue labels and a warning sticker stating Attn.: Ensure CPU and DSP module label colors are the same!. In
the event that there is a mismatch between the CPU and CT/VT module, the relay will not function and a DSP ERROR or
HARDWARE MISMATCH error will be displayed.
All other input/output modules are compatible with the new hardware.
With respect to the firmware, firmware versions 4.0x and higher are only compatible with the new CPU and CT/VT mod-
ules. Previous versions of the firmware (3.4x and earlier) are only compatible with the older CPU and CT/VT modules.
MODULE OLD NEW DESCRIPTION
CPU 9A 9E RS485 and RS485 (Modbus RTU, DNP)
9C 9G RS485 and 10Base-F (MMS/UCA2, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP)
9D 9H RS485 and Redundant 10Base-F (MMS/UCA2, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP)
CT/VT 8A 8F Standard 4CT/4VT
8B 8G Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT
8C 8H Standard 8CT
8D 8J Sensitive Ground 8CT/8VT
g
GE Industrial Systems
Addendum
GE Multilin B30 Bus Differential Relay v
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. GETTING STARTED 1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES
1.1.1 CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS ........................................................................... 1-1
1.1.2 INSPECTION CHECKLIST................................................................................ 1-1
1.2 UR OVERVIEW
1.2.1 INTRODUCTION TO THE UR........................................................................... 1-2
1.2.2 HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE......................................................................... 1-3
1.2.3 UR SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE ................................................................... 1-4
1.2.4 IMPORTANT UR CONCEPTS........................................................................... 1-4
1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE
1.3.1 REQUIREMENTS .............................................................................................. 1-5
1.3.2 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION............................................................................ 1-5
1.3.3 CONNECTING THE ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE WITH THE B30 ... 1-7
1.4 UR HARDWARE
1.4.1 MOUNTING AND WIRING............................................................................... 1-10
1.4.2 COMMUNICATIONS........................................................................................ 1-10
1.4.3 FACEPLATE DISPLAY.................................................................................... 1-10
1.5 USING THE RELAY
1.5.1 FACEPLATE KEYPAD..................................................................................... 1-11
1.5.2 MENU NAVIGATION ....................................................................................... 1-11
1.5.3 MENU HIERARCHY ........................................................................................ 1-11
1.5.4 RELAY ACTIVATION....................................................................................... 1-12
1.5.5 RELAY PASSWORDS..................................................................................... 1-12
1.5.6 FLEXLOGIC CUSTOMIZATION................................................................... 1-12
1.5.7 COMMISSIONING........................................................................................... 1-13
2. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1 INTRODUCTION
2.1.1 OVERVIEW........................................................................................................ 2-1
2.1.2 ORDERING........................................................................................................ 2-2
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS
2.2.1 PROTECTION ELEMENTS ............................................................................... 2-5
2.2.2 USER-PROGRAMMABLE ELEMENTS............................................................. 2-6
2.2.3 MONITORING.................................................................................................... 2-7
2.2.4 METERING........................................................................................................ 2-7
2.2.5 INPUTS.............................................................................................................. 2-7
2.2.6 POWER SUPPLY .............................................................................................. 2-8
2.2.7 OUTPUTS.......................................................................................................... 2-8
2.2.8 COMMUNICATIONS.......................................................................................... 2-9
2.2.9 INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS............................................................... 2-10
2.2.10 ENVIRONMENTAL .......................................................................................... 2-10
2.2.11 TYPE TESTS ................................................................................................... 2-11
2.2.12 PRODUCTION TESTS .................................................................................... 2-11
2.2.13 APPROVALS ................................................................................................... 2-11
2.2.14 MAINTENANCE............................................................................................... 2-11
3. HARDWARE 3.1 DESCRIPTION
3.1.1 PANEL CUTOUT ............................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2 MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION..................................................... 3-2
3.1.3 REAR TERMINAL LAYOUT............................................................................... 3-3
3.2 WIRING
3.2.1 TYPICAL WIRING.............................................................................................. 3-4
3.2.2 DIELECTRIC STRENGTH................................................................................. 3-5
3.2.3 CONTROL POWER........................................................................................... 3-5
3.2.4 CT/VT MODULES.............................................................................................. 3-6
3.2.5 CONTACT INPUTS/OUTPUTS ......................................................................... 3-8
3.2.6 TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS................................................................ 3-14
3.2.7 RS232 FACEPLATE PORT ............................................................................. 3-15
3.2.8 CPU COMMUNICATION PORTS.................................................................... 3-16
3.2.9 IRIG-B .............................................................................................................. 3-18
Table of Contents
vi B30 Bus Differential Relay GE Multilin
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.3 DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS
3.3.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................3-19
3.3.2 FIBER: LED AND ELED TRANSMITTERS ......................................................3-21
3.3.3 FIBER-LASER TRANSMITTERS .....................................................................3-21
3.3.4 G.703 INTERFACE...........................................................................................3-22
3.3.5 RS422 INTERFACE .........................................................................................3-25
3.3.6 RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE .....................................................................3-27
3.3.7 G.703 AND FIBER INTERFACE ......................................................................3-27
3.3.8 IEEE C37.94 INTERFACE................................................................................3-28
4. HUMAN INTERFACES 4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE
4.1.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................4-1
4.1.2 CREATING A SITE LIST ....................................................................................4-1
4.1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP OVERVIEW................................................................4-1
4.1.4 ENERVISTA UR SETUP MAIN WINDOW..........................................................4-3
4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE
4.2.1 FACEPLATE.......................................................................................................4-4
4.2.2 LED INDICATORS..............................................................................................4-4
4.2.3 DISPLAY.............................................................................................................4-7
4.2.4 KEYPAD.............................................................................................................4-7
4.2.5 MENUS...............................................................................................................4-7
4.2.6 CHANGING SETTINGS .....................................................................................4-9
5. SETTINGS 5.1 OVERVIEW
5.1.1 SETTINGS MENU..............................................................................................5-1
5.1.2 INTRODUCTION TO ELEMENTS......................................................................5-3
5.1.3 INTRODUCTION TO AC SOURCES..................................................................5-5
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5.2.1 PASSWORD SECURITY....................................................................................5-7
5.2.2 DISPLAY PROPERTIES ....................................................................................5-8
5.2.3 CLEAR RELAY RECORDS................................................................................5-9
5.2.4 COMMUNICATIONS ........................................................................................5-10
5.2.5 MODBUS USER MAP ......................................................................................5-19
5.2.6 REAL TIME CLOCK .........................................................................................5-19
5.2.7 USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT....................................................5-19
5.2.8 OSCILLOGRAPHY...........................................................................................5-20
5.2.9 USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS .....................................................................5-22
5.2.10 USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS .........................................................5-25
5.2.11 CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS............................................................................5-25
5.2.12 USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS....................................................5-27
5.2.13 FLEX STATE PARAMETERS ..........................................................................5-28
5.2.14 USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS........................................................................5-29
5.2.15 DIRECT INPUTS/OUTPUTS............................................................................5-31
5.2.16 INSTALLATION................................................................................................5-36
5.3 SYSTEM SETUP
5.3.1 AC INPUTS.......................................................................................................5-37
5.3.2 POWER SYSTEM ............................................................................................5-38
5.3.3 SIGNAL SOURCES..........................................................................................5-39
5.3.4 FLEXCURVES..............................................................................................5-41
5.3.5 BUS ..................................................................................................................5-48
5.4 FLEXLOGIC
5.4.1 INTRODUCTION TO FLEXLOGIC................................................................5-49
5.4.2 FLEXLOGIC RULES.....................................................................................5-55
5.4.3 FLEXLOGIC EVALUATION ..........................................................................5-55
5.4.4 FLEXLOGIC EXAMPLE................................................................................5-56
5.4.5 FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR................................................................5-60
5.4.6 FLEXLOGIC TIMERS ...................................................................................5-60
5.4.7 FLEXELEMENTS..........................................................................................5-61
5.4.8 NON-VOLATILE LATCHES..............................................................................5-65
GE Multilin B30 Bus Differential Relay vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS
5.5.1 OVERVIEW...................................................................................................... 5-66
5.5.2 SETTING GROUP ........................................................................................... 5-66
5.5.3 BUS DIFFERENTIAL ....................................................................................... 5-66
5.5.4 PHASE CURRENT .......................................................................................... 5-70
5.5.5 NEUTRAL CURRENT...................................................................................... 5-78
5.5.6 GROUND CURRENT....................................................................................... 5-80
5.5.7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS.................................................................................... 5-82
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS
5.6.1 OVERVIEW...................................................................................................... 5-86
5.6.2 SETTING GROUPS......................................................................................... 5-86
5.6.3 SELECTOR SWITCH....................................................................................... 5-87
5.6.4 DIGITAL ELEMENTS....................................................................................... 5-92
5.6.5 DIGITAL COUNTERS...................................................................................... 5-95
5.6.6 MONITORING ELEMENTS ............................................................................. 5-97
5.7 INPUTS / OUTPUTS
5.7.1 CONTACT INPUTS.......................................................................................... 5-99
5.7.2 VIRTUAL INPUTS.......................................................................................... 5-101
5.7.3 CONTACT OUTPUTS.................................................................................... 5-102
5.7.4 LATCHING OUTPUTS................................................................................... 5-102
5.7.5 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS...................................................................................... 5-104
5.7.6 REMOTE DEVICES....................................................................................... 5-105
5.7.7 REMOTE INPUTS.......................................................................................... 5-106
5.7.8 REMOTE OUTPUTS...................................................................................... 5-107
5.7.9 RESETTING................................................................................................... 5-108
5.7.10 DIRECT INPUTS/OUTPUTS ......................................................................... 5-108
5.8 TRANSDUCER I/O
5.8.1 DCMA INPUTS .............................................................................................. 5-112
5.8.2 RTD INPUTS.................................................................................................. 5-113
5.8.3 DCMA OUTPUTS .......................................................................................... 5-113
5.9 TESTING
5.9.1 TEST MODE .................................................................................................. 5-117
5.9.2 FORCE CONTACT INPUTS.......................................................................... 5-117
5.9.3 FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS...................................................................... 5-118
6. ACTUAL VALUES 6.1 OVERVIEW
6.1.1 ACTUAL VALUES MAIN MENU........................................................................ 6-1
6.2 STATUS
6.2.1 CONTACT INPUTS............................................................................................ 6-3
6.2.2 VIRTUAL INPUTS.............................................................................................. 6-3
6.2.3 REMOTE INPUTS.............................................................................................. 6-3
6.2.4 CONTACT OUTPUTS........................................................................................ 6-4
6.2.5 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS.......................................................................................... 6-4
6.2.6 REMOTE DEVICES........................................................................................... 6-4
6.2.7 DIGITAL COUNTERS........................................................................................ 6-5
6.2.8 SELECTOR SWITCHES.................................................................................... 6-5
6.2.9 FLEX STATES ................................................................................................... 6-5
6.2.10 ETHERNET........................................................................................................ 6-6
6.2.11 DIRECT INPUTS................................................................................................ 6-6
6.2.12 DIRECT DEVICES STATUS.............................................................................. 6-7
6.2.13 EGD PROTOCOL STATUS............................................................................... 6-7
6.3 METERING
6.3.1 METERING CONVENTIONS............................................................................. 6-8
6.3.2 BUS ZONE....................................................................................................... 6-10
6.3.3 SOURCES ....................................................................................................... 6-10
6.3.4 TRACKING FREQUENCY............................................................................... 6-12
6.3.5 FLEXELEMENTS......................................................................................... 6-12
6.3.6 TRANSDUCER I/O .......................................................................................... 6-13
6.4 RECORDS
6.4.1 USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORTS ................................................ 6-14
6.4.2 EVENT RECORDS .......................................................................................... 6-14
viii B30 Bus Differential Relay GE Multilin
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.4.3 OSCILLOGRAPHY...........................................................................................6-14
6.5 PRODUCT INFORMATION
6.5.1 MODEL INFORMATION...................................................................................6-15
6.5.2 FIRMWARE REVISIONS..................................................................................6-15
7. COMMANDS AND
TARGETS
7.1 COMMANDS
7.1.1 COMMANDS MENU...........................................................................................7-1
7.1.2 VIRTUAL INPUTS ..............................................................................................7-1
7.1.3 CLEAR RECORDS.............................................................................................7-2
7.1.4 SET DATE AND TIME........................................................................................7-2
7.1.5 RELAY MAINTENANCE.....................................................................................7-2
7.2 TARGETS
7.2.1 TARGETS MENU...............................................................................................7-3
7.2.2 TARGET MESSAGES........................................................................................7-3
7.2.3 RELAY SELF-TESTS .........................................................................................7-3
8. THEORY OF OPERATION 8.1 INTRODUCTION
8.1.1 BUS DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION .................................................................8-1
8.2 DYNAMIC BUS REPLICA
8.2.1 DYNAMIC BUS REPLICA MECHANISM............................................................8-2
8.2.2 CT RATIO MATCHING.......................................................................................8-3
8.3 DIFFERENTIAL PRINCIPLE
8.3.1 BIASED DIFFERENTIAL CHARACTERISTIC....................................................8-4
8.3.2 DIFFERENTIAL AND RESTRAINING CURRENTS...........................................8-5
8.3.3 ENHANCED SECURITY ....................................................................................8-6
8.4 DIRECTIONAL PRINCIPLE
8.4.1 CURRENT DIRECTIONAL PROTECTION.........................................................8-7
8.5 SATURATION DETECTOR
8.5.1 CT SATURATION DETECTION.........................................................................8-8
8.6 OUTPUT LOGIC AND EXAMPLES
8.6.1 OUTPUT LOGIC.................................................................................................8-9
8.6.2 INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL FAULT EXAMPLE...............................................8-9
9. APPLICATION OF
SETTINGS
9.1 OVERVIEW
9.1.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................9-1
9.1.2 SAMPLE BUSBAR AND DATA ..........................................................................9-1
9.2 ZONING AND DYNAMIC BUS REPLICA
9.2.1 DESCRIPTION ...................................................................................................9-3
9.2.2 NORTH BUS ZONE............................................................................................9-3
9.2.3 SOUTH BUS ZONE............................................................................................9-4
9.3 BIASED CHARACTERISTIC BREAKPOINTS
9.3.1 DESCRIPTION ...................................................................................................9-5
9.3.2 HIGH BREAKPOINT...........................................................................................9-5
9.3.3 LOW BREAKPOINT ...........................................................................................9-6
9.4 SLOPES AND HIGH SET THRESHOLD
9.4.1 DESCRIPTION ...................................................................................................9-7
9.4.2 EXTERNAL FAULTS ON C-1.............................................................................9-7
9.5 BUS DIFFERENTIAL SETTINGS
9.5.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................9-10
GE Multilin B30 Bus Differential Relay ix
TABLE OF CONTENTS
9.6 ENHANCING RELAY PERFORMANCE
9.6.1 USING SETTING GROUPS............................................................................. 9-11
A. FLEXANALOG
PARAMETERS
A.1 PARAMETERS
B. MODBUS
COMMUNICATIONS
B.1 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL
B.1.1 INTRODUCTION................................................................................................ B-1
B.1.2 PHYSICAL LAYER............................................................................................. B-1
B.1.3 DATA LINK LAYER............................................................................................ B-1
B.1.4 CRC-16 ALGORITHM........................................................................................ B-2
B.2 MODBUS FUNCTION CODES
B.2.1 SUPPORTED FUNCTION CODES ................................................................... B-3
B.2.2 READ ACTUAL VALUES OR SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 03/04H) ........... B-3
B.2.3 EXECUTE OPERATION (FUNCTION CODE 05H) ........................................... B-4
B.2.4 STORE SINGLE SETTING (FUNCTION CODE 06H) ....................................... B-4
B.2.5 STORE MULTIPLE SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 10H) ................................ B-5
B.2.6 EXCEPTION RESPONSES............................................................................... B-5
B.3 FILE TRANSFERS
B.3.1 OBTAINING RELAY FILES VIA MODBUS........................................................ B-6
B.3.2 MODBUS PASSWORD OPERATION............................................................... B-7
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
B.4.1 MODBUS MEMORY MAP ................................................................................. B-8
B.4.2 DATA FORMATS.............................................................................................B-39
C. IEC 60870-5-104 COMMS. C.1 IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL
C.1.1 INTEROPERABILITY DOCUMENT...................................................................C-1
C.1.2 IEC 60870-5-104 POINTS ...............................................................................C-10
D. DNP COMMUNICATIONS D.1 DNP PROTOCOL
D.1.1 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT........................................................................D-1
D.1.2 DNP IMPLEMENTATION...................................................................................D-4
D.2 DNP POINT LISTS
D.2.1 BINARY INPUTS................................................................................................D-8
D.2.2 BINARY AND CONTROL RELAY OUTPUTS..................................................D-13
D.2.3 COUNTERS.....................................................................................................D-14
D.2.4 ANALOG INPUTS............................................................................................D-15
E. MISCELLANEOUS E.1 CHANGE NOTES
E.1.1 REVISION HISTORY......................................................................................... E-1
E.1.2 CHANGES TO THE B30 MANUAL.................................................................... E-1
E.2 ABBREVIATIONS
E.2.1 STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS ......................................................................... E-4
E.3 WARRANTY
E.3.1 GE MULTILIN WARRANTY............................................................................... E-6
INDEX
x B30 Bus Differential Relay GE Multilin
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GE Multilin B30 Bus Differential Relay 1-1
1 GETTING STARTED 1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES
1
1 GETTING STARTED 1.1IMPORTANT PROCEDURES
Please read this chapter to help guide you through the initial setup of your new relay.
1.1.1 CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS
Before attempting to install or use the relay, it is imperative that all WARNINGS and CAU-
TIONS in this manual are reviewed to help prevent personal injury, equipment damage, and/
or downtime.
1.1.2 INSPECTION CHECKLIST
Open the relay packaging and inspect the unit for physical damage.
View the rear nameplate and verify that the correct model has been ordered.
Figure 11: REAR NAMEPLATE (EXAMPLE)
Ensure that the following items are included:
Instruction Manual
GE enerVista CD (includes the enerVista UR Setup software and manuals in PDF format)
mounting screws
registration card (attached as the last page of the manual)
Fill out the registration form and return to GE Multilin (include the serial number located on the rear nameplate).
For product information, instruction manual updates, and the latest software updates, please visit the GE Multilin web-
site at http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin.
If there is any noticeable physical damage, or any of the contents listed are missing, please contact GE
Multilin immediately.
GE MULTILIN CONTACT INFORMATION AND CALL CENTER FOR PRODUCT SUPPORT:
GE Multilin
215 Anderson Avenue
Markham, Ontario
Canada L6E 1B3
TELEPHONE: (905) 294-6222, 1-800-547-8629 (North America only)
FAX: (905) 201-2098
E-MAIL: gemultilin@indsys.ge.com
HOME PAGE: http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin
WARNING CAUTION
Technical Support:
Tel: (905) 294-6222
Fax: (905) 201-2098
http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin
Model:
Mods:
Wiring Diagram:
Inst. Manual:
Serial Number:
Firmware:
Mfg. Date:
B30H00HCHF8HH6HM8HP6AU8HW6H
000
836773
D
MAZB98000029
D
1998/01/05
Control Power:
Contact Inputs:
Contact Outputs:
88-300V DC @ 35W / 77-265V AC @ 35VA
300V DC Max 10mA
Standard Pilot Duty / 250V AC 7.5A
360V A Resistive / 125V DC Break
4A @ L/R = 40mS / 300W
RATINGS:
B30
GE Multilin
Made in
Canada
- M A A B 9 7 0 0 0 0 9 9 -
Bus Differential Relay
NOTE
1-2 B30 Bus Differential Relay GE Multilin
1.2 UR OVERVIEW 1 GETTING STARTED
1
1.2UR OVERVIEW 1.2.1 INTRODUCTION TO THE UR
Historically, substation protection, control, and metering functions were performed with electromechanical equipment. This
first generation of equipment was gradually replaced by analog electronic equipment, most of which emulated the single-
function approach of their electromechanical precursors. Both of these technologies required expensive cabling and auxil-
iary equipment to produce functioning systems.
Recently, digital electronic equipment has begun to provide protection, control, and metering functions. Initially, this equip-
ment was either single function or had very limited multi-function capability, and did not significantly reduce the cabling and
auxiliary equipment required. However, recent digital relays have become quite multi-functional, reducing cabling and aux-
iliaries significantly. These devices also transfer data to central control facilities and Human Machine Interfaces using elec-
tronic communications. The functions performed by these products have become so broad that many users now prefer the
term IED (Intelligent Electronic Device).
It is obvious to station designers that the amount of cabling and auxiliary equipment installed in stations can be even further
reduced, to 20% to 70% of the levels common in 1990, to achieve large cost reductions. This requires placing even more
functions within the IEDs.
Users of power equipment are also interested in reducing cost by improving power quality and personnel productivity, and
as always, in increasing system reliability and efficiency. These objectives are realized through software which is used to
perform functions at both the station and supervisory levels. The use of these systems is growing rapidly.
High speed communications are required to meet the data transfer rates required by modern automatic control and moni-
toring systems. In the near future, very high speed communications will be required to perform protection signaling with a
performance target response time for a command signal between two IEDs, from transmission to reception, of less than 5
milliseconds. This has been established by the Electric Power Research Institute, a collective body of many American and
Canadian power utilities, in their IEC 61850 project. In late 1998, some European utilities began to show an interest in this
ongoing initiative.
IEDs with the capabilities outlined above will also provide significantly more power system data than is presently available,
enhance operations and maintenance, and permit the use of adaptive system configuration for protection and control sys-
tems. This new generation of equipment must also be easily incorporated into automation systems, at both the station and
enterprise levels. The GE Multilin Universal Relay (UR) has been developed to meet these goals.
1 GETTING STARTED 1.2 UR OVERVIEW
1
1.2.2 HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE
a) UR BASIC DESIGN
The UR is a digital-based device containing a central processing unit (CPU) that handles multiple types of input and output
signals. The UR can communicate over a local area network (LAN) with an operator interface, a programming device, or
another UR device.
Figure 12: UR CONCEPT BLOCK DIAGRAM
The CPU module contains firmware that provides protection elements in the form of logic algorithms, as well as program-
mable logic gates, timers, and latches for control features.
Input elements accept a variety of analog or digital signals from the field. The UR isolates and converts these signals into
logic signals used by the relay.
Output elements convert and isolate the logic signals generated by the relay into digital or analog signals that can be used
to control field devices.
b) UR SIGNAL TYPES
The contact inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with connections to hard-wired contacts. Both wet and dry
contacts are supported.
The virtual inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with UR-series internal logic signals. Virtual inputs include
signals generated by the local user interface. The virtual outputs are outputs of FlexLogic equations used to customize
the device. Virtual outputs can also serve as virtual inputs to FlexLogic equations.
The analog inputs and outputs are signals that are associated with transducers, such as Resistance Temperature Detec-
tors (RTDs).
The CT and VT inputs refer to analog current transformer and voltage transformer signals used to monitor AC power lines.
The UR-series relays support 1 A and 5 A CTs.
The remote inputs and outputs provide a means of sharing digital point state information between remote UR-series
devices. The remote outputs interface to the remote inputs of other UR-series devices. Remote outputs are FlexLogic
operands inserted into IEC 61850 GSSE messages and are of two assignment types: DNA standard functions and user-
defined (UserSt) functions.
The direct inputs and outputs provide a means of sharing digital point states between a number of UR-series IEDs over a
dedicated fiber (single or multimode), RS422, or G.703 interface. No switching equipment is required as the IEDs are con-
nected directly in a ring or redundant (dual) ring configuration. This feature is optimized for speed and intended for pilot-
aided schemes, distributed logic applications, or the extension of the input/output capabilities of a single relay chassis.
827822A2.CDR
Input Elements
LAN
Programming
Device
Operator
Interface
Contact Inputs Contact Outputs
Virtual Inputs Virtual Outputs
Analog Inputs Analog Outputs
CT Inputs
VT Inputs
Input
Status
Table
Output
Status
Table
Pickup
Dropout
Operate
Protective Elements
Logic Gates
Remote Outputs
-DNA
-USER
CPU Module Output Elements
Remote Inputs
Direct Inputs Direct Outputs
1.2 UR OVERVIEW 1 GETTING STARTED
1
c) UR SCAN OPERATION
The UR-series devices operate in a cyclic scan fashion. The device reads the inputs into an input status table, solves the
logic program (FlexLogic equation), and then sets each output to the appropriate state in an output status table. Any
resulting task execution is priority interrupt-driven.
Figure 13: UR-SERIES SCAN OPERATION
1.2.3 UR SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE
The firmware (software embedded in the relay) is designed in functional modules which can be installed in any relay as
required. This is achieved with Object-Oriented Design and Programming (OOD/OOP) techniques.
Object-Oriented techniques involve the use of objects and classes. An object is defined as a logical entity that contains
both data and code that manipulates that data. A class is the generalized form of similar objects. By using this concept,
one can create a Protection Class with the Protection Elements as objects of the class such as Time Overcurrent, Instanta-
neous Overcurrent, Current Differential, Undervoltage, Overvoltage, Underfrequency, and Distance. These objects repre-
sent completely self-contained software modules. The same object-class concept can be used for Metering, Input/Output
Control, HMI, Communications, or any functional entity in the system.
Employing OOD/OOP in the software architecture of the Universal Relay achieves the same features as the hardware
architecture: modularity, scalability, and flexibility. The application software for any Universal Relay (e.g. Feeder Protection,
Transformer Protection, Distance Protection) is constructed by combining objects from the various functionality classes.
This results in a common look and feel across the entire family of UR-series platform-based applications.
1.2.4 IMPORTANT UR CONCEPTS
As described above, the architecture of the UR-series relays differ from previous devices. To achieve a general understand-
ing of this device, some sections of Chapter 5 are quite helpful. The most important functions of the relay are contained in
elements. A description of the UR-series elements can be found in the Introduction to Elements section in Chapter 5. An
example of a simple element, and some of the organization of this manual, can be found in the Digital Elements section. An
explanation of the use of inputs from CTs and VTs is in the Introduction to AC Sources section in Chapter 5. A description of
how digital signals are used and routed within the relay is contained in the Introduction to FlexLogic section in Chapter 5.
827823A1.CDR
PKP
DPO
OP
Protective Elements
Protection elements
serviced by sub-scan
Read Inputs
Solve Logic
Set Outputs
1 GETTING STARTED 1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE
1
1.3ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE 1.3.1 REQUIREMENTS
The faceplate keypad and display or the enerVista UR Setup software interface can be used to communicate with the relay.
The enerVista UR Setup software interface is the preferred method to edit settings and view actual values because the PC
monitor can display more information in a simple comprehensible format.
The following minimum requirements must be met for the enerVista UR Setup software to properly operate on a PC.
Pentium class or higher processor (Pentium II 300 MHz or higher recommended)
Windows 95, 98, 98SE, ME, NT 4.0 (Service Pack 4 or higher), 2000, XP
Internet Explorer 4.0 or higher
128 MB of RAM (256 MB recommended)
200 MB of available space on system drive and 200 MB of available space on installation drive
Video capable of displaying 800 x 600 or higher in high-color mode (16-bit color)
RS232 and/or Ethernet port for communications to the relay
The following qualified modems have been tested to be compliant with the B30 and the enerVista UR Setup software.
US Robotics external 56K FaxModem 5686
US Robotics external Sportster 56K X2
PCTEL 2304WT V.92 MDC internal modem
1.3.2 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION
After ensuring the minimum requirements for using enerVista UR Setup are met (see previous section), use the following
procedure to install the enerVista UR Setup from the enclosed GE enerVista CD.
1. Insert the GE enerVista CD into your CD-ROM drive.
2. Click the Install Now button and follow the installation instructions to install the no-charge enerVista software.
3. When installation is complete, start the enerVista Launchpad application.
4. Click the IED Setup section of the Launch Pad window.
1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE 1 GETTING STARTED
1
5. In the enerVista Launch Pad window, click the Install Software button and select the B30 Bus Differential Relay from
the Install Software window as shown below. Select the Web option to ensure the most recent software release, or
select CD if you do not have a web connection, then click the Check Now button to list software items for the B30.
6. Select the B30 software program and release notes (if desired) from the list and click the Download Now button to
obtain the installation program.
7. enerVista Launchpad will obtain the installation program from the Web or CD. Once the download is complete, double-
click the installation program to install the enerVista UR Setup software.
8. Select the complete path, including the new directory name, where the enerVista UR Setup will be installed.
9. Click on Next to begin the installation. The files will be installed in the directory indicated and the installation program
will automatically create icons and add enerVista UR Setup to the Windows start menu.
1
10. Click Finish to end the installation. The B30 device will be added to the list of installed IEDs in the enerVista Launch-
pad window, as shown below.
1.3.3 CONNECTING THE ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE WITH THE B30
This section is intended as a quick start guide to using the enerVista UR Setup software. Please refer to the enerVista UR
Setup Help File and Chapter 4 of this manual for more information.
a) CONFIGURING AN ETHERNET CONNECTION
Before starting, verify that the Ethernet network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet port on the back of the relay. To
setup the relay for Ethernet communications, it will be necessary to define a Site, then add the relay as a Device at that site.
1. Install and start the latest version of the enerVista UR Setup software (available from the GE enerVista CD or online
from http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin (see previous section for installation instructions).
2. Select the UR device from the enerVista Launchpad to start enerVista UR Setup.
3. Click the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window, then click the Add Site button to define a new site.
4. Enter the desired site name in the Site Name field. If desired, a short description of site can also be entered along
with the display order of devices defined for the site. Click the OK button when complete.
5. The new site will appear in the upper-left list in the enerVista UR Setup window. Click on the new site name and then
click the Device Setup button to re-open the Device Setup window.
6. Click the Add Device button to define the new device.
7. Enter the desired name in the Device Name field and a description (optional) of the site.
8. Select Ethernet from the Interface drop-down list. This will display a number of interface parameters that must be
entered for proper Ethernet functionality.
Enter the relay IP address (from SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" NETWORK ! IP ADDRESS)
in the IP Address field.
Enter the relay Modbus address (from the PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" MODBUS PROTOCOL ! MOD-
BUS SLAVE ADDRESS setting) in the Slave Address field.
Enter the Modbus port address (from the PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" MODBUS PROTOCOL !"
MODBUS TCP PORT NUMBER setting) in the Modbus Port field.
9. Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the B30 device and upload the order code. If an communications
error occurs, ensure that the three enerVista UR Setup values entered in the previous step correspond to the relay set-
ting values.
1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE 1 GETTING STARTED
1
10. Click OK when the relay order code has been received. The new device will be added to the Site List window (or
Online window) located in the top left corner of the main enerVista UR Setup window.
The Site Device has now been configured for Ethernet communications. Proceed to Section c) below to begin communica-
tions.
b) CONFIGURING AN RS232 CONNECTION
Before starting, verify that the RS232 serial cable is properly connected to the RS232 port on the front panel of the relay.
1. Install and start the latest version of the enerVista UR Setup software (available from the GE enerVista CD or online
from http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin.
2. Select the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window and click the Add Site button to define a new site.
3. Enter the desired site name in the Site Name field. If desired, a short description of site can also be entered along
with the display order of devices defined for the site. Click the OK button when complete.
4. The new site will appear in the upper-left list in the enerVista UR Setup window. Click on the new site name and then
click the Device Setup button to re-open the Device Setup window.
5. Click the Add Device button to define the new device.
6. Enter the desired name in the Device Name field and a description (optional) of the site.
7. Select Serial from the Interface drop-down list. This will display a number of interface parameters that must be
entered for proper serial communications.
Enter the relay slave address and COM port values (from the SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS
!" SERIAL PORTS menu) in the Slave Address and COM Port fields.
Enter the physical communications parameters (baud rate and parity settings) in their respective fields.
8. Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the B30 device and upload the order code. If an communications
error occurs, ensure that the enerVista UR Setup serial communications values entered in the previous step corre-
spond to the relay setting values.
9. Click OK when the relay order code has been received. The new device will be added to the Site List window (or
Online window) located in the top left corner of the main enerVista UR Setup window.
The Site Device has now been configured for RS232 communications. Proceed to Section c) Connecting to the Relay
below to begin communications.
c) CONNECTING TO THE RELAY
1. Open the Display Properties window through the Site List tree as shown below:
1
2. The Display Properties window will open with a status indicator on the lower left of the enerVista UR Setup window.
3. If the status indicator is red, verify that the Ethernet network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet port on the
back of the relay and that the relay has been properly setup for communications (steps A and B earlier).
If a relay icon appears in place of the status indicator, than a report (such as an oscillography or event record) is open.
Close the report to re-display the green status indicator.
4. The Display Properties settings can now be edited, printed, or changed according to user specifications.
Refer to Chapter 4 in this manual and the enerVista UR Setup Help File for more information about the
using the enerVista UR Setup software interface.
842743A1.CDR
Expand the Site List by double-clicking
or by selecting the [+] box
Communications Status Indicator
Green LED = OK, Red LED = No Communications
UR icon = report open
NOTE
1.4 UR HARDWARE 1 GETTING STARTED
1
1.4UR HARDWARE 1.4.1 MOUNTING AND WIRING
Please refer to Chapter 3: Hardware for detailed mounting and wiring instructions. Review all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS
carefully.
1.4.2 COMMUNICATIONS
The enerVista UR Setup software communicates to the relay via the faceplate RS232 port or the rear panel RS485 / Ether-
net ports. To communicate via the faceplate RS232 port, a standard straight-through serial cable is used. The DB-9 male
end is connected to the relay and the DB-9 or DB-25 female end is connected to the PC COM1 or COM2 port as described
in the CPU Communications Ports section of Chapter 3.
Figure 14: RELAY COMMUNICATIONS OPTIONS
To communicate through the B30 rear RS485 port from a PC RS232 port, the GE Multilin RS232/RS485 converter box is
required. This device (catalog number F485) connects to the computer using a straight-through serial cable. A shielded
twisted-pair (20, 22, or 24 AWG) connects the F485 converter to the B30 rear communications port. The converter termi-
nals (+, , GND) are connected to the B30 communication module (+, , COM) terminals. Refer to the CPU Communica-
tions Ports section in Chapter 3 for option details. The line should be terminated with an R-C network (i.e. 120 , 1 nF) as
described in the Chapter 3.
1.4.3 FACEPLATE DISPLAY
All messages are displayed on a 2 20 character vacuum fluorescent display to make them visible under poor lighting con-
ditions. An optional liquid crystal display (LCD) is also available. Messages are displayed in English and do not require the
aid of an instruction manual for deciphering. While the keypad and display are not actively being used, the display will
default to defined messages. Any high priority event driven message will automatically override the default message and
appear on the display.
1 GETTING STARTED 1.5 USING THE RELAY
1
1.5USING THE RELAY 1.5.1 FACEPLATE KEYPAD
Display messages are organized into pages under the following headings: Actual Values, Settings, Commands, and Tar-
gets. The key navigates through these pages. Each heading page is broken down further into logical subgroups.
The MESSAGE keys navigate through the subgroups. The VALUE keys scroll increment or decrement
numerical setting values when in programming mode. These keys also scroll through alphanumeric values in the text edit
mode. Alternatively, values may also be entered with the numeric keypad.
The key initiates and advance to the next character in text edit mode or enters a decimal point. The key may be
pressed at any time for context sensitive help messages. The key stores altered setting values.
1.5.2 MENU NAVIGATION
Press the key to select the desired header display page (top-level menu). The header title appears momentarily fol-
lowed by a header display page menu item. Each press of the key advances through the main heading pages as
illustrated below.
1.5.3 MENU HIERARCHY
The setting and actual value messages are arranged hierarchically. The header display pages are indicated by double
scroll bar characters (##), while sub-header pages are indicated by single scroll bar characters (#). The header display
pages represent the highest level of the hierarchy and the sub-header display pages fall below this level. The MESSAGE
and keys move within a group of headers, sub-headers, setting values, or actual values. Continually pressing the
MESSAGE key from a header display displays specific information for the header category. Conversely, continually
pressing the MESSAGE key from a setting value or actual value display returns to the header display.
! ! !
ACTUAL VALUES SETTINGS COMMANDS TARGETS
" " " "
## ACTUAL VALUES
## STATUS
## SETTINGS
## PRODUCT SETUP
## COMMANDS
## VIRTUAL INPUTS
No Active
Targets
!
USER DISPLAYS
(when in use)
"
User Display 1
HIGHEST LEVEL LOWEST LEVEL (SETTING VALUE)
## SETTINGS
## PRODUCT SETUP
# PASSWORD
# SECURITY
ACCESS LEVEL:
Restricted
## SETTINGS
## SYSTEM SETUP
1.5 USING THE RELAY 1 GETTING STARTED
1
1.5.4 RELAY ACTIVATION
The relay is defaulted to the Not Programmed state when it leaves the factory. This safeguards against the installation of
a relay whose settings have not been entered. When powered up successfully, the Trouble LED will be on and the In Ser-
vice LED off. The relay in the Not Programmed state will block signaling of any output relay. These conditions will remain
until the relay is explicitly put in the Programmed state.
Select the menu message SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" INSTALLATION ! RELAY SETTINGS
To put the relay in the Programmed state, press either of the VALUE keys once and then press . The face-
plate Trouble LED will turn off and the In Service LED will turn on. The settings for the relay can be programmed manually
(refer to Chapter 5) via the faceplate keypad or remotely (refer to the enerVista UR Setup Help file) via the enerVista UR
Setup software interface.
1.5.5 RELAY PASSWORDS
It is recommended that passwords be set up for each security level and assigned to specific personnel. There are two user
password security access levels, COMMAND and SETTING:
1. COMMAND
The COMMAND access level restricts the user from making any settings changes, but allows the user to perform the fol-
lowing operations:
change state of virtual inputs
clear event records
clear oscillography records
operate user-programmable pushbuttons
2. SETTING
The SETTING access level allows the user to make any changes to any of the setting values.
Refer to the Changing Settings section in Chapter 4 for complete instructions on setting up security level
passwords.
1.5.6 FLEXLOGIC CUSTOMIZATION
FlexLogic equation editing is required for setting up user-defined logic for customizing the relay operations. See the Flex-
Logic section in Chapter 5 for additional details.
RELAY SETTINGS:
Not Programmed
NOTE
1 GETTING STARTED 1.5 USING THE RELAY
1
1.5.7 COMMISSIONING
Templated tables for charting all the required settings before entering them via the keypad are available from the GE Multi-
lin website at http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin.
The B30 requires a minimum amount of maintenance when it is commissioned into service. The B30 is a microprocessor-
based relay and its characteristics do not change over time. As such no further functional tests are required.
Furthermore the B30 performs a number of ongoing self-tests and takes the necessary action in case of any major errors
(see the Relay Self-Test section in Chapter 7 for details). However, it is recommended that maintenance on the B30 be
scheduled with other system maintenance. This maintenance may involve the following.
In-service maintenance:
1. Visual verification of the analog values integrity such as voltage and current (in comparison to other devices on the cor-
responding system).
2. Visual verification of active alarms, relay display messages, and LED indications.
3. LED test.
4. Visual inspection for any damage, corrosion, dust, or loose wires.
5. Event recorder file download with further events analysis.
Out-of-service maintenance:
1. Check wiring connections for firmness.
2. Analog values (currents, voltages, RTDs, analog inputs) injection test and metering accuracy verification. Calibrated
test equipment is required.
3. Protection elements setpoints verification (analog values injection or visual verification of setting file entries against
relay settings schedule).
4. Contact inputs and outputs verification. This test can be conducted by direct change of state forcing or as part of the
system functional testing.
5. Visual inspection for any damage, corrosion, or dust.
6. Event recorder file download with further events analysis.
7. LED Test and pushbutton continuity check.
Unscheduled maintenance such as during a disturbance causing system interruption:
1. View the event recorder and oscillography or fault report for correct operation of inputs, outputs, and elements.
If it is concluded that the relay or one of its modules is of concern, contact GE Multilin or one of its representatives for
prompt service.
1.5 USING THE RELAY 1 GETTING STARTED
1
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1 INTRODUCTION
2
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1INTRODUCTION 2.1.1 OVERVIEW
The B30 Bus Differential Relay is a microprocessor based relay that provides protection and metering for a busbar with up
to 6 feeders. Protection is provided by a low impedance percent differential element with features that make it immune to
CT saturation. Both biased (restrained) and unbiased (unrestrained) differential protection functions are provided.
A dynamic busbar replica mechanism is provided by associating the breaker/switch status signals with the differential zone
currents.
The biased bus differential function operates using both the differential and current directional comparison protection princi-
ples. The differential element uses a dual-slope dual-breakpoint characteristic with the restraining current formed as a max-
imum of the input currents for better stability during through-fault conditions and faster operation on internal faults. The
current directional comparison principle checks the angular relationship between the currents.
The biased bus differential protection operates in the 2-out-of-2 mode for low differential currents. This improves stability
during CT saturation conditions caused by comparatively low currents combined with unfavorable phenomena such as mul-
tiple auto-reclose actions. For high differential currents, the bus differential element operates using the differential charac-
teristic alone if CT saturation is not detected. Upon CT saturation detection, the relay switches to the 2-out-of-2 operating
mode for better through fault stability.
The B30 typical operating time is about 12 ms for Fast Form-C output contacts and internal usage by user-programmable
logic, and about 15 ms for trip-rated Form-A output contacts.
A CT failure alarm function that monitors the level of the differential current is provided. A situation when the differential cur-
rent stays above a pre-defined level for a pre-defined period of time is declared as a CT trouble event, and an alarm is
raised. To prevent false tripping due to CT trouble, undervoltage supervision or an external check zone can be used.
Voltage and current metering is built into the relay as a standard feature. Current parameters are available as total wave-
form RMS magnitude, or as fundamental frequency only RMS magnitude and angle (phasor).
Diagnostic features include a sequence of records capable of storing 1024 time-tagged events. The internal clock used for
time-tagging can be synchronized with an IRIG-B signal or via the SNTP protocol over the Ethernet port. This precise time
stamping allows the sequence of events to be determined throughout the system. Events can also be programmed (via
FlexLogic equations) to trigger oscillography data capture which may be set to record the measured parameters before
and after the event for viewing on a personal computer (PC). These tools significantly reduce troubleshooting time and sim-
plify report generation in the event of a system fault.
A faceplate RS232 port may be used to connect to a PC for the programming of settings and the monitoring of actual val-
ues. A variety of communications modules are available. Two rear RS485 ports allow independent access by operating and
engineering staff. All serial ports use the Modbus
RTU protocol. The RS485 ports may be connected to system computers

with baud rates up to 115.2 kbps. The RS232 port has a fixed baud rate of 19.2 kbps. Optional communications modules
include a 10BaseF Ethernet interface which can be used to provide fast, reliable communications in noisy environments.
Another option provides two 10BaseF fiber optic ports for redundancy. The Ethernet port supports IEC 61850, Modbus
/
TCP, and TFTP protocols, and allows access to the relay via any standard web browser (B30 web pages). The IEC 60870-
5-104 protocol is supported on the Ethernet port. DNP 3.0 and IEC 60870-5-104 cannot be enabled at the same time.
The B30 IEDs use flash memory technology which allows field upgrading as new features are added. The following Single
Line Diagram illustrates the relay functionality using ANSI (American National Standards Institute) device numbers.
Table 21: ANSI DEVICE NUMBERS AND FUNCTIONS
DEVICE
NUMBER
FUNCTION DEVICE
NUMBER
FUNCTION
27P Phase Undervoltage 51G Ground Time Overcurrent
50G Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 51N Neutral Time Overcurrent
50N Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 51P Phase Time Overcurrent
50P Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 59N Neutral Overvoltage
50/74 CT Trouble 59X Auxiliary Overvoltage
50/87 Unrestrained Bus Differential 87B Restrained Bus Differential
2.1 INTRODUCTION 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2
Figure 21: SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM
2.1.2 ORDERING
The relay is available as a 19-inch rack horizontal mount unit and consists of the following modules: power supply, CPU,
CT/VT, digital input/output, transducer input/output. Each of these modules can be supplied in a number of configurations
specified at the time of ordering. The information required to completely specify the relay is provided in the following table
(see Chapter 3 for full details of relay modules).
Table 22: OTHER DEVICE FUNCTIONS
FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION
Contact Inputs (up to 96) FlexLogic Equations Setting Groups (6)
Contact Outputs (up to 64) IEC 61850 Communications Time Synchronization over SNTP
Control Pushbuttons IEC 61850 Remote Inputs/Outputs (GSSE) Transducer Inputs/Outputs
Digital Counters (8) Metering: Current, Voltage, Frequency User Definable Displays
Digital Elements (16) Modbus Communications User Programmable Fault Reports
Direct Inputs/Outputs (32) Modbus User Map User Programmable LEDs
DNP 3.0 or IEC 60870-5-104 Protocol Non-Volatile Latches User Programmable Pushbuttons
Ethernet Global Data (EGD) Protocol Non-Volatile Selector Switch User Programmable Self-Tests
Event Recorder Oscillography Virtual Inputs (32)
FlexElements Selector Switch Virtual Outputs (64)
836719AA.CDR
B30 Bus Differential Relay
27P 59X 50P 59N
51N
50N
50G
51G
51P
51N
50N
50G
51G
51P
51N
50N
50G
51G
51P
51N
50N
50G
51G
51P
51N
50N
50G
51G
51P
51N
50N
50G
51G
51P
50/87
Restraint Current
VT input
(optional)
F
l
e
x
E
l
e
m
e
n
t
s
TM
Current Directional Comparison
CT Saturation Detection
CT Trouble (50/74)
87B
M
e
t
e
r
i
n
g
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1 INTRODUCTION
2
Table 23: B30 ORDER CODES
B30 - * 00 - H * * - F ** - H ** - L ** - N ** - S ** - U ** - W ** Full Size Horizontal Mount
BASE UNIT B30 | | | | | | | | | | | | Base Unit
CPU E | | | | | | | | | | | RS485 + RS485 (ModBus RTU, DNP)
G | | | | | | | | | | | RS485 + 10BaseF (IEC 61850, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP)
H | | | | | | | | | | | RS485 + Redundant 10BaseF (IEC 61850, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP)
SOFTWARE 00 | | | | | | | | | | No Software Options
01 | | | | | | | | | | Ethernet Global Data (EGD); only available with Type G and H CPUs
MOUNT/
FACEPLATE
H C | | | | | | | | Horizontal (19 rack)
H P | | | | | | | | Horizontal (19 rack) with 16 User-Programmable Pushbuttons
POWER
SUPPLY
H | | | | | | | 125 / 250 V AC/DC
H | | | | | | RH 125 / 250 V AC/DC with redundant 125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply
L | | | | | | | 125 / 250 V AC/DC
L | | | | | | RL 24 to 48 V (DC only) with redundant 24 to 48 V DC power supply
CT/VT MODULES 8F | 8F | 8F | | Standard 4CT/4VT
8G | 8G | 8G | | Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT
8H | 8H | 8H | | Standard 8CT
8J | 8J | 8J | | Sensitive Ground 8CT
DIGITAL INPUTS/OUTPUTS XX XX XX XX XX XX No Module
4A 4A 4A 4A 4A | 4 Solid-State (No Monitoring) MOSFET Outputs
4B 4B 4B 4B 4B | 4 Solid-State (Voltage w/ opt Current) MOSFET Outputs
4C 4C 4C 4C 4C | 4 Solid-State (Current w/ opt Voltage) MOSFET Outputs
4L 4L 4L 4L 4L | 14 Form-A (No Monitoring) Latching Outputs
67 67 67 67 67 | 8 Form-A (No Monitoring) Outputs
6A 6A 6A 6A 6A | 2 Form-A (Volt w/ opt Curr) & 2 Form-C outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
6B 6B 6B 6B 6B | 2 Form-A (Volt w/ opt Curr) & 4 Form-C Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
6C 6C 6C 6C 6C | 8 Form-C Outputs
6D 6D 6D 6D 6D | 16 Digital Inputs
6E 6E 6E 6E 6E | 4 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
6F 6F 6F 6F 6F | 8 Fast Form-C Outputs
6G 6G 6G 6G 6G | 4 Form-A (Voltage w/ opt Current) Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
6H 6H 6H 6H 6H | 6 Form-A (Voltage w/ opt Current) Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
6K 6K 6K 6K 6K | 4 Form-C & 4 Fast Form-C Outputs
6L 6L 6L 6L 6L | 2 Form-A (current w/ optional voltage) & 2 Form-C outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
6M 6M 6M 6M 6M | 2 Form-A (current w/ optional voltage) & 4 Form-C outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
6N 6N 6N 6N 6N | 4 Form-A (current w/ optional voltage) outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
6P 6P 6P 6P 6P | 6 Form-A (current w/ optional voltage) outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
6R 6R 6R 6R 6R | 2 Form-A (No Monitoring) & 2 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
6S 6S 6S 6S 6S | 2 Form-A (No Monitoring) & 4 Form-C Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
6T 6T 6T 6T 6T | 4 Form-A (No Monitoring) Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
6U 6U 6U 6U 6U | 6 Form-A (No Monitoring) Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
TRANSDUCER
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
(select a maximum of 3 per unit)
5A 5A 5A 5A 5A | 4 dcmA Inputs, 4 dcmA Outputs (only one 5A module is allowed)
5C 5C 5C 5C 5C | 8 RTD Inputs
5D 5D 5D 5D 5D | 4 RTD Inputs, 4 dcmA Outputs (only one 5D module is allowed)
5E 5E 5E 5E 5E | 4 RTD Inputs, 4 dcmA Inputs
5F 5F 5F 5F 5F | 8 dcmA Inputs
INTER-RELAY
COMMUNICATIONS
(select a maximum of 1 per unit)
2A C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode
2B C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode
72 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel
73 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channel
74 Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER
75 Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, Single-mode LASER
76 IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
77 IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
7A 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
7B 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
7C 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel
7D 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel
7E Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode
7F Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode
7G Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED
7H 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
7I 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
7J 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels
7K 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channels
7L Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode, LED
7M Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED
7N Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED
7P Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER
7Q Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode LASER
7R G.703, 1 Channel
7S G.703, 2 Channels
7T RS422, 1 Channel
7W RS422, 2 Channels
2.1 INTRODUCTION 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2
The order codes for replacement modules to be ordered separately are shown in the following table. When ordering a
replacement CPU module or faceplate, please provide the serial number of your existing unit.
Table 24: ORDER CODES FOR REPLACEMENT MODULES
UR - ** -
POWER SUPPLY
(redundant power
supply only available in
horizontal mount units)
| 1H | 125 / 250 V AC/DC
| 1L | 24 to 48 V (DC only)
| RH | redundant 125 / 250 V AC/DC
| RH | redundant 24 to 48 V (DC only)
CPU | 9E | RS485 and RS485 (ModBus RTU, DNP 3.0)
| 9G | RS485 and 10Base-F (IEC 61850, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
| 9H | RS485 and Redundant 10Base-F (IEC 61850, ModBus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
FACEPLATE | 3C | Horizontal faceplate with display and keypad
| 3P | Horizontal faceplate with display, keypad, and user-programmable pushbuttons
DIGITAL
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
| 4A | 4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET Outputs
| 4B | 4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET Outputs
| 4C | 4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET Outputs
| 4L | 14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching Outputs
| 67 | 8 Form-A (no monitoring) Outputs
| 6A | 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
| 6B | 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
| 6C | 8 Form-C Outputs
| 6D | 16 Digital Inputs
| 6E | 4 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
| 6F | 8 Fast Form-C Outputs
| 6G | 4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
| 6H | 6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
| 6K | 4 Form-C & 4 Fast Form-C Outputs
| 6L | 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
| 6M | 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
| 6N | 4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
| 6P | 6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
| 6R | 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
| 6S | 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
| 6T | 4 Form-A (no monitoring) Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
| 6U | 6 Form-A (no monitoring) Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
CT/VT
MODULES
(NOT AVAILABLE FOR THE C30)
| 8F | Standard 4CT/4VT
| 8G | Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT
| 8H | Standard 8CT
| 8J | Sensitive Ground 8CT
UR INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS | 2A | C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode
| 2B | C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode
| 72 | 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel
| 73 | 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channel
| 74 | Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER
| 75 | Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, Single-mode LASER
| 76 | IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
| 77 | IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
| 7A | 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
| 7B | 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
| 7C | 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel
| 7D | 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel
| 7E | Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode
| 7F | Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode
| 7G | Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED
| 7H | 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
| 7I | 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
| 7J | 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels
| 7K | 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channels
| 7L | Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode, LED
| 7M | Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED
| 7N | Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED
| 7P | Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER
| 7Q | Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode LASER
| 7R | G.703, 1 Channel
| 7S | G.703, 2 Channels
7T RS422, 1 Channel
7W RS422, 2 Channels
TRANSDUCER
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
| 5A | 4 dcmA Inputs, 4 dcmA Outputs (only one 5A module is allowed)
| 5C | 8 RTD Inputs
| 5D | 4 RTD Inputs, 4 dcmA Outputs (only one 5D module is allowed)
| 5E | 4 dcmA Inputs, 4 RTD Inputs
| 5F | 8 dcmA Inputs
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.2 SPECIFICATIONS
2
2.2SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
2.2.1 PROTECTION ELEMENTS
The operating times below include the activation time of a trip rated Form-A output contact unless otherwise indi-
cated. FlexLogic operands of a given element are 4 ms faster. This should be taken into account when using
FlexLogic to interconnect with other protection or control elements of the relay, building FlexLogic equations, or
interfacing with other IEDs or power system devices via communications or different output contacts.
BUS DIFFERENTIAL (87B)
Pickup level: 0.050 to 2.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Low slope: 15 to 100% in steps of 1
High slope: 50 to 100% in steps of 1
Low breakpoint: 1.00 to 30.00 pu in steps of 0.01
High breakpoint: 1.00 to 30.00 pu in steps of 0.01
High set level: 0.10 to 99.99 pu in steps of 0.01
Dropout level: 97 to 98% of Pickup
Level accuracy:
0.1 to 2.0 CT rating: 0.5% of reading or 1% of rated (which-
ever is greater)
>2.0 CT rating 1.5% of reading
Operating time: one power system cycle (typical)
CT TROUBLE
Responding to: Differential current
Pickup delay: 1.0 to 60.0 sec. in steps of 0.1
PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND TOC
Current: Phasor or RMS
Dropout level: 97% to 98% of Pickup
Level accuracy:
for 0.1 to 2.0 CT: 0.5% of reading or 1% of rated
(whichever is greater)
for > 2.0 CT: 1.5% of reading > 2.0 CT rating
Curve shapes: IEEE Moderately/Very/Extremely
Inverse; IEC (and BS) A/B/C and Short
Inverse; GE IAC Inverse, Short/Very/
Extremely Inverse; I
2
t; FlexCurves
(programmable); Definite Time (0.01 s
base curve)
Curve multiplier: Time Dial = 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of
0.01
Reset type: Instantaneous/Timed (per IEEE)
Timing accuracy: Operate at > 1.03 actual Pickup
3.5% of operate time or cycle
PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND IOC
Current: Phasor only
Dropout level: 97 to 98% of pickup
Level accuracy:
0.1 to 2.0 CT rating: 0.5% of reading or 1% of rated
> 2.0 CT rating 1.5% of reading
Overreach: <2%
Pickup delay: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
Reset delay: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
Operate time: <16 ms at 3 Pickup at 60 Hz
(Phase/Ground IOC)
<20 ms at 3 Pickup at 60 Hz
(Neutral IOC)
Timing accuracy: Operate at 1.5 Pickup
3% or 4 ms (whichever is greater)
PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE
Level accuracy: 0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V
Curve shapes: GE IAV Inverse;
Definite Time (0.1s base curve)
Curve multiplier: Time Dial = 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of
0.01
Timing accuracy: Operate at < 0.90 Pickup
3.5% of operate time or 4 ms (which-
ever is greater)
NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE
Pickup delay: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
Reset delay: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
Timing accuracy: 3% or 4 ms (whichever is greater)
Operate time: < 30 ms at 1.10 Pickup at 60 Hz
AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE
Pickup delay: 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
Reset delay: 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
Timing accuracy: 3% of operate time or 4 ms
Operate time: < 30 ms at 1.10 pickup at 60 Hz
NOTE
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2
2.2.2 USER-PROGRAMMABLE ELEMENTS
FLEXLOGIC
Programming language: Reverse Polish Notation with graphical
visualization (keypad programmable)
Lines of code: 512
Internal variables: 64
Supported operations: NOT, XOR, OR (2 to 16 inputs), AND (2
to 16 inputs), NOR (2 to 16 inputs),
NAND (2 to 16 inputs), Latch (Reset
dominant), Edge Detectors, Timers
Inputs: any logical variable, contact, or virtual
input
Number of timers: 32
Pickup delay: 0 to 60000 (ms, sec., min.) in steps of 1
Dropout delay: 0 to 60000 (ms, sec., min.) in steps of 1
FLEXCURVES
Number: 4 (A through D)
Reset points: 40 (0 through 1 of pickup)
Operate points: 80 (1 through 20 of pickup)
Time delay: 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1
FLEX STATES
Number: up to 256 logical variables grouped
under 16 Modbus addresses
Programmability: any logical variable, contact, or virtual
input
FLEXELEMENTS
Number of elements: 8
Operating signal: any analog actual value, or two values in
differential mode
Operating signal mode: Signed or Absolute Value
Operating mode: Level, Delta
Comparator direction: Over, Under
Pickup Level: 30.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Hysteresis: 0.1 to 50.0% in steps of 0.1
Delta dt: 20 ms to 60 days
Pickup & dropout delay: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
NON-VOLATILE LATCHES
Type: Set-dominant or Reset-dominant
Number: 16 (individually programmed)
Output: Stored in non-volatile memory
Execution sequence: As input prior to protection, control, and
FlexLogic
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDs
Number: 48 plus Trip and Alarm
Programmability: from any logical variable, contact, or vir-
tual input
Reset mode: Self-reset or Latched
LED TEST
Initiation: from any digital input or user-program-
mable condition
Number of tests: 3, interruptible at any time
Duration of full test: approximately 3 minutes
Test sequence 1: all LEDs on
Test sequence 2: all LEDs off, one LED at a time on for 1 s
Test sequence 3: all LEDs on, one LED at a time off for 1 s
USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
Number of displays: 16
Lines of display: 2 20 alphanumeric characters
Parameters: up to 5, any Modbus register addresses
Invoking and scrolling: keypad, or any user-programmable con-
dition, including pushbuttons
CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS
Number of pushbuttons: 7
Operation: drive FlexLogic operands
USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS (OPTIONAL)
Number of pushbuttons: 12
Mode: Self-Reset, Latched
Display message: 2 lines of 20 characters each
SELECTOR SWITCH
Upper position limit: 1 to 7 in steps of 1
Selecting mode: Time-out or Acknowledge
Time-out timer: 3.0 to 60.0 s in steps of 0.1
Control inputs: step-up and 3-bit
Power-up mode: restore from non-volatile memory or syn-
chronize to a 3-bit control input
2
2.2.3 MONITORING
OSCILLOGRAPHY
Maximum records: 64
Sampling rate: 64 samples per power cycle
Triggers: Any element pickup, dropout or operate
Digital input change of state
Digital output change of state
FlexLogic equation
Data: AC input channels
Element state
Digital input state
Digital output state
Data storage: In non-volatile memory
EVENT RECORDER
Capacity: 1024 events
Time-tag: to 1 microsecond
Triggers: Any element pickup, dropout or operate
Digital input change of state
Digital output change of state
Self-test events
Data storage: In non-volatile memory
USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT
Pre-fault trigger: any FlexLogic operand
Fault trigger: any FlexLogic operand
Recorder quantities: 32 (any FlexAnalog value)
2.2.4 METERING
RMS CURRENT: PHASE, NEUTRAL, AND GROUND
Accuracy at
0.1 to 2.0 CT rating: 0.25% of reading or 0.1% of rated
> 2.0 CT rating: 1.0% of reading
RMS VOLTAGE
Accuracy: 0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V
FREQUENCY
Accuracy at
V = 0.8 to 1.2 pu: 0.01 Hz (when voltage signal is used
for frequency measurement)
I = 0.1 to 0.25 pu: 0.05 Hz
I > 0.25 pu: 0.02 Hz (when current signal is used for
frequency measurement)
2.2.5 INPUTS
AC CURRENT
CT rated primary: 1 to 50000 A
CT rated secondary: 1 A or 5 A by connection
Nominal frequency: 20 to 65 Hz
Relay burden: < 0.2 VA at rated secondary
Conversion range:
Standard CT: 0.02 to 46 CT rating RMS symmetrical
Sensitive Ground module:
0.002 to 4.6 CT rating RMS symmetrical
Current withstand: 20 ms at 250 times rated
1 sec. at 100 times rated
continuous at 3 times rated
AC VOLTAGE
VT rated secondary: 50.0 to 240.0 V
VT ratio: 1.00 to 24000.00
Nominal frequency: 20 to 65 Hz
Relay burden: < 0.25 VA at 120 V
Conversion range: 1 to 275 V
Voltage withstand: continuous at 260 V to neutral
1 min./hr at 420 V to neutral
CONTACT INPUTS
Dry contacts: 1000 maximum
Wet contacts: 300 V DC maximum
Selectable thresholds: 17 V, 33 V, 84 V, 166 V
Tolerance: 10%
Recognition time: < 1 ms
Debounce timer: 0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5
DCMA INPUTS
Current input (mA DC): 0 to 1, 0 to +1, 1 to +1, 0 to 5, 0 to 10,
0 to 20, 4 to 20 (programmable)
Input impedance: 379 10%
Conversion range: 1 to + 20 mA DC
Accuracy: 0.2% of full scale
Type: Passive
RTD INPUTS
Types (3-wire): 100 Platinum, 100 & 120 Nickel, 10
Copper
Sensing current: 5 mA
Range: 50 to +250C
Accuracy: 2C
Isolation: 36 V pk-pk
IRIG-B INPUT
Amplitude modulation: 1 to 10 V pk-pk
DC shift: TTL
Input impedance: 22 k
Isolation: 2 kV
REMOTE INPUTS (MMS GOOSE)
Number of input points: 32, configured from 64 incoming bit pairs
Number of remote devices:16
Default states on loss of comms.: On, Off, Latest/Off, Latest/On
2
DIRECT INPUTS
Number of input points: 32
No. of remote devices: 16
Default states on loss of comms.: On, Off, Latest/Off, Latest/On
Ring configuration: Yes, No
Data rate: 64 or 128 kbps
CRC: 32-bit
CRC alarm:
Responding to: Rate of messages failing the CRC
Monitoring message count: 10 to 10000 in steps of 1
Alarm threshold: 1 to 1000 in steps of 1
Unreturned message alarm:
Responding to: Rate of unreturned messages in the ring
configuration
Monitoring message count: 10 to 10000 in steps of 1
Alarm threshold: 1 to 1000 in steps of 1
2.2.6 POWER SUPPLY
LOW RANGE
Nominal DC voltage: 24 to 48 V at 3 A
Min/max DC voltage: 20 / 60 V
NOTE: Low range is DC only.
HIGH RANGE
Nominal DC voltage: 125 to 250 V at 0.7 A
Min/max DC voltage: 88 / 300 V
Nominal AC voltage: 100 to 240 V at 50/60 Hz, 0.7 A
Min/max AC voltage: 88 / 265 V at 48 to 62 Hz
ALL RANGES
Volt withstand: 2 Highest Nominal Voltage for 10 ms
Voltage loss hold-up: 50 ms duration at nominal
Power consumption: Typical = 15 VA; Max. = 30 VA
INTERNAL FUSE
RATINGS
Low range power supply: 7.5 A / 600 V
High range power supply: 5 A / 600 V
INTERRUPTING CAPACITY
AC: 100 000 A RMS symmetrical
DC: 10 000 A
2.2.7 OUTPUTS
FORM-A RELAY
Make and carry for 0.2 s: 30 A as per ANSI C37.90
Carry continuous: 6 A
Break at L/R of 40 ms: 0.25 A DC max. at 48 V
0.10 A DC max. at 125 V
Operate time: < 4 ms
Contact material: Silver alloy
LATCHING RELAY
Make and carry for 0.2 s: 30 A as per ANSI C37.90
Break at L/R of 40 ms: 0.25 A DC max.
Control: separate operate and reset inputs
Control mode: operate-dominant or reset-dominant
FORM-A VOLTAGE MONITOR
Applicable voltage: approx. 15 to 250 V DC
Trickle current: approx. 1 to 2.5 mA
FORM-A CURRENT MONITOR
Threshold current: approx. 80 to 100 mA
FORM-C AND CRITICAL FAILURE RELAY
Make and carry for 0.2 s: 10 A
Break at L/R of 40 ms: 0.25 A DC max. at 48 V
0.10 A DC max. at 125 V
FAST FORM-C RELAY
Make and carry: 0.1 A max. (resistive load)
Minimum load impedance:
Operate time: < 0.6 ms
Internal Limiting Resistor: 100 , 2 W
INPUT
VOLTAGE
IMPEDANCE
2 W RESISTOR 1 W RESISTOR
250 V DC 20 K 50 K
120 V DC 5 K 2 K
48 V DC 2 K 2 K
24 V DC 2 K 2 K
Note: values for 24 V and 48 V are the same due to a
required 95% voltage drop across the load impedance.
2
SOLID-STATE OUTPUT RELAY
Operate and release time: <100 s
Maximum voltage: 265 V DC
Maximum continuous current: 5 A at 45C; 4 A at 65C
Make and carry for 0.2 s: as per ANSI C37.90
Breaking capacity:
IRIG-B OUTPUT
Amplitude: 10 V peak-peak RS485 level
Maximum load: 100 ohms
Time delay: 1 ms for AM input
40 s for DC-shift input
Isolation: 2 kV
CONTROL POWER EXTERNAL OUTPUT
(FOR DRY CONTACT INPUT)
Capacity: 100 mA DC at 48 V DC
Isolation: 300 Vpk
REMOTE OUTPUTS (IEC 61850 GSSE)
Standard output points: 32
User output points: 32
DIRECT OUTPUTS
Output points: 32
DCMA OUTPUTS
Range: 1 to 1 mA, 0 to 1 mA, 4 to 20 mA
Max. load resistance: 12 k for 1 to 1 mA range
12 k for 0 to 1 mA range
600 for 4 to 20 mA range
Accuracy: 0.75% of full-scale for 0 to 1 mA range
0.5% of full-scale for 1 to 1 mA range
0.75% of full-scale for 0 to 20 mA range
99% Settling time to a step change: 100 ms
Isolation: 1.5 kV
Driving signal: any FlexAnalog quantity
Upper and lower limit for the driving signal: 90 to 90 pu in steps of
0.001
RS232
Front port: 19.2 kbps, Modbus
RTU
RS485
1 or 2 rear ports: Up to 115 kbps, Modbus
RTU, isolated
together at 36 Vpk
Typical distance: 1200 m
Isolation: 2 kV
ETHERNET PORT
10Base-F: 820 nm, multi-mode, supports half-
duplex/full-duplex fiber optic with ST
connector
Redundant 10Base-F: 820 nm, multi-mode, half-duplex/full-
duplex fiber optic with ST connector
10Base-T: RJ45 connector
Power budget: 10 db
Max optical input power: 7.6 dBm
Max optical output power: 20 dBm
Receiver sensitivity: 30 dBm
Typical distance: 1.65 km
SNTP clock synchronization error: <10 ms (typical)
IEC 647-5 / UL508 Utility
application
(autoreclose
scheme)
Industrial
application
Operations/
interval
5000 ops /
1 s-On, 9 s-Off
5 ops /
0.2 s-On,
0.2 s-Off
within 1
minute
10000 ops /
0.2 s-On,
30 s-Off 1000 ops /
0.5 s-On, 0.5 s-Off
Break
capability
(0 to 250 V
DC)
3.2 A
L/R = 10 ms
10 A
L/R = 40 ms
10 A
L/R = 40 ms
1.6 A
L/R = 20 ms
0.8 A
L/R = 40 ms
2
2.2.9 INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS
SHIELDED TWISTED-PAIR INTERFACE OPTIONS
RS422 distance is based on transmitter power
and does not take into consideration the clock
source provided by the user.
LINK POWER BUDGET
These Power Budgets are calculated from the
manufacturers worst-case transmitter power
and worst case receiver sensitivity.
MAXIMUM OPTICAL INPUT POWER
TYPICAL LINK DISTANCE
Compensated difference in transmitting and receiving (channel
asymmetry) channel delays using GPS satellite clock: 10 ms
2.2.10 ENVIRONMENTAL
OPERATING TEMPERATURES
Cold: IEC 60028-2-1, 16 h at 40C
Dry Heat: IEC 60028-2-2, 16 h at +85C
OTHER
Humidity (noncondensing): IEC 60068-2-30, 95%, Variant 1, 6
days
Altitude: Up to 2000 m
Installation Category: II
INTERFACE TYPE TYPICAL DISTANCE
RS422 1200 m
G.703 100 m
EMITTER,
FIBER TYPE
TRANSMIT
POWER
RECEIVED
SENSITIVITY
POWER
BUDGET
820 nm LED,
Multimode
20 dBm 30 dBm 10 dB
1300 nm LED,
Multimode
21 dBm 30 dBm 9 dB
1300 nm ELED,
Singlemode
21 dBm 30 dBm 9 dB
1300 nm Laser,
Singlemode
1 dBm 30 dBm 29 dB
1550 nm Laser,
Singlemode
+5 dBm 30 dBm 35 dB
EMITTER, FIBER TYPE MAX. OPTICAL
INPUT POWER
820 nm LED, Multimode 7.6 dBm
1300 nm LED, Multimode 11 dBm
1300 nm ELED, Singlemode 14 dBm
1300 nm Laser, Singlemode 14 dBm
1550 nm Laser, Singlemode 14 dBm
NOTE
NOTE
EMITTER TYPE FIBER TYPE CONNECTOR
TYPE
TYPICAL
DISTANCE
820 nm LED Multimode ST 1.65 km
1300 nm LED Multimode ST 3.8 km
1300 nm ELED Singlemode ST 11.4 km
1300 nm Laser Singlemode ST 64 km
1550 nm Laser Singlemode ST 105 km
Typical distances listed are based on the fol-
lowing assumptions for system loss. As
actual losses will vary from one installation to
another, the distance covered by your system
may vary.
CONNECTOR LOSSES (TOTAL OF BOTH ENDS)
ST connector 2 dB
FIBER LOSSES
820 nm multimode 3 dB/km
1300 nm multimode 1 dB/km
1300 nm singlemode 0.35 dB/km
1550 nm singlemode 0.25 dB/km
Splice losses: One splice every 2 km,
at 0.05 dB loss per splice.
SYSTEM MARGIN
3 dB additional loss added to calculations to compensate for
all other losses.
NOTE
2
2.2.11 TYPE TESTS
Electrical fast transient: ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1
IEC 61000-4-4
IEC 60255-22-4
Oscillatory transient: ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1
IEC 61000-4-12
Insulation resistance: IEC 60255-5
Dielectric strength: IEC 60255-6
ANSI/IEEE C37.90
Electrostatic discharge: EN 61000-4-2
Surge immunity: EN 61000-4-5
RFI susceptibility: ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2
IEC 61000-4-3
IEC 60255-22-3
Ontario Hydro C-5047-77
Conducted RFI: IEC 61000-4-6
Voltage dips/interruptions/variations:
IEC 61000-4-11
IEC 60255-11
Power frequency magnetic field immunity:
IEC 61000-4-8
Vibration test (sinusoidal): IEC 60255-21-1
Shock and bump: IEC 60255-21-2
Type test report available upon request.
2.2.12 PRODUCTION TESTS
THERMAL
Products go through an environmental test based upon an
Accepted Quality Level (AQL) sampling process.
2.2.13 APPROVALS
APPROVALS
UL Listed for the USA and Canada
CE:
LVD 73/23/EEC: IEC 1010-1
EMC 81/336/EEC: EN 50081-2, EN 50082-2
2.2.14 MAINTENANCE
MOUNTING
Attach mounting brackets using 20 inch-pounds (2 inch-pounds)
of torque.
CLEANING
Normally, cleaning is not required; but for situations where dust
has accumulated on the faceplate display, a dry cloth can be used.
NOTE
2
3 HARDWARE 3.1 DESCRIPTION
3
3 HARDWARE 3.1DESCRIPTION 3.1.1 PANEL CUTOUT
The relay is available as a 19-inch rack horizontal mount unit with a removable faceplate. The modular design allows the
relay to be easily upgraded or repaired by a qualified service person. The faceplate is hinged to allow easy access to the
removable modules, and is itself removable to allow mounting on doors with limited rear depth. There is also a removable
dust cover that fits over the faceplate, which must be removed when attempting to access the keypad or RS232 communi-
cations port.
The horizontal case dimensions are shown below, along with panel cutout details for panel mounting. When planning the
location of your panel cutout, ensure that provision is made for the faceplate to swing open without interference to or from
adjacent equipment.
The relay must be mounted such that the faceplate sits semi-flush with the panel or switchgear door, allowing the operator
access to the keypad and the RS232 communications port. The relay is secured to the panel with the use of four screws
supplied with the relay.
Figure 31: B30 HORIZONTAL MOUNTING AND DIMENSIONS
3.1 DESCRIPTION 3 HARDWARE
3
3.1.2 MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION
Module withdrawal and insertion may only be performed when control power has been removed from the
unit. Inserting an incorrect module type into a slot may result in personal injury, damage to the unit or con-
nected equipment, or undesired operation!
Proper electrostatic discharge protection (i.e. a static strap) must be used when coming in contact with
modules while the relay is energized!
The relay, being modular in design, allows for the withdrawal and insertion of modules. Modules must only be replaced with
like modules in their original factory configured slots. The faceplate can be opened to the left, once the sliding latch on the
right side has been pushed up, as shown below. This allows for easy accessibility of the modules for withdrawal.
Figure 32: UR MODULE WITHDRAWAL/INSERTION
MODULE WITHDRAWAL: The ejector/inserter clips, located at the top and bottom of each module, must be pulled
simultaneously to release the module for removal. Before performing this action, control power must be removed
from the relay. Record the original location of the module to ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted
into the correct slot. Modules with current input provide automatic shorting of external CT circuits.
MODULE INSERTION: Ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position. The ejector/
inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as the module is
smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis, engage the clips simulta-
neously. When the clips have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted.
Type 9G and 9H CPU modules are equipped with 10Base-T and 10Base-F Ethernet connectors. These connectors
must be individually disconnected from the module before the it can be removed from the chassis.
The version 4.0 release of the B30 relay includes new hardware (CPU and CT/VT modules). The new CPU mod-
ules are specified with the following order codes: 9E, 9G, and 9H. The new CT/VT modules are specified with the
following order codes: 8F, 8G, 8H, 8J.
The new CT/VT modules (8F, 8G, 8H, 8J) can only be used with the new CPUs (9E, 9G, 9H); similarly, the old CT/
VT modules (8A, 8B, 8C, 8D) can only be used with the old CPUs (9A, 9C, 9D). To prevent hardware mismatches,
the new CPU and CT/VT modules have blue labels and a warning sticker stating Attn.: Ensure CPU and DSP
module label colors are the same!. In the event that there is a mismatch between the CPU and CT/VT module,
the relay will not function and a DSP ERROR or HARDWARE MISMATCH error will be displayed.
All other input/output modules are compatible with the new hardware. Firmware versions 4.0x and higher are only
compatible with the new CPU and CT/VT modules. Previous versions of the firmware (3.4x and earlier) are only
compatible with the older CPU and CT/VT modules.
WARNING
WARNING
NOTE
NOTE
3 HARDWARE 3.1 DESCRIPTION
3
3.1.3 REAR TERMINAL LAYOUT
Figure 33: REAR TERMINAL VIEW
Do not touch any rear terminals while the relay is energized!
The relay follows a convention with respect to terminal number assignments which are three characters long assigned in
order by module slot position, row number, and column letter. Two-slot wide modules take their slot designation from the
first slot position (nearest to CPU module) which is indicated by an arrow marker on the terminal block. See the following
figure for an example of rear terminal assignments.
Figure 34: EXAMPLE OF MODULES IN F AND H SLOTS
836772A1.CDR
WARNING
3.2 WIRING 3 HARDWARE
3
3.2WIRING 3.2.1 TYPICAL WIRING
Figure 35: TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM
F3
F5
F4
F6
AC or DC
DC
(
D
C
O
N
L
Y
)
Dry
B30 BUS DIFFERENTIAL RELAY
1
Power
Supply
9
CPU
MODULE ARRANGEMENT
* Optional
J U M X L W K V B H T D N G S P F R
8
CT
6
I/O
8
CT
*
6
I/O
*
8
CT
*
6
I/O
*
F1
F2
A B C
GE Multilin
IC1
IC1
IA
IA
IA5
IA5
IA1
IA1
IB1
IB1
IB5
IB5
IC5
IC5
IB
IB
IC
IC
7c
5c
5a
5b
7b
3c
1c
6a
2b
7a
2a
6b
6c
2c
1a S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
1b
3a
3b
C
U
R
R
E
N
T
IN
P
U
T
S
8
H
/
8
J
IC1
IC1
IA
IA
IA5
IA5
IA1
IA1
IB1
IB1
IB5
IB5
IC5
IC5
IB
IB
IC
IC
7c
5c
5a
5b
7b
3c
1c
6a
2b
7a
2a
6b
6c
2c
1a L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
1b
3a
3b
C
U
R
R
E
N
T
IN
P
U
T
S
8
H
/
8
J
IC1
IC1
IA
IA
IA5
IA5
IA1
IA1
IB1
IB1
IB5
IB5
IC5
IC5
IB
IB
IC
IC
7c
5c
5a
5b
7b
3c
1c
6a
2b
7a
2a
6b
6c
2c
1a F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
1b
3a
3b
C
U
R
R
E
N
T
IN
P
U
T
S
8
H
/
8
J
CRITICAL
FAILURE
48 VDC
OUTPUT
CONTROL
POWER
HI
LO
P
O
W
E
R
S
U
P
P
L
Y
1
FILTER
SURGE
3a
1b
8a
6b
8b
6a
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
3b
1a
2b
5b
CONTACT IN 5a
CONTACT IN 7a
CONTACT IN 5c
CONTACT IN 7c
CONTACT IN 6a
CONTACT IN 8a
CONTACT IN 6c
CONTACT IN 8c
COMMON 5b
COMMON 7b
SURGE
6a
8a
5b
7b
8b
5a N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
7a
6c
8c
5c
7c
6
A 1
2
3
4
1a
2b
1c
1b
2c
2a
4a
4c
3b
3a
4b
3c
D
IG
IT
A
L
I/
O
I
V
I
V
D
IG
IT
A
L
I/
O
6
H
CONTACT IN 7a
CONTACT IN 7c
CONTACT IN 8a
CONTACT IN 8c
COMMON 7b
8a
7b
7a H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
8c
7c
1b
2b
3b
4b
5b
6b
1a
2a
3a
4a
5a
6a
1c
2c
3c
4c
5c
6c
SURGE 8b
1
5
2
6
3
4
I
V
I
V
I
V
I
V
I
V
I
V
Wet
D
IG
IT
A
L
I/
O
6
H
CONTACT IN 7a
CONTACT IN 7c
CONTACT IN 8a
CONTACT IN 8c
COMMON 7b
8a
7b
7a U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
8c
7c
1b
2b
3b
4b
5b
6b
1a
2a
3a
4a
5a
6a
1c
2c
3c
4c
5c
6c
SURGE 8b
1
5
2
6
3
4
I
V
I
V
I
V
I
V
I
V
I
V
836773A2.CDR
GROUND BUS
No. 10AWG
Minimum
MODULES MUST BE
GROUNDED IF
TERMINAL IS
PROVIDED
com
10BaseFL
10BaseFL
10BaseT
D1a
D2a
D4b
D3a
D4a IRIG-B
Input
IRIG-B
Output
COM
1
RS485
COM2
ALTERNATE
NORMAL
C
P
U
9
H
Tx2
Rx2
Tx1
Rx1
BNC
BNC
Fibre
Optic
*
Ground at
Remote
Device
Shielded
twisted pairs
Co-axial
Co-axial
Co-axial *
Co-axial * - For IRIG-B Input
only use one
terminal as input
This diagram is based on the following order code: B30-D00-HCL-F8H-H6H-L8H-N6A-S8H-U6H.
The purpose of this diagram is to provide an example of how the relay is typically wired, not specifically how to wire your own relay. Please
refer to the following pages for examples to help you wire your relay correctly based on your own relay configuration and order code.
CAUTION
3 HARDWARE 3.2 WIRING
3
3.2.2 DIELECTRIC STRENGTH
The dielectric strength of the UR-series module hardware is shown in the following table:
Filter networks and transient protection clamps are used in module hardware to prevent damage caused by high peak volt-
age transients, radio frequency interference (RFI) and electromagnetic interference (EMI). These protective components
can be damaged by application of the ANSI/IEEE C37.90 specified test voltage for a period longer than the specified one
minute.
3.2.3 CONTROL POWER
CONTROL POWER SUPPLIED TO THE RELAY MUST BE CONNECTED TO THE MATCHING POWER SUPPLY
RANGE OF THE RELAY. IF THE VOLTAGE IS APPLIED TO THE WRONG TERMINALS, DAMAGE MAY
OCCUR!
The B30 relay, like almost all electronic relays, contains electrolytic capacitors. These capacitors are well
known to be subject to deterioration over time if voltage is not applied periodically. Deterioration can be
avoided by powering the relays up once a year.
The power supply module can be ordered for two possible voltage ranges. Each range has a dedicated input connection for
proper operation. The ranges are as shown below (see the Technical Specifications section for additional details):
LO range: 24 to 48 V (DC only) nominal
HI range: 125 to 250 V nominal
The power supply module provides power to the relay and supplies power for dry contact input connections.
The power supply module provides 48 V DC power for dry contact input connections and a critical failure relay (see the
Typical Wiring Diagram earlier). The critical failure relay is a Form-C that will be energized once control power is applied
and the relay has successfully booted up with no critical self-test failures. If on-going self-test diagnostic checks detect a
critical failure (see the Self-Test Errors table in Chapter 7) or control power is lost, the relay will de-energize.
Table 31: DIELECTRIC STRENGTH OF UR-SERIES MODULE HARDWARE
MODULE
TYPE
MODULE FUNCTION TERMINALS DIELECTRIC STRENGTH
(AC)
FROM TO
1 Power Supply High (+); Low (+); () Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 minute
1 Power Supply 48 V DC (+) and () Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 minute
1 Power Supply Relay Terminals Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 minute
2 Reserved N/A N/A N/A
5 Analog Inputs/Outputs All except 8b Chassis < 50 V DC
6 Digital Inputs/Outputs All (See Precaution 2) Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 minute
7
G.703 All except 2b, 3a, 7b, 8a Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 minute
RS422 All except 6a, 7b, 8a Chassis < 50 V DC
8 CT/VT All Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 minute
9 CPU All Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 minute
CAUTION
NOTE
3
Figure 36: CONTROL POWER CONNECTION
3.2.4 CT/VT MODULES
A CT/VT module may have voltage inputs on Channels 1 through 4 inclusive, or Channels 5 through 8 inclusive. Channels
1 and 5 are intended for connection to Phase A, and are labeled as such in the relay. Channels 2 and 6 are intended for
connection to Phase B, and are labeled as such in the relay. Channels 3 and 7 are intended for connection to Phase C and
are labeled as such in the relay. Channels 4 and 8 are intended for connection to a single phase source. If voltage, this
channel is labelled the auxiliary voltage (VX). If current, this channel is intended for connection to a CT between a system
neutral and ground, and is labelled the ground current (IG).
a) CT INPUTS
VERIFY THAT THE CONNECTION MADE TO THE RELAY NOMINAL CURRENT OF 1 A OR 5 A MATCHES
THE SECONDARY RATING OF THE CONNECTED CTs. UNMATCHED CTs MAY RESULT IN EQUIPMENT
DAMAGE OR INADEQUATE PROTECTION.
The CT/VT module may be ordered with a standard ground current input that is the same as the phase current inputs (Type
8F) or with a sensitive ground input (Type 8G) which is 10 times more sensitive (see the Technical Specifications section for
additional details). Each AC current input has an isolating transformer and an automatic shorting mechanism that shorts the
input when the module is withdrawn from the chassis. There are no internal ground connections on the current inputs. Cur-
rent transformers with 1 to 50000 A primaries and 1 A or 5 A secondaries may be used.
CT connections for both ABC and ACB phase rotations are identical as shown in the Typical Wiring Diagram.
The exact placement of a zero-sequence CT so that ground fault current will be detected is shown below. Twisted pair
cabling on the zero-sequence CT is recommended.
CAUTION
3
Figure 37: ZERO-SEQUENCE CORE BALANCE CT INSTALLATION
b) VT INPUTS
The phase voltage channels are used for most metering and protection purposes. The auxiliary voltage channel is used as
input for the Synchrocheck and Volts/Hertz features.
Figure 38: CT/VT MODULE WIRING
Wherever a tilde ~ symbol appears, substitute with the Slot Position of the module.
827831AA-X5.CDR
827831AA-X3.CDR
NOTE
3
3.2.5 CONTACT INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Every digital input/output module has 24 terminal connections. They are arranged as 3 terminals per row, with 8 rows in
total. A given row of three terminals may be used for the outputs of one relay. For example, for Form-C relay outputs, the
terminals connect to the normally open (NO), normally closed (NC), and common contacts of the relay. For a Form-A out-
put, there are options of using current or voltage detection for feature supervision, depending on the module ordered. The
terminal configuration for contact inputs is different for the two applications. When a digital input/output module is ordered
with contact inputs, they are arranged in groups of four and use two rows of three terminals. Ideally, each input would be
totally isolated from any other input. However, this would require that every input have two dedicated terminals and limit the
available number of contacts based on the available number of terminals. So, although each input is individually optically
isolated, each group of four inputs uses a single common as a reasonable compromise. This allows each group of four out-
puts to be supplied by wet contacts from different voltage sources (if required) or a mix of wet and dry contacts.
The tables and diagrams on the following pages illustrate the module types (6A, etc.) and contact arrangements that may
be ordered for the relay. Since an entire row is used for a single contact output, the name is assigned using the module slot
position and row number. However, since there are two contact inputs per row, these names are assigned by module slot
position, row number, and column position.
UR-SERIES FORM-A / SOLID STATE (SSR) OUTPUT CONTACTS:
Some Form-A/SSR outputs include circuits to monitor the DC voltage across the output contact when it is open, and the DC
current through the output contact when it is closed. Each of the monitors contains a level detector whose output is set to
logic On = 1 when the current in the circuit is above the threshold setting. The voltage monitor is set to On = 1 when the
current is above about 1 to 2.5 mA, and the current monitor is set to On = 1 when the current exceeds about 80 to 100
mA. The voltage monitor is intended to check the health of the overall trip circuit, and the current monitor can be used to
seal-in the output contact until an external contact has interrupted current flow. The block diagrams of the circuits are below
above for the Form-A outputs with:
a) optional voltage monitor
b) optional current monitor
c) with no monitoring
Figure 39: FORM-A /SOLID STATE CONTACT FUNCTIONS
Load
I
~#a
~#b
~#c
If Idc 1mA, Cont Op x Von
otherwise Cont Op x Voff
V
~
827821A5.CDR
+
+
+
+
+
-
-
-
-
-
a) Voltage with optional
current monitoring
Voltage monitoring only
Load
I
V
Both voltage and current monitoring
If Idc 80mA, Cont Op x Ion
otherwise Cont Op x Ioff
~
~
Load
I
V
b) Current with optional
voltage monitoring Current monitoring only Both voltage and current monitoring
(external jumper a-b is required)
~
Load
I
V
~
~
Load
c) No monitoring
~#a
~#b
~#c
~#a
~#b
~#c
~#a
~#b
~#c
~#a
~#b
~#c
3
The operation of voltage and current monitors is reflected with the corresponding FlexLogic operands (Cont Op # Von, Cont
Op # Voff, Cont Op # Ion, and Cont Op # Ioff) which can be used in protection, control and alarm logic. The typical application of
the voltage monitor is breaker trip circuit integrity monitoring; a typical application of the current monitor is seal-in of the
control command. Refer to the Digital Elements section of Chapter 5 for an example of how Form-A/SSR contacts can be
applied for breaker trip circuit integrity monitoring.
Relay contacts must be considered unsafe to touch when the unit is energized! If the relay contacts need to
be used for low voltage accessible applications, it is the customers responsibility to ensure proper insula-
tion levels!
USE OF FORM-A/SSR OUTPUTS IN HIGH IMPEDANCE CIRCUITS
For Form-A/SSR output contacts internally equipped with a voltage measuring cIrcuit across the contact, the circuit
has an impedance that can cause a problem when used in conjunction with external high input impedance monitor-
ing equipment such as modern relay test set trigger circuits. These monitoring circuits may continue to read the
Form-A contact as being closed after it has closed and subsequently opened, when measured as an impedance.
The solution to this problem is to use the voltage measuring trigger input of the relay test set, and connect the
Form-A contact through a voltage-dropping resistor to a DC voltage source. If the 48 V DC output of the power sup-
ply is used as a source, a 500 , 10 W resistor is appropriate. In this configuration, the voltage across either the
Form-A contact or the resistor can be used to monitor the state of the output.
Wherever a tilde ~ symbol appears, substitute with the Slot Position of the module; wherever a number
sign "#" appears, substitute the contact number
When current monitoring is used to seal-in the Form-A/SSR contact outputs, the FlexLogic operand driv-
ing the contact output should be given a reset delay of 10 ms to prevent damage of the output contact (in
situations when the element initiating the contact output is bouncing, at values in the region of the pickup
value).
Table 32: DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE ASSIGNMENTS
~6A I/O MODULE ~6B I/O MODULE ~6C I/O MODULE ~6D I/O MODULE
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT OR
INPUT
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT OR
INPUT
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT
~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A ~1 Form-C ~1a, ~1c 2 Inputs
~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A ~2 Form-C ~2a, ~2c 2 Inputs
~3 Form-C ~3 Form-C ~3 Form-C ~3a, ~3c 2 Inputs
~4 Form-C ~4 Form-C ~4 Form-C ~4a, ~4c 2 Inputs
~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs ~5 Form-C ~5 Form-C ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs
~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs ~6 Form-C ~6 Form-C ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7 Form-C ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8 Form-C ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs
~6E I/O MODULE ~6F I/O MODULE ~6G I/O MODULE ~6H I/O MODULE
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT OR
INPUT
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT OR
INPUT
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT OR
INPUT
~1 Form-C ~1 Fast Form-C ~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A
~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs ~5 Fast Form-C ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs ~5 Form-A
~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs ~6 Fast Form-C ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs ~6 Form-A
~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7 Fast Form-C ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8 Fast Form-C ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs
WARNING
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
3
~6K I/O MODULE ~6L I/O MODULE ~6M I/O MODULE ~6N I/O MODULE
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT OR
INPUT
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT OR
INPUT
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT OR
INPUT
~1 Form-C ~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A
~2 Form-C ~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A
~3 Form-C ~3 Form-C ~3 Form-C ~3 Form-A
~4 Form-C ~4 Form-C ~4 Form-C ~4 Form-A
~5 Fast Form-C ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs ~5 Form-C ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs
~6 Fast Form-C ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs ~6 Form-C ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs
~7 Fast Form-C ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs
~8 Fast Form-C ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs
~6P I/O MODULE ~6R I/O MODULE ~6S I/O MODULE ~6T I/O MODULE
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT OR
INPUT
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT OR
INPUT
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT OR
INPUT
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT OR
INPUT
~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A
~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A
~3 Form-A ~3 Form-C ~3 Form-C ~3 Form-A
~4 Form-A ~4 Form-C ~4 Form-C ~4 Form-A
~5 Form-A ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs ~5 Form-C ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs
~6 Form-A ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs ~6 Form-C ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs
~6U I/O MODULE ~67 I/O MODULE ~4A I/O MODULE ~4B I/O MODULE
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT OR
INPUT
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT
~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A ~1 Not Used ~1 Not Used
~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A ~2 Solid-State ~2 Solid-State
~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7 Form-A ~7 Not Used ~7 Not Used
~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8 Form-A ~8 Solid-State ~8 Solid-State
~4C I/O MODULE ~4L I/O MODULE
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT
~1 Not Used ~1 2 Outputs
~2 Solid-State ~2 2 Outputs
~8 Solid-State ~8 Not Used
3
Figure 310: DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE WIRING (1 of 2)
827719CY-X1.dwg
3
Figure 311: DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE WIRING (2 of 2)
CORRECT POLARITY MUST BE OBSERVED FOR ALL CONTACT INPUT AND SOLID STATE OUTPUT CON-
NECTIONS FOR PROPER FUNCTIONALITY.
MOSFET Solid State Contact
827719CY-X2.dwg
CAUTION
3
A dry contact has one side connected to Terminal B3b. This is the positive 48 V DC voltage rail supplied by the power sup-
ply module. The other side of the dry contact is connected to the required contact input terminal. Each contact input group
has its own common (negative) terminal which must be connected to the DC negative terminal (B3a) of the power supply
module. When a dry contact closes, a current of 1 to 3 mA will flow through the associated circuit.
A wet contact has one side connected to the positive terminal of an external DC power supply. The other side of this contact
is connected to the required contact input terminal. In addition, the negative side of the external source must be connected
to the relay common (negative) terminal of each contact input group. The maximum external source voltage for this
arrangement is 300 V DC.
The voltage threshold at which each group of four contact inputs will detect a closed contact input is programmable as
17 V DC for 24 V sources, 33 V DC for 48 V sources, 84 V DC for 110 to 125 V sources, and 166 V DC for 250 V sources.
Figure 312: DRY AND WET CONTACT INPUT CONNECTIONS
Contact outputs may be ordered as Form-A or Form-C. The Form A contacts may be connected for external circuit supervi-
sion. These contacts are provided with voltage and current monitoring circuits used to detect the loss of DC voltage in the
circuit, and the presence of DC current flowing through the contacts when the Form-A contact closes. If enabled, the cur-
rent monitoring can be used as a seal-in signal to ensure that the Form-A contact does not attempt to break the energized
inductive coil circuit and weld the output contacts.
There is no provision in the relay to detect a DC ground fault on 48 V DC control power external output. We
recommend using an external DC supply.
827741A4.CDR
CRITICAL
FAILURE
1b B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
1a
2b
3a -
3b +
-
5b HI+
6b LO+
6a
8a
8b
48 VDC
OUTPUT
CONTROL
POWER
SURGE
FILTER P
O
W
E
R

S
U
P
P
L
Y

1
24-250V
(Wet) (Dry)
7a
DIGITAL I/O 6B
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~ 7c
8a
8c
7b
+
-
8b
+
+
+
CONTACT IN 7a
CONTACT IN 7c
CONTACT IN 8a
CONTACT IN 8c
COMMON 7b
SURGE
7a
DIGITAL I/O 6B
7c
8a
8c
7b
+
-
8b
+
+
+
CONTACT IN 7a
CONTACT IN 7c
CONTACT IN 8a
CONTACT IN 8c
COMMON 7b
SURGE
NOTE
NOTE
3
3.2.6 TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Transducer input modules can receive input signals from external dcmA output transducers (dcmA In) or resistance tem-
perature detectors (RTD). Hardware and software is provided to receive signals from these external transducers and con-
vert these signals into a digital format for use as required.
Transducer output modules provide DC current outputs in several standard dcmA ranges. Software is provided to configure
virtually any analog quantity used in the relay to drive the analog outputs.
Every transducer input/output module has a total of 24 terminal connections. These connections are arranged as three ter-
minals per row with a total of eight rows. A given row may be used for either inputs or outputs, with terminals in column "a"
having positive polarity and terminals in column "c" having negative polarity. Since an entire row is used for a single input/
output channel, the name of the channel is assigned using the module slot position and row number.
Each module also requires that a connection from an external ground bus be made to Terminal 8b. The current outputs
require a twisted-pair shielded cable, where the shield is grounded at one end only. The figure below illustrates the trans-
ducer module types (5A, 5C, 5D, 5E, and 5F) and channel arrangements that may be ordered for the relay.
Figure 313: TRANSDUCER INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE WIRING
NOTE
827831AB-X1.CDR
3
3.2.7 RS232 FACEPLATE PORT
A 9-pin RS232C serial port is located on the relays faceplate for programming with a portable (personal) computer. All that
is required to use this interface is a personal computer running the enerVista UR Setup software provided with the relay.
Cabling for the RS232 port is shown in the following figure for both 9 pin and 25 pin connectors.
The baud rate for this port is fixed at 19200 bps.
Figure 314: RS232 FACEPLATE PORT CONNECTION
NOTE
3
3.2.8 CPU COMMUNICATION PORTS
a) OPTIONS
In addition to the RS232 port on the faceplate, the relay provides the user with two additional communication port(s)
depending on the CPU module installed.
The 9E, 9G, and 9H CPU modules do not require a surge ground connection.
Figure 315: CPU MODULE COMMUNICATIONS WIRING
b) RS485 PORTS
RS485 data transmission and reception are accomplished over a single twisted pair with transmit and receive data alternat-
ing over the same two wires. Through the use of these port(s), continuous monitoring and control from a remote computer,
SCADA system or PLC is possible.
To minimize errors from noise, the use of shielded twisted pair wire is recommended. Correct polarity must also be
observed. For instance, the relays must be connected with all RS485 + terminals connected together, and all RS485
terminals connected together. The COM terminal should be connected to the common wire inside the shield, when pro-
vided. To avoid loop currents, the shield should be grounded at one point only. Each relay should also be daisy chained to
the next one in the link. A maximum of 32 relays can be connected in this manner without exceeding driver capability. For
larger systems, additional serial channels must be added. It is also possible to use commercially available repeaters to
increase the number of relays on a single channel to more than 32. Star or stub connections should be avoided entirely.
Lightning strikes and ground surge currents can cause large momentary voltage differences between remote ends of the
communication link. For this reason, surge protection devices are internally provided at both communication ports. An iso-
lated power supply with an optocoupled data interface also acts to reduce noise coupling. To ensure maximum reliability, all
equipment should have similar transient protection devices installed.
Both ends of the RS485 circuit should also be terminated with an impedance as shown below.
CPU TYPE COM1 COM2
9E RS485 RS485
9G 10Base-F and 10Base-T RS485
9H Redundant 10Base-F RS485
NOTE
827831AB-X6.DWG
3
Figure 316: RS485 SERIAL CONNECTION
c) 10BASE-F FIBER OPTIC PORT
ENSURE THE DUST COVERS ARE INSTALLED WHEN THE FIBER IS NOT IN USE. DIRTY OR SCRATCHED
CONNECTORS CAN LEAD TO HIGH LOSSES ON A FIBER LINK.
OBSERVING ANY FIBER TRANSMITTER OUTPUT MAY CAUSE INJURY TO THE EYE.
The fiber optic communication ports allow for fast and efficient communications between relays at 10 Mbps. Optical fiber
may be connected to the relay supporting a wavelength of 820 nanometers in multimode. Optical fiber is only available for
CPU types 9G and 9H. The 9H CPU has a 10BaseF transmitter and receiver for optical fiber communications and a second
pair of identical optical fiber transmitter and receiver for redundancy.
The optical fiber sizes supported include 50/125 m, 62.5/125 m and 100/140 m. The fiber optic port is designed such
that the response times will not vary for any core that is 100 m or less in diameter. For optical power budgeting, splices are
required every 1 km for the transmitter/receiver pair (the ST type connector contributes for a connector loss of 0.2 dB).
When splicing optical fibers, the diameter and numerical aperture of each fiber must be the same. In order to engage or dis-
engage the ST type connector, only a quarter turn of the coupling is required.
CAUTION
CAUTION
3
3.2.9 IRIG-B
IRIG-B is a standard time code format that allows stamping of events to be synchronized among connected devices within
1 millisecond. The IRIG time code formats are serial, width-modulated codes which can be either DC level shifted or ampli-
tude modulated (AM). Third party equipment is available for generating the IRIG-B signal; this equipment may use a GPS
satellite system to obtain the time reference so that devices at different geographic locations can also be synchronized.
Figure 317: IRIG-B CONNECTION
The IRIG-B repeater provides an amplified DC-shift IRIG-B signal to other equipment. By using one IRIG-B serial connec-
tion, several UR-series relays can be synchronized. The IRIG-B repeater has a bypass function to maintain the time signal
even when a relay in the series is powered down.
Figure 318: IRIG-B REPEATER
RELAY
BNC (IN)
RECEIVER RG58/59 COAXIAL CABLE
GPS SATELLITE SYSTEM
GPS CONNECTION
OPTIONAL
IRIG-B(-) 4A
+
-
827756A5.CDR
IRIG-B
TIME CODE
GENERATOR
(DC SHIFT OR
AMPLITUDE MODULATED
SIGNAL CAN BE USED)
4B IRIG-B(+)
BNC (OUT) REPEATER
TO OTHER DEVICES
(DC-SHIFT ONLY)
3 HARDWARE 3.3 DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS
3
3.3DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS 3.3.1 DESCRIPTION
The B30 direct inputs/outputs feature makes use of the Type 7 series of communications modules. These modules are also
used by the L90 Line Differential Relay for inter-relay communications. The direct input/output feature uses the communica-
tions channel(s) provided by these modules to exchange digital state information between relays. This feature is available
on all UR-series relay models except for the L90 Line Differential relay.
The communications channels are normally connected in a ring configuration as shown below. The transmitter of one mod-
ule is connected to the receiver of the next module. The transmitter of this second module is then connected to the receiver
of the next module in the ring. This is continued to form a communications ring. The figure below illustrates a ring of four
UR-series relays with the following connections: UR1-Tx to UR2-Rx, UR2-Tx to UR3-Rx, UR3-Tx to UR4-Rx, and UR4-Tx
to UR1-Rx. A maximum of eight (8) UR-series relays can be connected in a single ring
Figure 319: DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT SINGLE CHANNEL CONNECTION
The interconnection for dual-channel Type 7 communications modules is shown below. Two channel modules allow for a
redundant ring configuration. That is, two rings can be created to provide an additional independent data path. The required
connections are: UR1-Tx1 to UR2-Rx1, UR2-Tx1 to UR3-Rx1, UR3-Tx1 to UR4-Rx1, and UR4-Tx1 to UR1-Rx1 for the first
ring; and UR1-Tx2 to UR2-Rx2, UR2-Tx2 to UR3-Rx2, UR3-Tx2 to UR4-Rx2, and UR4-Tx2 to UR1-Rx2 for the second
ring.
Figure 320: DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT DUAL CHANNEL CONNECTION
The following diagram shows the connection for three UR-series relays using two independent communication channels.
UR1 and UR3 have single Type 7 communication modules; UR2 has a dual-channel module. The two communication
channels can be of different types, depending on the Type 7 modules used. To allow the direct input/output data to cross-
over from Channel 1 to Channel 2 on UR2, the DIRECT I/O CHANNEL CROSSOVER setting should be Enabled on UR2. This
forces UR2 to forward messages received on Rx1 out Tx2, and messages received on Rx2 out Tx1.
842006A1.CDR
Tx
Tx
Tx
Tx
UR #1
UR #2
UR #3
UR #4
Rx
Rx
Rx
Rx
842007A1.CDR
Tx1
UR #1
UR #2
UR #3
UR #4
Tx1
Tx1
Tx1
Tx2
Tx2
Tx2
Tx2
Rx1
Rx1
Rx1
Rx1
Rx2
Rx2
Rx2
Rx2
3.3 DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS 3 HARDWARE
3
Figure 321: DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT SINGLE/DUAL CHANNEL COMBINATION CONNECTION
The interconnection requirements are described in further detail in this section for each specific variation of Type 7 commu-
nications module. These modules are listed in the following table. All fiber modules use ST type connectors.
OBSERVING ANY FIBER TRANSMITTER OUTPUT MAY CAUSE INJURY TO THE EYE.
Table 33: CHANNEL COMMUNICATION OPTIONS
MODULE SPECIFICATION
2A C37.94SM, 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode
2B C37.94SM, 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode
7A 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 channel
7B 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 channel
7C 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 channel
7D 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 channel
7E Channel 1: G.703, Channel 2: 820 nm, multi-mode
7F Channel 1: G.703, Channel 2: 1300 nm, multi-mode
7G Channel 1: G.703, Channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode ELED
7H 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 channels
7I 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 channels
7J 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 channels
7K 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 channels
7L Channel 1: RS422, Channel: 820 nm, multi-mode, LED
7M Channel 1: RS422, Channel 2: 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED
7N Channel 1: RS422, Channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED
7P Channel 1: RS422, Channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER
7Q Channel 1: G.703, Channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER
7R G.703, 1 channel
7S G.703, 2 channels
7T RS422, 1 channel
7W RS422, 2 channels
72 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 channel
73 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 channels
74 Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER
75 Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER
76 IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 channel
77 IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 channels
842013A1.CDR
Tx
Tx
UR #1
Channel #1
Channel #2
UR #2
UR #3
Rx
Rx
Tx1
Tx2
Rx1
Rx2
CAUTION
3
3.3.2 FIBER: LED AND ELED TRANSMITTERS
The following figure shows the configuration for the 7A, 7B, 7C, 7H, 7I, and 7J fiber-only modules.
Figure 322: LED AND ELED FIBER MODULES
3.3.3 FIBER-LASER TRANSMITTERS
The following figure shows the configuration for the 72, 73, 7D, and 7K fiber-laser module.
Figure 323: LASER FIBER MODULES
When using a LASER Interface, attenuators may be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed Maximum
Optical Input Power to the receiver.
Module: 7A / 7B / 7C 7H / 7I / 7J
Connection Location: Slot X Slot X
1 Channel 2 Channels
RX1 RX1
RX2
TX1 TX1
TX2
831719A2.CDR
Module:
Connection Location:
73/ 7K
Slot X
72/ 7D
Slot X
1 Channel 2 Channels
RX1 RX1
RX2
TX1 TX1
TX2
831720A3.CDR
WARNING
3
3.3.4 G.703 INTERFACE
a) DESCRIPTION
The following figure shows the 64K ITU G.703 co-directional interface configuration.
The G.703 module is fixed at 64 kbps only. The SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" DIRECT I/O !" DIRECT I/O DATA
RATE setting is not applicable to this module.
AWG 22 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external connections, with the shield grounded only at one end. Con-
necting the shield to Pin X1a or X6a grounds the shield since these pins are internally connected to ground. Thus, if
Pin X1a or X6a is used, do not ground at the other end. This interface module is protected by surge suppression devices.
Figure 324: G.703 INTERFACE CONFIGURATION
The following figure shows the typical pin interconnection between two G.703 interfaces. For the actual physical arrange-
ment of these pins, see the Rear Terminal Assignments section earlier in this chapter. All pin interconnections are to be
maintained for a connection to a multiplexer.
Figure 325: TYPICAL PIN INTERCONNECTION BETWEEN TWO G.703 INTERFACES
Pin nomenclature may differ from one manufacturer to another. Therefore, it is not uncommon to see
pinouts numbered TxA, TxB, RxA and RxB. In such cases, it can be assumed that A is equivalent to +
and B is equivalent to .
b) G.703 SELECTION SWITCH PROCEDURES
1. Remove the G.703 module (7R or 7S):
The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module, must be pulled simultaneously in order
to release the module for removal. Before performing this action, control power must be removed from the relay.
The original location of the module should be recorded to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted
into the correct slot.
2. Remove the module cover screw.
3. Remove the top cover by sliding it towards the rear and then lift it upwards.
4. Set the Timing Selection Switches (Channel 1, Channel 2) to the desired timing modes.
5. Replace the top cover and the cover screw.
NOTE
831727A2-X1.CDR
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
8a
8b
7
R
Rx +
Tx +
Shld.
Tx
Shld.
Rx
Tx
Rx +
Tx +
Rx
C
O
M
M
.
2b
6a
7a
1b
1a
3a
6b
7b
2a
3b
G.703
CHANNEL 2
G.703
CHANNEL 1
SURGE
SURGE
831727A2.CDR
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
8a
8b
7
R
Rx +
Tx +
Shld.
Tx -
Shld.
Rx -
Tx -
Rx +
Tx +
Rx -
C
O
M
M
.
2b
6a
7a
1b
1a
3a
6b
7b
2a
3b
G.703
CHANNEL 2
G.703
CHANNEL 1
SURGE
SURGE
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
8a
8b
7
R
Rx +
Tx +
Shld.
Tx -
Shld.
Rx -
Tx -
Rx +
Tx +
Rx -
C
O
M
M
.
2b
6a
7a
1b
1a
3a
6b
7b
2a
3b
G.703
CHANNEL 2
G.703
CHANNEL 1
SURGE
SURGE
NOTE
3
6. Re-insert the G.703 module Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position.
The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as
the module is smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis, engage the
clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted.
Figure 326: G.703 TIMING SELECTION SWITCH SETTING
c) OCTET TIMING (SWITCH S1)
If Octet Timing is enabled (ON), this 8 kHz signal will be asserted during the violation of Bit 8 (LSB) necessary for connect-
ing to higher order systems. When B30s are connected back to back, Octet Timing should be disabled (OFF).
d) TIMING MODES (SWITCHES S5 AND S6)
Internal Timing Mode: The system clock generated internally. Therefore, the G.703 timing selection should be in the
Internal Timing Mode for back-to-back (UR-to-UR) connections. For Back to Back Connections, set for Octet Timing
(S1 = OFF) and Timing Mode = Internal Timing (S5 = ON and S6 = OFF).
Loop Timing Mode: The system clock is derived from the received line signal. Therefore, the G.703 timing selection
should be in Loop Timing Mode for connections to higher order systems. For connection to a higher order system (UR-
to-multiplexer, factory defaults), set to Octet Timing (S1 = ON) and set Timing Mode = Loop Timing (S5 = OFF and S6
= OFF).
Table 34: G.703 TIMING SELECTIONS
SWITCHES FUNCTION
S1 OFF Octet Timing Disabled
ON Octet Timing 8 kHz
S5 and S6 S5 = OFF and S6 = OFF Loop Timing Mode
S5 = ON and S6 = OFF Internal Timing Mode
S5 = OFF and S6 = ON Minimum Remote Loopback Mode
S5 = ON and S6 = ON Dual Loopback Mode
3
e) TEST MODES (SWITCHES S5 AND S6)
MINIMUM REMOTE LOOPBACK MODE:
In Minimum Remote Loopback mode, the multiplexer is enabled to return the data from the external interface without any
processing to assist in diagnosing G.703 Line Side problems irrespective of clock rate. Data enters from the G.703 inputs,
passes through the data stabilization latch which also restores the proper signal polarity, passes through the multiplexer
and then returns to the transmitter. The Differential Received Data is processed and passed to the G.703 Transmitter mod-
ule after which point the data is discarded. The G.703 Receiver module is fully functional and continues to process data and
passes it to the Differential Manchester Transmitter module. Since timing is returned as it is received, the timing source is
expected to be from the G.703 line side of the interface.
DUAL LOOPBACK MODE:
In Dual Loopback Mode, the multiplexers are active and the functions of the circuit are divided into two with each Receiver/
Transmitter pair linked together to deconstruct and then reconstruct their respective signals. Differential Manchester data
enters the Differential Manchester Receiver module and then is returned to the Differential Manchester Transmitter module.
Likewise, G.703 data enters the G.703 Receiver module and is passed through to the G.703 Transmitter module to be
returned as G.703 data. Because of the complete split in the communications path and because, in each case, the clocks
are extracted and reconstructed with the outgoing data, in this mode there must be two independent sources of timing. One
source lies on the G.703 line side of the interface while the other lies on the Differential Manchester side of the interface.
DMR
DMX
G7X
G7R
DMR = Differential Manchester Receiver
DMX = Differential Manchester Transmitter
G7X = G.703 Transmitter
G7R = G.703 Receiver
DMR
DMX
G7X
G7R
DMR = Differential Manchester Receiver
DMX = Differential Manchester Transmitter
G7X = G.703 Transmitter
G7R = G.703 Receiver
3
3.3.5 RS422 INTERFACE
a) DESCRIPTION
The following figure shows the RS422 2-terminal interface configuration at 64 kbps. AWG 22 twisted shielded pair is recom-
mended for external connections. This interface module is protected by surge suppression devices which optically isolated.
The RS422 module is fixed at 64 kbps only. The SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" DIRECT I/O !" DIRECT I/O DATA
RATE setting is not applicable to this module.
SHIELD TERMINATION
The shield pins (6a and 7b) are internally connected to the ground pin (8a). Proper shield termination is as follows:
Site 1: Terminate shield to pins 6a and/or 7b; Site 2: Terminate shield to COM pin 2b.
The clock terminating impedance should match the impedance of the line.
Figure 327: RS422 INTERFACE CONFIGURATION
The following figure shows the typical pin interconnection between two RS422 interfaces. All pin interconnections are to be
maintained for a connection to a multiplexer.
Figure 328: TYPICAL PIN INTERCONNECTION BETWEEN TWO RS422 INTERFACES
b) TWO CHANNEL APPLICATIONS VIA MULTIPLEXERS
The RS422 Interface may be used for 1 channel or 2 channel applications over SONET/SDH and/or Multiplexed systems.
When used in 1 channel applications, the RS422 interface links to higher order systems in a typical fashion observing Tx,
Rx, and Send Timing connections. However, when used in 2 channel applications, certain criteria have to be followed due
to the fact that there is 1 clock input for the two RS422 channels. The system will function correctly if the following connec-
tions are observed and your Data Module has a feature called Terminal Timing. Terminal Timing is a common feature to
most Synchronous Data Units that allows the module to accept timing from an external source. Using the Terminal Timing
feature, 2 channel applications can be achieved if these connections are followed: The Send Timing outputs from the Multi-
plexer - Data Module 1, will connect to the Clock inputs of the URRS422 interface in the usual fashion. In addition, the
Send Timing outputs of Data Module 1 will also be paralleled to the Terminal Timing inputs of Data Module 2. By using this
configuration the timing for both Data Modules and both URRS422 channels will be derived from a single clock source. As
NOTE
RS422.CDR
p/o 827831A6.CDR
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
7a
2b
8a
W
7
W
Shld.
Shld.
Tx -
Tx -
Rx -
Rx -
Tx +
Tx +
+
com
Rx +
Rx +
-
4b
5a
6b
3a
3b
6a
4a
7b
8b
2a
5b
RS422
CHANNEL 1
RS422
CHANNEL 2
CLOCK
SURGE
831728A3.CDR
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
7a
2b
8a
7
T
Shld.
Tx -
Rx -
Tx +
+
com
Rx +
-
4b
3a
3b
6a
8b
2a
RS422
CHANNEL 1
CLOCK
SURGE
64 KHz
+
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
7a
2b
8a
7
T
Shld.
Tx -
Rx -
Tx +
+
com
Rx +
-
4b
3a
3b
6a
8b
2a
RS422
CHANNEL 1
CLOCK
SURGE
3
a result, data sampling for both of the URRS422 channels will be synchronized via the Send Timing leads on Data Module
1 as shown in the following figure. If the Terminal Timing feature is not available or this type of connection is not desired, the
G.703 interface is a viable option that does not impose timing restrictions.
Figure 329: TIMING CONFIGURATION FOR RS422 TWO-CHANNEL, 3-TERMINAL APPLICATION
Data Module 1 provides timing to the B30 RS422 interface via the ST(A) and ST(B) outputs. Data Module 1 also provides
timing to Data Module 2 TT(A) and TT(B) inputs via the ST(A) and AT(B) outputs. The Data Module pin numbers have been
omitted in the figure above since they may vary depending on the manufacturer.
c) TRANSIT TIMING
The RS422 Interface accepts one clock input for Transmit Timing. It is important that the rising edge of the 64 kHz Transmit
Timing clock of the Multiplexer Interface is sampling the data in the center of the Transmit Data window. Therefore, it is
important to confirm Clock and Data Transitions to ensure Proper System Operation. For example, the following figure
shows the positive edge of the Tx Clock in the center of the Tx Data bit.
Figure 330: CLOCK AND DATA TRANSITIONS
Pin No.
Pin No.
Data Module 1
Data Module 2
Signal Name
Signal Name
SD(A) - Send Data
TT(A) - Terminal Timing
TT(B) - Terminal Timing
SD(B) - Send Data
RD(A) - Received Data
RD(A) - Received Data
SD(A) - Sand Data
SD(B) - Sand Data
RD(B) - Received Data
RD(B) - Received Data
RS(A) - Request to Send (RTS)
RS(A) - Request to Send (RTS)
RT(A) - Receive Timing
CS(A) - Clear To Send
CS(A) - Clear To Send
RT(B) - Receive Timing
CS(B) - Clear To Send
CS(B) - Clear To Send
Local Loopback
Local Loopback
Remote Loopback
Remote Loopback
Signal Ground
Signal Ground
ST(A) - Send Timing
ST(A) - Send Timing
ST(B) - Send Timing
ST(B) - Send Timing
RS(B) - Request to Send (RTS)
RS(B) - Request to Send (RTS)
831022A2.CDR
W7a
W2b
W8a
7
W
Shld.
Shld.
Tx1(+)
Tx2(+)
Tx1(-)
Tx2(-)
Rx1(+)
Rx2(+)
+
com
Rx1(-)
Rx2(-)
-
L
9
0

C
O
M
M
.
W3a
W5b
W5a
W3b
W2a
W6a
W6b
W7b
W8b
W4b
W4a
RS422
CHANNEL 1
RS422
CHANNEL 2
CLOCK
SURGE
Tx Clock
Tx Data
3
d) RECEIVE TIMING
The RS422 Interface utilizes NRZI-MARK Modulation Code and; therefore, does not rely on an Rx Clock to recapture data.
NRZI-MARK is an edge-type, invertible, self-clocking code.
To recover the Rx Clock from the data-stream, an integrated DPLL (Digital Phase Lock Loop) circuit is utilized. The DPLL is
driven by an internal clock, which is over-sampled 16X, and uses this clock along with the data-stream to generate a data
clock that can be used as the SCC (Serial Communication Controller) receive clock.
3.3.6 RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE
The following figure shows the combined RS422 plus Fiber interface configuration at 64K baud. The 7L, 7M, 7N, 7P, and 74
modules are used in 2-terminal with a redundant channel or 3-terminal configurations where Channel 1 is employed via the
RS422 interface (possibly with a multiplexer) and Channel 2 via direct fiber.
AWG 22 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external RS422 connections and the shield should be grounded only at
one end. For the direct fiber channel, power budget issues should be addressed properly.
Figure 331: RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE CONNECTION
Connections shown above are for multiplexers configured as DCE (Data Communications Equipment) units.
3.3.7 G.703 AND FIBER INTERFACE
The figure below shows the combined G.703 plus Fiber interface configuration at 64K baud. The 7E, 7F, 7G, 7Q, and 75
modules are used in configurations where Channel 1 is employed via the G.703 interface (possibly with a multiplexer) and
Channel 2 via direct fiber. AWG 22 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external G.703 connections connecting the
shield to Pin 1A at one end only. For the direct fiber channel, power budget issues should be addressed properly. See pre-
vious sections for more details on the G.703 and Fiber interfaces.
Figure 332: G.703 AND FIBER INTERFACE CONNECTION
WARNING
L907LMNP.CDR
P/O 827831A6.CDR
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
7a
2b
8a
W
7
L
,

M
,

N
,

P

a
n
d

7
4
Shld.
Tx1 -
Rx1 -
Tx1 +
+
com
Rx1 +
-
4b
3a
3b
6a
8b
2a
RS422
CHANNEL 1
CLOCK
(CHANNEL1)
SURGE
Tx2
Rx2
FIBER
CHANNEL 2
WARNING
W
7
E
,

F
,

G

a
n
d

Q
Tx2
Rx2
FIBER
CHANNEL 2
X
X
X
X
X
X
Rx +
Shld.
Tx -
Rx -
Tx +
2b
1b
1a
3a
2a
3b
G.703
CHANNEL 1
SURGE
3
3.3.8 IEEE C37.94 INTERFACE
The UR-series IEEE C37.94 communication modules (76 and 77) are designed to interface with IEEE C37.94 compliant
digital multiplexers and/or an IEEE C37.94 compliant interface converter for use with direct input/output applications for
firmware revisions 3.30 and higher. The IEEE C37.94 standard defines a point-to-point optical link for synchronous data
between a multiplexer and a teleprotection device. This data is typically 64 kbps, but the standard provides for speeds up to
64n kbps, where n = 1, 2,, 12. The UR-series C37.94 communication module is 64 kbps only with n fixed at 1. The frame
is a valid International Telecommunications Union (ITU-T) recommended G.704 pattern from the standpoint of framing and
data rate. The frame is 256 bits and is repeated at a frame rate of 8000 Hz, with a resultant bit rate of 2048 kbps.
The specifications for the module are as follows:
IEEE standard: C37.94 for 1 64 kbps optical fiber interface
Fiber optic cable type: 50 mm or 62.5 mm core diameter optical fiber
Fiber optic mode: multi-mode
Fiber optic cable length: up to 2 km
Fiber optic connector: type ST
Wavelength: 830 40 nm
Connection: as per all fiber optic connections, a Tx to Rx connection is required.
The UR-series C37.94 communication module can be connected directly to any compliant digital multiplexer that supports
the IEEE C37.94 standard as shown below.
The UR-series C37.94 communication module can be connected to the electrical interface (G.703, RS422, or X.21) of a
non-compliant digital multiplexer via an optical-to-electrical interface converter that supports the IEEE C37.94 standard, as
shown below.
The UR-series C37.94 communication module has six (6) switches that are used to set the clock configuration. The func-
tions of these control switches is shown below.
UR series
relay
Digital
Multiplexer
IEEE C37.94
compliant
IEEE C37.94
Fiber Interface
up to 2 km
UR series
relay
Digital
Multiplexer
with EIA-422
Interface
IEEE C37.94
Fiber Interface
up to 2 km
IEEE C37.94
Converter
RS422
Interface
te
te
xt
xt te
xt
te
te
xt
xt te
xt
xt te
xt
xt te
xt
xt te
xt
xt te
xt
xt te
xt
xt te
xt
xt te
xt
xt te
xt
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Internal Timing Mode Loop Timed
1 5 3 4 2 6 1 5 3 4 2 6
Switch Internal Loop Timed
1 ON OFF
2 ON OFF
3 OFF OFF
4 OFF OFF
5 OFF OFF
6 OFF OFF
3
For the Internal Timing Mode, the system clock is generated internally. Therefore, the timing switch selection should be
Internal Timing for Relay 1 and Loop Timed for Relay 2. There must be only one timing source configured.
For the Looped Timing Mode, the system clock is derived from the received line signal. Therefore, the timing selection
should be in Loop Timing Mode for connections to higher order systems.
The C37.94 communications module cover removal procedure is as follows:
1. Remove the C37.94 module (76 or 77):
The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module, must be pulled simultaneously in order
to release the module for removal. Before performing this action, control power must be removed from the relay.
The original location of the module should be recorded to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted
into the correct slot.
2. Remove the module cover screw.
3. Remove the top cover by sliding it towards the rear and then lift it upwards.
4. Set the Timing Selection Switches (Channel 1, Channel 2) to the desired timing modes (see description above).
5. Replace the top cover and the cover screw.
6. Re-insert the C37.94 module Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot posi-
tion. The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position
as the module is smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis, engage
the clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted.
Figure 333: C37.94 TIMING SELECTION SWITCH SETTING
3
4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE
4
4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.1ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE 4.1.1 INTRODUCTION
The enerVista UR Setup software provides a graphical user interface (GUI) as one of two human interfaces to a UR device.
The alternate human interface is implemented via the devices faceplate keypad and display (see Faceplate Interface sec-
tion in this chapter).
The enerVista UR Setup software provides a single facility to configure, monitor, maintain, and trouble-shoot the operation
of relay functions, connected over local or wide area communication networks. It can be used while disconnected (i.e. off-
line) or connected (i.e. on-line) to a UR device. In off-line mode, settings files can be created for eventual downloading to
the device. In on-line mode, you can communicate with the device in real-time.
The enerVista UR Setup software, provided with every B30 relay, can be run from any computer supporting Microsoft

Win-
dows
95, 98, NT, 2000, ME, and XP. This chapter provides a summary of the basic enerVista UR Setup software interface
features. The enerVista UR Setup Help File provides details for getting started and using the enerVista UR Setup software
interface.
4.1.2 CREATING A SITE LIST
To start using the enerVista UR Setup software, a site definition and device definition must first be created. See the enerV-
ista UR Setup Help File or refer to the Connecting enerVista UR Setup with the B30 section in Chapter 1 for details.
4.1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP OVERVIEW
a) ENGAGING A DEVICE
The enerVista UR Setup software may be used in on-line mode (relay connected) to directly communicate with a UR relay.
Communicating relays are organized and grouped by communication interfaces and into sites. Sites may contain any num-
ber of relays selected from the UR product series.
b) USING SETTINGS FILES
The enerVista UR Setup software interface supports three ways of handling changes to relay settings:
In off-line mode (relay disconnected) to create or edit relay settings files for later download to communicating relays.
While connected to a communicating relay to directly modify any relay settings via relay data view windows, and then
save the settings to the relay.
You can create/edit settings files and then write them to the relay while the interface is connected to the relay.
Settings files are organized on the basis of file names assigned by the user. A settings file contains data pertaining to the
following types of relay settings:
Device Definition
Product Setup
System Setup
FlexLogic
Grouped Elements
Control Elements
Inputs/Outputs
Testing
Factory default values are supplied and can be restored after any changes.
c) CREATING AND EDITING FLEXLOGIC
You can create or edit a FlexLogic equation in order to customize the relay. You can subsequently view the automatically
generated logic diagram.
4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE 4 HUMAN INTERFACES
4
d) VIEWING ACTUAL VALUES
You can view real-time relay data such as input/output status and measured parameters.
e) VIEWING TRIGGERED EVENTS
While the interface is in either on-line or off-line mode, you can view and analyze data generated by triggered specified
parameters, via one of the following:
Event Recorder facility: The event recorder captures contextual data associated with the last 1024 events, listed in
chronological order from most recent to oldest.
Oscillography facility: The oscillography waveform traces and digital states are used to provide a visual display of
power system and relay operation data captured during specific triggered events.
f) FILE SUPPORT
Execution: Any enerVista UR Setup file which is double clicked or opened will launch the application, or provide focus
to the already opened application. If the file was a settings file (has a URS extension) which had been removed from
the Settings List tree menu, it will be added back to the Settings List tree menu.
Drag and Drop: The Site List and Settings List control bar windows are each mutually a drag source and a drop target
for device-order-code-compatible files or individual menu items. Also, the Settings List control bar window and any
Windows Explorer directory folder are each mutually a file drag source and drop target.
New files which are dropped into the Settings List window are added to the tree which is automatically sorted alphabet-
ically with respect to settings file names. Files or individual menu items which are dropped in the selected device menu
in the Site List window will automatically be sent to the on-line communicating device.
g) FIRMWARE UPGRADES
The firmware of a B30 device can be upgraded, locally or remotely, via the enerVista UR Setup software. The correspond-
ing instructions are provided by the enerVista UR Setup Help file under the topic Upgrading Firmware.
Modbus addresses assigned to firmware modules, features, settings, and corresponding data items (i.e. default
values, minimum/maximum values, data type, and item size) may change slightly from version to version of firm-
ware. The addresses are rearranged when new features are added or existing features are enhanced or modified.
The EEPROM DATA ERROR message displayed after upgrading/downgrading the firmware is a resettable, self-test
message intended to inform users that the Modbus addresses have changed with the upgraded firmware. This
message does not signal any problems when appearing after firmware upgrades.
NOTE
4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE
4
4.1.4 ENERVISTA UR SETUP MAIN WINDOW
The enerVista UR Setup software main window supports the following primary display components:
a. Title bar which shows the pathname of the active data view
b. Main window menu bar
c. Main window tool bar
d. Site List control bar window
e. Settings List control bar window
f. Device data view window(s), with common tool bar
g. Settings File data view window(s), with common tool bar
h. Workspace area with data view tabs
i. Status bar
Figure 41: ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE MAIN WINDOW
4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4 HUMAN INTERFACES
4
4.2FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4.2.1 FACEPLATE
The keypad/display/LED interface is one of two alternate human interfaces supported. The other alternate human interface
is implemented via the enerVista UR Setup software. The faceplate interface consists of several functional panels.
The faceplate is hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules. There is also a removable dust cover that fits over
the faceplate which must be removed in order to access the keypad panel. The following figure shows the arrangement of
faceplate panels.
Figure 42: UR-SERIES HORIZONTAL FACEPLATE PANELS
4.2.2 LED INDICATORS
a) LED PANEL 1
This panel provides several LED indicators, several keys, and a communications port. The RESET key is used to reset any
latched LED indicator or target message, once the condition has been cleared (these latched conditions can also be reset
via the SETTINGS !" INPUT/OUTPUTS !" RESETTING menu). The USER keys are not used in this unit. The RS232 port is
intended for connection to a portable PC.
Figure 43: LED PANEL 1
STATUS INDICATORS:
IN SERVICE: Indicates that control power is applied; all monitored inputs/outputs and internal systems are OK; the
relay has been programmed.
TROUBLE: Indicates that the relay has detected an internal problem.
TEST MODE: Indicates that the relay is in test mode.
TRIP: Indicates that the selected FlexLogic operand serving as a Trip switch has operated. This indicator always
latches; the RESET command must be initiated to allow the latch to be reset.
ALARM: Indicates that the selected FlexLogic operand serving as an Alarm switch has operated. This indicator is
never latched.
827801A5.CDR
MENU
HELP
ESCAPE
ENTER VALUE
MESSAGE 4
7
1
.
5
8
2
0
6
9
3
+/-
PICKUP
ALARM
TRIP
TEST MODE
TROUBLE
IN SERVICE
STATUS
USER 3
USER 2
USER 1
RESET
NEUTRAL/GROUND
PHASE C
PHASE B
PHASE A
OTHER
FREQUENCY
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
EVENT CAUSE
LED PANEL 1
KEYPAD CONTROL
PUSHBUTTONS 1-7
USER-PROGRAMMABLE
PUSHBUTTONS 1-12
DISPLAY LED PANEL 2 LED PANEL 3
USER LABEL
1 3 5
2 4 6
USER LABEL USER LABEL
USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL
7 9 11
8 10 12
GE Multilin
USER 7
USER 6
USER 5
USER 4
PICKUP
ALARM
TRIP
TEST MODE
TROUBLE
IN SERVICE
STATUS
USER 3
USER 2
USER 1
RESET
NEUTRAL/GROUND
PHASE C
PHASE B
PHASE A
OTHER
FREQUENCY
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
EVENT CAUSE
4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE
4
PICKUP: Indicates that an element is picked up. This indicator is never latched.
EVENT CAUSE INDICATORS:
These indicate the input type that was involved in a condition detected by an element that is operated or has a latched flag
waiting to be reset.
VOLTAGE: Indicates voltage was involved.
CURRENT: Indicates current was involved.
FREQUENCY: Indicates frequency was involved.
OTHER: Indicates a composite function was involved.
PHASE A: Indicates Phase A was involved.
PHASE B: Indicates Phase B was involved.
PHASE C: Indicates Phase C was involved.
NEUTRAL/GROUND: Indicates neutral or ground was involved.
b) LED PANELS 2 AND 3
These panels provide 48 amber LED indicators whose operation is controlled by the user. Support for applying a custom-
ized label beside every LED is provided.
User customization of LED operation is of maximum benefit in installations where languages other than English are used to
communicate with operators. Refer to the User-Programmable LEDs section in Chapter 5 for the settings used to program
the operation of the LEDs on these panels.
Figure 44: LED PANELS 2 AND 3 (INDEX TEMPLATE)
c) DEFAULT LABELS FOR LED PANEL 2
The default labels are intended to represent:
GROUP 1...6: The illuminated GROUP is the active settings group.
Firmware revisions 2.9x and earlier support eight user setting groups; revisions 3.0x and higher support
six setting groups. For convenience of users using earlier firmware revisions, the relay panel shows eight
setting groups. Please note that the LEDs, despite their default labels, are fully user-programmable.
The relay is shipped with the default label for the LED panel 2. The LEDs, however, are not pre-programmed. To match the
pre-printed label, the LED settings must be entered as shown in the User-Programmable LEDs section of Chapter 5. The
LEDs are fully user-programmable. The default labels can be replaced by user-printed labels for both panels as explained
in the following section.
NOTE
4
Figure 45: LED PANEL 2 (DEFAULT LABEL)
d) CUSTOM LABELING OF LEDS
Custom labeling of an LED-only panel is facilitated through a Microsoft Word file available from the following URL:
http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin/support/ur/
This file provides templates and instructions for creating appropriate labeling for the LED panel. The following procedures
are contained in the downloadable file. The panel templates provide relative LED locations and located example text (x)
edit boxes. The following procedure demonstrates how to install/uninstall the custom panel labeling.
1. Remove the clear Lexan Front Cover (GE Multilin Part Number: 1501-0014).
2. Pop out the LED Module and/or the Blank Module with a screwdriver as shown below. Be careful not to damage the
plastic.
3. Place the left side of the customized module back to the front panel frame, then snap back the right side.
4. Put the clear Lexan Front Cover back into place.
e) CUSTOMIZING THE DISPLAY MODULE
The following items are required to customize the B30 display module:
Black and white or color printer (color preferred).
Microsoft Word 97 or later software for editing the template.
1 each of: 8.5" x 11" white paper, exacto knife, ruler, custom display module (GE Multilin Part Number: 1516-0069),
and a custom module cover (GE Multilin Part Number: 1502-0015).
GROUP 8
GROUP 7
GROUP 6
GROUP 5
GROUP 4
GROUP 3
GROUP 2
GROUP 1
SETTINGS IN USE
Push in
and gently lift
up the cover.
( LED MODULE ) ( BLANK MODULE )
4
1. Open the LED panel customization template with Microsoft Word. Add text in places of the LED x text placeholders on
the template(s). Delete unused place holders as required.
2. When complete, save the Word file to your local PC for future use.
3. Print the template(s) to a local printer.
4. From the printout, cut-out the Background Template from the three windows, using the cropmarks as a guide.
5. Put the Background Template on top of the custom display module (GE Multilin Part Number: 1513-0069) and snap the
clear custom module cover (GE Multilin Part Number: 1502-0015) over it and the templates.
4.2.3 DISPLAY
All messages are displayed on a 2 20 character vacuum fluorescent display to make them visible under poor lighting con-
ditions. An optional liquid crystal display (LCD) is also available. Messages are displayed in English and do not require the
aid of an instruction manual for deciphering. While the keypad and display are not actively being used, the display will
default to defined messages. Any high priority event driven message will automatically override the default message and
appear on the display.
4.2.4 KEYPAD
Display messages are organized into pages under the following headings: Actual Values, Settings, Commands, and Tar-
gets. The key navigates through these pages. Each heading page is broken down further into logical subgroups.
The MESSAGE keys navigate through the subgroups. The VALUE keys scroll increment or decrement
numerical setting values when in programming mode. These keys also scroll through alphanumeric values in the text edit
mode. Alternatively, values may also be entered with the numeric keypad.
The key initiates and advance to the next character in text edit mode or enters a decimal point. The key may be
pressed at any time for context sensitive help messages. The key stores altered setting values.
4.2.5 MENUS
a) NAVIGATION
Press the key to select the desired header display page (top-level menu). The header title appears momentarily fol-
lowed by a header display page menu item. Each press of the key advances through the main heading pages as
illustrated below.
! ! !
ACTUAL VALUES SETTINGS COMMANDS TARGETS
" " " "
## ACTUAL VALUES
## STATUS
## SETTINGS
## PRODUCT SETUP
## COMMANDS
## VIRTUAL INPUTS
No Active
Targets
!
USER DISPLAYS
(when in use)
"
User Display 1
4
b) HIERARCHY
The setting and actual value messages are arranged hierarchically. The header display pages are indicated by double
scroll bar characters (##), while sub-header pages are indicated by single scroll bar characters (#). The header display
pages represent the highest level of the hierarchy and the sub-header display pages fall below this level. The MESSAGE
and keys move within a group of headers, sub-headers, setting values, or actual values. Continually pressing the
MESSAGE key from a header display displays specific information for the header category. Conversely, continually
pressing the MESSAGE key from a setting value or actual value display returns to the header display.
c) EXAMPLE MENU NAVIGATION
HIGHEST LEVEL LOWEST LEVEL (SETTING VALUE)
## SETTINGS
## PRODUCT SETUP
# PASSWORD
# SECURITY
ACCESS LEVEL:
Restricted
## SETTINGS
## SYSTEM SETUP
## ACTUAL VALUES
## STATUS
Press the key until the header for the first Actual Values page appears. This
page contains system and relay status information. Repeatedly press the
MESSAGE keys to display the other actual value headers.
"
## SETTINGS
## PRODUCT SETUP
Press the key until the header for the first page of Settings appears. This page
contains settings to configure the relay.
"
## SETTINGS
## SYSTEM SETUP
Press the MESSAGE key to move to the next Settings page. This page contains
settings for System Setup. Repeatedly press the MESSAGE keys to display
the other setting headers and then back to the first Settings page header.
"
# PASSWORD
# SECURITY
From the Settings page one header (Product Setup), press the MESSAGE key
once to display the first sub-header (Password Security).
"
ACCESS LEVEL:
Restricted
Press the MESSAGE key once more and this will display the first setting for Pass-
word Security. Pressing the MESSAGE key repeatedly will display the remaining
setting messages for this sub-header.
"
# PASSWORD
# SECURITY
Press the MESSAGE key once to move back to the first sub-header message.
"
# DISPLAY
# PROPERTIES
Pressing the MESSAGE key will display the second setting sub-header associ-
ated with the Product Setup header.
"
FLASH MESSAGE
TIME: 1.0 s
Press the MESSAGE key once more and this will display the first setting for Dis-
play Properties.
"
DEFAULT MESSAGE
INTENSITY: 25%
To view the remaining settings associated with the Display Properties subheader,
repeatedly press the MESSAGE key. The last message appears as shown.
4
4.2.6 CHANGING SETTINGS
a) ENTERING NUMERICAL DATA
Each numerical setting has its own minimum, maximum, and increment value associated with it. These parameters define
what values are acceptable for a setting.
Two methods of editing and storing a numerical setting value are available.
0 to 9 and (decimal point): The relay numeric keypad works the same as that of any electronic calculator. A num-
ber is entered one digit at a time. The leftmost digit is entered first and the rightmost digit is entered last. Pressing the
MESSAGE key or pressing the ESCAPE key, returns the original value to the display.
VALUE : The VALUE key increments the displayed value by the step value, up to the maximum value
allowed. While at the maximum value, pressing the VALUE key again will allow the setting selection to continue
upward from the minimum value. The VALUE key decrements the displayed value by the step value, down to the
minimum value. While at the minimum value, pressing the VALUE key again will allow the setting selection to con-
tinue downward from the maximum value.
b) ENTERING ENUMERATION DATA
Enumeration settings have data values which are part of a set, whose members are explicitly defined by a name. A set is
comprised of two or more members.
Enumeration type values are changed using the VALUE keys. The VALUE key displays the next selection while the
VALUE key displays the previous selection.
c) ENTERING ALPHANUMERIC TEXT
Text settings have data values which are fixed in length, but user-defined in character. They may be comprised of upper
case letters, lower case letters, numerals, and a selection of special characters.
FLASH MESSAGE
TIME: 1.0 s
For example, select the SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" DISPLAY PROPERTIES ! FLASH
MESSAGE TIME setting.
"
MINIMUM: 0.5
MAXIMUM: 10.0
Press the key to view the minimum and maximum values. Press the key
again to view the next context sensitive help message.
FLASH MESSAGE
TIME: 2.5 s
As an example, set the flash message time setting to 2.5 seconds. Press the appropriate
numeric keys in the sequence 2 . 5". The display message will change as the digits are
being entered.
"
NEW SETTING
HAS BEEN STORED
Until is pressed, editing changes are not registered by the relay. Therefore, press
to store the new value in memory. This flash message will momentarily appear as
confirmation of the storing process. Numerical values which contain decimal places will
be rounded-off if more decimal place digits are entered than specified by the step value.
ACCESS LEVEL:
Restricted
For example, the selections available for ACCESS LEVEL are "Restricted", "Command",
"Setting", and "Factory Service".
ACCESS LEVEL:
Setting
If the ACCESS LEVEL needs to be "Setting", press the VALUE keys until the proper selec-
tion is displayed. Press at any time for the context sensitive help messages.
"
NEW SETTING
HAS BEEN STORED
Changes are not registered by the relay until the key is pressed. Pressing
stores the new value in memory. This flash message momentarily appears as confirma-
tion of the storing process.
4
There are several places where text messages may be programmed to allow the relay to be customized for specific appli-
cations. One example is the Message Scratchpad. Use the following procedure to enter alphanumeric text messages.
For example: to enter the text, Breaker #1
1. Press to enter text edit mode.
2. Press the VALUE keys until the character 'B' appears; press to advance the cursor to the next position.
3. Repeat step 2 for the remaining characters: r,e,a,k,e,r, ,#,1.
4. Press to store the text.
5. If you have any problem, press to view context sensitive help. Flash messages will sequentially appear for sev-
eral seconds each. For the case of a text setting message, pressing displays how to edit and store new values.
d) ACTIVATING THE RELAY
To change the RELAY SETTINGS: "Not Programmed" mode to "Programmed", proceed as follows:
1. Press the key until the SETTINGS header flashes momentarily and the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP message
appears on the display.
2. Press the MESSAGE key until the PASSWORD SECURITY message appears on the display.
3. Press the MESSAGE key until the INSTALLATION message appears on the display.
4. Press the MESSAGE key until the RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed message is displayed.
5. After the RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed message appears on the display, press the VALUE keys change the
selection to "Programmed".
6. Press the key.
7. When the "NEW SETTING HAS BEEN STORED" message appears, the relay will be in "Programmed" state and the
In Service LED will turn on.
RELAY SETTINGS:
Not Programmed
When the relay is powered up, the Trouble LED will be on, the In Service LED off, and
this message displayed, indicating the relay is in the "Not Programmed" state and is
safeguarding (output relays blocked) against the installation of a relay whose settings
have not been entered. This message remains until the relay is explicitly put in the
"Programmed" state.
SETTINGS
"
## SETTINGS
## PRODUCT SETUP
# PASSWORD
# SECURITY
# DISPLAY
# PROPERTIES
# USER-DEFINABLE
# DISPLAYS
# INSTALLATION
#
RELAY SETTINGS:
Not Programmed
RELAY SETTINGS:
Not Programmed

RELAY SETTINGS:
Programmed
NEW SETTING
HAS BEEN STORED
4
e) ENTERING INITIAL PASSWORDS
To enter the initial Setting (or Command) Password, proceed as follows:
1. Press the key until the SETTINGS header flashes momentarily and the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP message
appears on the display.
2. Press the MESSAGE key until the ACCESS LEVEL message appears on the display.
3. Press the MESSAGE key until the CHANGE SETTING (or COMMAND) PASSWORD message appears on the display.
4. After the CHANGE...PASSWORD message appears on the display, press the VALUE key or the VALUE key to
change the selection to Yes.
5. Press the key and the display will prompt you to ENTER NEW PASSWORD.
6. Type in a numerical password (up to 10 characters) and press the key.
7. When the VERIFY NEW PASSWORD is displayed, re-type in the same password and press .
8. When the NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED message appears, your new Setting (or Command) Password will be
active.
f) CHANGING EXISTING PASSWORD
To change an existing password, follow the instructions in the previous section with the following exception. A message will
prompt you to type in the existing password (for each security level) before a new password can be entered.
In the event that a password has been lost (forgotten), submit the corresponding Encrypted Password from the PASSWORD
SECURITY menu to the Factory for decoding.
SETTINGS
"
## SETTINGS
## PRODUCT SETUP
# PASSWORD
# SECURITY
ACCESS LEVEL:
Restricted
CHANGE COMMAND
PASSWORD: No
CHANGE SETTING
PASSWORD: No
ENCRYPTED COMMAND
PASSWORD: ----------
ENCRYPTED SETTING
CHANGE SETTING
PASSWORD: No
CHANGE SETTING
PASSWORD: Yes
ENTER NEW
PASSWORD: ##########
VERIFY NEW
PASSWORD: ##########
NEW PASSWORD
HAS BEEN STORED
4
5 SETTINGS 5.1 OVERVIEW
5
5 SETTINGS 5.1OVERVIEW 5.1.1 SETTINGS MENU
## SETTINGS
## PRODUCT SETUP
# PASSWORD
# SECURITY
See page 5-7.
# DISPLAY
# PROPERTIES
See page 5-8.
# CLEAR RELAY
# RECORDS
See page 5-9.
# COMMUNICATIONS
#
See page 5-10.
# MODBUS USER MAP
#
See page 5-19.
# REAL TIME
# CLOCK
See page 5-19.
# USER-PROGRAMMABLE
# FAULT REPORT
See page 5-19.
# OSCILLOGRAPHY
#
See page 5-20.
# USER-PROGRAMMABLE
# LEDS
See page 5-22.
# USER-PROGRAMMABLE
# SELF TESTS
See page 5-25.
# CONTROL
# PUSHBUTTONS
See page 5-25.
# USER-PROGRAMMABLE
# PUSHBUTTONS
See page 5-27.
# FLEX STATE
# PARAMETERS
See page 5-28.
# USER-DEFINABLE
# DISPLAYS
See page 5-29.
# DIRECT I/O
#
See page 5-31.
# INSTALLATION
#
See page 5-36.
## SETTINGS
## SYSTEM SETUP
# AC INPUTS
#
See page 5-37.
# POWER SYSTEM
#
See page 5-38.
# SIGNAL SOURCES
#
See page 5-39.
# FLEXCURVES
#
See page 5-41.
# BUS
#
See page 5-48.
5.1 OVERVIEW 5 SETTINGS
5
## SETTINGS
## FLEXLOGIC
# FLEXLOGIC
# EQUATION EDITOR
See page 5-60.
# FLEXLOGIC
# TIMERS
See page 5-60.
# FLEXELEMENTS
#
See page 5-61.
# NON-VOLATILE
# LATCHES
See page 5-65.
## SETTINGS
## GROUPED ELEMENTS
# SETTING GROUP 1
#
See page 5-66.
# SETTING GROUP 2
#
# SETTING GROUP 3
#
# SETTING GROUP 4
#
# SETTING GROUP 5
#
# SETTING GROUP 6
#
## SETTINGS
## CONTROL ELEMENTS
# SETTING GROUPS
#
See page 5-86.
# SELECTOR SWITCH
#
See page 5-87.
# DIGITAL ELEMENTS
#
See page 5-92.
# DIGITAL COUNTERS
#
See page 5-95.
# MONITORING
# ELEMENTS
See page 5-97.
## SETTINGS
## INPUTS / OUTPUTS
# CONTACT INPUTS
#
See page 5-99.
# VIRTUAL INPUTS
#
See page 5-101.
# CONTACT OUTPUTS
#
See page 5-102.
# LATCHING OUTPUTS
#
See page 5-102.
# VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
#
See page 5-104.
5
5.1.2 INTRODUCTION TO ELEMENTS
In the design of UR relays, the term element is used to describe a feature that is based around a comparator. The com-
parator is provided with an input (or set of inputs) that is tested against a programmed setting (or group of settings) to deter-
mine if the input is within the defined range that will set the output to logic 1, also referred to as setting the flag. A single
comparator may make multiple tests and provide multiple outputs; for example, the time overcurrent comparator sets a
Pickup flag when the current input is above the setting and sets an Operate flag when the input current has been at a level
above the pickup setting for the time specified by the time-current curve settings. All comparators, except the Digital Ele-
ment which uses a logic state as the input, use analog parameter actual values as the input.
Elements are arranged into two classes, GROUPED and CONTROL. Each element classed as a GROUPED element is
provided with six alternate sets of settings, in setting groups numbered 1 through 6. The performance of a GROUPED ele-
ment is defined by the setting group that is active at a given time. The performance of a CONTROL element is independent
of the selected active setting group.
The main characteristics of an element are shown on the element logic diagram. This includes the input(s), settings, fixed
logic, and the output operands generated (abbreviations used on scheme logic diagrams are defined in Appendix F).
Some settings for current and voltage elements are specified in per-unit (pu) calculated quantities:
# REMOTE DEVICES
#
See page 5-105.
# REMOTE INPUTS
#
See page 5-106.
# REMOTE OUTPUTS
# DNA BIT PAIRS
See page 5-107.
# REMOTE OUTPUTS
# UserSt BIT PAIRS
See page 5-108.
# RESETTING
#
See page 5-108.
# DIRECT INPUTS
#
See page 5-108.
# DIRECT OUTPUTS
#
See page 5-108.
## SETTINGS
## TRANSDUCER I/O
# DCMA INPUTS
#
See page 5-112.
# RTD INPUTS
#
See page 5-113.
# DCMA OUTPUTS
#
See page 5-113.
## SETTINGS
## TESTING
TEST MODE
FUNCTION: Disabled
See page 5-117.
TEST MODE INITIATE:
On
See page 5-117.
# FORCE CONTACT
# INPUTS
See page 5-117.
# FORCE CONTACT
# OUTPUTS
See page 5-118.
5
pu quantity = (actual quantity) / (base quantity)
For current elements, the base quantity is the nominal secondary or primary current of the CT. Where the current
source is the sum of two CTs with different ratios, the base quantity will be the common secondary or primary current
to which the sum is scaled (i.e. normalized to the larger of the 2 rated CT inputs). For example, if CT1 = 300 / 5 A and
CT2 = 100 / 5 A, then in order to sum these, CT2 is scaled to the CT1 ratio. In this case, the base quantity will be 5 A
secondary or 300 A primary.
For voltage elements the base quantity is the nominal primary voltage of the protected system which corresponds
(based on VT ratio and connection) to secondary VT voltage applied to the relay. For example, on a system with a
13.8 kV nominal primary voltage and with 14400:120 V Delta-connected VTs, the secondary nominal voltage (1 pu)
would be:
(EQ 5.1)
For Wye-connected VTs, the secondary nominal voltage (1 pu) would be:
(EQ 5.2)
Many settings are common to most elements and are discussed below:
FUNCTION setting: This setting programs the element to be operational when selected as Enabled. The factory
default is Disabled. Once programmed to Enabled, any element associated with the Function becomes active and
all options become available.
NAME setting: This setting is used to uniquely identify the element.
SOURCE setting: This setting is used to select the parameter or set of parameters to be monitored.
PICKUP setting: For simple elements, this setting is used to program the level of the measured parameter above or
below which the pickup state is established. In more complex elements, a set of settings may be provided to define the
range of the measured parameters which will cause the element to pickup.
PICKUP DELAY setting: This setting sets a time-delay-on-pickup, or on-delay, for the duration between the Pickup
and Operate output states.
RESET DELAY setting: This setting is used to set a time-delay-on-dropout, or off-delay, for the duration between the
Operate output state and the return to logic 0 after the input transits outside the defined pickup range.
BLOCK setting: The default output operand state of all comparators is a logic 0 or flag not set. The comparator
remains in this default state until a logic 1 is asserted at the RUN input, allowing the test to be performed. If the RUN
input changes to logic 0 at any time, the comparator returns to the default state. The RUN input is used to supervise
the comparator. The BLOCK input is used as one of the inputs to RUN control.
TARGET setting: This setting is used to define the operation of an element target message. When set to Disabled, no
target message or illumination of a faceplate LED indicator is issued upon operation of the element. When set to Self-
Reset, the target message and LED indication follow the Operate state of the element, and self-resets once the oper-
ate element condition clears. When set to Latched, the target message and LED indication will remain visible after the
element output returns to logic 0 - until a RESET command is received by the relay.
EVENTS setting: This setting is used to control whether the Pickup, Dropout or Operate states are recorded by the
event recorder. When set to Disabled, element pickup, dropout or operate are not recorded as events. When set to
Enabled, events are created for:
(Element) PKP (pickup)
(Element) DPO (dropout)
(Element) OP (operate)
The DPO event is created when the measure and decide comparator output transits from the pickup state (logic 1) to
the dropout state (logic 0). This could happen when the element is in the operate state if the reset delay time is not 0.
13800
14400
---------------- 120 115 V =
13800
14400
----------------
120
3
--------- - 66.4 V =
5
5.1.3 INTRODUCTION TO AC SOURCES
a) BACKGROUND
The B30 may be used on systems with breaker-and-a-half or ring bus configurations. In these applications, each of the two
three-phase sets of individual phase currents (one associated with each breaker) can be used as an input to a breaker fail-
ure element. The sum of both breaker phase currents and 3I_0 residual currents may be required for the circuit relaying
and metering functions. For a three-winding transformer application, it may be required to calculate watts and vars for each
of three windings, using voltage from different sets of VTs. These requirements can be satisfied with a single UR, equipped
with sufficient CT and VT input channels, by selecting the parameter to measure. A mechanism is provided to specify the
AC parameter (or group of parameters) used as the input to protection/control comparators and some metering elements.
Selection of the parameter(s) to measure is partially performed by the design of a measuring element or protection/control
comparator by identifying the type of parameter (fundamental frequency phasor, harmonic phasor, symmetrical component,
total waveform RMS magnitude, phase-phase or phase-ground voltage, etc.) to measure. The user completes the process
by selecting the instrument transformer input channels to use and some of the parameters calculated from these channels.
The input parameters available include the summation of currents from multiple input channels. For the summed currents of
phase, 3I_0, and ground current, current from CTs with different ratios are adjusted to a single ratio before summation.
A mechanism called a Source configures the routing of CT and VT input channels to measurement sub-systems.
Sources, in the context of UR series relays, refer to the logical grouping of current and voltage signals such that one source
contains all the signals required to measure the load or fault in a particular power apparatus. A given source may contain all
or some of the following signals: three-phase currents, single-phase ground current, three-phase voltages and an auxiliary
voltage from a single VT for checking for synchronism.
To illustrate the concept of Sources, as applied to current inputs only, consider the breaker-and-a-half scheme below. In this
application, the current flows as shown by the arrows. Some current flows through the upper bus bar to some other location
or power equipment, and some current flows into transformer Winding 1. The current into Winding 1 is the phasor sum (or
difference) of the currents in CT1 and CT2 (whether the sum or difference is used depends on the relative polarity of the CT
connections). The same considerations apply to transformer Winding 2. The protection elements require access to the net
current for transformer protection, but some elements may need access to the individual currents from CT1 and CT2.
Figure 51: BREAKER-AND-A-HALF SCHEME
In conventional analog or electronic relays, the sum of the currents is obtained from an appropriate external connection of
all CTs through which any portion of the current for the element being protected could flow. Auxiliary CTs are required to
perform ratio matching if the ratios of the primary CTs to be summed are not identical. In the UR series of relays, provisions
have been included for all the current signals to be brought to the UR device where grouping, ratio correction and summa-
tion are applied internally via configuration settings.
A major advantage of using internal summation is that the individual currents are available to the protection device; for
example, as additional information to calculate a restraint current, or to allow the provision of additional protection features
that operate on the individual currents such as breaker failure.
Given the flexibility of this approach, it becomes necessary to add configuration settings to the platform to allow the user to
select which sets of CT inputs will be added to form the net current into the protected device.
UR
Platform
CT1 CT2
CT3 CT4
WDG 1
WDG 2
Power
827791A2.CDR
Transformer
Through Current
5
The internal grouping of current and voltage signals forms an internal source. This source can be given a specific name
through the settings, and becomes available to protection and metering elements in the UR platform. Individual names can
be given to each source to help identify them more clearly for later use. For example, in the scheme shown in the above
diagram, the configures one Source to be the sum of CT1 and CT2 and can name this Source as Wdg 1 Current.
Once the sources have been configured, the user has them available as selections for the choice of input signal for the pro-
tection elements and as metered quantities.
b) CT/VT MODULE CONFIGURATION
CT and VT input channels are contained in CT/VT modules. The type of input channel can be phase/neutral/other voltage,
phase/ground current, or sensitive ground current. The CT/VT modules calculate total waveform RMS levels, fundamental
frequency phasors, symmetrical components and harmonics for voltage or current, as allowed by the hardware in each
channel. These modules may calculate other parameters as directed by the CPU module.
A CT/VT module contains up to eight input channels, numbered 1 through 8. The channel numbering corresponds to the
module terminal numbering 1 through 8 and is arranged as follows: Channels 1, 2, 3 and 4 are always provided as a group,
hereafter called a bank, and all four are either current or voltage, as are Channels 5, 6, 7 and 8. Channels 1, 2, 3 and 5, 6,
7 are arranged as phase A, B and C respectively. Channels 4 and 8 are either another current or voltage.
Banks are ordered sequentially from the block of lower-numbered channels to the block of higher-numbered channels, and
from the CT/VT module with the lowest slot position letter to the module with the highest slot position letter, as follows:
The UR platform allows for a maximum of three sets of three-phase voltages and six sets of three-phase currents. The
result of these restrictions leads to the maximum number of CT/VT modules in a chassis to three. The maximum number of
sources is six. A summary of CT/VT module configurations is shown below.
c) CT/VT INPUT CHANNEL CONFIGURATION
Upon relay startup, configuration settings for every bank of current or voltage input channels in the relay are automatically
generated from the order code. Within each bank, a channel identification label is automatically assigned to each bank of
channels in a given product. The bank naming convention is based on the physical location of the channels, required by
the user to know how to connect the relay to external circuits. Bank identification consists of the letter designation of the slot
in which the CT/VT module is mounted as the first character, followed by numbers indicating the channel, either 1 or 5.
For three-phase channel sets, the number of the lowest numbered channel identifies the set. For example, F1 represents
the three-phase channel set of F1/F2/F3, where F is the slot letter and 1 is the first channel of the set of three channels.
Upon startup, the CPU configures the settings required to characterize the current and voltage inputs, and will display them
in the appropriate section in the sequence of the banks (as described above) as follows for a maximum configuration: F1,
F5, M1, M5, U1, and U5.
The above section explains how the input channels are identified and configured to the specific application instrument
transformers and the connections of these transformers. The specific parameters to be used by each measuring element
and comparator, and some actual values are controlled by selecting a specific source. The source is a group of current and
voltage input channels selected by the user to facilitate this selection. With this mechanism, a user does not have to make
multiple selections of voltage and current for those elements that need both parameters, such as a distance element or a
watt calculation. It also gathers associated parameters for display purposes.
The basic idea of arranging a source is to select a point on the power system where information is of interest. An applica-
tion example of the grouping of parameters in a Source is a transformer winding, on which a three phase voltage is mea-
sured, and the sum of the currents from CTs on each of two breakers is required to measure the winding current flow.
INCREASING SLOT POSITION LETTER -->
CT/VT MODULE 1 CT/VT MODULE 2 CT/VT MODULE 3
< bank 1 > < bank 3 > < bank 5 >
< bank 2 > < bank 4 > < bank 6 >
ITEM MAXIMUM NUMBER
CT/VT Module 3
CT Bank (3 phase channels, 1 ground channel) 12
VT Bank (3 phase channels, 1 auxiliary channel) 6
5 SETTINGS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5
5.2PRODUCT SETUP 5.2.1 PASSWORD SECURITY
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP ! PASSWORD SECURITY
Two levels of password security are provided: Command and Setting. Operations under password supervision are:
COMMAND: changing the state of virtual inputs, clearing the event records, clearing the oscillography records,
changing the date and time, clearing the data logger, user-programmable pushbuttons
SETTING: changing any setting, test mode operation
The Command and Setting passwords are defaulted to "Null" when the relay is shipped from the factory. When a password
is set to "Null", the password security feature is disabled.
Programming a password code is required to enable each access level. A password consists of 1 to 10 numerical charac-
ters. When a CHANGE ... PASSWORD setting is set to "Yes", the following message sequence is invoked:
1. ENTER NEW PASSWORD: ____________
2. VERIFY NEW PASSWORD: ____________
3. NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED
To gain write access to a "Restricted" setting, set ACCESS LEVEL to "Setting" and then change the setting, or attempt to
change the setting and follow the prompt to enter the programmed password. If the password is correctly entered, access
will be allowed. If no keys are pressed for longer than 30 minutes or control power is cycled, accessibility will automatically
revert to the "Restricted" level.
If an entered password is lost (or forgotten), consult the factory with the corresponding ENCRYPTED PASSWORD.
The B30 provides a means to raise an alarm upon failed password entry. Should password verification fail while accessing
a password-protected level of the relay (either settings or commands), the UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS FlexLogic operand is
asserted. The operand can be programmed to raise an alarm via contact outputs or communications. This feature can be
used to protect against both unauthorized and accidental access attempts.
The UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS operand is reset with the COMMANDS !" CLEAR RECORDS !" RESET UNAUTHORIZED
ALARMS command. Therefore, to apply this feature with security, the command level should be password-protected.
The operand does not generate events or targets. If these are required, the operand can be assigned to a digital element
programmed with event logs and/or targets enabled.
If the SETTING and COMMAND passwords are identical, this one password allows access to both commands
and settings.
When enerVista UR Setup is used to access a particular level, the user will continue to have access to that
level as long as there are open windows in the enerVista UR Setup software. To re-establish the Password
Security feature, all windows must be closed for at least 30 minutes.
# PASSWORD
# SECURITY
ACCESS LEVEL:
Restricted
Range: Restricted, Command, Setting,
Factory Service (for factory use only)
MESSAGE
CHANGE COMMAND
PASSWORD: No
Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
CHANGE SETTING
PASSWORD: No
Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
ENCRYPTED COMMAND
Range: 0 to 9999999999
Note: ---------- indicates no password
MESSAGE
ENCRYPTED SETTING
Range: 0 to 9999999999
Note: ---------- indicates no password
NOTE
NOTE
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5 SETTINGS
5
5.2.2 DISPLAY PROPERTIES
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" DISPLAY PROPERTIES
Some relay messaging characteristics can be modified to suit different situations using the display properties settings.
FLASH MESSAGE TIME: Flash messages are status, warning, error, or information messages displayed for several
seconds in response to certain key presses during setting programming. These messages override any normal mes-
sages. The duration of a flash message on the display can be changed to accommodate different reading rates.
DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT: If the keypad is inactive for a period of time, the relay automatically reverts to a
default message. The inactivity time is modified via this setting to ensure messages remain on the screen long enough
during programming or reading of actual values.
DEFAULT MESSAGE INTENSITY: To extend phosphor life in the vacuum fluorescent display, the brightness can be
attenuated during default message display. During keypad interrogation, the display always operates at full brightness.
SCREEN SAVER FEATURE and SCREEN SAVER WAIT TIME: These settings are only visible if the B30 has a liquid
crystal display (LCD) and control its backlighting. When the SCREEN SAVER FEATURE is Enabled, the LCD backlighting
is turned off after the DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT followed by the SCREEN SAVER WAIT TIME, providing that no keys
have been pressed and no target messages are active. When a keypress occurs or a target becomes active, the LCD
backlighting is turned on.
CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL: This setting modifies the current cut-off threshold. Very low currents (1 to 2% of the
rated value) are very susceptible to noise. Some customers prefer very low currents to display as zero, while others
prefer the current be displayed even when the value reflects noise rather than the actual signal. The B30 applies a cut-
off value to the magnitudes and angles of the measured currents. If the magnitude is below the cut-off level, it is substi-
tuted with zero. This applies to phase and ground current phasors as well as true RMS values and symmetrical compo-
nents. The cut-off operation applies to quantities used for metering, protection, and control, as well as those used by
communications protocols. Note that the cut-off level for the sensitive ground input is 10 times lower that the CURRENT
CUT-OFF LEVEL setting value. Raw current samples available via oscillography are not subject to cut-off.
VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL: This setting modifies the voltage cut-off threshold. Very low secondary voltage measure-
ments (at the fractional volt level) can be affected by noise. Some customers prefer these low voltages to be displayed
as zero, while others prefer the voltage to be displayed even when the value reflects noise rather than the actual sig-
nal. The B30 applies a cut-off value to the magnitudes and angles of the measured voltages. If the magnitude is below
the cut-off level, it is substituted with zero. This operation applies to phase and auxiliary voltages, and symmetrical
components. The cut-off operation applies to quantities used for metering, protection, and control, as well as those
used by communications protocols. Raw samples of the voltages available via oscillography are not subject cut-off.
This setting relates to the actual measured voltage at the VT secondary inputs. It can be converted to per-unit values
(pu) by dividing by the PHASE VT SECONDARY setting value. For example, a PHASE VT SECONDARY setting of 66.4 V
and a VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL setting of 1.0 V gives a cut-off value of 1.0 V / 66.4 V = 0.015 pu.
# DISPLAY
# PROPERTIES
FLASH MESSAGE
TIME: 1.0 s
Range: 0.5 to 10.0 s in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
DEFAULT MESSAGE
TIMEOUT: 300 s
Range: 10 to 900 s in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DEFAULT MESSAGE
INTENSITY: 25 %
Range: 25%, 50%, 75%, 100%
Visible only if a VFD is installed
MESSAGE
SCREEN SAVER
FEATURE: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Visible only if an LCD is installed
MESSAGE
SCREEN SAVER
WAIT TIME: 30 min
Range: 1 to 65535 min. in steps of 1
Visible only if an LCD is installed
MESSAGE
CURRENT CUT-OFF
LEVEL: 0.020 pu
Range: 0.002 to 0.020 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
VOLTAGE CUT-OFF
LEVEL: 1.0 V
Range: 0.1 to 1.0 V secondary in steps of 0.1
5
Lower the VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL and CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL with care as the relay accepts lower signals
as valid measurements. Unless dictated otherwise by a specific application, the default settings of 0.02
pu for CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL and 1.0 V for VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL are recommended.
5.2.3 CLEAR RELAY RECORDS
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" CLEAR RELAY RECORDS
Selected records can be cleared from user-programmable conditions with FlexLogic operands. Assigning user-program-
mable pushbuttons to clear specific records are typical applications for these commands. Since the B30 responds to rising
edges of the configured FlexLogic operands, they must be asserted for at least 50 ms to take effect.
Clearing records with user-programmable operands is not protected by the command password. However, user-program-
mable pushbuttons are protected by the command password. Thus, if they are used to clear records, the user-programma-
ble pushbuttons can provide extra security if required.
For example, to assign User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 to clear demand records, the following settings should be
applied.
1. Assign the clear demand function to Pushbutton 1 by making the following change in the SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP
!" CLEAR RELAY RECORDS menu:
CLEAR DEMAND: PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
2. Set the properties for User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 by making the following changes in the SETTINGS ! PRODUCT
SETUP !" USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS ! USER PUSHBUTTON 1 menu:
PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: Self-reset
PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: 0.20 s
# CLEAR RELAY
# RECORDS
CLEAR USER REPORTS:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
CLEAR EVENT RECORDS:
Off
MESSAGE
CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY?
No
MESSAGE
RESET UNAUTH ACCESS:
Off
MESSAGE
CLEAR DIR I/O STATS:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand.
Valid only for units with Direct I/O module.
NOTE
5
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS
b) SERIAL PORTS
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS ! SERIAL PORTS
The B30 is equipped with up to 3 independent serial communication ports. The faceplate RS232 port is intended for local
use and is fixed at 19200 baud and no parity. The rear COM1 port type is selected when ordering: either an Ethernet or
RS485 port. The rear COM2 port is RS485. The RS485 ports have settings for baud rate and parity. It is important that
these parameters agree with the settings used on the computer or other equipment that is connected to these ports. Any of
these ports may be connected to a computer running enerVista UR Setup. This software can download and upload setting
files, view measured parameters, and upgrade the relay firmware. A maximum of 32 relays can be daisy-chained and con-
nected to a DCS, PLC or PC using the RS485 ports.
# COMMUNICATIONS
#
# SERIAL PORTS
#
See below.
MESSAGE
# NETWORK
#
See page 511.
MESSAGE
# MODBUS PROTOCOL
#
See page 511.
MESSAGE
# DNP PROTOCOL
#
See page 512.
MESSAGE
# IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
#
See page 514.
MESSAGE
# WEB SERVER
# HTTP PROTOCOL
See page 515.
MESSAGE
# TFTP PROTOCOL
#
See page 515.
MESSAGE
# IEC 60870-5-104
# PROTOCOL
See page 516.
MESSAGE
# SNTP PROTOCOL
#
See page 517.
MESSAGE
# EGD PROTOCOL
#
See page 517.
# SERIAL PORTS
#
RS485 COM1 BAUD
RATE: 19200
Range: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200,
28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, 115200. Only
active if CPU 9E is ordered.
MESSAGE
RS485 COM1 PARITY:
None
Range: None, Odd, Even
Only active if CPU Type 9E is ordered
MESSAGE
RS485 COM1 RESPONSE
MIN TIME: 0 ms
Range: 0 to 1000 ms in steps of 10
Only active if CPU Type 9E is ordered
MESSAGE
RS485 COM2 BAUD
RATE: 19200
Range: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200,
28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, 115200
MESSAGE
RS485 COM2 PARITY:
None
Range: None, Odd, Even
MESSAGE
RS485 COM2 RESPONSE
MIN TIME: 0 ms
5
For each RS485 port, the minimum time before the port will transmit after receiving data from a host can be
set. This feature allows operation with hosts which hold the RS485 transmitter active for some time after
each transmission.
c) NETWORK
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" NETWORK
These messages appear only if the B30 is ordered with an Ethernet card.
The IP addresses are used with the DNP, Modbus/TCP, IEC 61580, IEC 60870-5-104, TFTP, and HTTP protocols. The
NSAP address is used with the IEC 61850 protocol over the OSI (CLNP/TP4) stack only. Each network protocol has a set-
ting for the TCP/UDP PORT NUMBER. These settings are used only in advanced network configurations and should normally
be left at their default values, but may be changed if required (for example, to allow access to multiple UR-series relays
behind a router). By setting a different TCP/UDP PORT NUMBER for a given protocol on each UR-series relay, the router can
map the relays to the same external IP address. The client software (enerVista UR Setup, for example) must be configured
to use the correct port number if these settings are used.
When the NSAP address, any TCP/UDP Port Number, or any User Map setting (when used with DNP) is changed,
it will not become active until power to the relay has been cycled (OFF/ON).
Do not set more than one protocol to use the same TCP/UDP PORT NUMBER, as this will result in unreliable
operation of those protocols.
d) MODBUS PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" MODBUS PROTOCOL
The serial communication ports utilize the Modbus protocol, unless configured for DNP operation (see the DNP Protocol
description below). This allows the enerVista UR Setup software to be used. The UR operates as a Modbus slave device
only. When using Modbus protocol on the RS232 port, the B30 will respond regardless of the MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS pro-
grammed. For the RS485 ports each B30 must have a unique address from 1 to 254. Address 0 is the broadcast address
which all Modbus slave devices listen to. Addresses do not have to be sequential, but no two devices can have the same
address or conflicts resulting in errors will occur. Generally, each device added to the link should use the next higher
address starting at 1. Refer to Appendix B for more information on the Modbus protocol.
# NETWORK
#
IP ADDRESS:
0.0.0.0
Range: Standard IP address format
Only active if CPU Type 9G or 9H is ordered.
MESSAGE
SUBNET IP MASK:
0.0.0.0
MESSAGE
GATEWAY IP ADDRESS:
0.0.0.0
MESSAGE
# OSI NETWORK
# ADDRESS (NSAP)
Range: Press the MESSAGE ! key to enter the OSI
NETWORK ADDRESS. Only active if CPU Type
9G or 9H is ordered.
MESSAGE
ETHERNET OPERATION
MODE: Full-Duplex
Range: Half-Duplex, Full-Duplex
# MODBUS PROTOCOL
#
MODBUS SLAVE
ADDRESS: 254
Range: 1 to 254 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
MODBUS TCP PORT
NUMBER: 502
NOTE
NOTE
WARNING
5
e) DNP PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" DNP PROTOCOL
# DNP PROTOCOL
#
DNP PORT:
NONE
Range: NONE, COM1 - RS485, COM2 - RS485, FRONT
PANEL - RS232, NETWORK
MESSAGE
DNP ADDRESS:
255
MESSAGE
# DNP NETWORK
# CLIENT ADDRESSES
Range: Press the MESSAGE ! key to enter the DNP
NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESSES
MESSAGE
DNP TCP/UDP PORT
NUMBER: 20000
MESSAGE
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE
TIMEOUT: 5 s
MESSAGE
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE
MAX RETRIES: 10
MESSAGE
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE
DEST ADDRESS: 1
MESSAGE
USER MAP FOR DNP
ANALOGS: Disabled
MESSAGE
NUMBER OF SOURCES
IN ANALOG LIST: 1
MESSAGE
DNP CURRENT SCALE
FACTOR: 1
Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
100000
MESSAGE
DNP VOLTAGE SCALE
FACTOR: 1
Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
100000
MESSAGE
DNP POWER SCALE
FACTOR: 1
Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
100000
MESSAGE
DNP ENERGY SCALE
FACTOR: 1
Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
100000
MESSAGE
DNP OTHER SCALE
FACTOR: 1
Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
100000
MESSAGE
DNP CURRENT DEFAULT
DEADBAND: 30000
MESSAGE
DNP VOLTAGE DEFAULT
DEADBAND: 30000
MESSAGE
DNP POWER DEFAULT
DEADBAND: 30000
MESSAGE
DNP ENERGY DEFAULT
DEADBAND: 30000
MESSAGE
DNP OTHER DEFAULT
DEADBAND: 30000
MESSAGE
DNP TIME SYNC IIN
PERIOD: 1440 min
Range: 1 to 10080 min. in steps of 1
5
The B30 supports the Distributed Network Protocol (DNP) version 3.0. The B30 can be used as a DNP slave device con-
nected to a single DNP master (usually an RTU or a SCADA master station). Since the B30 maintains one set of DNP data
change buffers and connection information, only one DNP master should actively communicate with the B30 at one time.
The DNP PORT setting selects the communications port assigned to the DNP protocol; only a single port can be assigned.
Once DNP is assigned to a serial port, the Modbus protocol is disabled on that port. Note that COM1 can be used only in
non-ethernet UR relays. When this setting is set to Network, the DNP protocol can be used over either TCP/IP or UDP/IP.
Refer to Appendix E for more information on the DNP protocol. The DNP ADDRESS setting is the DNP slave address. This
number identifies the B30 on a DNP communications link. Each DNP slave should be assigned a unique address. The DNP
NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESS setting can force the B30 to respond to a maximum of five specific DNP masters.
The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE FUNCTION should be Disabled for RS485 applications since there is no collision avoidance
mechanism. The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE TIMEOUT sets the time the B30 waits for a DNP master to confirm an unsolicited
response. The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE MAX RETRIES setting determines the number of times the B30 retransmits an unsolic-
ited response without receiving confirmation from the master; a value of 255 allows infinite re-tries. The DNP UNSOL
RESPONSE DEST ADDRESS is the DNP address to which all unsolicited responses are sent. The IP address to which unsolic-
ited responses are sent is determined by the B30 from the current TCP connection or the most recent UDP message.
The USER MAP FOR DNP ANALOGS setting allows the large pre-defined Analog Inputs points list to be replaced by the much
smaller Modbus User Map. This can be useful for users wishing to read only selected Analog Input points from the B30.
See Appendix E for more information.
The NUMBER OF SOURCES IN ANALOG LIST setting allows the selection of the number of current/voltage source values that
are included in the Analog Inputs points list. This allows the list to be customized to contain data for only the sources that
are configured. This setting is relevant only when the User Map is not used.
The DNP SCALE FACTOR settings are numbers used to scale Analog Input point values. These settings group the B30 Ana-
log Input data into types: current, voltage, power, energy, and other. Each setting represents the scale factor for all Analog
Input points of that type. For example, if the DNP VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR setting is set to a value of 1000, all DNP Analog
Input points that are voltages will be returned with values 1000 times smaller (e.g. a value of 72000 V on the B30 will be
returned as 72). These settings are useful when analog input values must be adjusted to fit within certain ranges in DNP
masters. Note that a scale factor of 0.1 is equivalent to a multiplier of 10 (i.e. the value will be 10 times larger).
The DNP DEFAULT DEADBAND settings determine when to trigger unsolicited responses containing Analog Input data. These
settings group the B30 Analog Input data into types: current, voltage, power, energy, and other. Each setting represents the
default deadband value for all Analog Input points of that type. For example, to trigger unsolicited responses from the B30
MESSAGE
DNP MESSAGE FRAGMENT
SIZE: 240
MESSAGE
# DNP BINARY INPUTS
# USER MAP
MESSAGE
DNP OBJECT 1
DEFAULT VARIATION: 2
Range: 1, 2
MESSAGE
DNP OBJECT 2
Range: 1, 2
MESSAGE
DNP OBJECT 20
Range: 1, 2, 5, 6
MESSAGE
DNP OBJECT 21
Range: 1, 2, 9, 10
MESSAGE
DNP OBJECT 22
Range: 1, 2, 5, 6
MESSAGE
DNP OBJECT 23
Range: 1, 2, 5, 6
MESSAGE
DNP OBJECT 30
Range: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
MESSAGE
DNP OBJECT 32
Range: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7
5
when any current values change by 15 A, the DNP CURRENT DEFAULT DEADBAND setting should be set to 15. Note that
these settings are the deadband default values. DNP Object 34 points can be used to change deadband values, from the
default, for each individual DNP Analog Input point. Whenever power is removed and re-applied to the B30, the default
deadbands will be in effect.
The DNP TIME SYNC IIN PERIOD setting determines how often the Need Time Internal Indication (IIN) bit is set by the B30.
Changing this time allows the DNP master to send time synchronization commands more or less often, as required.
The DNP MESSAGE FRAGMENT SIZE setting determines the size, in bytes, at which message fragmentation occurs. Large
fragment sizes allow for more efficient throughput; smaller fragment sizes cause more application layer confirmations to be
necessary which can provide for more robust data transfer over noisy communication channels.
The DNP BINARY INPUTS USER MAP setting allows for the creation of a custom DNP Binary Inputs points list. The default DNP
Binary Inputs list contains 928 points representing various binary states (contact inputs and outputs, virtual inputs and out-
puts, protection element states, etc.). If not all of these points are required in the DNP master, a custom Binary Inputs points
list can be created by selecting up to 58 blocks of 16 points. Each block represents 16 binary input points. Block 1 repre-
sents binary input points 0 to 15, block 2 represents binary input points 16 to 31, block 3 represents binary input points 32
to 47, etc. The minimum number of binary input points that can be selected is 16 (1 block). If all of the BIN INPUT BLOCK X
settings are set to Not Used, the standard list of 928 points will be in effect. The B30 will form the binary inputs points list
from the BIN INPUT BLOCK X settings up to the first occurrence of a setting value of Not Used.
When using the User Maps for DNP data points (analog inputs and/or binary inputs) for relays with ethernet
installed, check the DNP Points Lists B30 web page to ensure the desired points lists are created. This
web page can be viewed using a web browser by entering the B30 IP address to access the B30 Main
Menu, then by selecting the Device Information Menu > DNP Points Lists menu item.
The DNP OBJECT N DEFAULT VARIATION settings allow the user to select the DNP default variation number for object types 1,
2, 20, 21, 22, 23, 30, and 32. The default variation refers to the variation response when variation 0 is requested and/or in
class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans. Refer to the DNP Implementation section in Appendix E for additional details.
f) IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
The B30 supports the Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) protocol as specified by IEC 61850. MMS is supported
over two protocol stacks: TCP/IP over ethernet and TP4/CLNP (OSI) over ethernet. The B30 operates as an IEC 61850
server. The Remote Inputs/Outputs section in this chapter describe the peer-to-peer GSSE message scheme.
The LOGICAL DEVICE NAME setting represents the MMS domain name (IEC 61850 logical device) where all IEC/MMS
objects are located. The GSSE FUNCTION setting allows for the blocking of GSSE messages from the B30. This can be used
during testing or to prevent the relay from sending GSSE messages during normal operation.
Since GSSE messages are multicast ethernet by specification, router networks must not be used for IEC/MMS.
# IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
#
DEFAULT GSSE UPDATE
TIME: 60 s
Range: 1 to 60 s in steps of 1. See UserSt Bit Pairs in the
Remote Outputs section of this Chapter.
MESSAGE
LOGICAL DEVICE NAME:
IECDevice
Range: Up to 16 alphanumeric characters representing
the name of the IEC 61850 logical device.
MESSAGE
IEC/MMS TCP PORT
NUMBER: 102
MESSAGE
GSSE FUNCTION:
Enabled
NOTE
NOTE
5
g) WEB SERVER HTTP PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" WEB SERVER HTTP PROTOCOL
The B30 contains an embedded web server and is capable of transferring web pages to a web browser such as Microsoft
Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator. This feature is available only if the B30 has the ethernet option installed. The web
pages are organized as a series of menus that can be accessed starting at the B30 Main Menu. Web pages are available
showing DNP and IEC 60870-5-104 points lists, Modbus registers, Event Records, Fault Reports, etc. The web pages can
be accessed by connecting the UR and a computer to an ethernet network. The Main Menu will be displayed in the web
browser on the computer simply by entering the IP address of the B30 into the Address box on the web browser.
h) TFTP PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" TFTP PROTOCOL
The Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) can be used to transfer files from the UR over a network. The B30 operates as a
TFTP server. TFTP client software is available from various sources, including Microsoft Windows NT. The dir.txt file
obtained from the B30 contains a list and description of all available files (event records, oscillography, etc.).
# WEB SERVER
# HTTP PROTOCOL
HTTP TCP PORT
NUMBER: 80
# TFTP PROTOCOL
#
TFTP MAIN UDP PORT
NUMBER: 69
MESSAGE
TFTP DATA UDP PORT 1
NUMBER: 0
MESSAGE
TFTP DATA UDP PORT 2
NUMBER: 0
5
i) IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL
The B30 supports the IEC 60870-5-104 protocol. The B30 can be used as an IEC 60870-5-104 slave device connected to
a maximum of two masters (usually either an RTU or a SCADA master station). Since the B30 maintains two sets of IEC
60870-5-104 data change buffers, no more than two masters should actively communicate with the B30 at one time.
The NUMBER OF SOURCES IN MMENC1 LIST setting allows the selection of the number of current/voltage source values that
are included in the M_ME_NC_1 (measured value, short floating point) Analog points list. This allows the list to be custom-
ized to contain data for only the sources that are configured.
The IEC ------- DEFAULT THRESHOLD settings are the values used by the UR to determine when to trigger spontaneous
responses containing M_ME_NC_1 analog data. These settings group the UR analog data into types: current, voltage,
power, energy, and other. Each setting represents the default threshold value for all M_ME_NC_1 analog points of that
type. For example, in order to trigger spontaneous responses from the UR when any current values change by 15 A, the
IEC CURRENT DEFAULT THRESHOLD setting should be set to 15. Note that these settings are the default values of the dead-
bands. P_ME_NC_1 (Parameter of measured value, short floating point value) points can be used to change threshold val-
ues, from the default, for each individual M_ME_NC_1 analog point. Whenever power is removed and re-applied to the UR,
the default thresholds will be in effect.
The IEC 60870-5-104 and DNP protocols can not be used at the same time. When the IEC 60870-5-104 FUNC-
TION setting is set to Enabled, the DNP protocol will not be operational. When this setting is changed it
will not become active until power to the relay has been cycled (Off/On).
# IEC 60870-5-104
# PROTOCOL
IEC 60870-5-104
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
IEC TCP PORT
NUMBER: 2404
MESSAGE
# IEC NETWORK
# CLIENT ADDRESSES
MESSAGE
IEC COMMON ADDRESS
OF ASDU: 0
MESSAGE
IEC CYCLIC DATA
PERIOD: 60 s
MESSAGE
NUMBER OF SOURCES
IN MMENC1 LIST: 1
MESSAGE
IEC CURRENT DEFAULT
THRESHOLD: 30000
MESSAGE
IEC VOLTAGE DEFAULT
THRESHOLD: 30000
MESSAGE
IEC POWER DEFAULT
THRESHOLD: 30000
MESSAGE
IEC ENERGY DEFAULT
THRESHOLD: 30000
MESSAGE
IEC OTHER DEFAULT
THRESHOLD: 30000
NOTE
5
j) SNTP PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" SNTP PROTOCOL
The B30 supports the Simple Network Time Protocol specified in RFC-2030. With SNTP, the B30 can obtain clock time
over an Ethernet network. The B30 acts as an SNTP client to receive time values from an SNTP/NTP server, usually a ded-
icated product using a GPS receiver to provide an accurate time. Both unicast and broadcast SNTP are supported.
If SNTP functionality is enabled at the same time as IRIG-B, the IRIG-B signal provides the time value to the B30 clock for
as long as a valid signal is present. If the IRIG-B signal is removed, the time obtained from the SNTP server is used. If
either SNTP or IRIG-B is enabled, the B30 clock value cannot be changed using the front panel keypad.
To use SNTP in unicast mode, SNTP SERVER IP ADDR must be set to the SNTP/NTP server IP address. Once this address is
set and SNTP FUNCTION is Enabled, the B30 attempts to obtain time values from the SNTP/NTP server. Since many time
values are obtained and averaged, it generally takes three to four minutes until the B30 clock is closely synchronized with
the SNTP/NTP server. It may take up to one minute for the B30 to signal an SNTP self-test error if the server is offline.
To use SNTP in broadcast mode, set the SNTP SERVER IP ADDR setting to 0.0.0.0 and SNTP FUNCTION to Enabled. The
B30 then listens to SNTP messages sent to the all ones broadcast address for the subnet. The B30 waits up to eighteen
minutes (>1024 seconds) without receiving an SNTP broadcast message before signaling an SNTP self-test error.
The UR-series relays do not support the multicast or anycast SNTP functionality.
k) EGD PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" EGD PROTOCOL
The Ethernet Global Data (EGD) protocol settings are only available if CPU Type 9G or 9H is ordered.
The relay supports one fast Ethernet Global Data (EGD) exchange and two slow EGD exchanges. There are 20 data items
in the fast-produced EGD exchange and 50 data items in each slow-produced exchange.
Ethernet Global Data (EGD) is a suite of protocols used for the real-time transfer of data for display and control purposes.
The relay can be configured to produce EGD data exchanges, and other devices can be configured to consume EGD
data exchanges. The number of produced exchanges (up to three), the data items in each exchange (up to 50), and the
exchange production rate can be configured.
EGD cannot be used to transfer data between UR-series relays. The relay supports EGD production only. An EGD
exchange will not be transmitted unless the destination address is non-zero, and at least the first data item address is set to
a valid Modbus register address. Note that the default setting value of 0 is considered invalid.
# SNTP PROTOCOL
#
SNTP FUNCTION:
Disabled
MESSAGE
SNTP SERVER IP ADDR:
0.0.0.0
MESSAGE
SNTP UDP PORT
NUMBER: 123
# EGD PROTOCOL
#
# FAST PROD EXCH 1
# CONFIGURATION
MESSAGE
# SLOW PROD EXCH 1
# CONFIGURATION
MESSAGE
# SLOW PROD EXCH 2
# CONFIGURATION
NOTE
5
The settings menu for the fast EGD exchange is shown below:
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" EGD PROTOCOL ! FAST PROD EXCH 1 CONFIGURATION
Fast exchanges (50 to 1000 ms) are generally used in control schemes. The B30 has one fast exchange (Exchange 1) and
two slow exchanges (Exchanges 2 and 3).
The settings menu for the slow EGD exchanges is shown below:
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" EGD PROTOCOL ! SLOW PROD EXCH 1(2) CONFIGURATION
Slow EGD exchanges (500 to 1000 ms) are generally used for the transfer and display of data items. The settings for the
fast and slow exchanges are described below:
EXCH 1 DESTINATION: This setting specifies the destination IP address of the produced EGD exchange. This is usu-
ally unicast or broadcast.
EXCH 1 DATA RATE: This setting specifies the rate at which this EGD exchange is transmitted. If the setting is 50 ms,
the exchange data will be updated and sent once every 50 ms. If the setting is 1000 ms, the exchange data will be
updated and sent once per second. EGD exchange 1 has a setting range of 50 to 1000 ms. Exchanges 2 and 3 have a
setting range of 500 to 1000 ms.
EXCH 1 DATA ITEM 1 to 20/50: These settings specify the data items that are part of this EGD exchange. Almost any
data from the B30 memory map can be configured to be included in an EGD exchange. The settings are the starting
Modbus register address for the data item in decimal format. Refer to Appendix B for the complete Modbus memory
map. Note that the Modbus memory map displays shows addresses in hexadecimal format; as such, it will be neces-
sary to convert these values to decimal format before entering them as values for these setpoints.
To select a data item to be part of an exchange, it is only necessary to choose the starting Modbus address of the item.
That is, for items occupying more than one Modbus register (e.g. 32 bit integers and floating point values), only the first
Modbus address is required. The EGD exchange configured with these settings contains the data items up to the first
setting that contains a Modbus address with no data, or 0. That is, if the first three settings contain valid Modbus
addresses and the fourth is 0, the produced EGD exchange will contain three data items.
# FAST PROD EXCH 1
# CONFIGURATION
EXCH 1 FUNCTION:
Disable
Range: Disable, Enable
MESSAGE
EXCH 1 DESTINATION:
0.0.0.0
Range: standard IP address
MESSAGE
EXCH 1 DATA RATE:
1000 ms
MESSAGE
EXCH 1 DATA ITEM 1:
0
(Modbus register address range)
MESSAGE
EXCH 1 DATA ITEM 20:
0
(Modbus register address range)
# SLOW PROD EXCH 1
# CONFIGURATION
EXCH 1 FUNCTION:
Disable
Range: Disable, Enable
MESSAGE
EXCH 1 DESTINATION:
0.0.0.0
Range: standard IP address
MESSAGE
EXCH 1 DATA RATE:
1000 ms
MESSAGE
EXCH 1 DATA ITEM 1:
0
(Modbus register address range in decimal)
MESSAGE
EXCH 1 DATA ITEM 50:
0
(Modbus register address range in decimal)
5
5.2.5 MODBUS USER MAP
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" MODBUS USER MAP
The Modbus User Map provides read-only access for up to 256 registers. To obtain a memory map value, enter the desired
address in the ADDRESS line (this value must be converted from hex to decimal format). The corresponding value is dis-
played in the VALUE line. A value of 0 in subsequent register ADDRESS lines automatically returns values for the previous
ADDRESS lines incremented by 1. An address value of 0 in the initial register means none and values of 0 will be dis-
played for all registers. Different ADDRESS values can be entered as required in any of the register positions.
These settings can also be used with the DNP protocol. See the DNP Analog Input Points section in Appen-
dix E for details.
5.2.6 REAL TIME CLOCK
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" REAL TIME CLOCK
The date and time for the relay clock can be synchronized to other relays using an IRIG-B signal. It has the same accuracy
as an electronic watch, approximately 1 minute per month. An IRIG-B signal may be connected to the relay to synchronize
the clock to a known time base and to other relays. If an IRIG-B signal is used, only the current year needs to be entered.
See also the COMMANDS !" SET DATE AND TIME menu for manually setting the relay clock.
The REAL TIME CLOCK EVENTS setting allows changes to the date and/or time to be captured in the event record.
5.2.7 USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT ! USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT 1(2)
# MODBUS USER MAP
#
ADDRESS 1: 0
VALUE: 0
MESSAGE
ADDRESS 256: 0
VALUE: 0
# REAL TIME
# CLOCK
IRIG-B SIGNAL TYPE:
None
Range: None, DC Shift, Amplitude Modulated
MESSAGE
REAL TIME CLOCK
EVENTS: Disabled
# USER-PROGRAMMABLE
# FAULT REPORT 1
FAULT REPORT 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
PRE-FAULT 1 TRIGGER:
Off
MESSAGE
FAULT 1 TRIGGER:
Off
MESSAGE
FAULT REPORT 1 #1:
Off
Range: Off, any actual value analog parameter
MESSAGE
FAULT REPORT 1 #2:
Off
MESSAGE
FAULT REPORT 1 #32:
Off
NOTE
5
When enabled, this function monitors the pre-fault trigger. The pre-fault data are stored in the memory for prospective cre-
ation of the fault report on the rising edge of the pre-fault trigger. The element waits for the fault trigger as long as the pre-
fault trigger is asserted, but not shorter than 1 second. When the fault trigger occurs, the fault data is stored and the com-
plete report is created. If the fault trigger does not occur within 1 second after the pre-fault trigger drops out, the element
resets and no record is created.
The user programmable record contains the following information: the user-programmed relay name, detailed firmware
revision (4.4x, for example) and relay model (B30), the date and time of trigger, the name of pre-fault trigger (specific Flex-
Logic operand), the name of fault trigger (specific FlexLogic operand), the active setting group at pre-fault trigger, the
active setting group at fault trigger, pre-fault values of all programmed analog channels (one cycle before pre-fault trigger),
and fault values of all programmed analog channels (at the fault trigger).
Each fault report is stored as a file to a maximum capacity of ten files. An eleventh trigger overwrites the oldest file. The
enerVista UR Setup software is required to view all captured data. A FAULT RPT TRIG event is automatically created when
the report is triggered.
The relay includes two user-programmable fault reports to enable capture of two types of trips (for example, trip from ther-
mal protection with the report configured to include temperatures, and short-circuit trip with the report configured to include
voltages and currents). Both reports feed the same report file queue.
The last record is available as individual data items via communications protocols.
PRE-FAULT 1 TRIGGER: Specifies the FlexLogic operand to capture the pre-fault data. The rising edge of this
operand stores one cycle-old data for subsequent reporting. The element waits for the fault trigger to actually create a
record as long as the operand selected as PRE-FAULT TRIGGER is On. If the operand remains Off for 1 second, the
element resets and no record is created.
FAULT 1 TRIGGER: Specifies the FlexLogic operand to capture the fault data. The rising edge of this operand
stores the data as fault data and results in a new report. The trigger (not the pre-fault trigger) controls the date and time
of the report.
FAULT REPORT 1 #1 to #32: These settings specify an actual value such as voltage or current magnitude, true RMS,
phase angle, frequency, temperature, etc., to be stored should the report be created. Up to 32 channels can be config-
ured. Two reports are configurable to cope with variety of trip conditions and items of interest.
5.2.8 OSCILLOGRAPHY
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" OSCILLOGRAPHY
Oscillography records contain waveforms captured at the sampling rate as well as other relay data at the point of trigger.
Oscillography records are triggered by a programmable FlexLogic operand. Multiple oscillography records may be cap-
tured simultaneously.
# OSCILLOGRAPHY
#
NUMBER OF RECORDS:
15
MESSAGE
TRIGGER MODE:
Automatic Overwrite
Range: Automatic Overwrite, Protected
MESSAGE
TRIGGER POSITION:
50%
Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1
MESSAGE
TRIGGER SOURCE:
Off
MESSAGE
AC INPUT WAVEFORMS:
16 samples/cycle
Range: Off; 8, 16, 32, 64 samples/cycle
MESSAGE
# DIGITAL CHANNELS
#
MESSAGE
# ANALOG CHANNELS
#
5
The NUMBER OF RECORDS is selectable, but the number of cycles captured in a single record varies considerably based on
other factors such as sample rate and the number of operational CT/VT modules. There is a fixed amount of data storage
for oscillography; the more data captured, the less the number of cycles captured per record. See the ACTUAL VALUES !"
RECORDS !" OSCILLOGRAPHY menu to view the number of cycles captured per record. The following table provides sam-
ple configurations with corresponding cycles/record.
A new record may automatically overwrite an older record if TRIGGER MODE is set to Automatic Overwrite.
Set the TRIGGER POSITION to a percentage of the total buffer size (e.g. 10%, 50%, 75%, etc.). A trigger position of 25% con-
sists of 25% pre- and 75% post-trigger data. The TRIGGER SOURCE is always captured in oscillography and may be any
FlexLogic parameter (element state, contact input, virtual output, etc.). The relay sampling rate is 64 samples per cycle.
The AC INPUT WAVEFORMS setting determines the sampling rate at which AC input signals (i.e. current and voltage) are
stored. Reducing the sampling rate allows longer records to be stored. This setting has no effect on the internal sampling
rate of the relay which is always 64 samples per cycle, i.e. it has no effect on the fundamental calculations of the device.
When changes are made to the oscillography settings, all existing oscillography records will be CLEARED.
b) DIGITAL CHANNELS
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" OSCILLOGRAPHY !" DIGITAL CHANNELS
A DIGITAL CHANNEL setting selects the FlexLogic operand state recorded in an oscillography trace. The length of each
oscillography trace depends in part on the number of parameters selected here. Parameters set to Off are ignored. Upon
startup, the relay will automatically prepare the parameter list.
c) ANALOG CHANNELS
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" OSCILLOGRAPHY !" ANALOG CHANNELS
Table 51: OSCILLOGRAPHY CYCLES/RECORD EXAMPLE
# RECORDS # CT/VTS SAMPLE
RATE
# DIGITALS # ANALOGS CYCLES/
RECORD
1 1 8 0 0 1872.0
1 1 16 16 0 1685.0
8 1 16 16 0 276.0
8 1 16 16 4 219.5
8 2 16 16 4 93.5
8 2 16 64 16 93.5
8 2 32 64 16 57.6
8 2 64 64 16 32.3
32 2 64 64 16 9.5
# DIGITAL CHANNELS
#
DIGITAL CHANNEL 1:
Off
MESSAGE
DIGITAL CHANNEL 63:
Off
# ANALOG CHANNELS
#
ANALOG CHANNEL 1:
Off
Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter
See Appendix A for complete list.
MESSAGE
ANALOG CHANNEL 16:
Off
Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter
See Appendix A for complete list.
WARNING
5
An ANALOG CHANNEL setting selects the metering actual value recorded in an oscillography trace. The length of each oscil-
lography trace depends in part on the number of parameters selected here. Parameters set to Off are ignored. The
parameters available in a given relay are dependent on: (a) the type of relay, (b) the type and number of CT/VT hardware
modules installed, and (c) the type and number of Analog Input hardware modules installed. Upon startup, the relay will
automatically prepare the parameter list. A list of all possible analog metering actual value parameters is presented in
Appendix A: FlexAnalog Parameters. The parameter index number shown in any of the tables is used to expedite the
selection of the parameter on the relay display. It can be quite time-consuming to scan through the list of parameters via the
relay keypad/display - entering this number via the relay keypad will cause the corresponding parameter to be displayed.
All eight CT/VT module channels are stored in the oscillography file. The CT/VT module channels are named as follows:
<slot_letter><terminal_number><I or V><phase A, B, or C, or 4th input>
The fourth current input in a bank is called IG, and the fourth voltage input in a bank is called VX. For example, F2-IB desig-
nates the IB signal on Terminal 2 of the CT/VT module in slot F. If there are no CT/VT modules and Analog Input modules,
no analog traces will appear in the file; only the digital traces will appear.
5.2.9 USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
b) LED TEST
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS ! LED TEST
When enabled, the LED Test can be initiated from any digital input or user-programmable condition such as user-program-
mable pushbutton. The control operand is configured under the LED TEST CONTROL setting. The test covers all LEDs,
including the LEDs of the optional user-programmable pushbuttons.
The test consists of three stages.
Stage 1: All 62 LEDs on the relay are illuminated. This is a quick test to verify if any of the LEDs is burned. This stage
lasts as long as the control input is on, up to a maximum of 1 minute. After 1 minute, the test will end.
Stage 2: All the LEDs are turned off, and then one LED at a time turns on for 1 second, then back off. The test routine
starts at the top left panel, moving from the top to bottom of each LED column. This test checks for hardware failures
that lead to more than one LED being turned on from a single logic point. This stage can be interrupted at any time.
Stage 3: All the LEDs are turned on. One LED at a time turns off for 1 second, then back on. The test routine starts at
the top left panel moving from top to bottom of each column of the LEDs. This test checks for hardware failures that
lead to more than one LED being turned off from a single logic point. This stage can be interrupted at any time.
# USER-PROGRAMMABLE
# LEDS
# LED TEST
#
See below
MESSAGE
# TRIP & ALARM LEDS
#
See page 524.
MESSAGE
# USER-PROGRAMMABLE
# LED 1
See page 524.
MESSAGE
# USER-PROGRAMMABLE
# LED 2
MESSAGE
# USER-PROGRAMMABLE
# LED 48
# LED TEST
#
LED TEST FUNCTION:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled.
MESSAGE
LED TEST CONTROL:
Off
5
When testing is in progress, the LEDs are controlled by the test sequence, rather than the protection, control, and monitor-
ing features. However, the LED control mechanism accepts all the changes to LED states generated by the relay and
stores the actual LED states (On or Off) in memory. When the test completes, the LEDs reflect the actual state resulting
from relay response during testing. The Reset pushbutton will not clear any targets when the LED Test is in progress.
A dedicated FlexLogic operand, LED TEST IN PROGRESS, is set for the duration of the test. When the test sequence is ini-
tiated, the LED Test Initiated event is stored in the Event Recorder.
The entire test procedure is user-controlled. In particular, Stage 1 can last as long as necessary, and Stages 2 and 3 can be
interrupted. The test responds to the position and rising edges of the control input defined by the LED TEST CONTROL set-
ting. The control pulses must last at least 250 ms to take effect. The following diagram explains how the test is executed.
Figure 52: LED TEST SEQUENCE
APPLICATION EXAMPLE 1:
Assume one needs to check if any of the LEDs is burned through User-Programmable Pushbutton 1. The following set-
tings should be applied. Configure User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 by making the following entries in the SETTINGS !
PRODUCT SETUP !" USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS ! USER PUSHBUTTON 1 menu:
PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: 0.10 s
Configure the LED test to recognize User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 by making the following entries in the SETTINGS !
PRODUCT SETUP !" USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS ! LED TEST menu:
LED TEST FUNCTION: Enabled
LED TEST CONTROL: PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
The test will be initiated when the User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 is pressed. The pushbutton should remain pressed for
as long as the LEDs are being visually inspected. When finished, the pushbutton should be released. The relay will then
automatically start Stage 2. At this point forward, test may be aborted by pressing the pushbutton.
842011A1.CDR
READY TO TEST
Start the software image of
the LEDs
STAGE 1
(all LEDs on)
control input is on
Wait 1 second
dropping edge of the
control input
Restore the LED states
from the software image
rising edge of the
control input
STAGE 2
(one LED on at a time)
STAGE 3
(one LED off at a time)
rising edge
of the control
input
rising edge of the
control input
Set the
LED TEST IN PROGRESS
operand
Reset the
LED TEST IN PROGRESS
operand
rising edge of the
control input
Wait 1 second
rising edge of the
control input
time-out
(1 minute)
5
APPLICATION EXAMPLE 2:
Assume one needs to check if any LEDs are burned as well as exercise one LED at a time to check for other failures. This
is to be performed via User-Programmable Pushbutton 1.
After applying the settings in Application Example 1, hold down the pushbutton as long as necessary to test all LEDs. Next,
release the pushbutton to automatically start Stage 2. Once Stage 2 has started, the pushbutton can be released. When
Stage 2 is completed, Stage 3 will automatically start. The test may be aborted at any time by pressing the pushbutton.
c) TRIP AND ALARM LEDS
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS !" TRIP & ALARM LEDS
The Trip and Alarm LEDs are on LED Panel 1. Each indicator can be programmed to become illuminated when the
selected FlexLogic operand is in the Logic 1 state.
d) USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED 1(48)
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS !" USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED 1(48)
There are 48 amber LEDs across the relay faceplate LED panels. Each of these indicators can be programmed to illumi-
nate when the selected FlexLogic operand is in the Logic 1 state.
LEDs 1 through 24 inclusive are on LED Panel 2; LEDs 25 through 48 inclusive are on LED Panel 3.
Refer to the LED Indicators section in Chapter 4 for the locations of these indexed LEDs. This menu selects the operands
to control these LEDs. Support for applying user-customized labels to these LEDs is provided. If the LED X TYPE setting is
Self-Reset (default setting), the LED illumination will track the state of the selected LED operand. If the LED X TYPE setting
is Latched, the LED, once lit, remains so until reset by the faceplate RESET button, from a remote device via a communi-
cations channel, or from any programmed operand, even if the LED operand state de-asserts.
Refer to the Control of Setting Groups example in the Control Elements section of this chapter for group activation.
# TRIP & ALARM LEDS
#
TRIP LED INPUT:
Off
MESSAGE
ALARM LED INPUT:
Off
# USER-PROGRAMMABLE
# LED 1
LED 1 OPERAND:
Off
MESSAGE
LED 1 TYPE:
Self-Reset
Range: Self-Reset, Latched
Table 52: RECOMMENDED SETTINGS FOR LED PANEL 2 LABELS
SETTING PARAMETER SETTING PARAMETER
LED 1 Operand SETTING GROUP ACT 1 LED 13 Operand Off
LED 7 Operand Off LED 19 Operand Off
5
5.2.10 USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS
All major self-test alarms are reported automatically with their corresponding FlexLogic operands, events, and targets.
Most of the Minor Alarms can be disabled if desired.
When in the Disabled mode, minor alarms will not assert a FlexLogic operand, write to the event recorder, display target
messages. Moreover, they will not trigger the ANY MINOR ALARM or ANY SELF-TEST messages. When in the Enabled mode,
minor alarms continue to function along with other major and minor alarms. Refer to the Relay Self-Tests section in Chapter
7 for additional information on major and minor self-test alarms.
5.2.11 CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS ! CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1(7)
The three standard pushbuttons located on the top left panel of the faceplate are user-programmable and can be used for
various applications such as performing an LED test, switching setting groups, and invoking and scrolling though user-pro-
grammable displays, etc. The location of the control pushbuttons in the following figure.
An additonal four control pushbuttons are included when the B30 is ordered with twelve user programmable pushbuttons.
# USER-PROGRAMMABLE
# SELF TESTS
DIRECT RING BREAK
FUNCTION: Enabled
Valid for units equipped with Direct I/O Module.
MESSAGE
DIRECT DEVICE OFF
FUNCTION: Enabled
Valid for units equipped with Direct I/O Module.
MESSAGE
REMOTE DEVICE OFF
FUNCTION: Enabled
Valid for units equipped with CPU Type C or D.
MESSAGE
PRI. ETHERNET FAIL
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
SEC. ETHERNET FAIL
FUNCTION: Disabled
Valid for units equipped with CPU Type D.
MESSAGE
BATTERY FAIL
FUNCTION: Enabled
MESSAGE
SNTP FAIL
FUNCTION: Enabled
MESSAGE
IRIG-B FAIL
FUNCTION: Enabled
# CONTROL
# PUSHBUTTON 1
CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1
EVENTS: Disabled
5
Figure 53: CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS
The control pushbuttons are typically not used for critical operations. As such, they are not protected by the control pass-
word. However, by supervising their output operands, the user can dynamically enable or disable the control pushbuttons
for security reasons.
Each control pushbutton asserts its own FlexLogic operand, CONTROL PUSHBTN 1(7) ON. These operands should be
configured appropriately to perform the desired function. The operand remains asserted as long as the pushbutton is
pressed and resets when the pushbutton is released. A dropout delay of 100 ms is incorporated to ensure fast pushbutton
manipulation will be recognized by various features that may use control pushbuttons as inputs.
An event is logged in the Event Record (as per user setting) when a control pushbutton is pressed; no event is logged when
the pushbutton is released. The faceplate keys (including control keys) cannot be operated simultaneously a given key
must be released before the next one can be pressed.
Figure 54: CONTROL PUSHBUTTON LOGIC
842733A2.CDR
PICKUP
ALARM
TRIP
TEST MODE
TROUBLE
IN SERVICE
STATUS
USER 3
USER 2
USER 1
RESET
EVENT CAUSE
NEUTRAL/GROUND
PHASE C
PHASE B
PHASE A
OTHER
FREQUENCY
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
THREE
STANDARD
CONTROL
PUSHBUTTONS
USER 7
USER 6
USER 5
USER 4
FOUR EXTRA
OPTIONAL
CONTROL
PUSHBUTTONS
842010A2.CDR
CONTROL PUSHBUTTON
1 FUNCTION:
SYSTEM SETUP/
BREAKERS/BREAKER 1/
BREAKER 1 PUSHBUTTON
: CONTROL
SYSTEM SETUP/
BREAKERS/BREAKER 2/
BREAKER 2 PUSHBUTTON
: CONTROL
SETTING
SETTINGS
TIMER
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Enabled=1
Enabled=1
W
h
e
n

a
p
p
l
i
c
a
b
l
e
Enabled=1
RUN
OFF
ON
AND
100 msec
0
CONTROL PUSHBTN 1 ON
{
5
5.2.12 USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS ! USER PUSHBUTTON 1(12)
The B30 has 12 optional user-programmable pushbuttons available, each configured via 12 identical menus. The pushbut-
tons provide an easy and error-free method of manually entering digital information (On, Off) into FlexLogic equations as
well as protection and control elements. Typical applications include breaker control, autorecloser blocking, ground protec-
tion blocking, and setting groups changes.
The user-configurable pushbuttons are shown below. They can be custom labeled with a factory-provided template, avail-
able online at http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin.
Figure 55: USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS
Each pushbutton asserts its own On and Off FlexLogic operands, respectively. FlexLogic operands should be used to
program desired pushbutton actions. The operand names are PUSHBUTTON 1 ON and PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF.
A pushbutton may be programmed to latch or self-reset. An indicating LED next to each pushbutton signals the present sta-
tus of the corresponding "On" FlexLogic operand. When set to "Latched", the state of each pushbutton is stored in non-
volatile memory which is maintained during any supply power loss.
Pushbuttons states can be logged by the Event Recorder and displayed as target messages. User-defined messages can
also be associated with each pushbutton and displayed when the pushbutton is ON.
PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: This setting selects the characteristic of the pushbutton. If set to Disabled, the push-
button is deactivated and the corresponding FlexLogic operands (both On and Off) are de-asserted. If set to
Self-reset, the control logic of the pushbutton asserts the On corresponding FlexLogic operand as long as the
pushbutton is being pressed. As soon as the pushbutton is released, the FlexLogic operand is de-asserted. The
Off operand is asserted/de-asserted accordingly.
If set to Latched, the control logic alternates the state of the corresponding FlexLogic operand between On and
Off on each push of the button. When operating in Latched mode, FlexLogic operand states are stored in non-vol-
atile memory. Should power be lost, the correct pushbutton state is retained upon subsequent power up of the relay.
# USER PUSHBUTTON 1
#
PUSHBUTTON 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT:
Range: Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT:
MESSAGE
PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT:
MESSAGE
PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT
TIME: 0.00 s
Range: 0 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
PUSHBUTTON 1
TARGETS: Disabled
Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
PUSHBUTTON 1
EVENTS: Disabled
7 9 11
8 10 12
USER LABEL
1 3 5
2 4 6
USER LABEL USER LABEL
5
PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT: This setting specifies the top 20-character line of the user-programmable message and is
intended to provide ID information of the pushbutton. Refer to the User-Definable Displays section for instructions on
how to enter alphanumeric characters from the keypad.
PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT: This setting specifies the bottom 20-character line of the user-programmable message and is
displayed when the pushbutton is in the on position. Refer to the User-Definable Displays section for instructions on
entering alphanumeric characters from the keypad.
PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT: This setting specifies the bottom 20-character line of the user-programmable message and is
displayed when the pushbutton is activated from the On to the Off position and the PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION is
Latched. This message is not displayed when the PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION is Self-reset as the pushbutton operand
status is implied to be Off upon its release. All user text messaging durations for the pushbuttons are configured with
the PRODUCT SETUP !" DISPLAY PROPERTIES ! FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting.
PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: This setting specifies a drop-out time delay for a pushbutton in the self-reset mode. A
typical applications for this setting is providing a select-before-operate functionality. The selecting pushbutton should
have the drop-out time set to a desired value. The operating pushbutton should be logically ANDed with the selecting
pushbutton in FlexLogic. The selecting pushbutton LED remains on for the duration of the drop-out time, signaling
the time window for the intended operation.
For example, consider a relay with the following settings: PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT: AUTORECLOSER, PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT:
DISABLED - CALL 2199", and PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT: ENABLED. When Pushbutton 1 changes its state to the On posi-
tion, the following AUTOCLOSER DISABLED Call 2199 message is displayed: When Pushbutton 1 changes its state to the
Off position, the message will change to AUTORECLOSER ENABLED.
User-programmable pushbuttons require a type HP relay faceplate. If an HP-type faceplate was ordered sepa-
rately, the relay order code must be changed to indicate the HP faceplate option. This can be done via enerVista
UR Setup with the Maintenance > Enable Pushbutton command.
5.2.13 FLEX STATE PARAMETERS
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" FLEX STATE PARAMETERS
This feature provides a mechanism where any of 256 selected FlexLogic operand states can be used for efficient moni-
toring. The feature allows user-customized access to the FlexLogic operand states in the relay. The state bits are packed
so that 16 states may be read out in a single Modbus register. The state bits can be configured so that all of the states
which are of interest to the user are available in a minimum number of Modbus registers.
The state bits may be read out in the "Flex States" register array beginning at Modbus address 900 hex. 16 states are
packed into each register, with the lowest-numbered state in the lowest-order bit. There are 16 registers in total to accom-
modate the 256 state bits.
# FLEX STATE
# PARAMETERS
PARAMETER 1:
Off
Range: FlexLogic Operand
MESSAGE
PARAMETER 2:
Off
MESSAGE
PARAMETER 256:
Off
NOTE
5
5.2.14 USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
This menu provides a mechanism for manually creating up to 16 user-defined information displays in a convenient viewing
sequence in the USER DISPLAYS menu (between the TARGETS and ACTUAL VALUES top-level menus). The sub-menus facili-
tate text entry and Modbus Register data pointer options for defining the User Display content.
Once programmed, the user-definable displays can be viewed in two ways.
KEYPAD: Use the Menu key to select the USER DISPLAYS menu item to access the first user-definable display (note
that only the programmed screens are displayed). The screens can be scrolled using the Up and Down keys. The dis-
play disappears after the default message time-out period specified by the PRODUCT SETUP !" DISPLAY PROPERTIES
!" DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT setting.
USER-PROGRAMMABLE CONTROL INPUT: The user-definable displays also respond to the INVOKE AND SCROLL
setting. Any FlexLogic operand (in particular, the user-programmable pushbutton operands), can be used to navi-
gate the programmed displays.
On the rising edge of the configured operand (such as when the pushbutton is pressed), the displays are invoked by
showing the last user-definable display shown during the previous activity. From this moment onward, the operand
acts exactly as the Down key and allows scrolling through the configured displays. The last display wraps up to the first
one. The INVOKE AND SCROLL input and the Down keypad key operate concurrently.
When the default timer expires (set by the DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT setting), the relay will start to cycle through the
user displays. The next activity of the INVOKE AND SCROLL input stops the cycling at the currently displayed user dis-
play, not at the first user-defined display. The INVOKE AND SCROLL pulses must last for at least 250 ms to take effect.
b) USER DISPLAY 1(16)
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS ! USER DISPLAY 1(16)
# USER-DEFINABLE
# DISPLAYS
INVOKE AND SCROLL:
Off
MESSAGE
# USER DISPLAY 1
#
Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
# USER DISPLAY 16
#
# USER DISPLAY 1
#
DISP 1 TOP LINE:
MESSAGE
DISP 1 BOTTOM LINE:
MESSAGE
DISP 1 ITEM 1
0
MESSAGE
DISP 1 ITEM 2
0
MESSAGE
DISP 1 ITEM 3
0
MESSAGE
DISP 1 ITEM 4
0
MESSAGE
DISP 1 ITEM 5:
0
5
Any existing system display can be automatically copied into an available user display by selecting the existing display and
pressing the key. The display will then prompt ADD TO USER DISPLAY LIST?. After selecting Yes, a message indi-
cates that the selected display has been added to the user display list. When this type of entry occurs, the sub-menus are
automatically configured with the proper content this content may subsequently be edited.
This menu is used to enter user-defined text and/or user-selected Modbus-registered data fields into the particular user
display. Each user display consists of two 20-character lines (top and bottom). The tilde (~) character is used to mark the
start of a data field - the length of the data field needs to be accounted for. Up to 5 separate data fields (ITEM 1(5)) can be
entered in a user display - the nth tilde (~) refers to the nth item.
A User Display may be entered from the faceplate keypad or the enerVista UR Setup interface (preferred for convenience).
The following procedure shows how to enter text characters in the top and bottom lines from the faceplate keypad:
1. Select the line to be edited.
2. Press the key to enter text edit mode.
3. Use either Value key to scroll through the characters. A space is selected like a character.
4. Press the key to advance the cursor to the next position.
5. Repeat step 3 and continue entering characters until the desired text is displayed.
6. The key may be pressed at any time for context sensitive help information.
7. Press the key to store the new settings.
To enter a numerical value for any of the 5 items (the decimal form of the selected Modbus address) from the faceplate key-
pad, use the number keypad. Use the value of 0 for any items not being used. Use the key at any selected system
display (setting, actual value, or command) which has a Modbus address, to view the hexadecimal form of the Modbus
address, then manually convert it to decimal form before entering it (enerVista UR Setup usage conveniently facilitates this
conversion).
Use the key to go to the user displays menu to view the user-defined content. The current user displays will show in
sequence, changing every 4 seconds. While viewing a user display, press the key and then select the Yes option
to remove the display from the user display list. Use the key again to exit the user displays menu.
An example User Display setup and result is shown below:
# USER DISPLAY 1
#
DISP 1 TOP LINE:
Current X ~ A
Shows user-defined text with first Tilde marker.
MESSAGE
DISP 1 BOTTOM LINE:
Current Y ~ A
Shows user-defined text with second Tilde marker.
MESSAGE
DISP 1 ITEM 1:
6016
Shows decimal form of user-selected Modbus Register
Address, corresponding to first Tilde marker.
MESSAGE
DISP 1 ITEM 2:
6357
Shows decimal form of user-selected Modbus
Register Address, corresponding to 2nd Tilde marker.
MESSAGE
DISP 1 ITEM 3:
0
This item is not being used - there is no corresponding
Tilde marker in Top or Bottom lines.
MESSAGE
DISP 1 ITEM 4:
0
MESSAGE
DISP 1 ITEM 5:
0
USER DISPLAYS
Current X 0.850 A
Current Y 0.327 A
Shows the resultant display content.
5
5.2.15 DIRECT INPUTS/OUTPUTS
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" DIRECT I/O
Direct inputs/outputs are intended for exchange of status information (inputs and outputs) between UR-series relays con-
nected directly via Type-7 digital communications cards. The mechanism is very similar to IEC 61850 GSSE, except that
communications takes place over a non-switchable isolated network and is optimized for speed. On Type 7 cards that sup-
port two channels, direct output messages are sent from both channels simultaneously. This effectively sends direct output
messages both ways around a ring configuration. On Type 7 cards that support one channel, direct output messages are
sent only in one direction. Messages will be resent (forwarded) when it is determined that the message did not originate at
the receiver.
Direct output message timing is similar to GSSE message timing. Integrity messages (with no state changes) are sent at
least every 1000 ms. Messages with state changes are sent within the main pass scanning the inputs and asserting the
outputs unless the communication channel bandwidth has been exceeded. Two Self-Tests are performed and signaled by
the following FlexLogic operands:
1. DIRECT RING BREAK (direct input/output ring break). This FlexLogic operand indicates that direct output messages
sent from a UR-series relay are not being received back by the relay.
2. DIRECT DEVICE 1(16) OFF (direct device offline). This FlexLogic operand indicates that direct output messages from
at least one direct device are not being received.
Direct input/output settings are similar to remote input/output settings. The equivalent of the remote device name strings for
direct inputs/outputs is the DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID. The DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID identifies the relay in all direct output
messages. All UR-series IEDs in a ring should have unique numbers assigned. The IED ID is used to identify the sender of
the direct input/output message.
If the direct input/output scheme is configured to operate in a ring (DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION: Yes), all direct output
messages should be received back. If not, the Direct Input/Output Ring Break self-test is triggered. The self-test error is sig-
naled by the DIRECT RING BREAK FlexLogic operand.
Select the DIRECT I/O DATA RATE to match the data capabilities of the communications channel. Back-to-back connections of
the local relays configured with the 7A, 7B, 7C, 7D, 7H, 7I, 7J, 7K, 72 and 73 fiber optic communication cards may be set to
128 kbps. For local relays configured with all other communication cards (i.e. 7E, 7F, 7G, 7L, 7M, 7N, 7P, 7R, 7S, 7T, 7W,
74, 75, 76 and 77), the baud rate will be set to 64 kbps. All IEDs communicating over direct inputs/outputs must be set to
# DIRECT I/O
#
DIRECT OUTPUT
DEVICE ID: 1
Range: 1 to 16
MESSAGE
DIRECT I/O CH1 RING
CONFIGURATION: Yes
Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
DIRECT I/O CH2 RING
CONFIGURATION: Yes
Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
DIRECT I/O DATA
RATE: 64 kbps
Range: 64 kbps, 128 kbps
MESSAGE
DIRECT I/O CHANNEL
CROSSOVER: Disabled
MESSAGE
# CRC ALARM CH1
#
See page 535.
MESSAGE
# CRC ALARM CH2
#
See page 535.
MESSAGE
# UNRETURNED
# MESSAGES ALARM CH1
See page 536.
MESSAGE
# UNRETURNED
See page 536.
5
the same data rate. UR-series IEDs equipped with dual-channel communications cards apply the same data rate to both
channels. Delivery time for direct input/output messages is approximately 0.2 of a power system cycle at 128 kbps and 0.4
of a power system cycle at 64 kbps, per each bridge.
The G.703 and RS422 modules are fixed at 64 kbps only. The SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" DIRECT I/O !"
DIRECT I/O DATA RATE setting is not applicable to these modules.
The DIRECT I/O CHANNEL CROSSOVER setting applies to B30s with dual-channel communication cards and allows crossing
over messages from Channel 1 to Channel 2. This places all UR-series IEDs into one direct input/output network regard-
less of the physical media of the two communication channels.
The following application examples illustrate the basic concepts for direct input/output configuration. Please refer to the
Inputs/Outputs section in this chapter for information on configuring FlexLogic operands (flags, bits) to be exchanged.
EXAMPLE 1: EXTENDING THE INPUT/OUTPUT CAPABILITIES OF A UR-SERIES RELAY
Consider an application that requires additional quantities of digital inputs and/or output contacts and/or lines of program-
mable logic that exceed the capabilities of a single UR-series chassis. The problem is solved by adding an extra UR-series
IED, such as the C30, to satisfy the additional input/output and programmable logic requirements. The two IEDs are con-
nected via single-channel digital communication cards as shown in the figure below.
Figure 56: INPUT/OUTPUT EXTENSION VIA DIRECT I/OS
In the above application, the following settings should be applied:
UR IED 1: DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: "1"
DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION: "Yes"
DIRECT I/O DATA RATE: "128 kbps"
DIRECT I/O DATA RATE: "128 kbps"
The message delivery time is about 0.2 of power cycle in both ways (at 128 kbps); i.e., from Device 1 to Device 2, and from
Device 2 to Device 1. Different communications cards can be selected by the user for this back-to-back connection (fiber,
G.703, or RS422).
EXAMPLE 2: INTERLOCKING BUSBAR PROTECTION
A simple interlocking busbar protection scheme could be accomplished by sending a blocking signal from downstream
devices, say 2, 3, and 4, to the upstream device that monitors a single incomer of the busbar, as shown below.
Figure 57: SAMPLE INTERLOCKING BUSBAR PROTECTION SCHEME
NOTE
842711A1.CDR
UR IED 1
TX1
RX1
UR IED 2
TX1
RX1
842712A1.CDR
UR IED 1
UR IED 2 UR IED 4 UR IED 3
BLOCK
5
For increased reliability, a dual-ring configuration (shown below) is recommended for this application.
Figure 58: INTERLOCKING BUS PROTECTION SCHEME VIA DIRECT I/OS
UR IED 1: DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: 1 UR IED 2: DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: 2
DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION: Yes DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION: Yes
Message delivery time is approximately 0.2 of power system cycle (at 128 kbps) times number of bridges between the ori-
gin and destination. Dual-ring configuration effectively reduces the maximum communications distance by a factor of two.
In this configuration the following delivery times are expected (at 128 kbps) if both rings are healthy:
IED 1 to IED 2: 0.2 of power system cycle; IED 1 to IED 3: 0.4 of power system cycle;
IED 2 to IED 4: 0.4 of power system cycle; IED 3 to IED 4: 0.2 of power system cycle
If one ring is broken (say TX2/RX2) the delivery times are as follows:
IED 2 to IED 4: 0.4 of power system cycle; IED 3 to IED 4: 0.2 of power system cycle
A coordinating timer for this bus protection scheme could be selected to cover the worst case scenario (0.4 of power sys-
tem cycle). Upon detecting a broken ring, the coordination time should be adaptively increased to 0.6 of power system
cycle. The complete application requires addressing a number of issues such as failure of both the communications rings,
failure or out-of-service conditions of one of the relays, etc. Self-monitoring flags of the direct inputs/outputs feature would
be primarily used to address these concerns.
EXAMPLE 3: PILOT-AIDED SCHEMES
Consider the three-terminal line protection application shown below:
Figure 59: THREE-TERMINAL LINE APPLICATION
A permissive pilot-aided scheme could be implemented in a two-ring configuration as shown below (IEDs 1 and 2 constitute
a first ring, while IEDs 2 and 3 constitute a second ring):
842716A1.CDR
UR IED 1
RX1
TX2
TX1
RX2
UR IED 2
TX2
RX2
RX1
TX1
UR IED 4
TX1
RX1
RX2
TX2
UR IED 3
RX2
TX1
TX2
RX1
842713A1.CDR
UR IED 1 UR IED 2
UR IED 3
5
Figure 510: SINGLE-CHANNEL OPEN LOOP CONFIGURATION
In this configuration the following delivery times are expected (at 128 kbps):
IED 2 to IED 3: 0.2 of power system cycle
In the above scheme, IEDs 1 and 3 do not communicate directly. IED 2 must be configured to forward the messages as
explained in the Inputs/Outputs section. A blocking pilot-aided scheme should be implemented with more security and, ide-
ally, faster message delivery time. This could be accomplished using a dual-ring configuration as shown below.
Figure 511: DUAL-CHANNEL CLOSED LOOP (DUAL-RING) CONFIGURATION
In this configuration the following delivery times are expected (at 128 kbps) if both the rings are healthy:
IED 2 to IED 3: 0.2 of power system cycle
The two communications configurations could be applied to both permissive and blocking schemes. Speed, reliability and
cost should be taken into account when selecting the required architecture.
842714A1.CDR
UR IED 1
TX1
RX1
UR IED 2
RX2
TX2
RX1
TX1
UR IED 3
RX1
TX1
842715A1.CDR
UR IED 1
TX1
RX2
TX2
RX1
UR IED 2
RX2
TX1
RX1
TX2
UR IED 3
RX1
TX2
TX1
RX2
5
b) CRC ALARM CH1(2)
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" DIRECT I/O !" CRC ALARM CH1(2)
The B30 checks integrity of the incoming direct input/output messages using a 32-bit CRC. The CRC Alarm function is
available for monitoring the communication medium noise by tracking the rate of messages failing the CRC check. The
monitoring function counts all incoming messages, including messages that failed the CRC check. A separate counter adds
up messages that failed the CRC check. When the failed CRC counter reaches the user-defined level specified by the CRC
ALARM CH1 THRESHOLD setting within the user-defined message count CRC ALARM 1 CH1 COUNT, the DIR IO CH1 CRC ALARM
FlexLogic operand is set.
When the total message counter reaches the user-defined maximum specified by the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT set-
ting, both the counters reset and the monitoring process is restarted.
The operand shall be configured to drive an output contact, user-programmable LED, or selected communication-based
output. Latching and acknowledging conditions - if required - should be programmed accordingly.
The CRC Alarm function is available on a per-channel basis. The total number of direct input/output messages that failed
the CRC check is available as the ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" DIRECT INPUTS !" CRC FAIL COUNT CH1(2) actual value.
Message Count and Length of the Monitoring Window:
To monitor communications integrity, the relay sends 1 message per second (at 64 kbps) or 2 messages per second (128
kbps) even if there is no change in the direct outputs. For example, setting the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT to 10000,
corresponds a time window of about 160 minutes at 64 kbps and 80 minutes at 128 kbps. If the messages are sent faster
as a result of direct outputs activity, the monitoring time interval will shorten. This should be taken into account when deter-
mining the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT setting. For example, if the requirement is a maximum monitoring time interval
of 10 minutes at 64 kbps, then the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT should be set to 10 60 1 = 600.
Correlation of Failed CRC and Bit Error Rate (BER):
The CRC check may fail if one or more bits in a packet are corrupted. Therefore, an exact correlation between the CRC fail
rate and the BER is not possible. Under certain assumptions an approximation can be made as follows. A direct input/out-
put packet containing 20 bytes results in 160 bits of data being sent and therefore, a transmission of 63 packets is equiva-
lent to 10,000 bits. A BER of 10
4
implies 1 bit error for every 10,000 bits sent/received. Assuming the best case of only 1
bit error in a failed packet, having 1 failed packet for every 63 received is about equal to a BER of 10
4
.
# CRC ALARM CH1
#
CRC ALARM CH1
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
CRC ALARM CH1
MESSAGE COUNT: 600
MESSAGE
CRC ALARM CH1
THRESHOLD: 10
MESSAGE
CRC ALARM CH1
EVENTS: Disabled
5
c) UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM CH1(2)
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" DIRECT I/O !" UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM CH1(2)
The B30 checks integrity of the direct input/output communication ring by counting unreturned messages. In the ring config-
uration, all messages originating at a given device should return within a pre-defined period of time. The Unreturned Mes-
sages Alarm function is available for monitoring the integrity of the communication ring by tracking the rate of unreturned
messages. This function counts all the outgoing messages and a separate counter adds the messages have failed to
return. When the unreturned messages counter reaches the user-definable level specified by the UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1
THRESHOLD setting and within the user-defined message count UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 COUNT, the DIR IO CH1 UNRET ALM
FlexLogic operand is set.
When the total message counter reaches the user-defined maximum specified by the UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 MESSAGE
COUNT setting, both the counters reset and the monitoring process is restarted.
The operand shall be configured to drive an output contact, user-programmable LED, or selected communication-based
output. Latching and acknowledging conditions, if required, should be programmed accordingly.
The Unreturned Messages Alarm function is available on a per-channel basis and is active only in the ring configuration.
The total number of unreturned input/output messages is available as the ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" DIRECT INPUTS
!" UNRETURNED MSG COUNT CH1(2) actual value.
5.2.16 INSTALLATION
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" INSTALLATION
To safeguard against the installation of a relay without any entered settings, the unit will not allow signaling of any output
relay until RELAY SETTINGS is set to "Programmed". This setting is defaulted to "Not Programmed" when at the factory. The
UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED self-test error message is displayed until the relay is put into the "Programmed" state.
The RELAY NAME setting allows the user to uniquely identify a relay. This name will appear on generated reports. This name
is also used to identify specific devices which are engaged in automatically sending/receiving data over the Ethernet com-
munications channel using the IEC 61850 protocol.
# UNRETURNED
UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE COUNT: 600
MESSAGE
THRESHOLD: 10
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
# INSTALLATION
#
RELAY SETTINGS:
Not Programmed
Range: Not Programmed, Programmed
MESSAGE
RELAY NAME:
Relay-1
5 SETTINGS 5.3 SYSTEM SETUP
5
5.3SYSTEM SETUP 5.3.1 AC INPUTS
a) CURRENT BANKS
PATH: SETTINGS !" SYSTEM SETUP ! AC INPUTS ! CURRENT BANK F1(S5)
Six banks of phase/ground CTs can be set, where the current banks are denoted in the following format (X represents the
module slot position letter):
Xa, where X = {F, L, S} and a = {1, 5}.
See the Introduction to AC Sources section at the beginning of this chapter for additional details.
These settings are critical for all features that have settings dependent on current measurements. When the relay is
ordered, the CT module must be specified to include a standard or sensitive ground input. As the phase CTs are connected
in Wye (star), the calculated phasor sum of the three phase currents (IA + IB + IC = Neutral Current = 3Io) is used as the
input for the neutral overcurrent elements. In addition, a zero-sequence (core balance) CT which senses current in all of the
circuit primary conductors, or a CT in a neutral grounding conductor may also be used. For this configuration, the ground
CT primary rating must be entered. To detect low level ground fault currents, the sensitive ground input may be used. In this
case, the sensitive ground CT primary rating must be entered. Refer to Chapter 3 for more details on CT connections.
Enter the rated CT primary current values. For both 1000:5 and 1000:1 CTs, the entry would be 1000. For correct opera-
tion, the CT secondary rating must match the setting (which must also correspond to the specific CT connections used).
The following example illustrates how multiple CT inputs (current banks) are summed as one source current. Given If the
following current banks:
F1: CT bank with 500:1 ratio; F5: CT bank with 1000: ratio; L1: CT bank with 800:1 ratio
The following rule applies:
(EQ 5.3)
1 pu is the highest primary current. In this case, 1000 is entered and the secondary current from the 500:1 ratio CT will be
adjusted to that created by a 1000:1 CT before summation. If a protection element is set up to act on SRC 1 currents, then
a pickup level of 1 pu will operate on 1000 A primary.
The same rule applies for current sums from CTs with different secondary taps (5 A and 1 A).
# CURRENT BANK F1
#
PHASE CT F1
PRIMARY: 1 A
Range: 1 to 65000 A in steps of 1
MESSAGE
PHASE CT F1
SECONDARY: 1 A
Range: 1 A, 5 A
MESSAGE
GROUND CT F1
PRIMARY: 1 A
Range: 1 to 65000 A in steps of 1
MESSAGE
GROUND CT F1
SECONDARY: 1 A
Range: 1 A, 5 A
SRC 1 F1 F5 L1 + + =
5.3 SYSTEM SETUP 5 SETTINGS
5
b) VOLTAGE BANKS
PATH: SETTINGS !" SYSTEM SETUP ! AC INPUTS !" VOLTAGE BANK F5(S5)
Three banks of phase/auxiliary VTs can be set, where voltage banks are denoted in the following format (X represents the
module slot position letter):
Xa, where X = {F, L, S} and a = {5}.
See the Introduction to AC Sources section at the beginning of this chapter for additional details.
With VTs installed, the relay can perform voltage measurements as well as power calculations. Enter the PHASE VT F5 CON-
NECTION made to the system as Wye or Delta. An open-delta source VT connection would be entered as Delta. See
the Typical Wiring Diagram in Chapter 3 for details.
The nominal PHASE VT F5 SECONDARY voltage setting is the voltage across the relay input terminals when nominal
voltage is applied to the VT primary.
For example, on a system with a 13.8 kV nominal primary voltage and with a 14400:120 volt VT in a Delta connec-
tion, the secondary voltage would be 115, i.e. (13800 / 14400) 120. For a Wye connection, the voltage value
entered must be the phase to neutral voltage which would be 115 / = 66.4.
On a 14.4 kV system with a Delta connection and a VT primary to secondary turns ratio of 14400:120, the voltage
value entered would be 120, i.e. 14400 / 120.
5.3.2 POWER SYSTEM
PATH: SETTINGS !" SYSTEM SETUP !" POWER SYSTEM
The power system NOMINAL FREQUENCY value is used as a default to set the digital sampling rate if the system frequency
cannot be measured from available signals. This may happen if the signals are not present or are heavily distorted. Before
reverting to the nominal frequency, the frequency tracking algorithm holds the last valid frequency measurement for a safe
period of time while waiting for the signals to reappear or for the distortions to decay.
# VOLTAGE BANK F5
#
PHASE VT F5
CONNECTION: Wye
Range: Wye, Delta
MESSAGE
PHASE VT F5
SECONDARY: 66.4 V
Range: 50.0 to 240.0 V in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
PHASE VT F5
RATIO: 1.00 :1
Range: 1.00 to 24000.00 in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
AUXILIARY VT F5
CONNECTION: Vag
Range: Vn, Vag, Vbg, Vcg, Vab, Vbc, Vca
MESSAGE
AUXILIARY VT F5
SECONDARY: 66.4 V
Range: 50.0 to 240.0 V in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
AUXILIARY VT F5
RATIO: 1.00 :1
# POWER SYSTEM
#
NOMINAL FREQUENCY:
60 Hz
Range: 25 to 60 Hz in steps of 1
MESSAGE
PHASE ROTATION:
ABC
Range: ABC, ACB
MESSAGE
FREQUENCY AND PHASE
REFERENCE: SRC 1
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4, SRC 5, SRC 6
MESSAGE
FREQUENCY TRACKING:
Enabled
NOTE
3
5
The phase sequence of the power system is required to properly calculate sequence components and power parameters.
The PHASE ROTATION setting matches the power system phase sequence. Note that this setting informs the relay of the
actual system phase sequence, either ABC or ACB. CT and VT inputs on the relay, labeled as A, B, and C, must be con-
nected to system phases A, B, and C for correct operation.
The FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE setting determines which signal source is used (and hence which AC signal) for
phase angle reference. The AC signal used is prioritized based on the AC inputs that are configured for the signal source:
phase voltages takes precedence, followed by auxiliary voltage, then phase currents, and finally ground current.
For three phase selection, phase A is used for angle referencing ( ), while Clarke transformation of the
phase signals is used for frequency metering and tracking ( ) for better performance dur-
ing fault, open pole, and VT and CT fail conditions.
The phase reference and frequency tracking AC signals are selected based upon the Source configuration, regardless of
whether or not a particular signal is actually applied to the relay.
Phase angle of the reference signal will always display zero degrees and all other phase angles will be relative to this sig-
nal. If the pre-selected reference signal is not measurable at a given time, the phase angles are not referenced.
The phase angle referencing is done via a phase locked loop, which can synchronize independent UR-series relays if they
have the same AC signal reference. These results in very precise correlation of time tagging in the event recorder between
different UR-series relays provided the relays have an IRIG-B connection.
FREQUENCY TRACKING should only be set to "Disabled" in very unusual circumstances; consult the factory for spe-
cial variable-frequency applications.
5.3.3 SIGNAL SOURCES
PATH: SETTINGS !" SYSTEM SETUP !" SIGNAL SOURCES ! SOURCE 1(6)
Six identical source menus are available. The "SRC 1" text can be replaced by with a user-defined name appropriate for the
associated source.
F, L, and S represent the module slot position. The number directly following these letters represents either the first
bank of four channels (1, 2, 3, 4) called 1 or the second bank of four channels (5, 6, 7, 8) called 5 in a particular CT/VT
module. Refer to the Introduction to AC Sources section at the beginning of this chapter for additional details on this con-
cept.
It is possible to select the sum of up to five (5) CTs. The first channel displayed is the CT to which all others will be referred.
For example, the selection F1+F5 indicates the sum of each phase from channels F1 and F5, scaled to whichever CT
has the higher ratio. Selecting None hides the associated actual values.
The approach used to configure the AC sources consists of several steps; first step is to specify the information about each
CT and VT input. For CT inputs, this is the nominal primary and secondary current. For VTs, this is the connection type,
ratio and nominal secondary voltage. Once the inputs have been specified, the configuration for each Source is entered,
including specifying which CTs will be summed together.
# SOURCE 1
#
SOURCE 1 NAME:
SRC 1
MESSAGE
SOURCE 1 PHASE CT:
None
Range: None, F1, F5, F1+F5,... up to a combination of
any 5 CTs. Only Phase CT inputs are displayed.
MESSAGE
SOURCE 1 GROUND CT:
None
Range: None, F1, F5, F1+F5,... up to a combination of
any 5 CTs. Only Ground CT inputs are displayed.
MESSAGE
SOURCE 1 PHASE VT:
None
Range: None, F1, F5, L1, L5, S1, S5
Only phase voltage inputs will be displayed.
MESSAGE
SOURCE 1 AUX VT:
None
Range: None, F1, F5, L1, L5, S1, S5
Only auxiliary voltage inputs will be displayed.
V
ANGLE REF
V
A
=
V
FREQUENCY
2V
A
V
B
V
C
( ) 3 =
NOTE
5
User Selection of AC Parameters for Comparator Elements:
CT/VT modules automatically calculate all current and voltage parameters from the available inputs. Users must select the
specific input parameters to be measured by every element in the relevant settings menu. The internal design of the ele-
ment specifies which type of parameter to use and provides a setting for Source selection. In elements where the parame-
ter may be either fundamental or RMS magnitude, such as phase time overcurrent, two settings are provided. One setting
specifies the Source, the second setting selects between fundamental phasor and RMS.
AC Input Actual Values:
The calculated parameters associated with the configured voltage and current inputs are displayed in the current and volt-
age sections of actual values. Only the phasor quantities associated with the actual AC physical input channels will be dis-
played here. All parameters contained within a configured source are displayed in the sources section of the actual values.
EXAMPLE USE OF SOURCES:
An example of the use of sources, with a relay with three CT/VT modules, is shown in the diagram below. A relay could
have the following hardware configuration:
This configuration could be used on a two winding transformer, with one winding connected into a breaker-and-a-half sys-
tem. The following figure shows the arrangement of sources used to provide the functions required in this application, and
the CT/VT inputs that are used to provide the data.
Figure 512: EXAMPLE USE OF SOURCES
INCREASING SLOT POSITION LETTER -->
CT/VT MODULE 1 CT/VT MODULE 2 CT/VT MODULE 3
CTs CTs VTs
F 5
F 1
DSP Bank
U 1
M 1
M 1
M 5
51BF-1 51BF-2
Source 4
87T
51P
UR Relay
A
V
V
A
W
W
Var
Var
Amps
Source 1
Source 3
Volts Amps
Amps Volts
Amps
Source 2
5
5.3.4 FLEXCURVES
a) SETTINGS
PATH: SETTINGS !" SYSTEM SETUP !" FLEXCURVES ! FLEXCURVE A(D)
FlexCurves A through D have settings for entering times to Reset/Operate at the following pickup levels: 0.00 to 0.98 /
1.03 to 20.00. This data is converted into 2 continuous curves by linear interpolation between data points. To enter a cus-
tom FlexCurve, enter the Reset/Operate time (using the VALUE keys) for each selected pickup point (using the
MESSAGE keys) for the desired protection curve (A, B, C, or D).
The relay using a given FlexCurve applies linear approximation for times between the user-entered
points. Special care must be applied when setting the two points that are close to the multiple of pickup of
1, i.e. 0.98 pu and 1.03 pu. It is recommended to set the two times to a similar value; otherwise, the linear
approximation may result in undesired behavior for the operating quantity that is close to 1.00 pu.
# FLEXCURVE A
#
FLEXCURVE A TIME AT
0.00 xPKP: 0 ms
Table 53: FLEXCURVE TABLE
RESET TIME
MS
RESET TIME
MS
OPERATE TIME
MS
OPERATE TIME
MS
OPERATE TIME
MS
OPERATE TIME
MS
0.00 0.68 1.03 2.9 4.9 10.5
0.05 0.70 1.05 3.0 5.0 11.0
0.10 0.72 1.1 3.1 5.1 11.5
0.15 0.74 1.2 3.2 5.2 12.0
0.20 0.76 1.3 3.3 5.3 12.5
0.25 0.78 1.4 3.4 5.4 13.0
0.30 0.80 1.5 3.5 5.5 13.5
0.35 0.82 1.6 3.6 5.6 14.0
0.40 0.84 1.7 3.7 5.7 14.5
0.45 0.86 1.8 3.8 5.8 15.0
0.48 0.88 1.9 3.9 5.9 15.5
0.50 0.90 2.0 4.0 6.0 16.0
0.52 0.91 2.1 4.1 6.5 16.5
0.54 0.92 2.2 4.2 7.0 17.0
0.56 0.93 2.3 4.3 7.5 17.5
0.58 0.94 2.4 4.4 8.0 18.0
0.60 0.95 2.5 4.5 8.5 18.5
0.62 0.96 2.6 4.6 9.0 19.0
0.64 0.97 2.7 4.7 9.5 19.5
0.66 0.98 2.8 4.8 10.0 20.0
NOTE
5
b) FLEXCURVE CONFIGURATION WITH ENERVISTA UR SETUP
The enerVista UR Setup software allows for easy configuration and management of FlexCurves and their associated
data points. Prospective FlexCurves can be configured from a selection of standard curves to provide the best approxi-
mate fit, then specific data points can be edited afterwards. Alternately, curve data can be imported from a specified file
(.csv format) by selecting the Import Data From enerVista UR Setup setting.
Curves and data can be exported, viewed, and cleared by clicking the appropriate buttons. FlexCurves are customized
by editing the operating time (ms) values at pre-defined per-unit current multiples. Note that the pickup multiples start at
zero (implying the "reset time"), operating time below pickup, and operating time above pickup.
c) RECLOSER CURVE EDITING
Recloser Curve selection is special in that recloser curves can be shaped into a composite curve with a minimum response
time and a fixed time above a specified pickup multiples. There are 41 recloser curve types supported. These definite oper-
ating times are useful to coordinate operating times, typically at higher currents and where upstream and downstream pro-
tective devices have different operating characteristics. The Recloser Curve configuration window shown below appears
when the Initialize From enerVista UR Setup setting is set to Recloser Curve and the Initialize FlexCurve button is clicked.
Figure 513: RECLOSER CURVE INITIALIZATION
Multiplier and Adder settings only affect the curve portion of the characteristic and not the MRT and HCT settings.
The HCT settings override the MRT settings for multiples of pickup greater than the HCT Ratio.
842721A1.CDR
Multiplier: Scales (multiplies) the curve operating times
Addr: Adds the time specified in this field (in ms) to each
operating time value. curve
Minimum Response Time (MRT): If enabled, the MRT setting
defines the shortest operating time even if the curve suggests
a shorter time at higher current multiples. A composite operating
characteristic is effectively defined. For current multiples lower
than the intersection point, the curve dictates the operating time;
otherwise, the MRT does. An information message appears
when attempting to apply an MRT shorter than the minimum
curve time.
High Current Time:
HCT Ratio
HCT
Allows the user to set a pickup multiple
from which point onwards the operating time is fixed. This is
normally only required at higher current levels. The
defines the high current pickup multiple; the defines the
operating time.
NOTE
5
d) EXAMPLE
A composite curve can be created from the GE_111 standard with MRT = 200 ms and HCT initially disabled and then
enabled at 8 times pickup with an operating time of 30 ms. At approximately 4 times pickup, the curve operating time is
equal to the MRT and from then onwards the operating time remains at 200 ms (see below).
Figure 514: COMPOSITE RECLOSER CURVE WITH HCT DISABLED
With the HCT feature enabled, the operating time reduces to 30 ms for pickup multiples exceeding 8 times pickup.
Figure 515: COMPOSITE RECLOSER CURVE WITH HCT ENABLED
Configuring a composite curve with an increase in operating time at increased pickup multiples is not allowed. If this
is attempted, the enerVista UR Setup software generates an error message and discards the proposed changes.
e) STANDARD RECLOSER CURVES
The standard Recloser curves available for the B30 are displayed in the following graphs.
842719A1.CDR
842720A1.CDR
NOTE
5
Figure 516: RECLOSER CURVES GE101 TO GE106
Figure 517: RECLOSER CURVES GE113, GE120, GE138 AND GE142
GE104
1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20
0.01
0.02
0.05
0.1
0.2
0.5
1
2
CURRENT (multiple of pickup)
T
I
M
E

(
s
e
c
)
GE101
GE102
GE103
GE106
GE105
842723A1.CDR
1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20
0.05
0.1
0.2
0.5
1
2
5
10
20
50
T
I
M
E

(
s
e
c
)
GE113
GE142
GE138
GE120
842725A1.CDR
5
Figure 518: RECLOSER CURVES GE134, GE137, GE140, GE151 AND GE201
Figure 519: RECLOSER CURVES GE131, GE141, GE152, AND GE200
1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20
0.5
1
2
5
10
20
50
T
I
M
E

(
s
e
c
)
GE134
GE151
GE140
GE137
GE201
842730A1.CDR
1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20
2
5
10
20
50
T
I
M
E

(
s
e
c
)
GE131
GE200
GE152
GE141
842728A1.CDR
5
Figure 520: RECLOSER CURVES GE133, GE161, GE162, GE163, GE164 AND GE165
Figure 521: RECLOSER CURVES GE116, GE117, GE118, GE132, GE136, AND GE139
842729A1.CDR
1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20
0.01
0.02
0.05
0.1
0.2
0.5
1
2
5
10
20
50
T
I
M
E

(
s
e
c
)
GE133
GE163
GE162
GE161
GE165
GE164
842726A1.CDR
1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20
0.01
0.02
0.05
0.1
0.2
0.5
1
2
5
10
20
T
I
M
E

(
s
e
c
)
GE116
GE132
GE118
GE117
GE139
GE136
5
Figure 522: RECLOSER CURVES GE107, GE111, GE112, GE114, GE115, GE121, AND GE122
Figure 523: RECLOSER CURVES GE119, GE135, AND GE202
842724A1.CDR
1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20
0.01
0.02
0.05
0.1
0.2
0.5
1
2
5
10
20
T
I
M
E

(
s
e
c
)
GE121
GE114
GE112
GE122
GE107
GE115
GE111
842727A1.CDR
1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20
0.2
0.5
1
2
5
10
20
50
T
I
M
E

(
s
e
c
)
GE119
GE202
GE135
5
5.3.5 BUS
PATH: SETTINGS " SYSTEM SETUP !" BUS ! BUS ZONE 1
One bus differential zone can be configured. The zone is associated with its own bus differential protection element and CT
trouble monitoring element.
The bus differential zone is defined by providing the names of Sources whose currents bound the differential zone (refer to
settings BUS ZONE 1A SOURCE to BUS ZONE 1F SOURCE).
The connection status of a circuit with respect to the protected bus is dynamically provided by FlexLogic operands (BUS
ZONE 1A STATUS to BUS ZONE 1F STATUS settings). A given operand should be "On" if the corresponding circuit is connected
to the bus. The operands are to be formed from the contact inputs that reflect positions of switches and/or breakers. If con-
tact discrepancy filtering is needed, it should be accomplished using FlexLogic when forming the final status operands.
The status signal is meant to exclude a given current from the bus zone if the circuit is connected to a different bus section
and its non-zero values would upset the current balance causing a spurious differential signal. Therefore, it is not required
nor recommended to use the position of the breaker to control the status signal of a given circuit. If the breaker is opened,
the circuit may remain included in the bus differential zone as the zero current values are measured and used when calcu-
lating the differential signal. Excluding/including dynamically a given current during the operation of a breaker can cause
undesirable transients and race conditions for the relay algorithm.
If a given circuit cannot be connected to any other bus section different than the protected one, the FlexLogic constant
"On" is recommended for the status signal.
# BUS ZONE 1
#
BUS ZONE 1A SOURCE:
SRC 1
MESSAGE
BUS ZONE 1B SOURCE:
SRC 1
MESSAGE
BUS ZONE 1C SOURCE:
SRC 1
MESSAGE
BUS ZONE 1D SOURCE:
SRC 1
MESSAGE
BUS ZONE 1E SOURCE:
SRC 1
MESSAGE
BUS ZONE 1F SOURCE:
SRC 1
MESSAGE
BUS ZONE 1A STATUS:
Off
MESSAGE
BUS ZONE 1B STATUS:
Off
MESSAGE
BUS ZONE 1C STATUS:
Off
MESSAGE
BUS ZONE 1D STATUS:
Off
MESSAGE
BUS ZONE 1E STATUS:
Off
MESSAGE
BUS ZONE 1F STATUS:
Off
5 SETTINGS 5.4 FLEXLOGIC
5
5.4FLEXLOGIC 5.4.1 INTRODUCTION TO FLEXLOGIC
To provide maximum flexibility to the user, the arrangement of internal digital logic combines fixed and user-programmed
parameters. Logic upon which individual features are designed is fixed, and all other logic, from digital input signals through
elements or combinations of elements to digital outputs, is variable. The user has complete control of all variable logic
through FlexLogic. In general, the system receives analog and digital inputs which it uses to produce analog and digital
outputs. The major sub-systems of a generic UR-series relay involved in this process are shown below.
Figure 524: UR ARCHITECTURE OVERVIEW
The states of all digital signals used in the B30 are represented by flags (or FlexLogic operands, which are described
later in this section). A digital 1 is represented by a 'set' flag. Any external contact change-of-state can be used to block an
element from operating, as an input to a control feature in a FlexLogic equation, or to operate a contact output. The state
of the contact input can be displayed locally or viewed remotely via the communications facilities provided. If a simple
scheme where a contact input is used to block an element is desired, this selection is made when programming the ele-
ment. This capability also applies to the other features that set flags: elements, virtual inputs, remote inputs, schemes, and
human operators.
If more complex logic than presented above is required, it is implemented via FlexLogic. For example, if it is desired to
have the closed state of contact input H7a and the operated state of the phase undervoltage element block the operation of
the phase time overcurrent element, the two control input states are programmed in a FlexLogic equation. This equation
ANDs the two control inputs to produce a virtual output which is then selected when programming the phase time overcur-
rent to be used as a blocking input. Virtual outputs can only be created by FlexLogic equations.
Traditionally, protective relay logic has been relatively limited. Any unusual applications involving interlocks, blocking, or
supervisory functions had to be hard-wired using contact inputs and outputs. FlexLogic minimizes the requirement for
auxiliary components and wiring while making more complex schemes possible.
5.4 FLEXLOGIC 5 SETTINGS
5
The logic that determines the interaction of inputs, elements, schemes and outputs is field programmable through the use
of logic equations that are sequentially processed. The use of virtual inputs and outputs in addition to hardware is available
internally and on the communication ports for other relays to use (distributed FlexLogic).
FlexLogic allows users to customize the relay through a series of equations that consist of operators and operands. The
operands are the states of inputs, elements, schemes and outputs. The operators are logic gates, timers and latches (with
set and reset inputs). A system of sequential operations allows any combination of specified operands to be assigned as
inputs to specified operators to create an output. The final output of an equation is a numbered register called a virtual out-
put. Virtual outputs can be used as an input operand in any equation, including the equation that generates the output, as a
seal-in or other type of feedback.
A FlexLogic equation consists of parameters that are either operands or operators. Operands have a logic state of 1 or 0.
Operators provide a defined function, such as an AND gate or a Timer. Each equation defines the combinations of parame-
ters to be used to set a Virtual Output flag. Evaluation of an equation results in either a 1 (=ON, i.e. flag set) or 0 (=OFF, i.e.
flag not set). Each equation is evaluated at least 4 times every power system cycle.
Some types of operands are present in the relay in multiple instances; e.g. contact and remote inputs. These types of oper-
ands are grouped together (for presentation purposes only) on the faceplate display. The characteristics of the different
types of operands are listed in the table below.
Table 54: B30 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND TYPES
OPERAND TYPE STATE EXAMPLE FORMAT CHARACTERISTICS
[INPUT IS 1 (= ON) IF...]
Contact Input On Cont Ip On Voltage is presently applied to the input (external contact
closed).
Off Cont Ip Off Voltage is presently not applied to the input (external
contact open).
Contact Output
(type Form-A contact
only)
Voltage On Cont Op 1 VOn Voltage exists across the contact.
Voltage Off Cont Op 1 VOff Voltage does not exists across the contact.
Current On Cont Op 1 IOn Current is flowing through the contact.
Current Off Cont Op 1 IOff Current is not flowing through the contact.
Direct Input On DIRECT INPUT 1 On The direct input is presently in the ON state.
Element
(Analog)
Pickup PHASE TOC1 PKP The tested parameter is presently above the pickup setting
of an element which responds to rising values or below the
pickup setting of an element which responds to falling
values.
Dropout PHASE TOC1 DPO This operand is the logical inverse of the above PKP
operand.
Operate PHASE TOC1 OP The tested parameter has been above/below the pickup
setting of the element for the programmed delay time, or
has been at logic 1 and is now at logic 0 but the reset timer
has not finished timing.
Block PH DIR1 BLK The output of the comparator is set to the block function.
Element
(Digital)
Pickup Dig Element 1 PKP The input operand is at logic 1.
Dropout Dig Element 1 DPO This operand is the logical inverse of the above PKP
operand.
Operate Dig Element 1 OP The input operand has been at logic 1 for the programmed
pickup delay time, or has been at logic 1 for this period and
is now at logic 0 but the reset timer has not finished timing.
Element
(Digital Counter)
Higher than Counter 1 HI The number of pulses counted is above the set number.
Equal to Counter 1 EQL The number of pulses counted is equal to the set number.
Lower than Counter 1 LO The number of pulses counted is below the set number.
Fixed On On Logic 1
Off Off Logic 0
Remote Input On REMOTE INPUT 1 On The remote input is presently in the ON state.
Virtual Input On Virt Ip 1 On The virtual input is presently in the ON state.
Virtual Output On Virt Op 1 On The virtual output is presently in the set state (i.e.
evaluation of the equation which produces this virtual
output results in a "1").
5
The operands available for this relay are listed alphabetically by types in the following table.
Table 55: B30 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS (Sheet 1 of 4)
OPERAND TYPE OPERAND SYNTAX OPERAND DESCRIPTION
CONTROL
PUSHBUTTONS
CONTROL PUSHBTN n ON Control Pushbutton n (n = 1 to 7) is being pressed.
DIRECT DEVICES DIRECT DEVICE 1On
DIRECT DEVICE 16On

DIRECT DEVICE 1Off
DIRECT DEVICE 16Off

Flag is set, logic=1


DIRECT INPUT/
OUTPUT
CHANNEL
MONITORING
DIR IO CH1(2) CRC ALARM
DIR IO CRC ALARM
DIR IO CH1(2) UNRET ALM
DIR IO UNRET ALM
The rate of Direct Input messages received on Channel 1(2) and failing the
CRC exceeded the user-specified level.
The rate of Direct Input messages failing the CRC exceeded the user-
specified level on Channel 1 or 2.
The rate of returned direct input/output messages on Channel 1(2) exceeded
the user-specified level (ring configurations only).
The rate of returned direct input/output messages exceeded the user-
specified level on Channel 1 or 2 (ring configurations only).
ELEMENT:
Auxiliary
Overvoltage
AUX OV1 PKP
AUX OV1 DPO
AUX OV1 OP
Auxiliary Overvoltage element has picked up
Auxiliary Overvoltage element has dropped out
Auxiliary Overvoltage element has operated
ELEMENT:
Bus Differential
BUS 1 OP
BUS 1 DPO
BUS 1 BIASED OP A
BUS 1 BIASED OP B
BUS 1 BIASED OP C
BUS 1 BIASED PKP A
BUS 1 BIASED PKP B
BUS 1 BIASED PKP C
BUS 1 UNBIASED OP A
BUS 1 UNBIASED OP B
BUS 1 UNBIASED OP C
BUS 1 BIASED DPO A
BUS 1 BIASED DPO B
BUS 1 BIASED DPO C
BUS 1 UNBIASED DPO A
BUS 1 UNBIASED DPO B
BUS 1 UNBIASED DPO C
BUS 1 DIR A
BUS 1 DIR B
BUS 1 DIR C
BUS 1 SAT A
BUS 1 SAT B
BUS 1 SAT C
At least one phase of the bus differential characteristic has operated
At least one phase of the bus differential characteristic has dropped out
Phase A biased differential function has operated
Phase B biased differential function has operated
Phase C biased differential function has operated
Phase A biased differential function has picked up
Phase B biased differential function has picked up
Phase C biased differential function has picked up
Phase A unbiased differential function has operated
Phase B unbiased differential function has operated
Phase C unbiased differential function has operated
Phase A biased differential function has dropped out
Phase B biased differential function has dropped out
Phase C biased differential function has dropped out
Phase A unbiased differential function has dropped out
Phase B unbiased differential function has dropped out
Phase C unbiased differential function has dropped out
Phase A directional principle has picked up
Phase B directional principle has picked up
Phase C directional principle has picked up
CT saturation is detected in phase A
CT saturation is detected in phase B
CT saturation is detected in phase C
ELEMENT:
CT Trouble
CT TROUBLE1 OP
CT TROUBLE1 OP A
CT TROUBLE1 OP B
CT TROUBLE1 OP C
At least one phase of CT Trouble Zone 1 is operated
Phase A of CT Trouble Zone 1 has operated
Phase B of CT Trouble Zone 1 has operated
Phase C of CT Trouble Zone 1 has operated
ELEMENT:
Digital Counters
Counter 1 HI
Counter 1 EQL
Counter 1 LO
Counter 8 HI
Counter 8 EQL
Counter 8 LO
Digital Counter 1 output is more than comparison value
Digital Counter 1 output is equal to comparison value
Digital Counter 1 output is less than comparison value
Digital Counter 8 output is more than comparison value

Digital Counter 8 output is equal to comparison value
Digital Counter 8 output is less than comparison value
ELEMENT:
Digital Elements
Dig Element 1 PKP
Dig Element 1 OP
Dig Element 1 DPO
Dig Element 16 PKP

Dig Element 16 OP
Dig Element 16 DPO
Digital Element 1 is picked up
Digital Element 1 is operated
Digital Element 1 is dropped out
Digital Element 16 is picked up

Digital Element 16 is operated
Digital Element 16 is dropped out
ELEMENT:
FlexElements
FxE 1 PKP
FxE 1 OP
FxE 1 DPO
FxE 8 PKP
FxE 8 OP
FxE 8 DPO
FlexElement 1 has picked up
FlexElement 1 has operated
FlexElement 1 has dropped out
FlexElement 8 has picked up

FlexElement 8 has operated
FlexElement 8 has dropped out
5
ELEMENT
Non-Volatile
Latches
LATCH 1 ON
LATCH 1 OFF
LATCH 16 ON
LATCH 16 OFF
Non-Volatile Latch 1 is ON (Logic = 1)
Non-Voltage Latch 1 is OFF (Logic = 0)
Non-Volatile Latch 16 is ON (Logic = 1)

Non-Voltage Latch 16 is OFF (Logic = 0)
ELEMENT:
Neutral Overvoltage
NEUTRAL OV1 PKP
NEUTRAL OV1 DPO
NEUTRAL OV1 OP
Neutral Overvoltage element has picked up
Neutral Overvoltage element has dropped out
Neutral Overvoltage element has operated
ELEMENT:
Neutral Time
Overcurrent
NEUTRAL TOC1 PKP
NEUTRAL TOC1 OP
NEUTRAL TOC1 DPO
Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 has picked up
Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 has operated
Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 has dropped out
NEUTRAL TOC2 to TOC6 Same set of operands as shown for NEUTRAL TOC1
ELEMENT:
Phase
Instantaneous
Overcurrent
PHASE IOC1 PKP
PHASE IOC1 OP
PHASE IOC1 DPO
PHASE IOC1 PKP A
PHASE IOC1 PKP B
PHASE IOC1 PKP C
PHASE IOC1 OP A
PHASE IOC1 OP B
PHASE IOC1 OP C
PHASE IOC1 DPO A
PHASE IOC1 DPO B
PHASE IOC1 DPO C
At least one phase of PHASE IOC1 has picked up
At least one phase of PHASE IOC1 has operated
At least one phase of PHASE IOC1 has dropped out
Phase A of PHASE IOC1 has picked up
Phase B of PHASE IOC1 has picked up
Phase C of PHASE IOC1 has picked up
Phase A of PHASE IOC1 has operated
Phase B of PHASE IOC1 has operated
Phase C of PHASE IOC1 has operated
Phase A of PHASE IOC1 has dropped out
Phase B of PHASE IOC1 has dropped out
Phase C of PHASE IOC1 has dropped out
PHASE IOC2 Same set of operands as shown for PHASE IOC1
ELEMENT:
Phase Time
Overcurrent
PHASE TOC1 PKP
PHASE TOC1 OP
PHASE TOC1 DPO
PHASE TOC1 PKP A
PHASE TOC1 PKP B
PHASE TOC1 PKP C
PHASE TOC1 OP A
PHASE TOC1 OP B
PHASE TOC1 OP C
PHASE TOC1 DPO A
PHASE TOC1 DPO B
PHASE TOC1 DPO C
At least one phase of PHASE TOC1 has picked up
At least one phase of PHASE TOC1 has operated
At least one phase of PHASE TOC1 has dropped out
Phase A of PHASE TOC1 has picked up
Phase B of PHASE TOC1 has picked up
Phase C of PHASE TOC1 has picked up
Phase A of PHASE TOC1 has operated
Phase B of PHASE TOC1 has operated
Phase C of PHASE TOC1 has operated
Phase A of PHASE TOC1 has dropped out
Phase B of PHASE TOC1 has dropped out
Phase C of PHASE TOC1 has dropped out
PHASE TOC2 to TOC6 Same set of operands as shown for PHASE TOC1
ELEMENT:
Phase Undervoltage
PHASE UV1 PKP
PHASE UV1 OP
PHASE UV1 DPO
PHASE UV1 PKP A
PHASE UV1 PKP B
PHASE UV1 PKP C
PHASE UV1 OP A
PHASE UV1 OP B
PHASE UV1 OP C
PHASE UV1 DPO A
PHASE UV1 DPO B
PHASE UV1 DPO C
At least one phase of UV1 has picked up
At least one phase of UV1 has operated
At least one phase of UV1 has dropped out
Phase A of UV1 has picked up
Phase B of UV1 has picked up
Phase C of UV1 has picked up
Phase A of UV1 has operated
Phase B of UV1 has operated
Phase C of UV1 has operated
Phase A of UV1 has dropped out
Phase B of UV1 has dropped out
Phase C of UV1 has dropped out
PHASE UV2 Same set of operands as shown for PHASE UV1
ELEMENT:
Selector Switch
SELECTOR 1 POS Y
SELECTOR 1 BIT 0
SELECTOR 1 BIT 1
SELECTOR 1 BIT 2
SELECTOR 1 STP ALARM
SELECTOR 1 BIT ALARM
SELECTOR 1 ALARM
SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM
Selector Switch 1 is in Position Y (mutually exclusive operands).
First bit of the 3-bit word encoding position of Selector 1.
Second bit of the 3-bit word encoding position of Selector 1.
Third bit of the 3-bit word encoding position of Selector 1.
Position of Selector 1 has been pre-selected with the stepping up control
input but not acknowledged.
Position of Selector 1 has been pre-selected with the 3-bit control input but
not acknowledged.
Position of Selector 1 has been pre-selected but not acknowledged.
Position of Selector Switch 1 is undetermined when the relay powers up and
synchronizes to the 3-bit input.
SELECTOR 2 Same set of operands as shown above for SELECTOR 1
ELEMENT:
Setting Group
SETTING GROUP ACT 1
SETTING GROUP ACT 6

Setting Group 1 is active
Setting Group 6 is active

5
FIXED OPERANDS Off Logic = 0. Does nothing and may be used as a delimiter in an equation list;
used as Disable by other features.
On Logic = 1. Can be used as a test setting.
INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
Contact Inputs
Cont Ip 1 On
Cont Ip 2 On
Cont Ip 1 Off
Cont Ip 2 Off
(will not appear unless ordered)


INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
Contact Outputs,
Current
(from detector on
Form-A output only)
Cont Op 1 IOn
Cont Op 2 IOn

Cont Op 1 IOff
Cont Op 2 IOff

INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
Contact Outputs,
Voltage
(from detector on
Form-A output only)
Cont Op 1 VOn
Cont Op 2 VOn

Cont Op 1 VOff
Cont Op 2 VOff

INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Direct Inputs
DIRECT INPUT 1 On
DIRECT INPUT 32 On

INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
Remote Inputs
REMOTE INPUT 1 On
REMOTE INPUT 32 On

INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
Virtual Inputs
Virt Ip 1 On
Virt Ip 32 On

INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
Virtual Outputs
Virt Op 1 On
Virt Op 64 On

LED TEST LED TEST IN PROGRESS An LED test has been initiated and has not finished.
REMOTE DEVICES REMOTE DEVICE 1 On
REMOTE DEVICE 16 On

REMOTE DEVICE 1 Off
REMOTE DEVICE 16 Off


RESETTING RESET OP
RESET OP (COMMS)
RESET OP (OPERAND)
RESET OP (PUSHBUTTON)
Reset command is operated (set by all 3 operands below)
Communications source of the reset command
Operand (assigned in the INPUTS/OUTPUTS !" RESETTING menu) source
of the reset command
Reset key (pushbutton) source of the reset command
5
Some operands can be re-named by the user. These are the names of the breakers in the breaker control feature, the ID
(identification) of contact inputs, the ID of virtual inputs, and the ID of virtual outputs. If the user changes the default name/
ID of any of these operands, the assigned name will appear in the relay list of operands. The default names are shown in
the FlexLogic operands table above.
The characteristics of the logic gates are tabulated below, and the operators available in FlexLogic are listed in the Flex-
Logic operators table.
SELF-
DIAGNOSTICS
ANY MAJOR ERROR
ANY MINOR ERROR
ANY SELF-TEST
BATTERY FAIL
DIRECT DEVICE OFF
DIRECT RING BREAK
DSP ERROR
EEPROM DATA ERROR
EQUIPMENT MISMATCH
FLEXLOGIC ERR TOKEN
IRIG-B FAILURE
LATCHING OUT ERROR
LOW ON MEMORY
NO DSP INTERRUPTS
PRI ETHERNET FAIL
PROGRAM MEMORY
PROTOTYPE FIRMWARE
REMOTE DEVICE OFF
SEC ETHERNET FAIL
SNTP FAILURE
SYSTEM EXCEPTION
UNIT NOT CALIBRATED
UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED
WATCHDOG ERROR
Any of the major self-test errors generated (major error)
Any of the minor self-test errors generated (minor error)
Any self-test errors generated (generic, any error)
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
UNAUTHORIZED
ACCESS ALARM
UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS Asserted when a password entry fails while accessing a password-protected
level of the relay.
USER-
PROGRAMMABLE
PUSHBUTTONS
PUSHBUTTON x ON
PUSHBUTTON x OFF
Pushbutton Number x is in the On position
Pushbutton Number x is in the Off position
Table 56: FLEXLOGIC GATE CHARACTERISTICS
GATES NUMBER OF INPUTS OUTPUT IS 1 (= ON) IF...
NOT 1 input is 0
OR 2 to 16 any input is 1
AND 2 to 16 all inputs are 1
NOR 2 to 16 all inputs are 0
NAND 2 to 16 any input is 0
XOR 2 only one input is 1
5
5.4.2 FLEXLOGIC RULES
When forming a FlexLogic equation, the sequence in the linear array of parameters must follow these general rules:
1. Operands must precede the operator which uses the operands as inputs.
2. Operators have only one output. The output of an operator must be used to create a virtual output if it is to be used as
an input to two or more operators.
3. Assigning the output of an operator to a Virtual Output terminates the equation.
4. A timer operator (e.g. "TIMER 1") or virtual output assignment (e.g. " = Virt Op 1") may only be used once. If this rule is
broken, a syntax error will be declared.
5.4.3 FLEXLOGIC EVALUATION
Each equation is evaluated in the order in which the parameters have been entered.
FlexLogic provides latches which by definition have a memory action, remaining in the set state after the
set input has been asserted. However, they are volatile; i.e. they reset on the re-application of control
power.
When making changes to settings, all FlexLogic equations are re-compiled whenever any new setting
value is entered, so all latches are automatically reset. If it is necessary to re-initialize FlexLogic during
testing, for example, it is suggested to power the unit down and then back up.
Table 57: FLEXLOGIC OPERATORS
TYPE SYNTAX DESCRIPTION NOTES
Editor INSERT Insert a parameter in an equation list.
DELETE Delete a parameter from an equation list.
End END The first END encountered signifies the last entry in
the list of processed FlexLogic parameters.
One Shot POSITIVE ONE SHOT One shot that responds to a positive going edge. A one shot refers to a single input gate
that generates a pulse in response to an
edge on the input. The output from a one
shot is True (positive) for only one pass
through the FlexLogic equation. There is
a maximum of 32 one shots.
NEGATIVE ONE
SHOT
One shot that responds to a negative going edge.
DUAL ONE SHOT One shot that responds to both the positive and
negative going edges.
Logic
Gate
NOT Logical Not Operates on the previous parameter.
OR(2)
OR(16)
2 input OR gate
16 input OR gate
Operates on the 2 previous parameters.

AND(2)
AND(16)
2 input AND gate
16 input AND gate


NOR(2)
NOR(16)
2 input NOR gate
16 input NOR gate


NAND(2)
NAND(16)
2 input NAND gate
16 input NAND gate


XOR(2) 2 input Exclusive OR gate Operates on the 2 previous parameters.
LATCH (S,R) Latch (Set, Reset) - reset-dominant The parameter preceding LATCH(S,R) is
the Reset input. The parameter preceding
the Reset input is the Set input.
Timer TIMER 1
TIMER 32
Timer set with FlexLogic Timer 1 settings.
Timer set with FlexLogic Timer 32 settings.

The timer is started by the preceding
parameter. The output of the timer is
TIMER #.
Assign
Virtual
Output
= Virt Op 1
= Virt Op 64
Assigns previous FlexLogic parameter to Virtual
Output 1.
Assigns previous FlexLogic parameter to Virtual

Output 64.
The virtual output is set by the preceding
parameter
CAUTION
5
5.4.4 FLEXLOGIC EXAMPLE
This section provides an example of implementing logic for a typical application. The sequence of the steps is quite impor-
tant as it should minimize the work necessary to develop the relay settings. Note that the example presented in the figure
below is intended to demonstrate the procedure, not to solve a specific application situation.
In the example below, it is assumed that logic has already been programmed to produce Virtual Outputs 1 and 2, and is
only a part of the full set of equations used. When using FlexLogic, it is important to make a note of each Virtual Output
used a Virtual Output designation (1 to 64) can only be properly assigned once.
Figure 525: EXAMPLE LOGIC SCHEME
1. Inspect the example logic diagram to determine if the required logic can be implemented with the FlexLogic opera-
tors. If this is not possible, the logic must be altered until this condition is satisfied. Once this is done, count the inputs
to each gate to verify that the number of inputs does not exceed the FlexLogic limits, which is unlikely but possible. If
the number of inputs is too high, subdivide the inputs into multiple gates to produce an equivalent. For example, if 25
inputs to an AND gate are required, connect Inputs 1 through 16 to AND(16), 17 through 25 to AND(9), and the outputs
from these two gates to AND(2).
Inspect each operator between the initial operands and final virtual outputs to determine if the output from the operator
is used as an input to more than one following operator. If so, the operator output must be assigned as a Virtual Output.
For the example shown above, the output of the AND gate is used as an input to both OR#1 and Timer 1, and must
therefore be made a Virtual Output and assigned the next available number (i.e. Virtual Output 3). The final output
must also be assigned to a Virtual Output as Virtual Output 4, which will be programmed in the contact output section
to operate relay H1 (i.e. Output Contact H1).
Therefore, the required logic can be implemented with two FlexLogic equations with outputs of Virtual Output 3 and
Virtual Output 4 as shown below.
Figure 526: LOGIC EXAMPLE WITH VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
LATCH
CONTACT INPUT H1c
State=Closed
XOR
AND
Reset
Set
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 2
State=ON
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
State=ON
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
State=Pickup
DIGITAL ELEMENT 2
State=Operated
OR #2
Operate Output
Relay H1
OR #1
(800 ms)
Timer 1
Time Delay
on Pickup
(200 ms)
Timer 2
Time Delay
on Dropout
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1
State=ON
827025A2.vsd
LATCH
CONTACT INPUT H1c
State=Closed
XOR
AND
Reset
Set
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 2
State=ON
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
State=ON
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
State=Pickup
DIGITAL ELEMENT 2
State=Operated
OR #2 VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4
OR #1
(800 ms)
Timer 1
Time Delay
on Pickup
(200 ms)
Timer 2
Time Delay
on Dropout
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1
State=ON
827026A2.VSD
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3
5
2. Prepare a logic diagram for the equation to produce Virtual Output 3, as this output will be used as an operand in the
Virtual Output 4 equation (create the equation for every output that will be used as an operand first, so that when these
operands are required they will already have been evaluated and assigned to a specific Virtual Output). The logic for
Virtual Output 3 is shown below with the final output assigned.
Figure 527: LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3
3. Prepare a logic diagram for Virtual Output 4, replacing the logic ahead of Virtual Output 3 with a symbol identified as
Virtual Output 3, as shown below.
Figure 528: LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4
4. Program the FlexLogic equation for Virtual Output 3 by translating the logic into available FlexLogic parameters.
The equation is formed one parameter at a time until the required logic is complete. It is generally easier to start at the
output end of the equation and work back towards the input, as shown in the following steps. It is also recommended to
list operator inputs from bottom to top. For demonstration, the final output will be arbitrarily identified as parameter 99,
and each preceding parameter decremented by one in turn. Until accustomed to using FlexLogic, it is suggested that
a worksheet with a series of cells marked with the arbitrary parameter numbers be prepared, as shown below.
Figure 529: FLEXLOGIC WORKSHEET
5. Following the procedure outlined, start with parameter 99, as follows:
99: The final output of the equation is Virtual Output 3, which is created by the operator "= Virt Op n". This parameter
is therefore "= Virt Op 3."
CONTACT INPUT H1c
State=Closed
AND(2)
DIGITAL ELEMENT 2
State=Operated
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3
827027A2.VSD
LATCH
CONTACT INPUT H1c
State=Closed
XOR
Reset
Set
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 2
State=ON
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
State=ON
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
State=Pickup
OR #2
VIRTUAL
OUTPUT 4
OR #1
(800 ms)
Timer 1
Time Delay
on Pickup
(200 ms)
Timer 2
Time Delay
on Dropout
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3
State=ON
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1
State=ON
827028A2.VSD
01
02
03
04
05
97
98
99
.
.
.
.
.
827029A1.VSD
5
98: The gate preceding the output is an AND, which in this case requires two inputs. The operator for this gate is a 2-
input AND so the parameter is AND(2). Note that FlexLogic rules require that the number of inputs to most
types of operators must be specified to identify the operands for the gate. As the 2-input AND will operate on the
two operands preceding it, these inputs must be specified, starting with the lower.
97: This lower input to the AND gate must be passed through an inverter (the NOT operator) so the next parameter is
NOT. The NOT operator acts upon the operand immediately preceding it, so specify the inverter input next.
96: The input to the NOT gate is to be contact input H1c. The ON state of a contact input can be programmed to be
set when the contact is either open or closed. Assume for this example the state is to be ON for a closed contact.
The operand is therefore Cont Ip H1c On.
95: The last step in the procedure is to specify the upper input to the AND gate, the operated state of digital element 2.
This operand is "DIG ELEM 2 OP".
Writing the parameters in numerical order can now form the equation for VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3:
[95] DIG ELEM 2 OP
[96] Cont Ip H1c On
[97] NOT
[98] AND(2)
[99] = Virt Op 3
It is now possible to check that this selection of parameters will produce the required logic by converting the set of parame-
ters into a logic diagram. The result of this process is shown below, which is compared to the Logic for Virtual Output 3 dia-
gram as a check.
Figure 530: FLEXLOGIC EQUATION FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3
6. Repeating the process described for VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3, select the FlexLogic parameters for Virtual Output 4.
99: The final output of the equation is VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4 which is parameter = Virt Op 4".
98: The operator preceding the output is Timer 2, which is operand TIMER 2". Note that the settings required for the
timer are established in the timer programming section.
97: The operator preceding Timer 2 is OR #2, a 3-input OR, which is parameter OR(3).
96: The lowest input to OR #2 is operand Cont Ip H1c On.
95: The center input to OR #2 is operand TIMER 1".
94: The input to Timer 1 is operand Virt Op 3 On".
93: The upper input to OR #2 is operand LATCH (S,R).
92: There are two inputs to a latch, and the input immediately preceding the latch reset is OR #1, a 4-input OR, which
is parameter OR(4).
91: The lowest input to OR #1 is operand Virt Op 3 On".
90: The input just above the lowest input to OR #1 is operand XOR(2).
89: The lower input to the XOR is operand DIG ELEM 1 PKP.
88: The upper input to the XOR is operand Virt Ip 1 On".
87: The input just below the upper input to OR #1 is operand Virt Op 2 On".
86: The upper input to OR #1 is operand Virt Op 1 On".
85: The last parameter is used to set the latch, and is operand Virt Op 4 On".
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
NOT
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
AND (2)
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
=Virt Op 3
97
98
99
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
DIG ELEM 2 OP
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
Cont Ip H1c On
95
96
AND
VIRTUAL
OUTPUT 3
827030A2.VSD
5
The equation for VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4 is:
[85] Virt Op 4 On
[86] Virt Op 1 On
[87] Virt Op 2 On
[88] Virt Ip 1 On
[89] DIG ELEM 1 PKP
[90] XOR(2)
[91] Virt Op 3 On
[92] OR(4)
[93] LATCH (S,R)
[94] Virt Op 3 On
[95] TIMER 1
[96] Cont Ip H1c On
[97] OR(3)
[98] TIMER 2
[99] = Virt Op 4
It is now possible to check that the selection of parameters will produce the required logic by converting the set of parame-
ters into a logic diagram. The result of this process is shown below, which is compared to the Logic for Virtual Output 4 dia-
gram as a check.
Figure 531: FLEXLOGIC EQUATION FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4
7. Now write the complete FlexLogic expression required to implement the logic, making an effort to assemble the
equation in an order where Virtual Outputs that will be used as inputs to operators are created before needed. In cases
where a lot of processing is required to perform logic, this may be difficult to achieve, but in most cases will not cause
problems as all logic is calculated at least 4 times per power frequency cycle. The possibility of a problem caused by
sequential processing emphasizes the necessity to test the performance of FlexLogic before it is placed in service.
In the following equation, Virtual Output 3 is used as an input to both Latch 1 and Timer 1 as arranged in the order
shown below:
DIG ELEM 2 OP
Cont Ip H1c On
NOT
AND(2)
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
Virt Op 3 On
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
OR (4)
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
LATCH (S,R)
91
92
93
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
DIG ELEM 1 PKP
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
XOR
89
90
XOR
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
Virt Op 1 On
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
Virt Op 2 On
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
Virt Ip 1 On
86
87
88
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
Virt Op 4 On
85
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
=Virt Op 4
99
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
OR (3)
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
TIMER 2
96
97
98
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
Virt Op 3 On
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
TIMER 1
94
95
LATCH
Reset
Set
OR
OR
T1
T2
VIRTUAL
OUTPUT 4
827031A2.VSD
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
Cont Ip H1c On
5
= Virt Op 3
Virt Op 4 On
Virt Op 1 On
Virt Op 2 On
Virt Ip 1 On
DIG ELEM 1 PKP
XOR(2)
Virt Op 3 On
OR(4)
LATCH (S,R)
Virt Op 3 On
TIMER 1
Cont Ip H1c On
OR(3)
TIMER 2
= Virt Op 4
END
In the expression above, the Virtual Output 4 input to the 4-input OR is listed before it is created. This is typical of a
form of feedback, in this case, used to create a seal-in effect with the latch, and is correct.
8. The logic should always be tested after it is loaded into the relay, in the same fashion as has been used in the past.
Testing can be simplified by placing an "END" operator within the overall set of FlexLogic equations. The equations
will then only be evaluated up to the first "END" operator.
The "On" and "Off" operands can be placed in an equation to establish a known set of conditions for test purposes, and
the "INSERT" and "DELETE" commands can be used to modify equations.
5.4.5 FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR
PATH: SETTINGS !" FLEXLOGIC ! FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR
There are 512 FlexLogic entries available, numbered from 1 to 512, with default END entry settings. If a "Disabled" Ele-
ment is selected as a FlexLogic entry, the associated state flag will never be set to 1. The +/ key may be used when
editing FlexLogic equations from the keypad to quickly scan through the major parameter types.
5.4.6 FLEXLOGIC TIMERS
PATH: SETTINGS !" FLEXLOGIC !" FLEXLOGIC TIMERS ! FLEXLOGIC TIMER 1(32)
There are 32 identical FlexLogic timers available. These timers can be used as operators for FlexLogic equations.
TIMER 1 TYPE: This setting is used to select the time measuring unit.
TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY: Sets the time delay to pickup. If a pickup delay is not required, set this function to "0".
TIMER 1 DROPOUT DELAY: Sets the time delay to dropout. If a dropout delay is not required, set this function to "0".
# FLEXLOGIC
# EQUATION EDITOR
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY 1:
END
Range: FlexLogic parameters
MESSAGE
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY 512:
END
Range: FlexLogic parameters
# FLEXLOGIC
# TIMER 1
TIMER 1
TYPE: millisecond
Range: millisecond, second, minute
MESSAGE
TIMER 1 PICKUP
DELAY: 0
MESSAGE
TIMER 1 DROPOUT
DELAY: 0
5
5.4.7 FLEXELEMENTS
PATH: SETTING !" FLEXLOGIC !" FLEXELEMENTS ! FLEXELEMENT 1(8)
A FlexElement is a universal comparator that can be used to monitor any analog actual value calculated by the relay or a
net difference of any two analog actual values of the same type. The effective operating signal could be treated as a signed
number or its absolute value could be used as per user's choice.
The element can be programmed to respond either to a signal level or to a rate-of-change (delta) over a pre-defined period
of time. The output operand is asserted when the operating signal is higher than a threshold or lower than a threshold as
per user's choice.
# FLEXELEMENT 1
#
FLEXELEMENT 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1 NAME:
FxE1
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN:
Off
Range: Off, any analog actual value parameter
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1 -IN:
Off
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT
MODE: Signed
Range: Signed, Absolute
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP
MODE: Level
Range: Level, Delta
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1
DIRECTION: Over
Range: Over, Under
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1
HYSTERESIS: 3.0%
Range: 0.1 to 50.0% in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt
UNIT: milliseconds
Range: milliseconds, seconds, minutes
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt:
20
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
DELAY: 0.000 s
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1 RST
DELAY: 0.000 s
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1 BLK:
Off
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1
TARGET: Self-reset
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1
EVENTS: Disabled
5
Figure 532: FLEXELEMENT SCHEME LOGIC
The FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN setting specifies the first (non-inverted) input to the FlexElement. Zero is assumed as the input if
this setting is set to Off. For proper operation of the element at least one input must be selected. Otherwise, the element
will not assert its output operands.
This FLEXELEMENT 1 IN setting specifies the second (inverted) input to the FlexElement. Zero is assumed as the input if
this setting is set to Off. For proper operation of the element at least one input must be selected. Otherwise, the element
will not assert its output operands. This input should be used to invert the signal if needed for convenience, or to make the
element respond to a differential signal such as for a top-bottom oil temperature differential alarm. The element will not
operate if the two input signals are of different types, for example if one tries to use active power and phase angle to build
the effective operating signal.
The element responds directly to the differential signal if the FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE setting is set to Signed. The ele-
ment responds to the absolute value of the differential signal if this setting is set to Absolute. Sample applications for the
Absolute setting include monitoring the angular difference between two phasors with a symmetrical limit angle in both
directions; monitoring power regardless of its direction, or monitoring a trend regardless of whether the signal increases of
decreases.
The element responds directly to its operating signal as defined by the FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN, FLEXELEMENT 1 IN and FLEX-
ELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE settings if the FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE setting is set to Threshold. The element responds to
the rate of change of its operating signal if the FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE setting is set to Delta. In this case the FLEXELE-
MENT 1 dt UNIT and FLEXELEMENT 1 dt settings specify how the rate of change is derived.
The FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION setting enables the relay to respond to either high or low values of the operating signal. The
following figure explains the application of the FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION, FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP and FLEXELEMENT 1 HYS-
TERESIS settings.
842004A3.CDR
FLEXELEMENT 1
FUNCTION:
SETTING
Enabled = 1
SETTINGS
FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT
MODE:
FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP
MODE:
FLEXELEMENT 1
DIRECTION:
FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP:
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt UNIT:
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt:
RUN
FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN:
SETTINGS
Actual Value FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
FxE 1 DPO
FxE 1 OP
FxE 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT 1 -IN:
Actual Value
+
-
FlexElement 1 OpSig
ACTUAL VALUE
Disabled = 0
FLEXELEMENT 1 BLK:
SETTING
Off = 0
AND
t
PKP
t
RST
SETTINGS
FLEXELEMENT 1 RST
DELAY:
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
DELAY:
FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT
HYSTERESIS:
5
Figure 533: FLEXELEMENT DIRECTION, PICKUP, AND HYSTERESIS
In conjunction with the FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE setting the element could be programmed to provide two extra charac-
teristics as shown in the figure below.
Figure 534: FLEXELEMENT INPUT MODE SETTING
FlexElement 1 OpSig
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Over
P
I
C
K
U
P
HYSTERESIS = % of PICKUP
FlexElement 1 OpSig
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Under
P
I
C
K
U
P
HYSTERESIS = % of PICKUP
842705A1.CDR
842706A2.CDR
FlexElement 1 OpSig
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Over;
FLEXELEMENT INPUT
MODE = Signed;
FlexElement 1 OpSig
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Over;
FLEXELEMENT INPUT
MODE = Absolute;
FlexElement 1 OpSig
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Under;
FLEXELEMENT INPUT
MODE = Signed;
FlexElement 1 OpSig
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Under;
FLEXELEMENT INPUT
MODE = Absolute;
5
The FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP setting specifies the operating threshold for the effective operating signal of the element. If set
to Over, the element picks up when the operating signal exceeds the FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP value. If set to Under, the
element picks up when the operating signal falls below the FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP value.
The FLEXELEMENT 1 HYSTERESIS setting controls the element dropout. It should be noticed that both the operating signal
and the pickup threshold can be negative facilitating applications such as reverse power alarm protection. The FlexEle-
ment can be programmed to work with all analog actual values measured by the relay. The FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP set-
ting is entered in per-unit values using the following definitions of the base units:
The FLEXELEMENT 1 HYSTERESIS setting defines the pickupdropout relation of the element by specifying the width of the
hysteresis loop as a percentage of the pickup value as shown in the FlexElement Direction, Pickup, and Hysteresis dia-
gram.
The FLEXELEMENT 1 DT UNIT setting specifies the time unit for the setting FLEXELEMENT 1 dt. This setting is applicable only if
FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE is set to Delta. The FLEXELEMENT 1 DT setting specifies duration of the time interval for the
rate of change mode of operation. This setting is applicable only if FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE is set to Delta.
This FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP DELAY setting specifies the pickup delay of the element. The FLEXELEMENT 1 RST DELAY setting
specifies the reset delay of the element.
Table 58: FLEXELEMENT BASE UNITS
BUS DIFFERENTIAL
RESTRAINING CURRENT
(Bus Diff Mag)
I
BASE
= maximum primary RMS value of the +IN and IN inputs
(CT primary for source currents, and bus reference primary current for bus differential currents)
BUS DIFFERENTIAL
RESTRAINING CURRENT
(Bus Rest Mag)
I
BASE
dcmA BASE = maximum value of the DCMA INPUT MAX setting for the two transducers configured
under the +IN and IN inputs.
FREQUENCY f
BASE
= 1 Hz
PHASE ANGLE
BASE
= 360 degrees (see the UR angle referencing convention)
POWER FACTOR PF
BASE
= 1.00
RTDs BASE = 100C
SOURCE CURRENT I
BASE
= maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and IN inputs
SOURCE POWER P
BASE
= maximum value of V
BASE
I
BASE
for the +IN and IN inputs
SOURCE VOLTAGE V
BASE
5
5.4.8 NON-VOLATILE LATCHES
PATH: SETTINGS !" FLEXLOGIC !" NON-VOLATILE LATCHES ! LATCH 1(16)
The non-volatile latches provide a permanent logical flag that is stored safely and will not reset upon reboot after the relay
is powered down. Typical applications include sustaining operator commands or permanently block relay functions, such as
Autorecloser, until a deliberate HMI action resets the latch. The settings, logic, and element operation are described below:
LATCH 1 TYPE: This setting characterizes Latch 1 to be Set- or Reset-dominant.
LATCH 1 SET: If asserted, the specified FlexLogic operands 'sets' Latch 1.
LATCH 1 RESET: If asserted, the specified FlexLogic operand 'resets' Latch 1.
Figure 535: NON-VOLATILE LATCH OPERATION TABLE (N=1 to 16) AND LOGIC
# LATCH 1
#
LATCH 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
LATCH 1 TYPE:
Reset Dominant
Range: Reset Dominant, Set Dominant
MESSAGE
LATCH 1 SET:
Off
MESSAGE
LATCH 1 RESET:
Off
MESSAGE
LATCH 1
TARGET: Self-reset
MESSAGE
LATCH 1
EVENTS: Disabled
842005A1.CDR
LATCH 1 FUNCTION:
LATCH 1 TYPE:
LATCH 1 SET:
LATCH 1 SET:
RUN
SET
RESET
SETTING
SETTING
SETTING
SETTING
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Disabled=0
Off=0
Off=0
Enabled=1
LATCH 1 ON
LATCH 1 OFF
LATCH N
TYPE
LATCH N
SET
LATCH N
RESET
LATCH N
ON
LATCH N
OFF
Reset
Dominant
ON OFF ON OFF
OFF OFF Previous
State
Previous
State
ON ON OFF ON
OFF ON OFF ON
Set
Dominant
ON OFF ON OFF
ON ON ON OFF
OFF OFF Previous
State
Previous
State
OFF ON OFF ON
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5 SETTINGS
5
5.5GROUPED ELEMENTS 5.5.1 OVERVIEW
Each protection element can be assigned up to six different sets of settings according to Setting Group designations 1 to 6.
The performance of these elements is defined by the active Setting Group at a given time. Multiple setting groups allow the
user to conveniently change protection settings for different operating situations (e.g. altered power system configuration,
season of the year). The active setting group can be preset or selected via the SETTING GROUPS menu (see the Control Ele-
ments section later in this chapter). See also the Introduction to Elements section at the beginning of this chapter.
5.5.2 SETTING GROUP
PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6)
Each of the six setting group menus is identical. Setting Group 1 (the default active group) automatically becomes active if
no other group is active (see Section 5.6.2: Setting Groups on page 586 for further details).
5.5.3 BUS DIFFERENTIAL
PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS !" SETTING GROUP 1(6) ! BUS DIFFERENTIAL ! BUS ZONE 1 DIFFERENTIAL
# SETTING GROUP 1
#
# BUS DIFFERENTIAL
#
See below.
MESSAGE
# PHASE CURRENT
#
See page 5-70.
MESSAGE
# NEUTRAL CURRENT
#
See page 5-78.
MESSAGE
# GROUND CURRENT
#
See page 5-80.
MESSAGE
# VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
#
See page 5-82.
# BUS ZONE 1
# DIFFERENTIAL
BUS ZONE 1 DIFF
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
BUS ZONE 1 DIFF
PICKUP: 0.100 pu
MESSAGE
BUS ZONE 1 DIFF
LOW SLOPE: 25%
MESSAGE
BUS ZONE 1 DIFF
LOW BPNT: 2.00 pu
MESSAGE
BUS ZONE 1 DIF
HIGH SLOPE: 60%
MESSAGE
BUS ZONE 1 DIFF
HIGH BPNT: 8.00 pu
MESSAGE
BUS ZONE 1 DIFF
HIGH SET: 15.00 pu
MESSAGE
BUS ZONE 1 DIFF
SEAL-IN: 0.400 s
MESSAGE
BUS ZONE 1 DIFF BLK:
Off
MESSAGE
BUS ZONE 1 DIFF
TARGET: Latched
5 SETTINGS 5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS
5
The operation of this element is completely dependent on the dynamic bus replica, which must be defined first. Both biased
and unbiased bus differential protection functions are provided for the bus differential zone.
The biased bus differential function has a dual-slope operating characteristic (see figure below) operating in conjunction
with saturation detection and a directional comparison principle (refer to the Bus Zone 1 Differential Scheme Logic figure in
this section).
Figure 536: BIASED DIFFERENTIAL OPERATING CHARACTERISTIC
The protected zone input current with the highest magnitude is used as the restraining signal. Stability during heavy exter-
nal faults is achieved by dynamic CT saturation detection and current flow direction supervision without affecting sensitivity
and speed of operation for internal faults.
The differential operating characteristic is divided into two regions. In the region of low differential currents and lower slope,
the element operates on a 2-out-of-2 basis, applying both the differential and current directional tests. In the region of high
differential currents, the element operates on a dynamic 1-out-of-2 / 2-out-of-2 basis. If the differential current is in this
region and CT saturation is detected, both the differential and current directional tests are applied. If CT saturation is ruled
out by the saturation detector, the differential protection principle alone is capable of causing the element to operate.
The saturation detector is an integral part of the bus differential element. It has no settings but uses some of the differential
characteristic parameters. The flags indicating CT saturation are available on a per phase basis as FlexLogic operands.
The directional principle is an integral part of the biased bus differential element and has no associated settings. The direc-
tional element dynamically identifies what appears to be the faulted circuit and compares its current angle with that of the
sum of the remaining currents of the protected zone. The element declares a bus fault if the angle is less than 90. Direc-
tional indicating flags signal operation on a per-phase basis and are available as FlexLogic operands.
The unbiased bus differential function checks the magnitude of the differential current against an adjustable threshold. Nei-
ther the bias nor the directional principles apply. The operation of the unbiased differential function is associated with sepa-
rate output operands. More information can be found in the Theory of Operation chapter.
Operation of this element is completely dependent on the dynamic bus replica which must be first defined under Bus Zone
1. The bus differential element 1 protects the differential zone defined as Bus Zone 1.
BUS ZONE 1 DIFF PICKUP: This setting defines the minimum differential current required for operation of the biased
bus differential protection element. This setting is chosen based on the maximum magnitude of the differential current
that might be seen under no-load conditions. This setting prevents relay maloperation in the situation when the bus
carries little power and the restraining signal is too low to provide enough bias in the first slope region of the differential
characteristic.
This setting may also be set above the maximum load level to ensure security during CT trouble conditions. However,
voltage supervision or a check-zone are better alternatives.
MESSAGE
BUS ZONE 1 DIFF
EVENTS: Disabled
d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l
restraining
LOW
SLOPE
OPERATE
BLOCK
Ir
|Id|
HIGH
SLOPE
L
O
W
B
P
N
T
H
I
G
H
B
P
N
T
PICKUP
836720A1.CDR
5
BUS ZONE 1 DIFF LOW SLOPE: This setting defines the percentage bias for the restraining currents, from zero to the
lower breakpoint (LOW BPNT). This setting determines the sensitivity of the relay for low current internal faults. The
value chosen should be high enough to accommodate the spurious differential current resulting from inaccuracy of the
CTs operating in their linear mode, i.e. in load conditions and during distant external faults. When adjusting this setting,
it must be kept in mind that the restraining signal used by the biased bus differential protection element is created as
the maximum of all the input currents.
BUS ZONE 1 DIFF LOW BPNT: This setting defines the lower breakpoint of the dual-slope operating characteristic.
The percentage bias applied for the restraining current from zero to the value specified as LOW BPNT is given by the
LOW SLOPE setting. This setting should be set above the maximum load current. The LOW BPNT may be moved to the
AC current under which all the CTs are guaranteed to transform without saturation. This includes the effect of residual
magnetism. When adjusting this setting, it must be kept in mind that the restraining signal is created as the maximum
of all the input currents.
BUS ZONE 1 DIFF HIGH SLOPE: This setting defines the percentage bias for the restraining currents above the
higher breakpoint (HIGH BPNT). This setting affects stability of the relay for heavy external faults. Traditionally, the
value chosen for this setting should be high enough to accommodate the spurious differential current resulting from
saturation of the CTs during heavy external faults. This requirement may be considerably relaxed in favor of sensitivity
and speed of operation as the relay detects CT saturation and upon detection applies the directional principle to pre-
vent maloperation. When adjusting this setting, it must be kept in mind that the restraining signal is created as the max-
imum of all the input currents.
BUS ZONE 1 DIFF HIGH BPNT: This setting defines the higher breakpoint of the dual-slope operating characteristic.
The percentage bias applied for the restraining current above the value specified as HIGH BPNT is given by the HIGH
SLOPE setting. The HIGH BPNT setting should be set below the minimum AC current that is likely to saturate the weak-
est CT feeding the relay. When adjusting this setting, it must be kept in that mind the restraining signal is created as the
maximum of all the input currents.
The dual-slope operating characteristic of the biased bus differential protection element is shaped to ensure true per-
centage bias for high restraining currents (see the following Figure). This means that the straight line defining the
upper slope intersects the origin of the differential-restraining plane and a discontinuity appears between the low and
high slope regions (between the LOW BPNT and HIGH BPNT settings). This discontinuity is handled by approximating the
operate/no-operate boundary of the characteristic using a certain gluing function. This ensures smooth transition of
the slope from LOW SLOPE (lower value) to HIGH SLOPE (higher value).
The following parameters of the biased operating characteristic are used by the saturation detector: LOW SLOPE, HIGH
SLOPE, and HIGH BPNT. The saturation detector uses these settings to detect specific relations between the differential
and restraining currents. The values of these settings should be selected based on the aforementioned criteria related
to the art of bus differential protection.
BUS ZONE 1 DIFF HIGH SET: This setting defines the minimum differential current required for operation of the unbi-
ased bus differential protection function. This setting is based on the maximum magnitude of the differential current
that might be seen during heavy external faults causing deep CT saturation. When selecting this setting, keep in mind
that the unbiased bus differential protection function uses the full-cycle Fourier measuring algorithm and applies it to
pre-filtered samples of the input currents. As a result, the transient measuring errors including the effect of the DC
component are below 2%. During heavy CT saturation when the currents are significantly distorted, the magnitude of
the differential current as measured by the relay and used by the unbiased bus differential function is significantly lower
than both the peak values of the waveform and the true RMS value. The measured magnitude practically reflects the
power system frequency component alone. This allows for lower values of the HIGH SET setting.
The unbiased (high set) differential function can be virtually disabled by setting its operating threshold, HIGH SET, very
high.
BUS ZONE 1 DIFF SEAL-IN: This setting defines the drop-out time of the seal-in timer applied to the BUS 1 OP Flex-
Logic operand.
More information on the Bus Zone Differential settings can be found in the Application of Settings chapter.
5
Figure 537: BUS ZONE 1 DIFFERENTIAL SCHEME LOGIC
O
f
f

=

0
O
f
f

=

0
B
U
S

Z
O
N
E

1

D
I
F
F
P
I
C
K
U
P
:
B
U
S

Z
O
N
E

1

D
I
F
F
L
O
W

S
L
O
P
E
:
B
U
S

Z
O
N
E

1

D
I
F
F
L
O
W

B
P
N
T
:
B
U
S

Z
O
N
E

1

D
I
F
F
H
I
G
H

S
L
O
P
E
:
B
U
S

Z
O
N
E

1

D
I
F
F
H
I
G
H

B
P
N
T
:
C
U
R
R
E
N
T
D
I
R
E
C
T
I
O
N
A
L
E
L
E
M
E
N
T
S
A
T
U
R
A
T
I
O
N
D
E
T
E
C
T
O
R
R
U
N
B
U
S

Z
O
N
E

1
A

S
T
A
T
U
S
:
B
U
S

Z
O
N
E

1
F

S
T
A
T
U
S
:
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
.

.

.
.

.

.
.

.

.
B
U
S

Z
O
N
E

1
A

S
O
U
R
C
E
:
B
U
S

Z
O
N
E

1
F

S
O
U
R
C
E
:
P H A S O R S
D I F F E R E N T I A L A N D R E S T R A I N I N G C U R R E N T S
I
a
r
1
I
b
r
1
I
c
r
1
I
a
d
1
I
b
d
1
I
c
d
1
P H A S O R S S A M P L E S S A M P L E S
I
a
I
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
i
a i
a
I
b
I
b
i
b i
b
I
c
I
c
i
c i
c
O
R
O
R
O
R
O
R
O
R
O
R
O
R
O
R
O
R
O
R
A
N
D
A
N
D
A
N
D
A
N
D
A
N
D
A
N
D
d
iffe
r
e
n
tia
l
restraining
d
iffe
r
e
n
tia
l
restraining
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
E
n
a
b
l
e
=
1
D
i
s
a
b
l
e

=

0
O
f
f

=

0
B
U
S

Z
O
N
E

1

D
I
F
F
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
:
B
U
S

Z
O
N
E

1

D
I
F
F
H
I
G
H

S
E
T
:
F
L
E
X
L
O
G
I
C

O
P
E
R
A
N
D
S
B
U
S

1

D
P
O
B
U
S

1

B
I
A
S
E
D

O
P

A
B
U
S

1

B
I
A
S
E
D

D
P
O

A
8
3
6
7
2
1
A
6
.C
D
R
F
L
E
X
L
O
G
I
C

O
P
E
R
A
N
D
S
F
L
E
X
L
O
G
I
C

O
P
E
R
A
N
D
S
F
L
E
X
L
O
G
I
C

O
P
E
R
A
N
D
S
F
L
E
X
L
O
G
I
C

O
P
E
R
A
N
D
S
F
L
E
X
L
O
G
I
C

O
P
E
R
A
N
D
S
B
U
S

1

B
I
A
S
E
D

D
P
O

B
B
U
S

1

B
I
A
S
E
D

D
P
O

C
B
U
S

1

B
I
A
S
E
D

O
P

B
B
U
S

1

B
I
A
S
E
D

P
K
P

A
B
U
S

1

D
I
R

A
B
U
S

1

S
A
T

A
B
U
S

1

D
I
R

B
B
U
S

1

S
A
T

B
B
U
S

1

D
I
R

C
B
U
S

1

S
A
T

C
B
U
S

1

B
I
A
S
E
D

P
K
P

B
B
U
S

1

B
I
A
S
E
D

P
K
P

C
B
U
S

1

B
I
A
S
E
D

O
P

C
F
L
E
X
L
O
G
I
C

O
P
E
R
A
N
D
F
L
E
X
L
O
G
I
C

O
P
E
R
A
N
D
S
B
U
S

1

U
N
B
I
A
S
E
D

O
P

A
B
U
S

1

U
N
B
I
A
S
E
D

D
P
O

A
B
U
S

1

O
P
B
U
S

1

U
N
B
I
A
S
E
D

O
P

B
B
U
S

1

U
N
B
I
A
S
E
D

D
P
O

B
B
U
S

1

U
N
B
I
A
S
E
D

O
P

C
B
U
S

1

U
N
B
I
A
S
E
D

D
P
O

C
|

I
a
d
1

|

>

H
I
G
H

S
E
T
R
U
N
R
U
N
R
U
N
|

I
b
d
1

|

>

H
I
G
H

S
E
T
|

I
c
d
1

|

>

H
I
G
H

S
E
T
B
U
S

Z
O
N
E

1

D
I
F
F
B
L
O
C
K
:
O
R
O
R
A
N
D
0
t
D
P
O
B
U
S

Z
O
N
E

1

D
I
F
F
S
E
A
L
-
I
N
:
5
5.5.4 PHASE CURRENT
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" PHASE CURRENT
b) INVERSE TOC CURVE CHARACTERISTICS
The inverse time overcurrent curves used by the time overcurrent elements are the IEEE, IEC, GE Type IAC, and I
2
t stan-
dard curve shapes. This allows for simplified coordination with downstream devices. If however, none of these curve
shapes is adequate, FlexCurves may be used to customize the inverse time curve characteristics. The Definite Time
curve is also an option that may be appropriate if only simple protection is required.
A time dial multiplier setting allows selection of a multiple of the base curve shape (where the time dial multiplier = 1) with
the curve shape (CURVE) setting. Unlike the electromechanical time dial equivalent, operate times are directly proportional
to the time multiplier (TD MULTIPLIER) setting value. For example, all times for a multiplier of 10 are 10 times the multiplier 1
or base curve values. Setting the multiplier to zero results in an instantaneous response to all current levels above pickup.
Time overcurrent time calculations are made with an internal energy capacity memory variable. When this variable indi-
cates that the energy capacity has reached 100%, a time overcurrent element will operate. If less than 100% energy capac-
ity is accumulated in this variable and the current falls below the dropout threshold of 97 to 98% of the pickup value, the
variable must be reduced. Two methods of this resetting operation are available: Instantaneous and Timed. The Instan-
taneous selection is intended for applications with other relays, such as most static relays, which set the energy capacity
directly to zero when the current falls below the reset threshold. The Timed selection can be used where the relay must
coordinate with electromechanical relays.
Graphs of standard time-current curves on 11 17 log-log graph paper are available upon request from
the GE Multilin literature department. The original files are also available in PDF format on the enerVista CD
and the GE Multilin website at http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin.
# PHASE CURRENT
#
# PHASE TOC1
#
See page 575.
MESSAGE
# PHASE TOC2
#
See page 575.
MESSAGE
# PHASE TOC3
#
See page 575.
MESSAGE
# PHASE TOC4
#
See page 575.
MESSAGE
# PHASE TOC5
#
Note: Seen only if slot F or slot M has an 8H or 8J CT
module installed.
MESSAGE
# PHASE TOC6
#
Note: Seen only if slot F or slot M has an 8H or 8J CT
module installed.
MESSAGE
# PHASE IOC1
#
See page 577.
MESSAGE
# PHASE IOC2
#
Table 59: OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES
IEEE IEC GE TYPE IAC OTHER
IEEE Extremely Inv. IEC Curve A (BS142) IAC Extremely Inv. I
2
t
IEEE Very Inverse IEC Curve B (BS142) IAC Very Inverse FlexCurves A, B, C, and D
IEEE Moderately Inv. IEC Curve C (BS142) IAC Inverse Recloser Curves
IEC Short Inverse IAC Short Inverse Definite Time
NOTE
5
IEEE CURVES:
The IEEE time overcurrent curve shapes conform to industry standards and the IEEE C37.112-1996 curve classifications
for extremely, very, and moderately inverse. The IEEE curves are derived from the formulae:
, (EQ 5.4)
where: T = operate time (in seconds), TDM = Multiplier setting, I = input current, I
pickup
= Pickup Current setting
A, B, p = constants, T
RESET
= reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET is Timed),
t
r
= characteristic constant
Table 510: IEEE INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS
IEEE CURVE SHAPE A B P T
R
IEEE Extremely Inverse 28.2 0.1217 2.0000 29.1
IEEE Very Inverse 19.61 0.491 2.0000 21.6
IEEE Moderately Inverse 0.0515 0.1140 0.02000 4.85
Table 511: IEEE CURVE TRIP TIMES (IN SECONDS)
MULTIPLIER
(TDM)
CURRENT ( I / I
pickup
)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
IEEE EXTREMELY INVERSE
0.5 11.341 4.761 1.823 1.001 0.648 0.464 0.355 0.285 0.237 0.203
1.0 22.682 9.522 3.647 2.002 1.297 0.927 0.709 0.569 0.474 0.407
2.0 45.363 19.043 7.293 4.003 2.593 1.855 1.418 1.139 0.948 0.813
4.0 90.727 38.087 14.587 8.007 5.187 3.710 2.837 2.277 1.897 1.626
6.0 136.090 57.130 21.880 12.010 7.780 5.564 4.255 3.416 2.845 2.439
8.0 181.454 76.174 29.174 16.014 10.374 7.419 5.674 4.555 3.794 3.252
10.0 226.817 95.217 36.467 20.017 12.967 9.274 7.092 5.693 4.742 4.065
IEEE VERY INVERSE
0.5 8.090 3.514 1.471 0.899 0.654 0.526 0.450 0.401 0.368 0.345
1.0 16.179 7.028 2.942 1.798 1.308 1.051 0.900 0.802 0.736 0.689
2.0 32.358 14.055 5.885 3.597 2.616 2.103 1.799 1.605 1.472 1.378
4.0 64.716 28.111 11.769 7.193 5.232 4.205 3.598 3.209 2.945 2.756
6.0 97.074 42.166 17.654 10.790 7.849 6.308 5.397 4.814 4.417 4.134
8.0 129.432 56.221 23.538 14.387 10.465 8.410 7.196 6.418 5.889 5.513
10.0 161.790 70.277 29.423 17.983 13.081 10.513 8.995 8.023 7.361 6.891
IEEE MODERATELY INVERSE
0.5 3.220 1.902 1.216 0.973 0.844 0.763 0.706 0.663 0.630 0.603
1.0 6.439 3.803 2.432 1.946 1.688 1.526 1.412 1.327 1.260 1.207
2.0 12.878 7.606 4.864 3.892 3.377 3.051 2.823 2.653 2.521 2.414
4.0 25.756 15.213 9.729 7.783 6.753 6.102 5.647 5.307 5.041 4.827
6.0 38.634 22.819 14.593 11.675 10.130 9.153 8.470 7.960 7.562 7.241
8.0 51.512 30.426 19.458 15.567 13.507 12.204 11.294 10.614 10.083 9.654
10.0 64.390 38.032 24.322 19.458 16.883 15.255 14.117 13.267 12.604 12.068
T TDM
A
I
I
pi ckup
----------------
\ .
| |
p
1
---------------------------------- B +
= T
RESET
TDM
t
r
I
I
pi ckup
----------------
\ .
| |
2
1
----------------------------------
=
5
IEC CURVES
For European applications, the relay offers three standard curves defined in IEC 255-4 and British standard BS142. These
are defined as IEC Curve A, IEC Curve B, and IEC Curve C. The formulae for these curves are:
, (EQ 5.5)
where: T = operate time (in seconds), TDM = Multiplier setting, I = input current, I
pickup
= Pickup Current setting, K, E =
constants, t
r
= characteristic constant, and T
RESET
= reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100%
and RESET is Timed)
Table 512: IEC (BS) INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS
IEC (BS) CURVE SHAPE K E T
R
IEC Curve A (BS142) 0.140 0.020 9.7
IEC Curve B (BS142) 13.500 1.000 43.2
IEC Curve C (BS142) 80.000 2.000 58.2
IEC Short Inverse 0.050 0.040 0.500
Table 513: IEC CURVE TRIP TIMES (IN SECONDS)
MULTIPLIER
(TDM)
CURRENT ( I / I
pickup
)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
IEC CURVE A
0.05 0.860 0.501 0.315 0.249 0.214 0.192 0.176 0.165 0.156 0.149
0.10 1.719 1.003 0.630 0.498 0.428 0.384 0.353 0.330 0.312 0.297
0.20 3.439 2.006 1.260 0.996 0.856 0.767 0.706 0.659 0.623 0.594
0.40 6.878 4.012 2.521 1.992 1.712 1.535 1.411 1.319 1.247 1.188
0.60 10.317 6.017 3.781 2.988 2.568 2.302 2.117 1.978 1.870 1.782
0.80 13.755 8.023 5.042 3.984 3.424 3.070 2.822 2.637 2.493 2.376
1.00 17.194 10.029 6.302 4.980 4.280 3.837 3.528 3.297 3.116 2.971
IEC CURVE B
0.05 1.350 0.675 0.338 0.225 0.169 0.135 0.113 0.096 0.084 0.075
0.10 2.700 1.350 0.675 0.450 0.338 0.270 0.225 0.193 0.169 0.150
0.20 5.400 2.700 1.350 0.900 0.675 0.540 0.450 0.386 0.338 0.300
0.40 10.800 5.400 2.700 1.800 1.350 1.080 0.900 0.771 0.675 0.600
0.60 16.200 8.100 4.050 2.700 2.025 1.620 1.350 1.157 1.013 0.900
0.80 21.600 10.800 5.400 3.600 2.700 2.160 1.800 1.543 1.350 1.200
1.00 27.000 13.500 6.750 4.500 3.375 2.700 2.250 1.929 1.688 1.500
IEC CURVE C
0.05 3.200 1.333 0.500 0.267 0.167 0.114 0.083 0.063 0.050 0.040
0.10 6.400 2.667 1.000 0.533 0.333 0.229 0.167 0.127 0.100 0.081
0.20 12.800 5.333 2.000 1.067 0.667 0.457 0.333 0.254 0.200 0.162
0.40 25.600 10.667 4.000 2.133 1.333 0.914 0.667 0.508 0.400 0.323
0.60 38.400 16.000 6.000 3.200 2.000 1.371 1.000 0.762 0.600 0.485
0.80 51.200 21.333 8.000 4.267 2.667 1.829 1.333 1.016 0.800 0.646
1.00 64.000 26.667 10.000 5.333 3.333 2.286 1.667 1.270 1.000 0.808
IEC SHORT TIME
0.05 0.153 0.089 0.056 0.044 0.038 0.034 0.031 0.029 0.027 0.026
0.10 0.306 0.178 0.111 0.088 0.075 0.067 0.062 0.058 0.054 0.052
0.20 0.612 0.356 0.223 0.175 0.150 0.135 0.124 0.115 0.109 0.104
0.40 1.223 0.711 0.445 0.351 0.301 0.269 0.247 0.231 0.218 0.207
0.60 1.835 1.067 0.668 0.526 0.451 0.404 0.371 0.346 0.327 0.311
0.80 2.446 1.423 0.890 0.702 0.602 0.538 0.494 0.461 0.435 0.415
1.00 3.058 1.778 1.113 0.877 0.752 0.673 0.618 0.576 0.544 0.518
T TDM
K
I I
pi ckup
( )
E
1
---------------------------------------
= T
RESET
TDM
t
r
I I
pi ckup
( )
2
1
---------------------------------------
=
5
IAC CURVES:
The curves for the General Electric type IAC relay family are derived from the formulae:
, (EQ 5.6)
where: T = operate time (in seconds), TDM = Multiplier setting, I = Input current, I
pkp
= Pickup Current setting, A to E =
constants, t
r
= characteristic constant, and T
RESET
= reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100%
and RESET is Timed)
Table 514: GE TYPE IAC INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS
IAC CURVE SHAPE A B C D E T
R
IAC Extreme Inverse 0.0040 0.6379 0.6200 1.7872 0.2461 6.008
IAC Very Inverse 0.0900 0.7955 0.1000 1.2885 7.9586 4.678
IAC Inverse 0.2078 0.8630 0.8000 0.4180 0.1947 0.990
IAC Short Inverse 0.0428 0.0609 0.6200 0.0010 0.0221 0.222
Table 515: IAC CURVE TRIP TIMES
MULTIPLIER
(TDM)
CURRENT ( I / I
pickup
)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
IAC EXTREMELY INVERSE
0.5 1.699 0.749 0.303 0.178 0.123 0.093 0.074 0.062 0.053 0.046
1.0 3.398 1.498 0.606 0.356 0.246 0.186 0.149 0.124 0.106 0.093
2.0 6.796 2.997 1.212 0.711 0.491 0.372 0.298 0.248 0.212 0.185
4.0 13.591 5.993 2.423 1.422 0.983 0.744 0.595 0.495 0.424 0.370
6.0 20.387 8.990 3.635 2.133 1.474 1.115 0.893 0.743 0.636 0.556
8.0 27.183 11.987 4.846 2.844 1.966 1.487 1.191 0.991 0.848 0.741
10.0 33.979 14.983 6.058 3.555 2.457 1.859 1.488 1.239 1.060 0.926
IAC VERY INVERSE
0.5 1.451 0.656 0.269 0.172 0.133 0.113 0.101 0.093 0.087 0.083
1.0 2.901 1.312 0.537 0.343 0.266 0.227 0.202 0.186 0.174 0.165
2.0 5.802 2.624 1.075 0.687 0.533 0.453 0.405 0.372 0.349 0.331
4.0 11.605 5.248 2.150 1.374 1.065 0.906 0.810 0.745 0.698 0.662
6.0 17.407 7.872 3.225 2.061 1.598 1.359 1.215 1.117 1.046 0.992
8.0 23.209 10.497 4.299 2.747 2.131 1.813 1.620 1.490 1.395 1.323
10.0 29.012 13.121 5.374 3.434 2.663 2.266 2.025 1.862 1.744 1.654
IAC INVERSE
0.5 0.578 0.375 0.266 0.221 0.196 0.180 0.168 0.160 0.154 0.148
1.0 1.155 0.749 0.532 0.443 0.392 0.360 0.337 0.320 0.307 0.297
2.0 2.310 1.499 1.064 0.885 0.784 0.719 0.674 0.640 0.614 0.594
4.0 4.621 2.997 2.128 1.770 1.569 1.439 1.348 1.280 1.229 1.188
6.0 6.931 4.496 3.192 2.656 2.353 2.158 2.022 1.921 1.843 1.781
8.0 9.242 5.995 4.256 3.541 3.138 2.878 2.695 2.561 2.457 2.375
10.0 11.552 7.494 5.320 4.426 3.922 3.597 3.369 3.201 3.072 2.969
IAC SHORT INVERSE
0.5 0.072 0.047 0.035 0.031 0.028 0.027 0.026 0.026 0.025 0.025
1.0 0.143 0.095 0.070 0.061 0.057 0.054 0.052 0.051 0.050 0.049
2.0 0.286 0.190 0.140 0.123 0.114 0.108 0.105 0.102 0.100 0.099
4.0 0.573 0.379 0.279 0.245 0.228 0.217 0.210 0.204 0.200 0.197
6.0 0.859 0.569 0.419 0.368 0.341 0.325 0.314 0.307 0.301 0.296
8.0 1.145 0.759 0.559 0.490 0.455 0.434 0.419 0.409 0.401 0.394
10.0 1.431 0.948 0.699 0.613 0.569 0.542 0.524 0.511 0.501 0.493
T TDM
A
B
I I
pkp
( ) C
------------------------------
D
I I
pkp
( ) C ( )
2
--------------------------------------
E
I I
pkp
( ) C ( )
3
-------------------------------------- + + +
\ .
|
| |
= T
RESET TDM
t
r
I I
pkp
( )
2
1
--------------------------------
=
5
I2t CURVES:
The curves for the I
2
t are derived from the formulae:
, (EQ 5.7)
where: T = Operate Time (sec.); TDM = Multiplier Setting; I = Input Current; I
pickup
= Pickup Current Setting;
T
RESET
= Reset Time in sec. (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)
FLEXCURVES:
The custom FlexCurves are described in detail in the FlexCurves section of this chapter. The curve shapes for the
FlexCurves are derived from the formulae:
(EQ 5.8)
(EQ 5.9)
where: T = Operate Time (sec.), TDM = Multiplier setting
I = Input Current, I
pickup
T
RESET
= Reset Time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)
DEFINITE TIME CURVE:
The Definite Time curve shape operates as soon as the pickup level is exceeded for a specified period of time. The base
definite time curve delay is in seconds. The curve multiplier of 0.00 to 600.00 makes this delay adjustable from instanta-
neous to 600.00 seconds in steps of 10 ms.
(EQ 5.10)
(EQ 5.11)
where: T = Operate Time (sec.), TDM = Multiplier setting
I = Input Current, I
pickup
T
RESET
= Reset Time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)
RECLOSER CURVES:
The B30 uses the FlexCurve feature to facilitate programming of 41 recloser curves. Please refer to the FlexCurve sec-
tion in this chapter for additional details.
Table 516: I
2
T CURVE TRIP TIMES
MULTIPLIER
(TDM)
CURRENT ( I / I
pickup
)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
0.01 0.44 0.25 0.11 0.06 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01
0.10 4.44 2.50 1.11 0.63 0.40 0.28 0.20 0.16 0.12 0.10
1.00 44.44 25.00 11.11 6.25 4.00 2.78 2.04 1.56 1.23 1.00
10.00 444.44 250.00 111.11 62.50 40.00 27.78 20.41 15.63 12.35 10.00
100.00 4444.4 2500.0 1111.1 625.00 400.00 277.78 204.08 156.25 123.46 100.00
600.00 26666.7 15000.0 6666.7 3750.0 2400.0 1666.7 1224.5 937.50 740.74 600.00
T TDM
100
I
I
pi ckup
----------------
\ .
| |
2
--------------------------
= T
RESET
TDM
100
I
I
pi ckup
----------------
\ .
| |
2
----------------------------
=
T TDM FlexCurve Time at
I
I
pi ckup
----------------
\ .
| |
= when
I
I
pi ckup
----------------
\ .
| |
1.00
T
RESET
TDM FlexCurve Time at
I
I
pi ckup
----------------
\ .
| |
when
I
I
pi ckup
----------------
\ .
| |
0.98 =
T TDM in seconds, when I I
pi ckup
> =
T
RESET
TDM in seconds =
5
c) PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT (ANSI 51P)
PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) ! PHASE CURRENT ! PHASE TOC1(6)
The phase time overcurrent element can provide a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied current or
be used as a simple Definite Time element. The phase current input quantities may be programmed as fundamental phasor
magnitude or total waveform RMS magnitude as required by the application.
Two methods of resetting operation are available: Timed and Instantaneous (refer to the Inverse TOC Curves Character-
istic sub-section earlier for details on curve setup, trip times and reset operation). When the element is blocked, the time
accumulator will reset according to the reset characteristic. For example, if the element reset characteristic is set to Instan-
taneous and the element is blocked, the time accumulator will be cleared immediately.
The PHASE TOC1 PICKUP setting can be dynamically reduced by a voltage restraint feature (when enabled). This is accom-
plished via the multipliers (Mvr) corresponding to the phase-phase voltages of the voltage restraint characteristic curve (see
the figure below); the pickup level is calculated as Mvr times the PHASE TOC1 PICKUP setting. If the voltage restraint feature
is disabled, the pickup level always remains at the setting value.
# PHASE TOC1
#
PHASE TOC1
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1 SIGNAL
SOURCE: SRC 1
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1
INPUT: Phasor
Range: Phasor, RMS
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1
CURVE: IEEE Mod Inv
Range: See Overcurrent Curve Types table
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1
TD MULTIPLIER: 1.00
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1
RESET: Instantaneous
Range: Instantaneous, Timed
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1 VOLTAGE
RESTRAINT: Disabled
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1 BLOCK A:
Off
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1 BLOCK B:
Off
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1 BLOCK C:
Off
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1
TARGET: Self-reset
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1
EVENTS: Disabled
5
Figure 538: PHASE TOC VOLTAGE RESTRAINT CHARACTERISTIC
Figure 539: PHASE TOC1 SCHEME LOGIC
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
0
818784A4.CDR
M
u
l
t
i
p
l
i
e
r
f
o
r
P
i
c
k
u
p
C
u
r
r
e
n
t
Phase-Phase Voltage VT Nominal Phase-phase Voltage
SETTING
SETTING
SETTING
SETTING
SETTING
MULTIPLY INPUTS
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETTING
PHASE TOC1
FUNCTION:
PHASE TOC1
BLOCK-A :
PHASE TOC1
BLOCK-C:
PHASE TOC1
BLOCK-B:
PHASE TOC1 VOLT
RESTRAINT:
PHASE TOC1 A PKP
PHASE TOC1 A DPO
PHASE TOC1 A OP
PHASE TOC1 B PKP
PHASE TOC1 B DPO
PHASE TOC1 B OP
PHASE TOC1 C PKP
PHASE TOC1 C DPO
PHASE TOC1 C OP
PHASE TOC1 PKP
PHASE TOC1 OP
PHASE TOC1
SOURCE:
PHASE TOC1
RESET:
PHASE TOC1
CURVE:
PHASE TOC1
PICKUP:
PHASE TOC1
INPUT:
IA
Seq=ABC Seq=ACB
Set
Multiplier
Set
Multiplier
Set
Multiplier
Set Pickup
Multiplier-Phase A
Calculate
Calculate
Calculate
Set Pickup
Multiplier-Phase B
Set Pickup
Multiplier-Phase C
RUN
IB
VAB VAC
RUN
IC
VBC VBA
VCA VCB
RUN
Off=0
Off=0
Off=0
Enabled
Enabled=1
Disabled=0
OR
AND
AND
AND
OR
827072A4.CDR
PHASE TOC1
TD MULTIPLIER:
RUN
RUN
RUN
IA PICKUP
t
t
t
IB PICKUP
IC PICKUP
SETTING
PHASE TOC1 DPO AND
5
d) PHASE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (ANSI 50P)
PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) ! PHASE CURRENT ! PHASE IOC 1(2)
Two instantaneous overcurrent elements facilitate applications including an external check zone function. For bus configu-
rations of up to 5 feeders, each with a second set of CTs, a check zone can be implemented by externally summing cur-
rents from the independent sets of CTs and connecting the resulting differential current to the sixth current input. In this
case, one element monitors the independently formed differential current and supervises the differential protection.
If applied, the overcurrent function responding to the independently formed differential signal should be used to supervise
the output from the main differential protection with a FlexLogic AND gate before driving the output contact. It is not rec-
ommended to use the drop-out operand of the overcurrent function as the block input to the Differential element. The differ-
ential element includes the saturation detector that responds to specific time relationships between the differential and
restraining currents, and therefore, it must be operational all the time in order to function properly.
The phase instantaneous overcurrent element may be used as an instantaneous element with no intentional delay or as a
Definite Time element. The input current is the fundamental phasor magnitude.
Figure 540: PHASE IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC
# PHASE IOC1
#
PHASE IOC1
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
PHASE IOC1 SIGNAL
SOURCE: SRC 1
MESSAGE
PHASE IOC1
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
MESSAGE
PHASE IOC1 PICKUP
DELAY: 0.00 s
MESSAGE
PHASE IOC1 RESET
DELAY: 0.00 s
MESSAGE
PHASE IOC1 BLOCK A:
Off
MESSAGE
PHASE IOC1 BLOCK B:
Off
MESSAGE
PHASE IOC1 BLOCK C:
Off
MESSAGE
PHASE IOC1
TARGET: Self-reset
MESSAGE
PHASE IOC1
EVENTS: Disabled
IA PICKUP
SETTING
PHASE IOC1
FUNCTION:
Enabled = 1
Disabled = 0
SETTING
PHASE IOC1
SOURCE:
IA
IB
IC
PHASE IOC1
BLOCK-A:
Off = 0
SETTING
SETTING
IB PICKUP
RUN
PHASE IOC1
PICKUP:
RUN
IC PICKUP
RUN
PHASE IOC1
PICKUPDELAY:
SETTINGS
PHASE IOC1 RESET
DELAY:
t
PKP
t
RST
t
PKP
t
RST
t
PKP
t
RST
827033A6.VSD
FLEXLOGIC
OPERANDS
PHASE IOC1 B PKP
PHASE IOC1 B DPO
PHASE IOC1 PKP
PHASE IOC1 C PKP
PHASE IOC1 C DPO
PHASE IOC1 A OP
PHASE IOC1 B OP
PHASE IOC1 OP
OR
AND
OR
AND
AND
PHASE IOC1 A DPO
PHASE IOC1 A PKP
PHASE IOC1 C OP
PHASE IOC1
BLOCK-B:
Off = 0
SETTING
PHASE IOC1
BLOCK-C:
Off = 0
SETTING
PHASE IOC1 DPO AND
5
5.5.5 NEUTRAL CURRENT
a) NEUTRAL TIME OVERCURRENT (ANSI 51N)
PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" NEUTRAL CURRENT ! NEUTRAL TOC1
The Neutral Time Overcurrent element can provide a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied current
or be used as a simple Definite Time element. The neutral current input value is a quantity calculated as 3Io from the phase
currents and may be programmed as fundamental phasor magnitude or total waveform RMS magnitude as required by the
application.
Two methods of resetting operation are available: Timed and Instantaneous (refer to the Inverse TOC Curve Character-
istics section for details on curve setup, trip times and reset operation). When the element is blocked, the time accumulator
will reset according to the reset characteristic. For example, if the element reset characteristic is set to Instantaneous and
the element is blocked, the time accumulator will be cleared immediately.
Figure 541: NEUTRAL TOC1 SCHEME LOGIC
# NEUTRAL TOC1
#
NEUTRAL TOC1
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL TOC1 SIGNAL
SOURCE: SRC 1
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL TOC1
INPUT: Phasor
Range: Phasor, RMS
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL TOC1
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL TOC1
CURVE: IEEE Mod Inv
Range: See OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES table
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL TOC1
TD MULTIPLIER: 1.00
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL TOC1
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL TOC1 BLOCK:
Off
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL TOC1
TARGET: Self-reset
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL TOC1
EVENTS: Disabled
SETTING
NEUTRAL TOC1
FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1
SETTING
NEUTRAL TOC1
SOURCE:
IN
NEUTRAL TOC1
BLOCK:
Off = 0
NEUTRAL TOC1
CURVE:
NEUTRAL TOC1
TD MULTIPLIER:
NEUTRAL TOC 1
RESET:
SETTINGS
SETTING
IN PICKUP
I
t
NEUTRAL TOC1
PICKUP:
RUN
827034A3.VSD
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
NEUTRAL TOC1 DPO
NEUTRAL TOC1 OP
NEUTRAL TOC1
INPUT:
AND
NEUTRAL TOC1 PKP
5
b) NEUTRAL INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (ANSI 50N)
PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" NEUTRAL CURRENT !" NEUTRAL IOC1(6)
The Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent element may be used as an instantaneous function with no intentional delay or as a
Definite Time function. The element essentially responds to the magnitude of a neutral current fundamental frequency pha-
sor calculated from the phase currents. A positive-sequence restraint is applied for better performance. A small portion
(6.25%) of the positive-sequence current magnitude is subtracted from the zero-sequence current magnitude when forming
the operating quantity of the element as follows:
(EQ 5.12)
The positive-sequence restraint allows for more sensitive settings by counterbalancing spurious zero-sequence currents
resulting from:
system unbalances under heavy load conditions
transformation errors of current transformers (CTs) during double-line and three-phase faults
switch-off transients during double-line and three-phase faults
The positive-sequence restraint must be considered when testing for pickup accuracy and response time (multiple of
pickup). The operating quantity depends on how test currents are injected into the relay (single-phase injection:
; three-phase pure zero-sequence injection: ).
Figure 542: NEUTRAL IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC
# NEUTRAL IOC1
#
NEUTRAL IOC1
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL IOC1 SIGNAL
SOURCE: SRC 1
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL IOC1
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL IOC1 PICKUP
DELAY: 0.00 s
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL IOC1 RESET
DELAY: 0.00 s
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL IOC1 BLOCK:
Off
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL IOC1
TARGET: Self-reset
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL IOC1
EVENTS: Disabled
I
op
3 I_0 K I_1 ( ) = where K 1 16 =
I
op
0.9375 I
i nj ected
= I
op
3 I
i nj ected
=
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
NEUTRAL IOC1 FUNCTION:
NEUTRAL IOC1 PICKUP:
NEUTRAL IOC1 SOURCE:
NEUTRAL IOC1 BLOCK:
NEUTRAL IOC1 DPO
NEUTRAL IOC1 OP
NEUTRAL IOC1 PKP
RUN AND
827035A4.CDR
SETTING
SETTING
Enabled=1
Disabled=0
SETTING
SETTING
I_0
Off=0
SETTINGS
NEUTRAL IOC1
RESET DELAY :
NEUTRAL IOC1
PICKUP DELAY :
tPKP
tRST
3( _0 - K _1 ) PICKUP I I
5
5.5.6 GROUND CURRENT
a) GROUND TIME OVERCURRENT (ANSI 51G)
PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" GROUND CURRENT ! GROUND TOC1(6)
This element can provide a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied current or be used as a simple
Definite Time element. The ground current input value is the quantity measured by the ground input CT and is the funda-
mental phasor or RMS magnitude. Two methods of resetting operation are available; Timed and Instantaneous (refer to
the Inverse Time Overcurrent Curve Characteristics section for details). When the element is blocked, the time accumulator
will reset according to the reset characteristic. For example, if the element reset characteristic is set to Instantaneous and
the element is blocked, the time accumulator will be cleared immediately.
These elements measure the current that is connected to the ground channel of a CT/VT module. This channel
may be equipped with a standard or sensitive input. The conversion range of a standard channel is from 0.02 to 46
times the CT rating. The conversion range of a sensitive channel is from 0.002 to 4.6 times the CT rating.
Figure 543: GROUND TOC1 SCHEME LOGIC
# GROUND TOC1
#
GROUND TOC1
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
GROUND TOC1 SIGNAL
SOURCE: SRC 1
MESSAGE
GROUND TOC1
INPUT: Phasor
Range: Phasor, RMS
MESSAGE
GROUND TOC1
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
MESSAGE
GROUND TOC1
CURVE: IEEE Mod Inv
Range: see the Overcurrent Curve Types table
MESSAGE
GROUND TOC1
TD MULTIPLIER: 1.00
MESSAGE
GROUND TOC1
MESSAGE
GROUND TOC1 BLOCK:
Off
MESSAGE
GROUND TOC1
TARGET: Self-reset
MESSAGE
GROUND TOC1
EVENTS: Disabled
NOTE
SETTING
GROUND TOC1
FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1
SETTING
GROUND TOC1
SOURCE:
IG
GROUND TOC1
BLOCK:
Off = 0
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
GROUND TOC1 DPO
GROUND TOC1 OP
GROUND TOC1
CURVE:
GROUND TOC1
TD MULTIPLIER:
GROUND TOC 1
RESET:
SETTINGS
SETTING
IG PICKUP
I
t
GROUND TOC1
PICKUP:
RUN
827036A3.VSD
GROUND TOC1
INPUT:
AND
GROUND TOC1 PKP
5
b) GROUND INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (ANSI 50G)
PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" GROUND CURRENT !" GROUND IOC1(6)
The Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent element may be used as an instantaneous element with no intentional delay or as
a Definite Time element. The ground current input is the quantity measured by the ground input CT and is the fundamental
phasor magnitude.
Figure 544: GROUND IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC
These elements measure the current that is connected to the ground channel of a CT/VT module. This channel
may be equipped with a standard or sensitive input. The conversion range of a standard channel is from 0.02 to 46
times the CT rating. The conversion range of a sensitive channel is from 0.002 to 4.6 times the CT rating.
# GROUND IOC1
#
GROUND IOC1
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
GROUND IOC1 SIGNAL
SOURCE: SRC 1
MESSAGE
GROUND IOC1
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
MESSAGE
GROUND IOC1 PICKUP
DELAY: 0.00 s
MESSAGE
GROUND IOC1 RESET
DELAY: 0.00 s
MESSAGE
GROUND IOC1 BLOCK:
Off
MESSAGE
GROUND IOC1
TARGET: Self-reset
MESSAGE
GROUND IOC1
EVENTS: Disabled
SETTING
GROUND IOC1
FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1
SETTING
GROUND IOC1
SOURCE:
IG
GROUND IOC1
BLOCK:
Off = 0
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
GROUND IOIC DPO
GROUND IOC1 OP
SETTING
SETTING
IG PICKUP
GROUND IOC1
PICKUP:
RUN
GROUND IOC1 PICKUP
DELAY:
SETTINGS
GROUND IOC1 RESET
DELAY:
t
PKP
t
RST
827037A4.VSD
AND
GROUND IOC1 PKP
NOTE
5
5.5.7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
These protection elements can be used for a variety of applications such as:
Undervoltage Protection: For voltage sensitive loads, such as induction motors, a drop in voltage increases the drawn
current which may cause dangerous overheating in the motor. The undervoltage protection feature can be used to either
cause a trip or generate an alarm when the voltage drops below a specified voltage setting for a specified time delay.
Permissive Functions: The undervoltage feature may be used to block the functioning of external devices by operating an
output relay when the voltage falls below the specified voltage setting. The undervoltage feature may also be used to block
the functioning of other elements through the block feature of those elements.
Source Transfer Schemes: In the event of an undervoltage, a transfer signal may be generated to transfer a load from its
normal source to a standby or emergency power source.
The undervoltage elements can be programmed to have a Definite Time delay characteristic. The Definite Time curve oper-
ates when the voltage drops below the pickup level for a specified period of time. The time delay is adjustable from 0 to
600.00 seconds in steps of 10 ms. The undervoltage elements can also be programmed to have an inverse time delay
characteristic. The undervoltage delay setting defines the family of curves shown below.
Figure 545: INVERSE TIME UNDERVOLTAGE CURVES
# VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
#
# PHASE
# UNDERVOLTAGE1
See page 583.
MESSAGE
# PHASE
# UNDERVOLTAGE2
See page 583.
MESSAGE
# NEUTRAL OV1
#
See page 584.
MESSAGE
# AUXILIARY OV1
#
See page 585.
D=5.0 2.0 1.0
0.0
2.0
4.0
6.0
8.0
10.0
12.0
14.0
16.0
18.0
20.0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
% of V pickup
T
i
m
e
(
s
e
c
o
n
d
s
)
where: T = Operating Time
D = Undervoltage Delay Setting
(D = 0.00 operates instantaneously)
V = Secondary Voltage applied to the relay
V
pickup
= Pickup Level
At 0% of pickup, the operating time equals the
UNDERVOLTAGE DELAY setting.
T
D
1
V
V
pi ckup
------------------
\ .
| |
---------------------------------- =
NOTE
5
b) PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE (ANSI 27P)
PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" VOLTAGE ELEMENTS ! PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE1(2)
Two undervoltage elements facilitate applications including undervoltage supervision of the main bus differential protection
to prevent maloperation in the event of CT trouble.
In this scheme, the normal voltage level halts the differential element. An actual bus fault operates the undervoltage ele-
ment, thereby permitting the differential element to operate. This can be applied for bus configurations of up to 5 feeders
with the voltage signal available. If applied, use the undervoltage function to supervise the main differential output with an
AND gate in the FlexLogic equation before driving the output contact.
Using the drop-out undervoltage operand as the Block input to the differential element is not recommended. The differential
element includes the saturation detector that responds to certain time relationships between the differential and restraining
currents, and therefore, it must be operational all the time in order to function properly.
This element may be used to give a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied fundamental voltage
(phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase for Wye VT connection, or phase-to-phase for Delta VT connection) or as a Definite
Time element. The element resets instantaneously if the applied voltage exceeds the dropout voltage. The delay setting
selects the minimum operating time of the phase undervoltage. The minimum voltage setting selects the operating voltage
below which the element is blocked (a setting of 0 will allow a dead source to be considered a fault condition).
# PHASE
# UNDERVOLTAGE1
PHASE UV1
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
PHASE UV1 SIGNAL
SOURCE: SRC 1
MESSAGE
PHASE UV1 MODE:
Phase to Ground
Range: Phase to Ground, Phase to Phase
MESSAGE
PHASE UV1
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
MESSAGE
PHASE UV1
CURVE: Definite Time
Range: Definite Time, Inverse Time
MESSAGE
PHASE UV1
DELAY: 1.00 s
MESSAGE
PHASE UV1 MINIMUM
VOLTAGE: 0.100 pu
MESSAGE
PHASE UV1 BLOCK:
Off
MESSAGE
PHASE UV1
TARGET: Self-reset
MESSAGE
PHASE UV1
EVENTS: Disabled
5
Figure 546: PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE1 SCHEME LOGIC
c) NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE (ANSI 59N)
PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" VOLTAGE ELEMENTS !" NEUTRAL OV1
The Neutral Overvoltage element can be used to detect asymmetrical system voltage condition due to a ground fault or to
the loss of one or two phases of the source. The element responds to the system neutral voltage (3V_0), calculated from
the phase voltages. The nominal secondary voltage of the phase voltage channels entered under SETTINGS !" SYSTEM
SETUP ! AC INPUTS !" VOLTAGE BANK ! PHASE VT SECONDARY is the p.u. base used when setting the pickup level.
VT errors and normal voltage unbalance must be considered when setting this element. This function requires the VTs to
be Wye connected.
# NEUTRAL OV1
#
NEUTRAL OV1
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL OV1 SIGNAL
SOURCE: SRC 1
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP:
0.300 pu
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP:
DELAY: 1.00 s
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL OV1 RESET:
DELAY: 1.00 s
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL OV1 BLOCK:
Off
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL OV1 TARGET:
Self-reset
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL OV1 EVENTS:
Disabled
PHASE UV1
FUNCTION:
PHASE UV1
BLOCK:
PHASE UV1 SOURCE:
PHASE UV1 MODE:
PHASE UV1
PICKUP:
PHASE UV1
CURVE:
PHASE UV1
DELAY:
PHASE UV1
MINIMUM VOLTAGE:
Disabled = 0
Off = 0
Source VT = Delta
Phase to Ground Phase to Phase
RUN
RUN
VCG or VCA PICKUP
VBG or VBC PICKUP
VAG or VAB Minimum
VBG or VBC Minimum
VCG or VCA Minimum
Source VT = Wye
VAG VAB
VBG VBC
VCG VCA
Enabled = 1
VAB
VBC
VCA
PHASE UV1 A PKP
PHASE UV1 B PKP
PHASE UV1 C PKP
PHASE UV1 PKP
PHASE UV1 A DPO
PHASE UV1 B DPO
PHASE UV1 C DPO
PHASE UV1 A OP
PHASE UV1 B OP
PHASE UV1 C OP
PHASE UV1 OP
AND
SETTING
SETTING
SETTING
SETTING
SETTING
SETTING
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
827039AB.CDR
AND
AND
AND
OR
OR
<
<
<
<
<
}
t
V
t
t
V
V
VAG or VAB PICKUP < RUN
PHASE UV1 DPO
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
5
Figure 547: NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE1 SCHEME LOGIC
d) AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE (ANSI 27X)
PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" VOLTAGE ELEMENTS !" AUXILIARY OV1
This element is intended for monitoring overvoltage conditions of the auxiliary voltage. The nominal secondary voltage of
the auxiliary voltage channel entered under SYSTEM SETUP ! AC INPUTS "! VOLTAGE BANK X5 "! AUXILIARY VT X5 SEC-
ONDARY is the p.u. base used when setting the pickup level.
Figure 548: AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE SCHEME LOGIC
# AUXILIARY OV1
#
AUX OV1
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
AUX OV1 SIGNAL
SOURCE: SRC 1
MESSAGE
AUX OV1 PICKUP:
0.300 pu
MESSAGE
AUX OV1 PICKUP
DELAY: 1.00 s
MESSAGE
AUX OV1 RESET
DELAY: 1.00 s
MESSAGE
AUX OV1 BLOCK:
Off
MESSAGE
AUX OV1 TARGET:
Self-reset
MESSAGE
AUX OV1 EVENTS:
Disabled
827848A1.CDR
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
NEUTRAL OV1
FUNCTION:
NEUTRAL OV1 BLOCK:
NEUTRAL OV1 SIGNAL
SOURCE:
NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP:
NEUTRAL OV1 DPO
NEUTRAL OV1 OP
NEUTRAL OV1 PKP
RUN AND
SETTING
SETTING
NEUTRAL OV1 RESET
DELAY :
NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP
DELAY :
SETTING
Enabled=1
Disabled=0
tPKP
tRST
SETTING
SETTING
Off=0
ZERO SEQ VOLT (V_0)
3V_0 Pickup <
827836A2.CDR
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AUX OV1
FUNCTION:
AUX OV1 BLOCK:
AUX OV1 SIGNAL
SOURCE:
AUX OV1 PICKUP:
AUX OV1 DPO
AUX OV1 OP
AUX OV1 PKP
RUN AND
SETTING
SETTING
AUX OV1 RESET
DELAY :
AUX OV1 PICKUP
DELAY :
SETTING
Enabled=1
Disabled=0
tPKP
tRST
SETTING
SETTING
Off=0
AUXILIARY VOLT (Vx)
Vx Pickup <
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS 5 SETTINGS
5
5.6CONTROL ELEMENTS 5.6.1 OVERVIEW
Control elements are generally used for control rather than protection. See the Introduction to Elements section at the
beginning of this chapter for further information.
5.6.2 SETTING GROUPS
PATH: SETTINGS !" CONTROL ELEMENTS ! SETTINGS GROUPS
The Setting Groups menu controls the activation/deactivation of up to six possible groups of settings in the GROUPED ELE-
MENTS settings menu. The faceplate Settings In Use LEDs indicate which active group (with a non-flashing energized
LED) is in service.
The SETTING GROUPS BLK setting prevents the active setting group from changing when the FlexLogic parameter is set to
"On". This can be useful in applications where it is undesirable to change the settings under certain conditions, such as the
breaker being open.
Each GROUP n ACTIVATE ON setting selects a FlexLogic operand which, when set, will make the particular setting group
active for use by any grouped element. A priority scheme ensures that only one group is active at a given time the high-
est-numbered group which is activated by its GROUP n ACTIVATE ON parameter takes priority over the lower-numbered
groups. There is no activate on setting for Group 1 (the default active group), because Group 1 automatically becomes
active if no other group is active.
The relay can be set up via a FlexLogic equation to receive requests to activate or de-activate a particular non-default
settings group. The following FlexLogic equation (see the figure below) illustrates requests via remote communications
(e.g. VIRTUAL INPUT 1) or from a local contact input (e.g. H7a) to initiate the use of a particular settings group, and requests
from several overcurrent pickup measuring elements to inhibit the use of the particular settings group. The assigned VIR-
TUAL OUTPUT 1 operand is used to control the On state of a particular settings group.
Figure 549: EXAMPLE FLEXLOGIC CONTROL OF A SETTINGS GROUP
# SETTING GROUPS
#
SETTING GROUPS
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
SETTING GROUPS BLK:
Off
MESSAGE
GROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON:
Off
MESSAGE
GROUP 6 ACTIVATE ON:
Off
MESSAGE
SETTING GROUP
EVENTS: Disabled
5 SETTINGS 5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS
5
5.6.3 SELECTOR SWITCH
PATH: SETTINGS !" CONTROL ELEMENTS !" SELECTOR SWITCH ! SELECTOR SWITCH 1(2)
The Selector Switch element is intended to replace a mechanical selector switch. Typical applications include setting group
control or control of multiple logic sub-circuits in user-programmable logic.
The element provides for two control inputs. The step-up control allows stepping through selector position one step at a
time with each pulse of the control input, such as a user-programmable pushbutton. The 3-bit control input allows setting
the selector to the position defined by a 3-bit word.
The element allows pre-selecting a new position without applying it. The pre-selected position gets applied either after time-
out or upon acknowledgement via separate inputs (user setting). The selector position is stored in non-volatile memory.
Upon power-up, either the previous position is restored or the relay synchronizes to the current 3-bit word (user setting).
Basic alarm functionality alerts the user under abnormal conditions; e.g. the 3-bit control input being out of range.
SELECTOR 1 FULL RANGE: This setting defines the upper position of the selector. When stepping up through avail-
able positions of the selector, the upper position wraps up to the lower position (Position 1). When using a direct 3-bit
control word for programming the selector to a desired position, the change would take place only if the control word is
within the range of 1 to the SELECTOR FULL RANGE. If the control word is outside the range, an alarm is established by
setting the SELECTOR ALARM FlexLogic operand for 3 seconds.
SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT: This setting defines the time-out period for the selector. This value is used by the relay in
the following two ways. When the SELECTOR STEP-UP MODE is Time-out, the setting specifies the required period of
# SELECTOR SWITCH 1
#
SELECTOR 1 FUNCTION:
Disabled
MESSAGE
SELECTOR 1 FULL
RANGE: 7
MESSAGE
SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT:
5.0 s
MESSAGE
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP:
Off
MESSAGE
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP
MODE: Time-out
Range: Time-out, Acknowledge
MESSAGE
SELECTOR 1 ACK:
Off
MESSAGE
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0:
Off
MESSAGE
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A1:
Off
MESSAGE
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A2:
Off
MESSAGE
SELECTOR 1 3BIT
MODE: Time-out
Range: Time-out, Acknowledge
MESSAGE
SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK:
Off
MESSAGE
SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP
MODE: Restore
Range: Restore, Synchronize, Sync/Restore
MESSAGE
SELECTOR 1 TARGETS:
Self-reset
MESSAGE
SELECTOR 1 EVENTS:
Disabled
5
inactivity of the control input after which the pre-selected position is automatically applied. When the SELECTOR STEP-
UP MODE is Acknowledge, the setting specifies the period of time for the acknowledging input to appear. The timer is
re-started by any activity of the control input. The acknowledging input must come before the SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT
timer expires; otherwise, the change will not take place and an alarm will be set.
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP: This setting specifies a control input for the selector switch. The switch is shifted to a new
position at each rising edge of this signal. The position changes incrementally, wrapping up from the last (SELECTOR 1
FULL RANGE) to the first (Position 1). Consecutive pulses of this control operand must not occur faster than every
50 ms. After each rising edge of the assigned operand, the time-out timer is restarted and the SELECTOR SWITCH 1:
POS Z CHNG INITIATED target message is displayed, where Z the pre-selected position. The message is displayed for
the time specified by the FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting. The pre-selected position is applied after the selector times out
(Time-out mode), or when the acknowledging signal appears before the element times out (Acknowledge mode).
When the new position is applied, the relay displays the SELECTOR SWITCH 1: POSITION Z IN USE message. Typically,
a user-programmable pushbutton is configured as the stepping up control input.
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP MODE: This setting defines the selector mode of operation. When set to Time-out, the
selector will change its position after a pre-defined period of inactivity at the control input. The change is automatic and
does not require any explicit confirmation of the intent to change the selector's position. When set to Acknowledge,
the selector will change its position only after the intent is confirmed through a separate acknowledging signal. If the
acknowledging signal does not appear within a pre-defined period of time, the selector does not accept the change
and an alarm is established by setting the SELECTOR STP ALARM output FlexLogic operand for 3 seconds.
SELECTOR 1 ACK: This setting specifies an acknowledging input for the stepping up control input. The pre-selected
position is applied on the rising edge of the assigned operand. This setting is active only under Acknowledge mode of
operation. The acknowledging signal must appear within the time defined by the SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT setting after the
last activity of the control input. A user-programmable pushbutton is typically configured as the acknowledging input.
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0, A1, and A2: These settings specify a 3-bit control input of the selector. The 3-bit control word
pre-selects the position using the following encoding convention:
The rest position (0, 0, 0) does not generate an action and is intended for situations when the device generating the
3-bit control word is having a problem. When SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE is Time-out, the pre-selected position is applied
in SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT seconds after the last activity of the 3-bit input. When SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE is Acknowl-
edge, the pre-selected position is applied on the rising edge of the SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK acknowledging input.
The stepping up control input (SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP) and the 3-bit control inputs (SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0 through A2) lock-
out mutually: once the stepping up sequence is initiated, the 3-bit control input is inactive; once the 3-bit control
sequence is initiated, the stepping up input is inactive.
SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE: This setting defines the selector mode of operation. When set to Time-out, the selector
changes its position after a pre-defined period of inactivity at the control input. The change is automatic and does not
require explicit confirmation to change the selector position. When set to Acknowledge, the selector changes its posi-
tion only after confirmation via a separate acknowledging signal. If the acknowledging signal does not appear within a
pre-defined period of time, the selector rejects the change and an alarm established by invoking the SELECTOR BIT
ALARM FlexLogic operand for 3 seconds.
SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK: This setting specifies an acknowledging input for the 3-bit control input. The pre-selected
position is applied on the rising edge of the assigned FlexLogic operand. This setting is active only under the
Acknowledge mode of operation. The acknowledging signal must appear within the time defined by the SELECTOR
TIME-OUT setting after the last activity of the 3-bit control inputs. Note that the stepping up control input and 3-bit control
input have independent acknowledging signals (SELECTOR 1 ACK and SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK, accordingly).
A2 A1 A0 POSITION
0 0 0 rest
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 2
0 1 1 3
1 0 0 4
1 0 1 5
1 1 0 6
1 1 1 7
5
SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP MODE: This setting specifies behavior of the element on power up of the relay. When set
to Restore, the last selector position, stored in non-volatile memory, is restored after powering up the relay. When set
to Synchronize, the selector sets to the current 3-bit control input after powering up the relay. This operation does not
wait for time-out or the acknowledging input. When powering up, the rest position (0, 0, 0) and the out-of-range 3-bit
control words are also ignored, the output is set to Position 0 (no output operand selected), and an alarm is established
(SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM). If the position restored from memory is out-of-range, Position 0 (no output operand
selected) is applied and an alarm is set (SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM).
SELECTOR 1 EVENTS: If enabled, the following events are logged:
The following figures illustrate the operation of the Selector Switch. In these diagrams, T represents a time-out setting.
Figure 550: TIME-OUT MODE
EVENT NAME DESCRIPTION
SELECTOR 1 POS Z Selector 1 changed its position to Z.
SELECTOR 1 STP ALARM The selector position pre-selected via the stepping up control input has not been
confirmed before the time out.
SELECTOR 1 BIT ALARM The selector position pre-selected via the 3-bit control input has not been confirmed
before the time out.
842737A1.CDR
STEP-UP
3BIT A0
3BIT A1
3BIT A2
POS 1
POS 2
POS 3
POS 4
POS 5
POS 6
POS 7
BIT 0
BIT 1
BIT 2
pre-existing
position 2
changed to 4 with
a pushbutton
changed to 1 with
a 3-bit input
changed to 2 with a
pushbutton
T T
T T
changed to 7 with
a 3-bit input
STP ALARM
BIT ALARM
ALARM
5
Figure 551: ACKNOWLEDGE MODE
842736A1.CDR
STEP-UP
ACK
3BIT A0
3BIT A1
3BIT A2
3BIT ACK
POS 1
POS 2
POS 3
POS 4
POS 5
POS 6
POS 7
BIT 0
BIT 1
BIT 2
pre-existing
position 2
changed to 4 with
a pushbutton
changed to 1 with
a 3-bit input
changed to 2 with
a pushbutton
STP ALARM
BIT ALARM
ALARM
5
APPLICATION EXAMPLE
Consider an application where the selector switch is used to control Setting Groups 1 through 4 in the relay. The setting
groups are to be controlled from both User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 and from an external device via Contact Inputs 1
through 3. The active setting group shall be available as an encoded 3-bit word to the external device and SCADA via out-
put contacts 1 through 3. The pre-selected setting group shall be applied automatically after 5 seconds of inactivity of the
control inputs. When the relay powers up, it should synchronize the setting group to the 3-bit control input.
Make the following changes to Setting Group Control in the SETTINGS !" CONTROL ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUPS menu:
SETTING GROUPS FUNCTION: Enabled GROUP 4 ACTIVATE ON: SELECTOR 1 POS 4"
SETTING GROUPS BLK: Off GROUP 5 ACTIVATE ON: Off
GROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON: SELECTOR 1 POS 2" GROUP 6 ACTIVATE ON: Off
GROUP 3 ACTIVATE ON: SELECTOR 1 POS 3"
Make the following changes to Selector Switch element in the SETTINGS !" CONTROL ELEMENTS !" SELECTOR SWITCH !
SELECTOR SWITCH 1 menu to assign control to User Programmable Pushbutton 1 and Contact Inputs 1 through 3:
SELECTOR 1 FUNCTION: Enabled SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0: CONT IP 1 ON
SELECTOR 1 FULL-RANGE: 4 SELECTOR 1 3BIT A1: CONT IP 2 ON
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP MODE: Time-out SELECTOR 1 3BIT A2: CONT IP 3 ON
SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT: 5.0 s SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE: Time-out
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP: PUSHBUTTON 1 ON SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK: Off
SELECTOR 1 ACK: Off SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP MODE: Synchronize
Now, assign the contact output operation (assume the H6E module) to the Selector Switch element by making the following
changes in the SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUTS !" CONTACT OUTPUTS menu:
OUTPUT H1 OPERATE: SELECTOR 1 BIT 0"
Finally, assign configure User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 by making the following changes in the SETTINGS ! PRODUCT
SETUP !" USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS ! USER PUSHBUTTON 1 menu:
PUSHBUTTON 1 DROP-OUT TIME: 0.10 s
The logic for the selector switch is shown below:
Figure 552: SELECTOR SWITCH LOGIC
842012A1.CDR
step up
acknowledge
3-bit position out
on
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SELECTOR 1 POS 1
SELECTOR 1 POS 2
SELECTOR 1 POS 3
SELECTOR 1 POS 4
SELECTOR 1 POS 5
SELECTOR 1 POS 6
SELECTOR 1 POS 7
SELECTOR 1 STP ALARM
SELECTOR 1 BIT ALARM
SELECTOR 1 ALARM
SELECTOR 1 BIT 0
SELECTOR 1 BIT 1
SELECTOR 1 BIT 2
O
R
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
RUN
SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP MODE:
SETTINGS
SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT:
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP MODE:
SELECTOR 1 FULL RANGE:
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP:
Off
SELECTOR 1 FUNCTION:
SETTINGS
Enabled = 1
SELECTOR 1 ACK:
Off
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0:
Off
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A1:
Off
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A2:
Off
SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK:
Off
3-bit
acknowledge
SELECTOR 1 POSITION
ACTUAL VALUE
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE:
SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM
3
-
b
i
t
c
o
n
t
r
o
l
i
n
5
5.6.4 DIGITAL ELEMENTS
PATH: SETTINGS !" CONTROL ELEMENTS !" DIGITAL ELEMENTS ! DIGITAL ELEMENT 1(16)
There are 16 identical Digital Elements available, numbered 1 to 16. A digital element can monitor any FlexLogic oper-
and and present a target message and/or enable events recording depending on the output operand state. The digital ele-
ment settings include a name which will be referenced in any target message, a blocking input from any selected
FlexLogic operand, and a timer for pickup and reset delays for the output operand.
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 INPUT: Selects a FlexLogic operand to be monitored by the digital element.
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 PICKUP DELAY: Sets the time delay to pickup. If a pickup delay is not required, set to "0".
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 RESET DELAY: Sets the time delay to reset. If a reset delay is not required, set to 0.
Figure 553: DIGITAL ELEMENT SCHEME LOGIC
CIRCUIT MONITORING APPLICATIONS:
Some versions of the digital input modules include an active Voltage Monitor circuit connected across Form-A contacts.
The voltage monitor circuit limits the trickle current through the output circuit (see technical specifications for Form-A).
As long as the current through the Voltage Monitor is above a threshold (see technical specifications for Form-A), the Flex-
Logic operand "Cont Op # VOn" will be set. (# represents the output contact number). If the output circuit has a high
resistance or the DC current is interrupted, the trickle current will drop below the threshold and the FlexLogic operand
"Cont Op # VOff" will be set. Consequently, the state of these operands can be used as indicators of the integrity of the cir-
cuits in which Form-A contacts are inserted.
# DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
#
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
DIG ELEM 1 NAME:
Dig Element 1
Range: 16 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
DIG ELEM 1 INPUT:
Off
MESSAGE
DIG ELEM 1 PICKUP
DELAY: 0.000 s
MESSAGE
DIG ELEM 1 RESET
DELAY: 0.000 s
MESSAGE
DIG ELEM 1 BLOCK:
Off
MESSAGE
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
TARGET: Self-reset
MESSAGE
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
EVENTS: Disabled
SETTING
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01
FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01
BLOCK:
Off = 0
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
DIG ELEM 01 DPO
DIG ELEM 01 PKP
SETTING
827042A1.VSD
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01
INPUT:
Off = 0
SETTING
INPUT = 1
RUN
t
PKP
t
RST
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01
PICKUP DELAY:
SETTINGS
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01
RESET DELAY:
AND
SETTING
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01
NAME:
DIG ELEM 01 OP
5
EXAMPLE 1: BREAKER TRIP CIRCUIT INTEGRITY MONITORING
In many applications it is desired to monitor the breaker trip circuit integrity so problems can be detected before a trip oper-
ation is required. The circuit is considered to be healthy when the voltage monitor connected across the trip output contact
detects a low level of current, well below the operating current of the breaker trip coil. If the circuit presents a high resis-
tance, the trickle current will fall below the monitor threshold and an alarm would be declared.
In most breaker control circuits, the trip coil is connected in series with a breaker auxiliary contact which is open when the
breaker is open (see diagram below). To prevent unwanted alarms in this situation, the trip circuit monitoring logic must
include the breaker position.
Figure 554: TRIP CIRCUIT EXAMPLE 1
Assume the output contact H1 is a trip contact. Using the contact output settings, this output will be given an ID name, e.g.
Cont Op 1". Assume a 52a breaker auxiliary contact is connected to contact input H7a to monitor breaker status. Using the
contact input settings, this input will be given an ID name, e.g. Cont Ip 1" and will be set On when the breaker is closed.
Using Digital Element 1 to monitor the breaker trip circuit, the settings will be:
The PICKUP DELAY setting should be greater than the operating time of the breaker to avoid nuisance
alarms.
# DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
#
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
FUNCTION: Enabled
MESSAGE
DIG ELEM 1 NAME:
Bkr Trip Cct Out
MESSAGE
DIG ELEM 1 INPUT:
Cont Op 1 VOff
MESSAGE
DIG ELEM 1 PICKUP
DELAY: 0.200 s
MESSAGE
DIG ELEM 1 RESET
DELAY: 0.100 s
MESSAGE
DIG ELEM 1 BLOCK:
Cont Ip 1 Off
MESSAGE
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
TARGET: Self-reset
MESSAGE
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
EVENTS: Enabled
Trip
Coil
52a
V
I
H1a
H1b
H1c
UR Relay - Form-A
V = Voltage Monitor
I = Current Monitor
DC+
DC
827073A1.vsd
NOTE
5
EXAMPLE 2: BREAKER TRIP CIRCUIT INTEGRITY MONITORING
If it is required to monitor the trip circuit continuously, independent of the breaker position (open or closed), a method to
maintain the monitoring current flow through the trip circuit when the breaker is open must be provided (as shown in the fig-
ure below). This can be achieved by connecting a suitable resistor (see figure below) across the auxiliary contact in the trip
circuit. In this case, it is not required to supervise the monitoring circuit with the breaker position the BLOCK setting is
selected to Off. In this case, the settings will be:
Figure 555: TRIP CIRCUIT EXAMPLE 2
# DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
#
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
FUNCTION: Enabled
MESSAGE
DIG ELEM 1 NAME:
Bkr Trip Cct Out
MESSAGE
DIG ELEM 1 INPUT:
Cont Op 1 VOff
MESSAGE
DIG ELEM 1 PICKUP
DELAY: 0.200 s
MESSAGE
DIG ELEM 1 RESET
DELAY: 0.100 s
MESSAGE
DIG ELEM 1 BLOCK:
Off
MESSAGE
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
TARGET: Self-reset
MESSAGE
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
EVENTS: Enabled
Trip
Coil
52a
V
I
H1a
H1b
H1c
UR Relay - Form-A
V = Voltage Monitor
I = Current Monitor
DC+
DC
827074A1.vsd
R
By-pass
Resistor
Table 517: VALUES OF RESISTOR R
POWER
SUPPLY (V DC)
RESISTANCE
(OHMS)
POWER
(WATTS)
24 1000 2
30 5000 2
48 10000 2
110 25000 5
125 25000 5
250 50000 5
5
5.6.5 DIGITAL COUNTERS
PATH: SETTINGS !" CONTROL ELEMENTS !" DIGITAL COUNTERS ! COUNTER 1(8)
There are 8 identical digital counters, numbered from 1 to 8. A digital counter counts the number of state transitions from
Logic 0 to Logic 1. The counter is used to count operations such as the pickups of an element, the changes of state of an
external contact (e.g. breaker auxiliary switch), or pulses from a watt-hour meter.
COUNTER 1 UNITS: Assigns a label to identify the unit of measure pertaining to the digital transitions to be counted.
The units label will appear in the corresponding actual values status.
COUNTER 1 PRESET: Sets the count to a required preset value before counting operations begin, as in the case
where a substitute relay is to be installed in place of an in-service relay, or while the counter is running.
COUNTER 1 COMPARE: Sets the value to which the accumulated count value is compared. Three FlexLogic output
operands are provided to indicate if the present value is more than (HI), equal to (EQL), or less than (LO) the set
value.
COUNTER 1 UP: Selects the FlexLogic operand for incrementing the counter. If an enabled UP input is received
when the accumulated value is at the limit of +2,147,483,647 counts, the counter will rollover to 2,147,483,648.
COUNTER 1 DOWN: Selects the FlexLogic operand for decrementing the counter. If an enabled DOWN input is
received when the accumulated value is at the limit of 2,147,483,648 counts, the counter will rollover to
+2,147,483,647.
COUNTER 1 BLOCK: Selects the FlexLogic operand for blocking the counting operation. All counter operands are
blocked.
# COUNTER 1
#
COUNTER 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
COUNTER 1 NAME:
Counter 1
MESSAGE
COUNTER 1 UNITS:
MESSAGE
COUNTER 1 PRESET:
0
Range: 2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
MESSAGE
COUNTER 1 COMPARE:
0
Range: 2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
MESSAGE
COUNTER 1 UP:
Off
MESSAGE
COUNTER 1 DOWN:
Off
MESSAGE
COUNTER 1 BLOCK:
Off
MESSAGE
CNT1 SET TO PRESET:
Off
MESSAGE
COUNTER 1 RESET:
Off
MESSAGE
COUNT1 FREEZE/RESET:
Off
MESSAGE
COUNT1 FREEZE/COUNT:
Off
5
CNT1 SET TO PRESET: Selects the FlexLogic operand used to set the count to the preset value. The counter will
be set to the preset value in the following situations:
1. When the counter is enabled and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand has the value 1 (when the counter is enabled
and CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand is 0, the counter will be set to 0).
2. When the counter is running and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand changes the state from 0 to 1 (CNT1 SET TO
PRESET changing from 1 to 0 while the counter is running has no effect on the count).
3. When a reset or reset/freeze command is sent to the counter and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand has the value
1 (when a reset or reset/freeze command is sent to the counter and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand has the
value 0, the counter will be set to 0).
COUNTER 1 RESET: Selects the FlexLogic operand for setting the count to either 0 or the preset value depending
on the state of the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand.
COUNTER 1 FREEZE/RESET: Selects the FlexLogic operand for capturing (freezing) the accumulated count value
into a separate register with the date and time of the operation, and resetting the count to 0.
COUNTER 1 FREEZE/COUNT: Selects the FlexLogic operand for capturing (freezing) the accumulated count value
into a separate register with the date and time of the operation, and continuing counting. The present accumulated
value and captured frozen value with the associated date/time stamp are available as actual values. If control power is
interrupted, the accumulated and frozen values are saved into non-volatile memory during the power down operation.
Figure 556: DIGITAL COUNTER SCHEME LOGIC
827065A1.VSD
FLEXLOGIC
OPERANDS
COUNTER 1 HI
COUNTER 1 EQL
COUNTER 1 LO
SETTING
COUNTER 1 FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1
COUNTER 1 BLOCK:
COUNTER 1 UP:
COUNTER 1 DOWN:
COUNTER 1 RESET:
COUNT1 FREEZE/RESET:
COUNT1 FREEZE/COUNT:
Off = 0
COUNTER 1 UNITS:
COUNTER 1 PRESET:
CALCULATE
VALUE
RUN
SET TO PRESET VALUE
STORE DATE & TIME
COUNTER 1 NAME:
COUNTER 1 COMPARE:
Count more than Comp.
Count equal to Comp.
Count less than Comp.
COUNTER 1 FROZEN:
Date & Time
CNT 1 SET TO PRESET:
SET TO ZERO
SETTING
SETTING
SETTING
SETTING
SETTING
SETTING
SETTING
SETTINGS
Off = 0
Off = 0
Off = 0
Off = 0
Off = 0
Off = 0
ACTUAL VALUES
COUNTER 1 ACCUM:
ACTUAL VALUE
SETTING
AND
OR
OR
AND
AND
5
5.6.6 MONITORING ELEMENTS
a) CT TROUBLE ZONE
PATH: SETTINGS !" CONTROL ELEMENTS !" MONITORING ELEMENTS ! CT TROUBLE ZONE 1(4)
The CT Trouble feature is available only when PRODUCT SETUP ! B90 FUNCTION ! B90 FUNCTION is set to "Protection". This
element uses the differential current calculated in accordance with the bus configuration programmed under Bus Zone 1.
Operation of this element is therefore completely dependent on the dynamic bus replica, which must be defined first. The
bus differential zones are defined using the path SETTINGS !" SYSTEM SETUP !" BUS. The CT Trouble element 1 detects
CT problems in any of the circuits actually connected to the differential zone defined as Bus Zone 1.
The CT TROUBLE ZONE 1 PICKUP setting specifies the differential current level that defines an abnormal bus state. If the dif-
ferential current in a given phase remains above this level for the time interval defined by the CT TROUBLE ZONE 1 DELAY
setting, CT Trouble is declared for the given phase by setting the appropriate FlexLogic output operand. The operand
may be configured to raise an alarm and block the bus differential function for the corresponding zone of protection.
Figure 557: B30 CT TROUBLE SCHEME LOGIC
# CT TROUBLE ZONE 1
#
CT TROUBLE ZONE 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled, Alarm
MESSAGE
CT TROUBLE ZONE 1
PICKUP: 0.100 pu
MESSAGE
CT TROUBLE ZONE 1
DELAY: 10.0 s
MESSAGE
CT TROUBLE ZONE 1
TARGET: Self-reset
MESSAGE
CT TROUBLE ZONE 1
EVENTS: Disabled
836722A2.CDR
SETTING
SETTING SETTING
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SETTING
SETTING
Enabled, Alarm=1
Disable = 0
Off = 0
Off = 0
CT TROUBLE ZONE 1
FUNCTION:
CT TROUBLE ZONE 1
PICKUP:
CT TROUBLE ZONE 1
DELAY:
CT TROUBLE 1 OP
CT TROUBLE 1 OP A
CT TROUBLE 1 OP B
CT TROUBLE 1 OP C
| Iad1 | > PICKUP
RUN
RUN
RUN
| Ibd1 | > PICKUP
| Icd1 | > PICKUP
BUS ZONE 1A STATUS:
BUS ZONE 1F STATUS:
SETTING
SETTING
BUS ZONE 1A SOURCE:
BUS ZONE 1F SOURCE:
P
H
A
S
O
R
S
P
H
A
S
O
R
S
D
I
F
F
E
R
E
N
T
I
A
L

C
U
R
R
E
N
T
S
I
c
d
1
I
b
d
1
I
a
d
1
Ia
Ia
Ib
Ib
Ic
Ic
OR
. . .
PKP
PKP
PKP
0
0
0
5
Figure 558: B90 CT TROUBLE SCHEME LOGIC
836759A3.CDR
SETTING
SETTING
SETTING
SETTING
SETTINGS
SETTINGS SETTINGS
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETTINGS
Protection = 1
Enabled = 1
Logic = 0
Disabled = 0
Current Phasor
Current Phasor
Off = 0
RUN
Id1 > PICKUP
t
PKP
0
Off = 0
B90 FUNCTION:
CT TROUBLE ZONE 1
FUNCTION:
AND
Z
O
N
E

1

D
I
F
F
E
R
E
N
T
I
A
L

C
U
R
R
E
N
T
I
D
1
BUS 1A CT:
BUS 1X CT:
BUS 1A STATUS:
CT TROUBLE ZONE 1
PICKUP:
CT TROUBLE ZONE 1
PICKUP:
CT TROUBLE1 OP
BUS 1X STATUS:
BUS 1A DIRECTION:
. . .
BUS 1X DIRECTION:
5 SETTINGS 5.7 INPUTS / OUTPUTS
5
5.7INPUTS / OUTPUTS 5.7.1 CONTACT INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUTS ! CONTACT INPUTS
The contact inputs menu contains configuration settings for each contact input as well as voltage thresholds for each group
of four contact inputs. Upon startup, the relay processor determines (from an assessment of the installed modules) which
contact inputs are available and then display settings for only those inputs.
An alphanumeric ID may be assigned to a contact input for diagnostic, setting, and event recording purposes. The CON-
TACT IP X On (Logic 1) FlexLogic operand corresponds to contact input X being closed, while CONTACT IP X Off corre-
sponds to contact input X being open. The CONTACT INPUT DEBNCE TIME defines the time required for the contact to
overcome contact bouncing conditions. As this time differs for different contact types and manufacturers, set it as a maxi-
mum contact debounce time (per manufacturer specifications) plus some margin to ensure proper operation. If CONTACT
INPUT EVENTS is set to Enabled, every change in the contact input state will trigger an event.
A raw status is scanned for all Contact Inputs synchronously at the constant rate of 0.5 ms as shown in the figure below.
The DC input voltage is compared to a user-settable threshold. A new contact input state must be maintained for a user-
settable debounce time in order for the B30 to validate the new contact state. In the figure below, the debounce time is set
at 2.5 ms; thus the 6th sample in a row validates the change of state (mark no. 1 in the diagram). Once validated (de-
bounced), the contact input asserts a corresponding FlexLogic operand and logs an event as per user setting.
A time stamp of the first sample in the sequence that validates the new state is used when logging the change of the con-
tact input into the Event Recorder (mark no. 2 in the diagram).
Protection and control elements, as well as FlexLogic equations and timers, are executed eight times in a power system
cycle. The protection pass duration is controlled by the frequency tracking mechanism. The FlexLogic operand reflecting
the debounced state of the contact is updated at the protection pass following the validation (marks no. 3 and 4 on the fig-
ure below). The update is performed at the beginning of the protection pass so all protection and control functions, as well
as FlexLogic equations, are fed with the updated states of the contact inputs.
# CONTACT INPUTS
#
# CONTACT INPUT H5a
#
MESSAGE
CONTACT INPUT H5a ID:
Cont Ip 1
MESSAGE
CONTACT INPUT H5a
DEBNCE TIME: 2.0 ms
Range: 0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5
MESSAGE
CONTACT INPUT H5a
EVENTS: Disabled
# CONTACT INPUT xxx

#
# CONTACT INPUT
# THRESHOLDS
MESSAGE
Ips H5a,H5c,H6a,H6c
THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc
Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc
MESSAGE
Ips H7a,H7c,H8a,H8c
THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc
Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc
MESSAGE
Ips xxx,xxx,xxx,xxx
THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc
Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc
5.7 INPUTS / OUTPUTS 5 SETTINGS
5
The FlexLogic operand response time to the contact input change is equal to the debounce time setting plus up to one
protection pass (variable and depending on system frequency if frequency tracking enabled). If the change of state occurs
just after a protection pass, the recognition is delayed until the subsequent protection pass; that is, by the entire duration of
the protection pass. If the change occurs just prior to a protection pass, the state is recognized immediately. Statistically a
delay of half the protection pass is expected. Owing to the 0.5 ms scan rate, the time resolution for the input contact is
below 1msec.
For example, 8 protection passes per cycle on a 60 Hz system correspond to a protection pass every 2.1 ms. With a con-
tact debounce time setting of 3.0 ms, the FlexLogic operand-assert time limits are: 3.0 + 0.0 = 3.0 ms and 3.0 + 2.1 = 5.1
ms. These time limits depend on how soon the protection pass runs after the debouncing time.
Regardless of the contact debounce time setting, the contact input event is time-stamped with a 1 s accuracy using the
time of the first scan corresponding to the new state (mark no. 2 below). Therefore, the time stamp reflects a change in the
DC voltage across the contact input terminals that was not accidental as it was subsequently validated using the debounce
timer. Keep in mind that the associated FlexLogic operand is asserted/de-asserted later, after validating the change.
The debounce algorithm is symmetrical: the same procedure and debounce time are used to filter the LOW-HIGH (marks
no.1, 2, 3, and 4 in the figure below) and HIGH-LOW (marks no. 5, 6, 7, and 8 below) transitions.
Figure 559: INPUT CONTACT DEBOUNCING MECHANISM AND TIME-STAMPING SAMPLE TIMING
Contact inputs are isolated in groups of four to allow connection of wet contacts from different voltage sources for each
group. The CONTACT INPUT THRESHOLDS determine the minimum voltage required to detect a closed contact input. This
value should be selected according to the following criteria: 17 for 24 V sources, 33 for 48 V sources, 84 for 110 to 125 V
sources and 166 for 250 V sources.
For example, to use contact input H5a as a status input from the breaker 52b contact to seal-in the trip relay and record it in
the Event Records menu, make the following settings changes:
CONTACT INPUT H5A ID: "Breaker Closed (52b)"
CONTACT INPUT H5A EVENTS: "Enabled"
Note that the 52b contact is closed when the breaker is open and open when the breaker is closed.
842709A1.cdr
DEBOUNCE TIME
(user setting)
At this time, the
new (HIGH)
contact state is
validated
The FlexLogic
TM
operand is going to
be asserted at this
protection pass
The FlexLogic
TM
operand
changes reflecting the
validated contact state
Time stamp of the first
scan corresponding to
the new validated state is
logged in the SOE record
2 1 3
4
DEBOUNCE TIME
(user setting)
At this time, the new
(LOW) contact state is
validated
The FlexLogic
TM
operand is going to be
de-asserted at this
protection pass
The FlexLogic
TM
operand
changes reflecting the
validated contact state
5
7
8
Time stamp of the first
scan corresponding to the
new validated state is
logged in the SOE record
6
SCAN TIME
(0.5 msec)
PROTECTION PASS
(8 times a cycle controlled by the
frequency tracking mechanism)
R
A
W
C
O
N
T
A
C
T
S
T
A
T
E
F
L
E
X
L
O
G
I
C
T
M
O
P
E
R
A
N
D
I
N
P
U
T
V
O
L
T
A
G
E
USER-PROGRAMMABLE THRESHOLD
5
5.7.2 VIRTUAL INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUTS !" VIRTUAL INPUTS ! VIRTUAL INPUT 1(32)
There are 32 virtual inputs that can be individually programmed to respond to input signals from the keypad (Commands
menu) and communications protocols. All virtual input operands are defaulted to OFF = 0 unless the appropriate input sig-
nal is received. Virtual input states are preserved through a control power loss.
If the VIRTUAL INPUT x FUNCTION is to Disabled, the input will be forced to 'Off' (Logic 0) regardless of any attempt to alter
the input. If set to Enabled, the input operates as shown on the logic diagram and generates output FlexLogic operands
in response to received input signals and the applied settings.
There are two types of operation: Self-Reset and Latched. If VIRTUAL INPUT x TYPE is Self-Reset, when the input signal
transits from OFF = 0 to ON = 1, the output operand will be set to ON = 1 for only one evaluation of the FlexLogic equa-
tions and then return to OFF = 0. If set to Latched, the virtual input sets the state of the output operand to the same state
as the most recent received input, ON =1 or OFF = 0.
The Self-Reset operating mode generates the output operand for a single evaluation of the FlexLogic
equations. If the operand is to be used anywhere other than internally in a FlexLogic equation, it will
likely have to be lengthened in time. A FlexLogic timer with a delayed reset can perform this function.
Figure 560: VIRTUAL INPUTS SCHEME LOGIC
# VIRTUAL INPUT 1
#
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
VIRTUAL INPUT 1 ID:
Virt Ip 1
MESSAGE
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
TYPE: Latched
Range: Self-Reset, Latched
MESSAGE
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
EVENTS: Disabled
NOTE
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
FUNCTION:
VIRTUAL INPUT 1 ID:
Virtual Input 1 to OFF = 0
Virtual Input 1 to ON = 1
AND
AND
AND
OR
SETTING
SETTING
Enabled=1
Disabled=0
(Flexlogic Operand)
Virt Ip 1
827080A2.CDR
SETTING
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
TYPE:
Latched
Self - Reset
R
S
Latch
5
5.7.3 CONTACT OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUTS !" CONTACT OUTPUTS ! CONTACT OUTPUT H1
Upon startup of the relay, the main processor will determine from an assessment of the modules installed in the chassis
which contact outputs are available and present the settings for only these outputs.
An ID may be assigned to each contact output. The signal that can OPERATE a contact output may be any FlexLogic
operand (virtual output, element state, contact input, or virtual input). An additional FlexLogic operand may be used to
SEAL-IN the relay. Any change of state of a contact output can be logged as an Event if programmed to do so.
For example, the trip circuit current is monitored by providing a current threshold detector in series with some Form-A con-
tacts (see the trip circuit example in the Digital Elements section). The monitor will set a flag (see the specifications for
Form-A). The name of the FlexLogic operand set by the monitor, consists of the output relay designation, followed by the
name of the flag; e.g. Cont Op 1 IOn or Cont Op 1 IOff.
In most breaker control circuits, the trip coil is connected in series with a breaker auxiliary contact used to interrupt current
flow after the breaker has tripped, to prevent damage to the less robust initiating contact. This can be done by monitoring
an auxiliary contact on the breaker which opens when the breaker has tripped, but this scheme is subject to incorrect oper-
ation caused by differences in timing between breaker auxiliary contact change-of-state and interruption of current in the
trip circuit. The most dependable protection of the initiating contact is provided by directly measuring current in the tripping
circuit, and using this parameter to control resetting of the initiating relay. This scheme is often called trip seal-in.
This can be realized in the B30 using the Cont Op 1 IOn FlexLogic operand to seal-in the contact output as follows:
CONTACT OUTPUT H1 ID: Cont Op 1"
OUTPUT H1 OPERATE: any suitable FlexLogic operand
OUTPUT H1 SEAL-IN: Cont Op 1 IOn
CONTACT OUTPUT H1 EVENTS: Enabled
5.7.4 LATCHING OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUTS !" LATCHING OUTPUTS ! LATCHING OUTPUT H1a
# CONTACT OUTPUT H1
#
CONTACT OUTPUT H1 ID
Cont Op 1
MESSAGE
OUTPUT H1 OPERATE:
Off
MESSAGE
OUTPUT H1 SEAL-IN:
Off
MESSAGE
CONTACT OUTPUT H1
EVENTS: Enabled
# LATCHING
# OUTPUT H1a
OUTPUT H1a ID
L-Cont Op 1
MESSAGE
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE:
Off
MESSAGE
OUTPUT H1a RESET:
Off
MESSAGE
OUTPUT H1a TYPE:
Operate-dominant
Range: Operate-dominant, Reset-dominant
MESSAGE
OUTPUT H1a EVENTS:
Disabled
5
The B30 latching output contacts are mechanically bi-stable and controlled by two separate (open and close) coils. As such
they retain their position even if the relay is not powered up. The relay recognizes all latching output contact cards and pop-
ulates the setting menu accordingly. On power up, the relay reads positions of the latching contacts from the hardware
before executing any other functions of the relay (such as protection and control features or FlexLogic).
The latching output modules, either as a part of the relay or as individual modules, are shipped from the factory with all
latching contacts opened. It is highly recommended to double-check the programming and positions of the latching con-
tacts when replacing a module.
Since the relay asserts the output contact and reads back its position, it is possible to incorporate self-monitoring capabili-
ties for the latching outputs. If any latching outputs exhibits a discrepancy, the LATCHING OUTPUT ERROR self-test error is
declared. The error is signaled by the LATCHING OUT ERROR FlexLogic operand, event, and target message.
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: This setting specifies a FlexLogic operand to operate the close coil of the contact. The
relay will seal-in this input to safely close the contact. Once the contact is closed and the RESET input is logic 0 (off),
any activity of the OPERATE input, such as subsequent chattering, will not have any effect. With both the OPERATE and
RESET inputs active (logic 1), the response of the latching contact is specified by the OUTPUT H1A TYPE setting.
OUTPUT H1a RESET: This setting specifies a FlexLogic operand to operate the trip coil of the contact. The relay
will seal-in this input to safely open the contact. Once the contact is opened and the OPERATE input is logic 0 (off), any
activity of the RESET input, such as subsequent chattering, will not have any effect. With both the OPERATE and RESET
inputs active (logic 1), the response of the latching contact is specified by the OUTPUT H1A TYPE setting.
OUTPUT H1a TYPE: This setting specifies the contact response under conflicting control inputs; that is, when both the
OPERATE and RESET signals are applied. With both control inputs applied simultaneously, the contact will close if set to
Operate-dominant and will open if set to Reset-dominant.
Application Example 1:
A latching output contact H1a is to be controlled from two user-programmable pushbuttons (buttons number 1 and 2). The
following settings should be applied.
Program the Latching Outputs by making the following changes in the SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUT !" LATCHING OUT-
PUTS ! LATCHING OUTPUT H1a menu (assuming an H4L module):
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
OUTPUT H1a RESET: PUSHBUTTON 2 ON
Program the pushbuttons by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP !" USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUT-
TONS !" USER PUSHBUTTON 1 and USER PUSHBUTTON 2 menus:
PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: Self-reset PUSHBUTTON 2 FUNCTION: Self-reset
PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: 0.00 s PUSHBTN 2 DROP-OUT TIME: 0.00 s
A relay, having two latching contacts H1a and H1c, is to be programmed. The H1a contact is to be a Type-a contact, while
the H1c contact is to be a Type-b contact (Type-a means closed after exercising the operate input; Type-b means closed
after exercising the reset input). The relay is to be controlled from virtual outputs: VO1 to operate and VO2 to reset.
PUTS ! LATCHING OUTPUT H1a and LATCHING OUTPUT H1c menus (assuming an H4L module):
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: VO1 OUTPUT H1c OPERATE: VO2
OUTPUT H1a RESET: VO2 OUTPUT H1c RESET: VO1
Since the two physical contacts in this example are mechanically separated and have individual control inputs, they will not
operate at exactly the same time. A discrepancy in the range of a fraction of a maximum operating time may occur. There-
fore, a pair of contacts programmed to be a multi-contact relay will not guarantee any specific sequence of operation (such
as make before break). If required, the sequence of operation must be programmed explicitly by delaying some of the con-
trol inputs as shown in the next application example.
A make before break functionality must be added to the preceding example. An overlap of 20 ms is required to implement
this functionality as described below:
5
Write the following FlexLogic equation (enerVista UR Setup example shown):
Both timers (Timer 1 and Timer 2) should be set to 20 ms pickup and 0 ms dropout.
PUTS ! LATCHING OUTPUT H1a and LATCHING OUTPUT H1c menus (assuming an H4L module):
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: VO1 OUTPUT H1c OPERATE: VO2
OUTPUT H1a RESET: VO4 OUTPUT H1c RESET: VO3
A latching contact H1a is to be controlled from a single virtual output VO1. The contact should stay closed as long as VO1
is high, and should stay opened when VO1 is low. Program the relay as follows.
PUTS ! LATCHING OUTPUT H1a menu (assuming an H4L module):
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: VO1
OUTPUT H1a RESET: VO2
5.7.5 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUTS !" VIRTUAL OUTPUTS ! VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1(64)
There are 64 virtual outputs that may be assigned via FlexLogic. If not assigned, the output will be forced to OFF (Logic
0). An ID may be assigned to each virtual output. Virtual outputs are resolved in each pass through the evaluation of the
FlexLogic equations. Any change of state of a virtual output can be logged as an event if programmed to do so.
For example, if Virtual Output 1 is the trip signal from FlexLogic and the trip relay is used to signal events, the settings
would be programmed as follows:
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 ID: "Trip"
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 EVENTS: "Disabled"
# VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1
#
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 ID
Virt Op 1
MESSAGE
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1
EVENTS: Disabled
5
5.7.6 REMOTE DEVICES
a) REMOTE INPUTS/OUTPUTS OVERVIEW
Remote inputs and outputs, which are a means of exchanging information regarding the state of digital points between
remote devices, are provided in accordance with the IEC 61850 Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (GSSE) spec-
ifications.
The IEC 61850 specification requires that communications between devices be implemented on Ethernet
communications facilities. For UR-series relays, Ethernet communications is provided only on the type 9G
and 9H versions of the CPU module.
The sharing of digital point state information between GSSE equipped relays is essentially an extension to FlexLogic to
allow distributed FlexLogic by making operands available to/from devices on a common communications network. In
addition to digital point states, GSSE messages identify the originator of the message and provide other information
required by the communication specification. All devices listen to network messages and capture data from only those mes-
sages that have originated in selected devices.
GSSE messages are designed to be short, high priority and with a high level of reliability. The GSSE message structure
contains space for 128 bit pairs representing digital point state information. The IEC 61850 specification provides 32 DNA
bit pairs, which are status bits representing pre-defined events. All remaining bit pairs are UserSt bit pairs, which are sta-
tus bits representing user-definable events. The B30 implementation provides 32 of the 96 available UserSt bit pairs.
The IEC 61850 specification includes features that are used to cope with the loss of communication between transmitting
and receiving devices. Each transmitting device will send a GSSE message upon a successful power-up, when the state of
any included point changes, or after a specified interval (the default update time) if a change-of-state has not occurred.
The transmitting device also sends a hold time which is set to three times the programmed default time, which is required
by the receiving device.
Receiving devices are constantly monitoring the communications network for messages they require, as recognized by the
identification of the originating device carried in the message. Messages received from remote devices include the mes-
sage hold time for the device. The receiving relay sets a timer assigned to the originating device to the hold time interval,
and if it has not received another message from this device at time-out, the remote device is declared to be non-communi-
cating, so it will use the programmed default state for all points from that specific remote device. This mechanism allows a
receiving device to fail to detect a single transmission from a remote device which is sending messages at the slowest pos-
sible rate, as set by its default update timer, without reverting to use of the programmed default states. If a message is
received from a remote device before the hold time expires, all points for that device are updated to the states contained in
the message and the hold timer is restarted. The status of a remote device, where Offline indicates non-communicating,
can be displayed.
The GSSE facility provides for 32 remote inputs and 64 remote outputs.
b) LOCAL DEVICES: ID OF DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING GSSE MESSAGES
In a B30 relay, the device ID that identifies the originator of the message is programmed in the SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP
!" INSTALLATION !" RELAY NAME setting.
c) REMOTE DEVICES: ID OF DEVICE FOR RECEIVING GSSE MESSAGES
PATH: SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUTS !" REMOTE DEVICES ! REMOTE DEVICE 1(16)
Sixteen remote devices, numbered from 1 to 16, can be selected for setting purposes. A receiving relay must be pro-
grammed to capture messages from only those originating remote devices of interest. This setting is used to select specific
remote devices by entering (bottom row) the exact identification (ID) assigned to those devices.
# REMOTE DEVICE 1
#
REMOTE DEVICE 1 ID:
Remote Device 1
NOTE
5
5.7.7 REMOTE INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUTS !" REMOTE INPUTS ! REMOTE INPUT 1(32)
Remote Inputs which create FlexLogic operands at the receiving relay, are extracted from GSSE messages originating in
remote devices. The relay provides 32 remote inputs, each of which can be selected from a list consisting of 64 selections:
DNA-1 through DNA-32 and UserSt-1 through UserSt-32. The function of DNA inputs is defined in the IEC 61850 specifica-
tion and is presented in the IEC 61850 DNA Assignments table in the Remote Outputs section. The function of UserSt
inputs is defined by the user selection of the FlexLogic operand whose state is represented in the GSSE message. A
user must program a DNA point from the appropriate FlexLogic operand.
Remote Input 1 must be programmed to replicate the logic state of a specific signal from a specific remote device for local
use. This programming is performed via the three settings shown above.
REMOTE IN 1 DEVICE selects the number (1 to 16) of the remote device which originates the required signal, as previously
assigned to the remote device via the setting REMOTE DEVICE NN ID (see the Remote Devices section). REMOTE IN 1 BIT PAIR
selects the specific bits of the GSSE message required.
The REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE setting selects the logic state for this point if the local relay has just completed startup or
the remote device sending the point is declared to be non-communicating. The following choices are available:
Setting REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE to On value defaults the input to Logic 1.
Setting REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE to Off value defaults the input to Logic 0.
Setting REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE to Latest/On freezes the input in case of lost communications. If the latest state is
not known, such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input will default to Logic 1.
When communication resumes, the input becomes fully operational.
Setting REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE to Latest/Off freezes the input in case of lost communications. If the latest state is
not known, such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input will default to Logic 0.
When communication resumes, the input becomes fully operational.
For additional information on the GSSE specification, refer to the Remote Devices section in this chapter.
# REMOTE INPUT 1
#
REMOTE IN 1 DEVICE:
Remote Device 1
Range: 1 to 16 inclusive
MESSAGE
REMOTE IN 1 BIT
PAIR: None
Range: None, DNA-1 to DNA-32, UserSt-1 to UserSt-32
MESSAGE
REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT
STATE: Off
Range: On, Off, Latest/On, Latest/Off
MESSAGE
REMOTE IN 1
EVENTS: Disabled
NOTE
5
5.7.8 REMOTE OUTPUTS
a) DNA BIT PAIRS
PATH: SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUTS !" REMOTE OUTPUTS DNA BIT PAIRS ! REMOTE OUPUTS DNA- 1(32) BIT PAIR
Remote Outputs (1 to 32) are FlexLogic operands inserted into GSSE messages that are transmitted to remote devices
on a LAN. Each digital point in the message must be programmed to carry the state of a specific FlexLogic operand. The
above operand setting represents a specific DNA function (as shown in the following table) to be transmitted.
For more information on GSSE specifications, see the Remote Inputs/Outputs Overview in the Remote
Devices section.
# REMOTE OUTPUTS
# DNA- 1 BIT PAIR
DNA- 1 OPERAND:
Off
MESSAGE
DNA- 1 EVENTS:
Disabled
Table 518: IEC 61850 DNA2 ASSIGNMENTS
DNA DEFINITION INTENDED FUNCTION LOGIC 0 LOGIC 1
1 OperDev Trip Close
2 Lock Out LockoutOff LockoutOn
3 Initiate Reclosing Initiate remote reclose sequence InitRecloseOff InitRecloseOn
4 Block Reclosing Prevent/cancel remote reclose sequence BlockOff BlockOn
5 Breaker Failure Initiate Initiate remote breaker failure scheme BFIOff BFIOn
6 Send Transfer Trip Initiate remote trip operation TxXfrTripOff TxXfrTripOn
7 Receive Transfer Trip Report receipt of remote transfer trip command RxXfrTripOff RxXfrTripOn
8 Send Perm Report permissive affirmative TxPermOff TxPermOn
9 Receive Perm Report receipt of permissive affirmative RxPermOff RxPermOn
10 Stop Perm Override permissive affirmative StopPermOff StopPermOn
11 Send Block Report block affirmative TxBlockOff TxBlockOn
12 Receive Block Report receipt of block affirmative RxBlockOff RxBlockOn
13 Stop Block Override block affirmative StopBlockOff StopBlockOn
14 BkrDS Report breaker disconnect 3-phase state Open Closed
15 BkrPhsADS Report breaker disconnect phase A state Open Closed
16 BkrPhsBDS Report breaker disconnect phase B state Open Closed
17 BkrPhsCDS Report breaker disconnect phase C state Open Closed
18 DiscSwDS Open Closed
19 Interlock DS DSLockOff DSLockOn
20 LineEndOpen Report line open at local end Open Closed
21 Status Report operating status of local GSSE device Offline Available
22 Event EventOff EventOn
23 Fault Present FaultOff FaultOn
24 Sustained Arc Report sustained arc SustArcOff SustArcOn
25 Downed Conductor Report downed conductor DownedOff DownedOn
26 Sync Closing SyncClsOff SyncClsOn
27 Mode Report mode status of local GSSE device Normal Test
2832 Reserved
NOTE
5
b) USERST BIT PAIRS
PATH: SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUTS !" REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt BIT PAIRS ! REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt- 1(32) BIT PAIR
Remote Outputs 1 to 32 originate as GSSE messages to be transmitted to remote devices. Each digital point in the mes-
sage must be programmed to carry the state of a specific FlexLogic operand. The setting above is used to select the
operand which represents a specific UserSt function (as selected by the user) to be transmitted.
The following setting represents the time between sending GSSE messages when there has been no change of state of
any selected digital point. This setting is located in the PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" IEC 61850 PROTOCOL set-
tings menu.
For more information on GSSE specifications, see the Remote Inputs/Outputs Overview in the Remote
Devices section.
5.7.9 RESETTING
PATH: SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUTS !" RESETTING
Some events can be programmed to latch the faceplate LED event indicators and the target message on the display. Once
set, the latching mechanism will hold all of the latched indicators or messages in the set state after the initiating condition
has cleared until a RESET command is received to return these latches (not including FlexLogic latches) to the reset
state. The RESET command can be sent from the faceplate Reset button, a remote device via a communications channel,
or any programmed operand.
When the RESET command is received by the relay, two FlexLogic operands are created. These operands, which are
stored as events, reset the latches if the initiating condition has cleared. The three sources of RESET commands each cre-
ate the RESET OP FlexLogic operand. Each individual source of a RESET command also creates its individual operand
RESET OP (PUSHBUTTON), RESET OP (COMMS) or RESET OP (OPERAND) to identify the source of the command. The setting
shown above selects the operand that will create the RESET OP (OPERAND) operand.
5.7.10 DIRECT INPUTS/OUTPUTS
a) DIRECT INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUTS !" DIRECT INPUTS ! DIRECT INPUT 1(32)
These settings specify how the direct input information is processed. The DIRECT INPUT DEVICE ID represents the source of
this direct input. The specified direct input is driven by the device identified here.
# REMOTE OUTPUTS
# UserSt- 1 BIT PAIR
UserSt- 1 OPERAND:
Off
MESSAGE
UserSt- 1 EVENTS:
Disabled
DEFAULT GSSE UPDATE
TIME: 60 s
# RESETTING
#
RESET OPERAND:
Off
# DIRECT INPUT 1
#
DIRECT INPUT 1
DEVICE ID: 1
Range: 1 to 16
MESSAGE
DIRECT INPUT 1
BIT NUMBER: 1
Range: 1 to 32
MESSAGE
DIRECT INPUT 1
DEFAULT STATE: Off
Range: On, Off, Latest/On, Latest/Off
MESSAGE
DIRECT INPUT 1
EVENTS: Disabled
NOTE
5
The DIRECT INPUT 1 BIT NUMBER is the bit number to extract the state for this direct input. Direct Input x is driven by the bit
identified here as DIRECT INPUT 1 BIT NUMBER. This corresponds to the direct output number of the sending device.
The DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE represents the state of the direct input when the associated direct device is offline. The
following choices are available:
Setting DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE to On value defaults the input to Logic 1.
Setting DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE to Off value defaults the input to Logic 0.
Setting DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE to Latest/On freezes the input in case of lost communications. If the latest
state is not known, such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input will default to
Logic 1. When communication resumes, the input becomes fully operational.
Setting DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE to Latest/Off freezes the input in case of lost communications. If the latest
state is not known, such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input will default to
Logic 0. When communication resumes, the input becomes fully operational.
b) DIRECT OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUTS !" DIRECT OUTPUTS ! DIRECT OUTPUT 1(32)
The DIR OUT 1 OPERAND is the FlexLogic operand that determines the state of this Direct Output.
c) APPLICATION EXAMPLES
The examples introduced in the earlier Direct Inputs/Outputs section (part of the Product Setup section) direct inputs/out-
puts are continued below to illustrate usage of the direct inputs and outputs.
EXAMPLE 1: EXTENDING INPUT/OUTPUT CAPABILITIES OF A B30 RELAY
Consider an application that requires additional quantities of digital inputs and/or output contacts and/or lines of program-
mable logic that exceed the capabilities of a single UR-series chassis. The problem is solved by adding an extra UR-series
IED, such as the C30, to satisfy the additional inputs/outputs and programmable logic requirements. The two IEDs are con-
nected via single-channel digital communication cards as shown below.
Figure 561: INPUT/OUTPUT EXTENSION VIA DIRECT INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Assume Contact Input 1 from UR IED 2 is to be used by UR IED 1. The following settings should be applied (Direct Input 5
and bit number 12 are used, as an example):
The Cont Ip 1 On operand of UR IED 2 is now available in UR IED 1 as DIRECT INPUT 5 ON.
EXAMPLE 2: INTERLOCKING BUSBAR PROTECTION
A simple interlocking busbar protection scheme can be accomplished by sending a blocking signal from downstream
devices, say 2, 3 and 4, to the upstream device that monitors a single incomer of the busbar, as shown in the figure below.
# DIRECT OUTPUT 1
#
DIRECT OUT 1 OPERAND:
Off
MESSAGE
DIRECT OUTPUT 1
EVENTS: Disabled
UR IED 1: DIRECT INPUT 5 DEVICE ID = 2
DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER = 12
UR IED 2: DIRECT OUT 12 OPERAND = Cont Ip 1 On
UR IED 1
TX1
RX1
UR IED 2
TX1
RX1
5
Figure 562: SAMPLE INTERLOCKING BUSBAR PROTECTION SCHEME
Assume that Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 is used by Devices 2, 3, and 4 to block Device 1. If not blocked, Device 1
would trip the bus upon detecting a fault and applying a short coordination time delay.
The following settings should be applied (assume Bit 3 is used by all 3 devices to sent the blocking signal and Direct Inputs
7, 8, and 9 are used by the receiving device to monitor the three blocking signals):
UR IED 2: DIRECT OUT 3 OPERAND: "PHASE IOC1 OP"
UR IED 1: DIRECT INPUT 7 DEVICE ID: "2"
DIRECT INPUT 7 BIT NUMBER: "3"
DIRECT INPUT 7 DEFAULT STATE: select "On" for security, select "Off" for dependability
DIRECT INPUT 8 DEVICE ID: "3"
Now the three blocking signals are available in UR IED 1 as DIRECT INPUT 7 ON, DIRECT INPUT 8 ON, and DIRECT INPUT 9
ON. Upon losing communications or a device, the scheme is inclined to block (if any default state is set to On), or to trip
the bus on any overcurrent condition (all default states set to Off).
EXAMPLE 2: PILOT-AIDED SCHEMES
Consider a three-terminal line protection application shown in the figure below.
Figure 563: THREE-TERMINAL LINE APPLICATION
Assume the Hybrid Permissive Overreaching Transfer Trip (Hybrid POTT) scheme is applied using the architecture shown
below. The scheme output operand HYB POTT TX1 is used to key the permission.
842712A1.CDR
UR IED 1
UR IED 2 UR IED 4 UR IED 3
BLOCK
842713A1.CDR
UR IED 1 UR IED 2
UR IED 3
5
Figure 564: SINGLE-CHANNEL OPEN-LOOP CONFIGURATION
In the above architecture, Devices 1 and 3 do not communicate directly. Therefore, Device 2 must act as a bridge. The fol-
lowing settings should be applied:
UR IED 1: DIRECT OUT 2 OPERAND: "HYB POTT TX1"
DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER: "2" (this is a message from IED 2)
DIRECT INPUT 6 BIT NUMBER: "4" (effectively, this is a message from IED 3)
UR IED 3: DIRECT OUT 2 OPERAND: "HYB POTT TX1"
DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER: "2" (this is a message from IED 2)
DIRECT INPUT 6 BIT NUMBER: "3" (effectively, this is a message from IED 1)
UR IED 2: DIRECT INPUT 5 DEVICE ID: "1"
DIRECT OUT 2 OPERAND: "HYB POTT TX1"
DIRECT OUT 3 OPERAND: "DIRECT INPUT 5" (forward a message from 1 to 3)
DIRECT OUT 4 OPERAND: "DIRECT INPUT 6" (forward a message from 3 to 1)
Signal flow between the three IEDs is shown in the figure below:
Figure 565: SIGNAL FLOW FOR DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLE 3
In three-terminal applications, both the remote terminals must grant permission to trip. Therefore, at each terminal, Direct
Inputs 5 and 6 should be ANDed in FlexLogic and the resulting operand configured as the permission to trip (HYB POTT
RX1 setting).
842714A1.CDR
UR IED 1
TX1
RX1
UR IED 2
RX2
TX2
RX1
TX1
UR IED 3
RX1
TX1
842717A1.CDR
UR IED 3
UR IED 2 UR IED 1
DIRECT OUT 2 = HYB POTT TX1
DIRECT INPUT 5
DIRECT INPUT 6
DIRECT INPUT 5
DIRECT INPUT 6
DIRECT INPUT 6
DIRECT OUT 4 = DIRECT INPUT 6
DIRECT OUT 3 = DIRECT INPUT 5
DIRECT INPUT 5
5.8 TRANSDUCER I/O 5 SETTINGS
5
5.8TRANSDUCER I/O 5.8.1 DCMA INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS !" TRANSDUCER I/O !" DCMA INPUTS ! DCMA INPUT H1(U8)
Hardware and software is provided to receive signals from external transducers and convert these signals into a digital for-
mat for use as required. The relay will accept inputs in the range of 1 to +20 mA DC, suitable for use with most common
transducer output ranges; all inputs are assumed to be linear over the complete range. Specific hardware details are con-
tained in Chapter 3.
Before the dcmA input signal can be used, the value of the signal measured by the relay must be converted to the range
and quantity of the external transducer primary input parameter, such as DC voltage or temperature. The relay simplifies
this process by internally scaling the output from the external transducer and displaying the actual primary parameter.
dcmA input channels are arranged in a manner similar to CT and VT channels. The user configures individual channels
with the settings shown here.
The channels are arranged in sub-modules of two channels, numbered from 1 through 8 from top to bottom. On power-up,
the relay will automatically generate configuration settings for every channel, based on the order code, in the same general
manner that is used for CTs and VTs. Each channel is assigned a slot letter followed by the row number, 1 through 8 inclu-
sive, which is used as the channel number. The relay generates an actual value for each available input channel.
Settings are automatically generated for every channel available in the specific relay as shown above for the first channel of
a type 5F transducer module installed in slot H.
The function of the channel may be either Enabled or Disabled. If Disabled, no actual values are created for the chan-
nel. An alphanumeric ID is assigned to each channel; this ID will be included in the channel actual value, along with the
programmed units associated with the parameter measured by the transducer, such as volts, C, megawatts, etc. This ID is
also used to reference the channel as the input parameter to features designed to measure this type of parameter. The
DCMA INPUT H1 RANGE setting specifies the mA DC range of the transducer connected to the input channel.
The DCMA INPUT H1 MIN VALUE and DCMA INPUT H1 MAX VALUE settings are used to program the span of the transducer in
primary units. For example, a temperature transducer might have a span from 0 to 250C; in this case the DCMA INPUT H1
MIN VALUE value is 0 and the DCMA INPUT H1 MAX VALUE value is 250. Another example would be a watts transducer with
a span from 20 to +180 MW; in this case the DCMA INPUT H1 MIN VALUE value would be 20 and the DCMA INPUT H1 MAX
VALUE value 180. Intermediate values between the min and max values are scaled linearly.
# DCMA INPUT H1
#
DCMA INPUT H1
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
DCMA INPUT H1 ID:
DCMA Ip 1
MESSAGE
DCMA INPUT H1
UNITS: A
MESSAGE
DCMA INPUT H1
RANGE: 0 to -1 mA
Range: 0 to 1 mA, 0 to +1 mA, 1 to +1 mA, 0 to 5 mA,
0 to 10mA, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
MESSAGE
DCMA INPUT H1 MIN
VALUE: 0.000
Range: 9999.999 to +9999.999 in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DCMA INPUT H1 MAX
VALUE: 0.000
Range: 9999.999 to +9999.999 in steps of 0.001
5 SETTINGS 5.8 TRANSDUCER I/O
5
5.8.2 RTD INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS !" TRANSDUCER I/O !" RTD INPUTS ! RTD INPUT H1(U8)
Hardware and software is provided to receive signals from external Resistance Temperature Detectors and convert these
signals into a digital format for use as required. These channels are intended to be connected to any of the RTD types in
common use. Specific hardware details are contained in Chapter 3.
RTD input channels are arranged in a manner similar to CT and VT channels. The user configures individual channels with
the settings shown here.
The channels are arranged in sub-modules of two channels, numbered from 1 through 8 from top to bottom. On power-up,
the relay will automatically generate configuration settings for every channel, based on the order code, in the same general
manner that is used for CTs and VTs. Each channel is assigned a slot letter followed by the row number, 1 through 8 inclu-
sive, which is used as the channel number. The relay generates an actual value for each available input channel.
Settings are automatically generated for every channel available in the specific relay as shown above for the first channel of
a type 5C transducer module installed in slot H.
The function of the channel may be either Enabled or Disabled. If Disabled, there will not be an actual value created for
the channel. An alphanumeric ID is assigned to the channel; this ID will be included in the channel actual values. It is also
used to reference the channel as the input parameter to features designed to measure this type of parameter. Selecting the
type of RTD connected to the channel configures the channel.
Actions based on RTD overtemperature, such as trips or alarms, are done in conjunction with the FlexElements feature.
In FlexElements, the operate level is scaled to a base of 100C. For example, a trip level of 150C is achieved by setting
the operate level at 1.5 pu. FlexElement operands are available to FlexLogic for further interlocking or to operate an
output contact directly.
5.8.3 DCMA OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS !" TRANSDUCER I/O !" DCMA OUTPUTS ! DCMA OUTPUT H1(U8)
Hardware and software is provided to generate dcmA signals that allow interfacing with external equipment. Specific hard-
ware details are contained in Chapter 3. The dcmA output channels are arranged in a manner similar to transducer input or
CT and VT channels. The user configures individual channels with the settings shown below.
The channels are arranged in sub-modules of two channels, numbered 1 through 8 from top to bottom. On power-up, the
relay automatically generates configuration settings for every channel, based on the order code, in the same manner used
for CTs and VTs. Each channel is assigned a slot letter followed by the row number, 1 through 8 inclusive, which is used as
the channel number.
Both the output range and a signal driving a given output are user-programmable via the following settings menu (an exam-
ple for channel M5 is shown).
# RTD INPUT H1
#
RTD INPUT H1
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
RTD INPUT H1 ID:
RTD Ip 1
MESSAGE
RTD INPUT H1 TYPE:
100 Nickel
Range: 100 Nickel, 10 Copper, 100 Platinum,
120 Nickel
# DCMA OUTPUT H1
#
DCMA OUTPUT H1
SOURCE: Off
MESSAGE
DCMA OUTPUT H1
RANGE: 1 to 1 mA
Range: 1 to 1 mA, 0 to 1 mA, 4 to 20 mA
MESSAGE
DCMA OUTPUT H1
MIN VAL: 0.000 pu
MESSAGE
DCMA OUTPUT H1
MAX VAL: 1.000 pu
5
The relay checks the driving signal (x in equations below) for the minimum and maximum limits, and subsequently re-
scales so the limits defined as MIN VAL and MAX VAL match the output range of the hardware defined as RANGE. The follow-
ing equation is applied:
(EQ 5.13)
where: x is a driving signal specified by the SOURCE setting
I
min
and I
max
are defined by the RANGE setting
k is a scaling constant calculated as:
(EQ 5.14)
The feature is intentionally inhibited if the MAX VAL and MIN VAL settings are entered incorrectly, e.g. when MAX VAL MIN
VAL < 0.1 pu. The resulting characteristic is illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 566: DCMA OUTPUT CHARACTERISTIC
The dcmA output settings are described below.
DCMA OUTPUT H1 SOURCE: This setting specifies an internal analog value to drive the analog output. Actual values
(FlexAnalog parameters) such as power, current amplitude, voltage amplitude, power factor, etc. can be configured as
sources driving dcmA outputs. Refer to Appendix A for a complete list of FlexAnalog parameters.
DCMA OUTPUT H1 RANGE: This setting allows selection of the output range. Each dcmA channel may be set inde-
pendently to work with different ranges. The three most commonly used output ranges are available.
DCMA OUTPUT H1 MIN VAL: This setting allows setting the minimum limit for the signal that drives the output. This
setting is used to control the mapping between an internal analog value and the output current (see the following
examples). The setting is entered in per-unit values. The base units are defined in the same manner as the FlexEle-
ment base units.
DCMA OUTPUT H1 MAX VAL: This setting allows setting the maximum limit for the signal that drives the output. This
setting is used to control the mapping between an internal analog value and the output current (see the following
examples). The setting is entered in per-unit values. The base units are defined in the same manner as the FlexEle-
ment base units.
Three application examples are described below.
EXAMPLE 1:
A three phase active power on a 13.8 kV system measured via UR-series relay source 1 is to be monitored by the dcmA H1
output of the range of 1 to 1 mA. The following settings are applied on the relay: CT ratio = 1200:5, VT secondary 115, VT
connection is delta, and VT ratio = 120. The nominal current is 800 A primary and the nominal power factor is 0.90. The
power is to be monitored in both importing and exporting directions and allow for 20% overload compared to the nominal.
I
out
I
mi n
if x MIN VAL <
I
max
if x MAX VAL >
k x MIN VAL ( ) I
mi n
+ otherwise
=
k
I
max
I
mi n
MAX VAL MIN VAL

------------------------------------------------- =
842739A1.CDR
DRIVING SIGNAL
O
U
T
P
U
T

C
U
R
R
E
N
T
MIN VAL
I
min
I
max
MAX VAL
5 SETTINGS 5.8 TRANSDUCER I/O
5
The nominal three-phase power is:
(EQ 5.15)
The three-phase power with 20% overload margin is:
(EQ 5.16)
The base unit for power (refer to the FlexElements section in this chapter for additional details) is:
(EQ 5.17)
The minimum and maximum power values to be monitored (in pu) are:
(EQ 5.18)
The following settings should be entered:
DCMA OUTPUT H1 SOURCE: SRC 1 P
DCMA OUTPUT H1 RANGE: 1 to 1 mA
DCMA OUTPUT H1 MIN VAL: 1.247 pu
DCMA OUTPUT H1 MIN VALL 1.247 pu
With the above settings, the output will represent the power with the scale of 1 mA per 20.65 MW. The worst-case error for
this application can be calculated by superimposing the following two sources of error:
0.5% of the full scale for the analog output module, or
1% of reading error for the active power at power factor of 0.9
For example at the reading of 20 MW, the worst-case error is 0.01 20 MW + 0.207 MW = 0.407 MW.
EXAMPLE 2:
The phase A current (true RMS value) is to be monitored via the H2 current output working with the range from 4 to 20 mA.
The CT ratio is 5000:5 and the maximum load current is 4200 A. The current should be monitored from 0 A upwards, allow-
ing for 50% overload.
The phase current with the 50% overload margin is:
(EQ 5.19)
The base unit for current (refer to the FlexElements section in this chapter for additional details) is:
(EQ 5.20)
The minimum and maximum power values to be monitored (in pu) are:
(EQ 5.21)
DCMA OUTPUT H2 SOURCE: SRC 1 Ia RMS
The worst-case error for this application could be calculated by superimposing the following two sources of error:
0.25% of reading or 0.1% of rated (whichever is greater) for currents between 0.1 and 2.0 of nominal
For example, at the reading of 4.2 kA, the worst-case error is max(0.0025 4.2 kA, 0.001 5 kA) + 0.504 kA = 0.515 kA.
EXAMPLE 3:
A positive-sequence voltage on a 400 kV system measured via Source 2 is to be monitored by the dcmA H3 output with a
range of 0 to 1 mA. The VT secondary setting is 66.4 V, the VT ratio setting is 6024, and the VT connection setting is
Delta. The voltage should be monitored in the range from 70% to 110% of nominal.
P 3 13.8 kV 0.8 kA 0.9 17.21 MW = =
P
max
1.2 17.21 MW 20.65 MW = =
P
BASE
115 V 120 1.2 kA 16.56 MW = =
minimum power
20.65 MW
16.56 MW
------------------------------ 1.247 pu, maximum power
20.65 MW
16.56 MW
--------------------------- 1.247 pu = = = =
0.005 1 1 ( ) ( ) 20.65 MW 0.207 MW =
I
max
1.5 4.2 kA 6.3 kA = =
I
BASE
5 kA =
minimum current
0 kA
5 kA
------------ 0 pu, maximum current
6.3 kA
5 kA
----------------- 1.26 pu = = = =
0.005 20 4 ( ) 6.3 kA 0.504 kA =
5
The minimum and maximum positive-sequence voltages to be monitored are:
(EQ 5.22)
The base unit for voltage (refer to the FlexElements section in this chapter for additional details) is:
(EQ 5.23)
The minimum and maximum voltage values to be monitored (in pu) are:
(EQ 5.24)
DCMA OUTPUT H3 SOURCE: SRC 2 V_1 mag
The limit settings differ from the expected 0.7 pu and 1.1 pu because the relay calculates the positive-sequence quantities
scaled to the phase-to-ground voltages, even if the VTs are connected in Delta (refer to the Metering Conventions section
in Chapter 6), while at the same time the VT nominal voltage is 1 pu for the settings. Consequently the settings required in
this example differ from naturally expected by the factor of .
The worst-case error for this application could be calculated by superimposing the following two sources of error:
0.5% of reading
For example, under nominal conditions, the positive-sequence reads 230.94 kV and the worst-case error is
0.005 x 230.94 kV + 1.27 kV = 2.42 kV.
V
mi n
0.7
400 kV
3
------------------- 161.66 kV, V
max
1.1
400 kV
3
------------------- 254.03 kV = = = =
V
BASE
0.0664 kV 6024 400 kV = =
minimum voltage
161.66 kV
400 kV
--------------------------- 0.404 pu, maximum voltage
254.03 kV
400 kV
--------------------------- 0.635 pu = = = =
3
0.005 1 0 ( ) 254.03 kV 1.27 kV =
5 SETTINGS 5.9 TESTING
5
5.9TESTING 5.9.1 TEST MODE
PATH: SETTINGS !" TESTING ! TEST MODE
The relay provides test settings to verify that functionality using simulated conditions for contact inputs and outputs. The
Test Mode is indicated on the relay faceplate by a flashing Test Mode LED indicator.
To initiate the Test mode, the TEST MODE FUNCTION setting must be Enabled and the TEST MODE INITIATE setting must be
set to Logic 1. In particular:
To initiate Test Mode through relay settings, set TEST MODE INITIATE to On. The Test Mode starts when the TEST MODE
FUNCTION setting is changed from Disabled to Enabled.
To initiate Test Mode through a user-programmable condition, such as FlexLogic operand (pushbutton, digital input,
communication-based input, or a combination of these), set TEST MODE FUNCTION to Enabled and set TEST MODE INI-
TIATE to the desired operand. The Test Mode starts when the selected operand assumes a Logic 1 state.
When in Test Mode, the B30 remains fully operational, allowing for various testing procedures. In particular, the protection
and control elements, FlexLogic, and communication-based inputs and outputs function normally.
The only difference between the normal operation and the Test Mode is the behavior of the input and output contacts. The
former can be forced to report as open or closed or remain fully operational; the latter can be forced to open, close, freeze,
or remain fully operational. The response of the digital input and output contacts to the Test Mode is programmed individu-
ally for each input and output using the Force Contact Inputs and Force Contact Outputs test functions described in the fol-
lowing sections.
5.9.2 FORCE CONTACT INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS !" TESTING !" FORCE CONTACT INPUTS
The relay digital inputs (contact inputs) could be pre-programmed to respond to the Test Mode in the following ways:
If set to Disabled, the input remains fully operational. It is controlled by the voltage across its input terminals and can
be turned on and off by external circuitry. This value should be selected if a given input must be operational during the
test. This includes, for example, an input initiating the test, or being a part of a user pre-programmed test sequence.
If set to Open, the input is forced to report as opened (Logic 0) for the entire duration of the Test Mode regardless of
the voltage across the input terminals.
If set to Closed, the input is forced to report as closed (Logic 1) for the entire duration of the Test Mode regardless of
the voltage across the input terminals.
The Force Contact Inputs feature provides a method of performing checks on the function of all contact inputs. Once
enabled, the relay is placed into Test Mode, allowing this feature to override the normal function of contact inputs. The Test
Mode LED will be On, indicating that the relay is in Test Mode. The state of each contact input may be programmed as Dis-
abled, Open, or Closed. All contact input operations return to normal when all settings for this feature are disabled.
## SETTINGS
## TESTING
TEST MODE
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
TEST MODE INITIATE:
On
# FORCE CONTACT
# INPUTS
FORCE Cont Ip 1
:Disabled
Range: Disabled, Open, Closed
MESSAGE
FORCE Cont Ip 2
:Disabled
MESSAGE
FORCE Cont Ip xx
:Disabled
5.9 TESTING 5 SETTINGS
5
5.9.3 FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS !" TESTING !" FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS
The relay contact outputs can be pre-programmed to respond to the Test Mode.
If set to Disabled, the contact output remains fully operational. If operates when its control operand is Logic 1 and will
resets when its control operand is Logic 0. If set to Energize, the output will close and remain closed for the entire duration
of the Test Mode, regardless of the status of the operand configured to control the output contact. If set to De-energize,
the output will open and remain opened for the entire duration of the Test Mode regardless of the status of the operand con-
figured to control the output contact. If set to Freeze, the output retains its position from before entering the Test Mode,
regardless of the status of the operand configured to control the output contact.
These settings are applied two ways. First, external circuits may be tested by energizing or de-energizing contacts. Sec-
ond, by controlling the output contact state, relay logic may be tested and undesirable effects on external circuits avoided.
Example 1: Initiating a Test from User-Programmable Pushbutton 1
The Test Mode should be initiated from User-Programmable Pushbutton 1. The pushbutton will be programmed as
Latched (pushbutton pressed to initiate the test, and pressed again to terminate the test). During the test, Digital Input 1
should remain operational, Digital Inputs 2 and 3 should open, and Digital Input 4 should close. Also, Contact Output 1
should freeze, Contact Output 2 should open, Contact Output 3 should close, and Contact Output 4 should remain fully
operational. The required settings are shown below.
To enable User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 to initiate the Test mode, make the following changes in the SETTINGS !"
TESTING ! TEST MODE menu:
TEST MODE FUNCTION: Enabled and TEST MODE INITIATE: PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
Make the following changes to configure the Contact I/Os. In the SETTINGS !" TESTING !" FORCE CONTACT INPUTS and
FORCE CONTACT INPUTS menus, set:
FORCE Cont Ip 1: Disabled, FORCE Cont Ip 2: Open, FORCE Cont Ip 3: Open, and FORCE Cont Ip 4: Closed
FORCE Cont Op 1: Freeze, FORCE Cont Op 2: De-energized, FORCE Cont Op 3: Open, and FORCE Cont Op 4: Disabled
Example 2: Initiating a Test from User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 or through Remote Input 1
The Test should be initiated locally from User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 or remotely through Remote Input 1. Both the
pushbutton and the remote input will be programmed as Latched. The required settings are shown below.
Set the User Programmable Pushbutton as latching by changing SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" USER-PROGRAMMABLE
PUSHBUTTONS ! USER PUSHBUTTON 1 ! PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION to Latched. To enable either Pushbutton 1 or Remote
Input 1 to initiate the Test mode, make the following changes in the SETTINGS !" TESTING ! TEST MODE menu:
TEST MODE FUNCTION: Enabled and TEST MODE INITIATE: VO1
# FORCE CONTACT
# OUTPUTS
FORCE Cont Op 1
:Disabled
Range: Disabled, Energized, De-energized, Freeze
MESSAGE
FORCE Cont Op 2
:Disabled
MESSAGE
FORCE Cont Op xx
:Disabled
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.1 OVERVIEW
6
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.1OVERVIEW 6.1.1 ACTUAL VALUES MAIN MENU
## ACTUAL VALUES
## STATUS
# CONTACT INPUTS
#
See page 6-3.
# VIRTUAL INPUTS
#
See page 6-3.
# REMOTE INPUTS
#
See page 6-3.
# CONTACT OUTPUTS
#
See page 6-4.
# VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
#
See page 6-4.
# REMOTE DEVICES
# STATUS
See page 6-4.
# REMOTE DEVICES
# STATISTICS
See page 6-5.
# DIGITAL COUNTERS
#
See page 6-5.
# SELECTOR SWITCHES
#
See page 6-5.
# FLEX STATES
#
See page 6-5.
# ETHERNET
#
See page 6-6.
# DIRECT INPUTS
#
See page 6-6.
# DIRECT DEVICES
# STATUS
See page 6-7.
# EGD PROTOCOL
# STATUS
See page 6-7.
## ACTUAL VALUES
## METERING
# BUS
#
See page 6-10.
# SOURCE SRC 1
#
See page 6-10.
# SOURCE SRC 2
#
# SOURCE SRC 3
#
# SOURCE SRC 4
#
# SOURCE SRC 5
#
# SOURCE SRC 6
#
6.1 OVERVIEW 6 ACTUAL VALUES
6
# TRACKING FREQUENCY
#
See page 6-12.
# FLEXELEMENTS
#
See page 6-12.
# TRANSDUCER I/O
# DCMA INPUTS
See page 6-13.
# TRANSDUCER I/O
# RTD INPUTS
See page 6-13.
## ACTUAL VALUES
## RECORDS
# USER-PROGRAMMABLE
# FAULT REPORTS
See page 6-14.
# EVENT RECORDS
#
See page 6-14.
# OSCILLOGRAPHY
#
See page 6-14.
## ACTUAL VALUES
## PRODUCT INFO
# MODEL INFORMATION
#
See page 6-15.
# FIRMWARE REVISIONS
#
See page 6-15.
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.2 STATUS
6
6.2STATUS
For status reporting, On represents Logic 1 and Off represents Logic 0.
6.2.1 CONTACT INPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS ! CONTACT INPUTS
The present status of the contact inputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the contact
input. For example, Cont Ip 1 refers to the contact input in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of the
display indicates the logic state of the contact input.
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" VIRTUAL INPUTS
The present status of the 32 virtual inputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the virtual
input. For example, Virt Ip 1 refers to the virtual input in terms of the default name. The second line of the display indicates
the logic state of the virtual input.
6.2.3 REMOTE INPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" REMOTE INPUTS
The present state of the 32 remote inputs is shown here.
The state displayed will be that of the remote point unless the remote device has been established to be Offline in which
case the value shown is the programmed default state for the remote input.
# CONTACT INPUTS
#
Cont Ip 1
Off
MESSAGE
Cont Ip xx
Off
# VIRTUAL INPUTS
#
Virt Ip 1
Off
MESSAGE
Virt Ip 32
Off
# REMOTE INPUTS
#
REMOTE INPUT 1
STATUS: Off
Range: On, Off
MESSAGE
REMOTE INPUT 32
STATUS: Off
Range: On, Off
NOTE
6.2 STATUS 6 ACTUAL VALUES
6
6.2.4 CONTACT OUTPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" CONTACT OUTPUTS
The present state of the contact outputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the contact
output. For example, Cont Op 1 refers to the contact output in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of
the display indicates the logic state of the contact output.
For Form-A outputs, the state of the voltage(V) and/or current(I) detectors will show as: Off, VOff, IOff, On,
VOn, and/or IOn. For Form-C outputs, the state will show as Off or On.
6.2.5 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
The present state of up to 64 virtual outputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the virtual
output. For example, Virt Op 1 refers to the virtual output in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of the
display indicates the logic state of the virtual output, as calculated by the FlexLogic equation for that output.
6.2.6 REMOTE DEVICES
a) STATUS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" REMOTE DEVICES STATUS
The present state of up to 16 programmed Remote Devices is shown here. The ALL REMOTE DEVICES ONLINE message indi-
cates whether or not all programmed Remote Devices are online. If the corresponding state is "No", then at least one
required Remote Device is not online.
# CONTACT OUTPUTS
#
Cont Op 1
Off
MESSAGE
Cont Op xx
Off
# VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
#
Virt Op 1
Off
MESSAGE
Virt Op 64
Off
# REMOTE DEVICES
# STATUS
All REMOTE DEVICES
ONLINE: No
Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
REMOTE DEVICE 1
STATUS: Offline
Range: Online, Offline
MESSAGE
REMOTE DEVICE 16
STATUS: Offline
Range: Online, Offline
NOTE
6
b) STATISTICS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" REMOTE DEVICES STATISTICS ! REMOTE DEVICE 1(16)
Statistical data (2 types) for up to 16 programmed Remote Devices is shown here.
The StNum number is obtained from the indicated Remote Device and is incremented whenever a change of state of at
least one DNA or UserSt bit occurs. The SqNum number is obtained from the indicated Remote Device and is incremented
whenever a GSSE message is sent. This number will rollover to zero when a count of 4,294,967,295 is incremented.
6.2.7 DIGITAL COUNTERS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! DIGITAL COUNTERS !" DIGITAL COUNTERS ! DIGITAL COUNTERS Counter 1(8)
The present status of the 8 digital counters is shown here. The status of each counter, with the user-defined counter name,
includes the accumulated and frozen counts (the count units label will also appear). Also included, is the date/time stamp
for the frozen count. The Counter n MICROS value refers to the microsecond portion of the time stamp.
6.2.8 SELECTOR SWITCHES
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" SELECTOR SWITCHES
The display shows both the current position and the full range. The current position only (an integer from 0 through 7) is the
actual value.
6.2.9 FLEX STATES
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" FLEX STATES
There are 256 FlexState bits available. The second line value indicates the state of the given FlexState bit.
# REMOTE DEVICE 1
#
REMOTE DEVICE 1
StNum: 0
MESSAGE
REMOTE DEVICE 1
SqNum: 0
# DIGITAL COUNTERS
# Counter 1
Counter 1 ACCUM:
0
MESSAGE
Counter 1 FROZEN:
0
MESSAGE
Counter 1 FROZEN:
YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
MESSAGE
Counter 1 MICROS:
0
# SELECTOR SWITCHES
#
SELECTOR SWITCH 1
POSITION: 0/7
Range: Current Position / 7
MESSAGE
SELECTOR SWITCH 2
POSITION: 0/7
Range: Current Position / 7
# FLEX STATES
#
PARAM 1: Off
Off
Range: Off, On
MESSAGE
PARAM 256: Off
Off
Range: Off, On
6.2 STATUS 6 ACTUAL VALUES
6
6.2.10 ETHERNET
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" ETHERNET
6.2.11 DIRECT INPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" DIRECT INPUTS
The AVERAGE MSG RETURN TIME is the time taken for direct output messages to return to the sender in a direct input/output
ring configuration (this value is not applicable for non-ring configurations). This is a rolling average calculated for the last 10
messages. There are two return times for dual-channel communications modules.
The UNRETURNED MSG COUNT values (one per communications channel) count the direct output messages that do not
make the trip around the communications ring. The CRC FAIL COUNT values (one per communications channel) count the
direct output messages that have been received but fail the CRC check. High values for either of these counts may indicate
on a problem with wiring, the communication channel, or the relay(s). The UNRETURNED MSG COUNT and CRC FAIL COUNT
values can be cleared using the CLEAR DIRECT I/O COUNTERS command.
The DIRECT INPUT x values represent the state of the x-th direct input.
# ETHERNET
#
ETHERNET PRI LINK
STATUS: OK
Range: Fail, OK
MESSAGE
ETHERNET SEC LINK
STATUS: OK
Range: Fail, OK
# DIRECT INPUTS
#
AVG MSG RETURN
TIME CH1: 0 ms
MESSAGE
UNRETURNED MSG
COUNT CH1: 0
MESSAGE
CRC FAIL COUNT
CH1: 0
MESSAGE
AVG MSG RETURN
TIME CH2: 0 ms
MESSAGE
UNRETURNED MSG
COUNT CH2: 0
MESSAGE
CRC FAIL COUNT
CH2: 0
MESSAGE
DIRECT INPUT 1:
On
MESSAGE
DIRECT INPUT 32:
On
6
6.2.12 DIRECT DEVICES STATUS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" DIRECT DEVICES STATUS
These actual values represent the state of Direct Devices 1 through 8.
6.2.13 EGD PROTOCOL STATUS
a) FAST EXCHANGE
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" EGD PROTOCOL STATUS ! PRODUCER STATUS ! FAST EXCHANGE 1
These values provide information that may be useful for debugging an EGD network. The EGD signature and packet size
for the fast EGD exchange is displayed.
b) SLOW EXCHANGE
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" EGD PROTOCOL STATUS ! PRODUCER STATUS !" SLOW EXCHANGE 1(2)
These values provide information that may be useful for debugging an EGD network. The EGD signature and packet size
for the slow EGD exchanges are displayed.
# DIRECT DEVICES
# STATUS
DIRECT DEVICE 1
STATUS: Offline
MESSAGE
DIRECT DEVICE 2
STATUS: Offline
MESSAGE
DIRECT DEVICE 8
STATUS: Offline
# FAST EXCHANGE 1
#
EXCH 1 SIGNATURE:
0
MESSAGE
EXCH 1 SIZE:
0
# SLOW EXCHANGE 1
#
EXCH 1 SIGNATURE:
0
MESSAGE
EXCH 1 SIZE:
0
6.3 METERING 6 ACTUAL VALUES
6
6.3METERING 6.3.1 METERING CONVENTIONS
a) UR CONVENTION FOR MEASURING PHASE ANGLES
All phasors calculated by UR-series relays and used for protection, control and metering functions are rotating phasors that
maintain the correct phase angle relationships with each other at all times.
For display and oscillography purposes, all phasor angles in a given relay are referred to an AC input channel pre-selected
by the SETTINGS !" SYSTEM SETUP !" POWER SYSTEM !" FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE setting. This setting
defines a particular source to be used as the reference.
The relay will first determine if any Phase VT bank is indicated in the Source. If it is, voltage channel VA of that bank is
used as the angle reference. Otherwise, the relay determines if any Aux VT bank is indicated; if it is, the auxiliary voltage
channel of that bank is used as the angle reference. If neither of the two conditions is satisfied, then two more steps of this
hierarchical procedure to determine the reference signal include Phase CT bank and Ground CT bank.
If the AC signal pre-selected by the relay upon configuration is not measurable, the phase angles are not referenced. The
phase angles are assigned as positive in the leading direction, and are presented as negative in the lagging direction, to
more closely align with power system metering conventions. This is illustrated below.
Figure 61: UR PHASE ANGLE MEASUREMENT CONVENTION
b) UR CONVENTION FOR MEASURING SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS
The UR-series of relays calculate voltage symmetrical components for the power system phase A line-to-neutral voltage,
and symmetrical components of the currents for the power system phase A current. Owing to the above definition, phase
angle relations between the symmetrical currents and voltages stay the same irrespective of the connection of instrument
transformers. This is important for setting directional protection elements that use symmetrical voltages.
For display and oscillography purposes the phase angles of symmetrical components are referenced to a common refer-
ence as described in the previous sub-section.
WYE-CONNECTED INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS:
The above equations apply to currents as well.
ABC phase rotation: ACB phase rotation:
827845A1.CDR
UR phase angle
reference
0
o
-45
o
-90
o
-135
o
-270
o
-225
o
-180
o
-315
o
positive
angle
direction
V_0
1
3
--- V
AG
V
BG
V
CG
+ + ( ) =
V_1
1
3
--- V
AG
aV
BG
a
2
V
CG
+ + ( ) =
V_2
1
3
--- V
AG
a
2
V
BG
aV
CG
+ + ( ) =
V_0
1
3
--- V
AG
V
BG
V
CG
+ + ( ) =
V_1
1
3
--- V
AG
a
2
V
BG
aV
CG
+ + ( ) =
V_2
1
3
--- V
AG
aV
BG
a
2
V
CG
+ + ( ) =
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.3 METERING
6
DELTA-CONNECTED INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS:
The zero-sequence voltage is not measurable under the Delta connection of instrument transformers and is defaulted to
zero. The table below shows an example of symmetrical components calculations for the ABC phase rotation.
* The power system voltages are phase-referenced for simplicity to VAG and VAB, respectively. This, however, is a
relative matter. It is important to remember that the B30 displays are always referenced as specified under SETTINGS
!" SYSTEM SETUP !" POWER SYSTEM !" FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE.
The example above is illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 62: MEASUREMENT CONVENTION FOR SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS
ABC phase rotation: ACB phase rotation:
Table 61: SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS CALCULATION EXAMPLE
SYSTEM VOLTAGES, SEC. V * VT
CONN.
RELAY INPUTS, SEC. V SYMM. COMP, SEC. V
V
AG
V
BG
V
CG
V
AB
V
BC
V
CA
F5AC F6AC F7AC V
0
V
1
V
2
13.9
0
76.2
125
79.7
250
84.9
313
138.3
97
85.4
241
WYE 13.9
0
76.2
125
79.7
250
19.5
192
56.5
7
23.3
187
UNKNOWN (only V
1
and V
2

can be determined)
84.9
0
138.3
144
85.4
288
DELTA 84.9
0
138.3
144
85.4
288
N/A 56.5
54
23.3
234
V_0 N/A =
V_1
1 30
3 3
-------------------- V
AB
aV
BC
a
2
V
CA
+ + ( ) =
V_2
1 30
3 3
----------------- V
AB
a
2
V
BC
aV
CA
+ + ( ) =
V_0 N/A =
V_1
1 30
3 3
----------------- V
AB
a
2
V
BC
aV
CA
+ + ( ) =
V_2
1 30
3 3
-------------------- V
AB
aV
BC
a
2
V
CA
+ + ( ) =
827844A1.CDR
A
B
C
WYE VTs
1
0
2
A
B
C
DELTA VTs
1
2
SYSTEM VOLTAGES SYMMETRICAL
COMPONENTS
U
R

p
h
a
s
e

a
n
g
l
e
r
e
f
e
r
e
n
c
e
U
R

p
h
a
s
e

a
n
g
l
e
r
e
f
e
r
e
n
c
e
U
R

p
h
a
s
e

a
n
g
l
e
r
e
f
e
r
e
n
c
e
U
R

p
h
a
s
e

a
n
g
l
e
r
e
f
e
r
e
n
c
e
6
6.3.2 BUS ZONE
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES !" METERING ! BUS ! BUS ZONE 1
The phasors of differential and restraint currents are available for the bus zone. The magnitudes are displayed in primary
amperes (see Chapter 8: Theory of Operation for additional explanation).
6.3.3 SOURCES
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES !" METERING ! SOURCE SRC 1 !
# BUS ZONE 1
#
BUS 1 DIFF Iad:
0.000 A 0.0
MESSAGE
BUS 1 REST Iar:
0.000 A 0.0
MESSAGE
BUS 1 DIFF Ibd:
0.000 A 0.0
MESSAGE
BUS 1 REST Ibr:
0.000 A 0.0
MESSAGE
BUS 1 DIFF Icd:
0.000 A 0.0
MESSAGE
BUS 1 REST Icr:
0.000 A 0.0
# PHASE CURRENT
# SRC 1
SRC 1 RMS Ia: 0.000
b: 0.000 c: 0.000 A
MESSAGE
SRC 1 RMS Ia:
0.000 A
MESSAGE
SRC 1 RMS Ib:
0.000 A
MESSAGE
SRC 1 RMS Ic:
0.000 A
MESSAGE
SRC 1 RMS In:
0.000 A
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR Ia:
0.000 A 0.0
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR Ib:
0.000 A 0.0
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR Ic:
0.000 A 0.0
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR In:
0.000 A 0.0
MESSAGE
SRC 1 ZERO SEQ I0:
0.000 A 0.0
MESSAGE
SRC 1 POS SEQ I1:
0.000 A 0.0
MESSAGE
SRC 1 NEG SEQ I2:
0.000 A 0.0
6
# GROUND CURRENT
# SRC 1
SRC 1 RMS Ig:
0.000 A
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR Ig:
0.000 A 0.0
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR Igd:
0.000 A 0.0
# PHASE VOLTAGE
# SRC 1
SRC 1 RMS Vag:
0.000 V
MESSAGE
SRC 1 RMS Vbg:
0.000 V
MESSAGE
SRC 1 RMS Vcg:
0.000 V
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR Vag:
0.000 V 0.0
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR Vbg:
0.000 V 0.0
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR Vcg:
0.000 V 0.0
MESSAGE
SRC 1 RMS Vab:
0.000 V
MESSAGE
SRC 1 RMS Vbc:
0.000 V
MESSAGE
SRC 1 RMS Vca:
0.000 V
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR Vab:
0.000 V 0.0
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR Vbc:
0.000 V 0.0
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR Vca:
0.000 V 0.0
MESSAGE
SRC 1 ZERO SEQ V0:
0.000 V 0.0
MESSAGE
SRC 1 POS SEQ V1:
0.000 V 0.0
MESSAGE
SRC 1 NEG SEQ V2:
0.000 V 0.0
# AUXILIARY VOLTAGE
# SRC 1
SRC 1 RMS Vx:
0.000 V
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR Vx:
0.000 V 0.0
# FREQUENCY
# SRC 1
SRC 1 FREQUENCY:
0.00 Hz
6
Six identical Source menus are available. The "SRC 1" text will be replaced by whatever name was programmed by the
user for the associated source (see SETTINGS !" SYSTEM SETUP !" SIGNAL SOURCES).
SOURCE FREQUENCY is measured via software-implemented zero-crossing detection of an AC signal. The signal is either a
Clarke transformation of three-phase voltages or currents, auxiliary voltage, or ground current as per source configuration
(see the SYSTEM SETUP !" POWER SYSTEM settings). The signal used for frequency estimation is low-pass filtered. The
final frequency measurement is passed through a validation filter that eliminates false readings due to signal distortions and
transients.
6.3.4 TRACKING FREQUENCY
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES !" METERING !" TRACKING FREQUENCY
The tracking frequency is displayed here. The frequency is tracked based on configuration of the reference source. The
TRACKING FREQUENCY is based upon positive sequence current phasors from all line terminals and is synchronously
adjusted at all terminals. If currents are below 0.125 pu, then the NOMINAL FREQUENCY is used.
6.3.5 FLEXELEMENTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES !" METERING !" FLEXELEMENTS ! FLEXELEMENT 1(8)
The operating signals for the FlexElements are displayed in pu values using the following definitions of the base units.
# TRACKING FREQUENCY
#
TRACKING FREQUENCY:
60.00 Hz
# FLEXELEMENT 1
#
FLEXELEMENT 1
OpSig: 0.000 pu
Table 62: FLEXELEMENT BASE UNITS
BUS DIFFERENTIAL
RESTRAINING CURRENT
(Bus Diff Mag)
I
BASE
BUS DIFFERENTIAL
RESTRAINING CURRENT
(Bus Rest Mag)
I
BASE
dcmA BASE = maximum value of the DCMA INPUT MAX setting for the two transducers configured
under the +IN and IN inputs.
FREQUENCY f
BASE
= 1 Hz
PHASE ANGLE
BASE
= 360 degrees (see the UR angle referencing convention)
POWER FACTOR PF
BASE
= 1.00
RTDs BASE = 100C
SOURCE CURRENT I
BASE
SOURCE POWER P
BASE
= maximum value of V
BASE
I
BASE
for the +IN and IN inputs
SOURCE VOLTAGE V
BASE
6
6.3.6 TRANSDUCER I/O
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES !" METERING !" TRANSDUCER I/O DCMA INPUTS ! DCMA INPUT xx
Actual values for each dcmA input channel that is enabled are displayed with the top line as the programmed Channel ID
and the bottom line as the value followed by the programmed units.
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES !" METERING !" TRANSDUCER I/O RTD INPUTS ! RTD INPUT xx
Actual values for each RTD input channel that is enabled are displayed with the top line as the programmed Channel ID
and the bottom line as the value.
# DCMA INPUT xx
#
DCMA INPUT xx
0.000 mA
# RTD INPUT xx
#
RTD INPUT xx
-50 C
6.4 RECORDS 6 ACTUAL VALUES
6
6.4RECORDS 6.4.1 USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES !" RECORDS ! USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT
This menu displays the User-Programmable Fault Report actual values. See the User-Programmable Fault Report section
in Chapter 5 for additional information on this feature.
6.4.2 EVENT RECORDS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES !" RECORDS !" EVENT RECORDS
The Event Records menu shows the contextual data associated with up to the last 1024 events, listed in chronological
order from most recent to oldest. If all 1024 event records have been filled, the oldest record will be removed as a new
record is added. Each event record shows the event identifier/sequence number, cause, and date/time stamp associated
with the event trigger. Refer to the COMMANDS " CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing event records.
6.4.3 OSCILLOGRAPHY
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES !" RECORDS !" OSCILLOGRAPHY
This menu allows the user to view the number of triggers involved and number of oscillography traces available. The
cycles per record value is calculated to account for the fixed amount of data storage for oscillography. See the Oscillogra-
phy section of Chapter 5 for further details.
A trigger can be forced here at any time by setting "Yes" to the FORCE TRIGGER? command. Refer to the COMMANDS !"
CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing the oscillography records.
# USER-PROGRAMMABLE
# FAULT REPORT
NEWEST RECORD
NUMBER: 0
MESSAGE
LAST CLEARED DATE:
2002/8/11 14:23:57
MESSAGE
LAST REPORT DATE:
2002/10/09 08:25:27
# EVENT RECORDS
#
EVENT: XXXX
RESET OP(PUSHBUTTON)
MESSAGE
EVENT: 3
POWER ON
EVENT 3
DATE: 2000/07/14
MESSAGE
EVENT: 2
POWER OFF
EVENT 3
TIME: 14:53:00.03405
MESSAGE
EVENT: 1
EVENTS CLEARED
Date and Time Stamps
# OSCILLOGRAPHY
#
FORCE TRIGGER?
No
Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
NUMBER OF TRIGGERS:
0
MESSAGE
AVAILABLE RECORDS:
0
MESSAGE
CYCLES PER RECORD:
0.0
MESSAGE
LAST CLEARED DATE:
2000/07/14 015:40:16
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.5 PRODUCT INFORMATION
6
6.5PRODUCT INFORMATION 6.5.1 MODEL INFORMATION
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES !" PRODUCT INFO ! MODEL INFORMATION
The product order code, serial number, Ethernet MAC address, date/time of manufacture, and operating time are shown
here.
6.5.2 FIRMWARE REVISIONS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES !" PRODUCT INFO !" FIRMWARE REVISIONS
The shown data is illustrative only. A modification file number of 0 indicates that, currently, no modifications have been
installed.
# MODEL INFORMATION
#
ORDER CODE LINE 1:
B30-E00-HCL-F8H-H6A
Example code shown
MESSAGE
ORDER CODE LINE 2:
MESSAGE
ORDER CODE LINE 3:
MESSAGE
ORDER CODE LINE 4:
MESSAGE
SERIAL NUMBER:
MESSAGE
ETHERNET MAC ADDRESS
000000000000
MESSAGE
MANUFACTURING DATE:
0
Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
MESSAGE
OPERATING TIME:
0:00:00
# FIRMWARE REVISIONS
#
B30 Bus Relay
REVISION: 4.40
Range: 0.00 to 655.35
Revision number of the application firmware.
MESSAGE
MODIFICATION FILE
NUMBER: 0
Range: 0 to 65535 (ID of the MOD FILE)
Value is 0 for each standard firmware release.
MESSAGE
BOOT PROGRAM
REVISION: 1.13
Range: 0.00 to 655.35
Revision number of the boot program firmware.
MESSAGE
FRONT PANEL PROGRAM
REVISION: 0.08
Range: 0.00 to 655.35
Revision number of faceplate program firmware.
MESSAGE
COMPILE DATE:
2004/09/15 04:55:16
Range: Any valid date and time.
Date and time when product firmware was built.
MESSAGE
BOOT DATE:
2004/09/15 16:41:32
Range: Any valid date and time.
Date and time when the boot program was built.
6.5 PRODUCT INFORMATION 6 ACTUAL VALUES
6
7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS 7.1 COMMANDS
7
7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS 7.1COMMANDS 7.1.1 COMMANDS MENU
The Commands menu contains relay directives intended for operations personnel. All commands can be protected from
unauthorized access via the Command Password; see the Password Security section of Chapter 5. The following flash
message appears after successfully command entry:
PATH: COMMANDS " COMMANDS VIRTUAL INPUTS
The states of up to 32 virtual inputs are changed here. The first line of the display indicates the ID of the virtual input. The
second line indicates the current or selected status of the virtual input. This status will be a logical state Off (0) or On (1).
COMMANDS
"
MESSAGE
## COMMANDS
## VIRTUAL INPUTS
MESSAGE
## COMMANDS
## CLEAR RECORDS
MESSAGE
## COMMANDS
## SET DATE AND TIME
MESSAGE
## COMMANDS
## RELAY MAINTENANCE
COMMAND
EXECUTED
## COMMANDS
## VIRTUAL INPUTS
Virt Ip 1
Off
Range: Off, On
MESSAGE
Virt Ip 32
Off
Range: Off, On
7.1 COMMANDS 7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS
7
7.1.3 CLEAR RECORDS
PATH: COMMANDS " COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS
This menu contains commands for clearing historical data such as the Event Records. Data is cleared by changing a com-
mand setting to Yes and pressing the key. After clearing data, the command setting automatically reverts to No.
7.1.4 SET DATE AND TIME
PATH: COMMANDS " SET DATE AND TIME
The date and time can be entered here via the faceplate keypad only if the IRIG-B signal is not in use. The time setting is
based on the 24-hour clock. The complete date, as a minimum, must be entered to allow execution of this command. The
new time will take effect at the moment the key is clicked.
7.1.5 RELAY MAINTENANCE
PATH: COMMANDS " RELAY MAINTENANCE
This menu contains commands for relay maintenance purposes. Commands are activated by changing a command setting
to Yes and pressing the key. The command setting will then automatically revert to No.
The PERFORM LAMPTEST command turns on all faceplate LEDs and display pixels for a short duration. The UPDATE
ORDER CODE command causes the relay to scan the backplane for the hardware modules and update the order code to
match. If an update occurs, the following message is shown.
There is no impact if there have been no changes to the hardware modules. When an update does not occur, the ORDER
CODE NOT UPDATED message will be shown.
## COMMANDS
## CLEAR RECORDS
CLEAR USER FAULT
REPORTS? No
Range: No, Yes
CLEAR EVENT RECORDS?
No
Range: No, Yes
CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY?
No
Range: No, Yes
CLEAR UNAUTHORIZED
ACCESS? No
Range: No, Yes
CLEAR DIRECT I/O
COUNTERS? No
Range: No, Yes
Valid only for units with Direct I/O module.
CLEAR ALL RELAY
RECORDS? No
Range: No, Yes
## COMMANDS
## SET DATE AND TIME
SET DATE AND TIME:
2000/01/14 13:47:03
(YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS)
## COMMANDS
## RELAY MAINTENANCE
PERFORM LAMPTEST?
No
Range: No, Yes
UPDATE ORDER CODE?
No
Range: No, Yes
UPDATING...
PLEASE WAIT
7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS 7.2 TARGETS
7
7.2TARGETS 7.2.1 TARGETS MENU
The status of any active targets will be displayed in the Targets menu. If no targets are active, the display will read No
Active Targets:
7.2.2 TARGET MESSAGES
When there are no active targets, the first target to become active will cause the display to immediately default to that mes-
sage. If there are active targets and the user is navigating through other messages, and when the default message timer
times out (i.e. the keypad has not been used for a determined period of time), the display will again default back to the tar-
get message.
The range of variables for the target messages is described below. Phase information will be included if applicable. If a tar-
get message status changes, the status with the highest priority will be displayed.
If a self test error is detected, a message appears indicating the cause of the error. For example UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED
indicates that the minimal relay settings have not been programmed.
7.2.3 RELAY SELF-TESTS
The relay performs a number of self-test diagnostic checks to ensure device integrity. The two types of self-tests (major and
minor) are listed in the tables below. When either type of self-test error occurs, the Trouble LED Indicator will turn on and a
target message displayed. All errors record an event in the event recorder. Latched errors can be cleared by pressing the
RESET key, providing the condition is no longer present.
Major self-test errors also result in the following:
the critical fail relay on the power supply module is de-energized
all other output relays are de-energized and are prevented from further operation
the faceplate In Service LED indicator is turned off
a RELAY OUT OF SERVICE event is recorded
Most of the minor self-test errors can be disabled. Refer to the settings in the User-Programmable Self-Tests section in
Chapter 5 for additional details.
TARGETS
"
MESSAGE
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1:
LATCHED
Displayed only if targets for this element are active.
Example shown.
MESSAGE
DIGITAL ELEMENT 16:
LATCHED
Displayed only if targets for this element are active.
Example shown.
MESSAGE

Table 71: TARGET MESSAGE PRIORITY STATUS

PRIORITY ACTIVE STATUS DESCRIPTION
1 OP element operated and still picked up
2 PKP element picked up and timed out
3 LATCHED element had operated but has dropped out
7.2 TARGETS 7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS
7
Table 72: MAJOR SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGES
SELF-TEST ERROR
MESSAGE
LATCHED
TARGET
MESSAGE?
DESCRIPTION OF PROBLEM HOW OFTEN THE
TEST IS PERFORMED
WHAT TO DO
DSP ERRORS:
A/D Calibration, A/D
Interrupt, A/D Reset, Inter
DSP Rx, Sample Int, Rx
Interrupt, Tx Interrupt, Rx
Sample Index, Invalid
Settings, Rx Checksum
Yes CT/VT module with digital signal
processor may have a problem.
Every 1/8th of a cycle. Cycle the control power (if the problem
recurs, contact the factory).
DSP ERROR:
INVALID REVISION
Yes One or more DSP modules in a
multiple DSP unit has Rev. C
hardware
Rev. C DSP needs to be replaced
with a Rev. D DSP.
Contact the factory
EQUIPMENT MISMATCH
with 2nd-line detail
No Configuration of modules does not
match the order code stored in the
CPU.
On power up; thereafter, the
backplane is checked for missing
cards every 5 seconds.
Check all modules against the order
code, ensure they are inserted
properly, and cycle control power (if
problem persists, contact factory).
FLEXLOGIC ERR TOKEN
with 2nd-line detail
No FlexLogic equations do not
compile properly.
Event driven; whenever Flex-
Logic equations are modified.
Finish all equation editing and use self
test to debug any errors.
LATCHING OUTPUT
ERROR
No Discrepancy in the position of a
latching contact between firmware
and hardware has been detected.
Every 1/8th of a cycle. The latching output module failed.
Replace the Module.
PROGRAM MEMORY
Test Failed
Yes Error was found while checking
Flash memory.
Once flash is uploaded with new
firmware.
Contact the factory.
UNIT NOT CALIBRATED No Settings indicate the unit is not
calibrated.
On power up. Contact the factory.
UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED No PRODUCT SETUP !"
INSTALLATION setting indicates
relay is not in a programmed state.
On power up and whenever the
RELAY PROGRAMMED setting is
altered.
Program all settings (especially those
under PRODUCT SETUP !"
INSTALLATION).
Table 73: MINOR SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGES
SELF-TEST ERROR
MESSAGE
LATCHED
TARGET
MESSAGE
DESCRIPTION OF PROBLEM HOW OFTEN THE
TEST IS PERFORMED
WHAT TO DO
BATTERY FAIL Yes Battery is not functioning. Monitored every 5 seconds. Reported
after 1 minute if problem persists.
Replace the battery located in the
power supply module (1H or 1L).
DIRECT RING BREAK No Direct input/output settings
configured for a ring, but the
connection is not in a ring.
Every second. Check direct input/output configuration
and/or wiring.
DIRECT DEVICE OFF No A direct device is configured but
not connected.
Every second. Check direct input/output configuration
and/or wiring.
EEPROM DATA
ERROR
Yes The non-volatile memory has been
corrupted.
On power up only. If this message appears after an order
code update is preformed, press the
RESET key to clear target message. In
other cases, contact the factory.
IRIG-B FAILURE No A bad IRIG-B input signal has been
detected
Monitored whenever an IRIG-B signal
is received.
Ensure the IRIG-B cable is connected,
check cable functionality (i.e. look for
physical damage or perform continuity
test), ensure IRIG-B receiver is
functioning, and check input signal level
(it may be less than specification). If
none of these apply, contact the factory.
LATCHING OUT
ERROR
Yes Latching output failure. Event driven. Contact the factory.
LOW ON MEMORY Yes Memory is close to 100% capacity. Monitored every 5 seconds. Contact the factory.
PRI ETHERNET FAIL Yes Primary Ethernet connection failed. Monitored every 2 seconds Check connections.
PROTOTYPE
FIRMWARE
Yes A prototype version of the firmware
is loaded.
On power up only. Contact the factory.
REMOTE DEVICE OFF No One or more GOOSE devices are
not responding.
Event driven occurs when a device
programmed to receive GOOSE
messages stops receiving. Every 1 to
60 s, depending on GOOSE packets.
Check GOOSE setup.
SEC ETHERNET FAIL Yes Sec. Ethernet connection failed. Monitored every 2 seconds Check connections.
SNTP FAILURE No SNTP server not responding. 10 to 60 seconds. Check SNTP configuration and/or
network connections.
SYSTEM EXCEPTION Yes Abnormal restart from modules
being removed/inserted when
powered-up, abnormal DC supply,
or internal relay failure.
Event driven. Contact the factory.
WATCHDOG ERROR No Some tasks are behind schedule. Event driven. Contact the factory.
8 THEORY OF OPERATION 8.1 INTRODUCTION
8
8 THEORY OF OPERATION 8.1INTRODUCTION 8.1.1 BUS DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION
Referring to the figure below, input currents defining (through the dynamic bus replica) the bus differential zone are
received by the B30 from Current Transformers (CTs) associated with the power system.
Figure 81: BUS DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION BLOCK DIAGRAM
The currents are digitally pre-filtered (Block 1) in order to remove the decaying DC components and other signal distortions.
The filtered input signals are brought to a common scale taking into account the transformation ratios of the connected CTs
(Block 2). Refer to Section 8.2: Dynamic Bus Replica for details.
Phasors of the differential zone currents are estimated digitally (Block 3) and the differential (Block 4) and restraining (Block
5) signals are calculated. Refer to Section 8.3: Differential Principle for details.
The magnitude of the differential signal is compared with a threshold and an appropriate flag indicating operation of the
unbiased bus differential protection is produced (Block 6).
The magnitudes of the differential and restraining currents are compared and two auxiliary flags that correspond to two spe-
cifically shaped portions of the differential operating characteristic (DIF1 and DIF2) are produced (blocks 7 and 8). The
characteristic is split in order to enhance performance of the relay by applying diverse security measures for each of the
regions. Refer to Section 8.3: Differential Principle for details.
The directional element (Block 10) supervises the biased differential characteristic when necessary. The current directional
comparison principle is used that processes phasors of all the input currents as well as the differential and restraining cur-
rents. Refer to Section 8.4: Directional Principle for details.
The saturation detector (Block 9) analyzes the differential and restraining currents as well as the samples of the input cur-
rents. This block sets its output flag upon detecting CT saturation. Refer to Section 8.5: Saturation Detector for details.
The output logic (Block 11) combines the differential, directional and saturation flags into the biased differential operation
flag. The applied logic enhances performance of the relay while keeping an excellent balance between dependability/speed
and security. Refer to Section 8.6: Output Logic and Examples for details.
Measuring Unit
Biased Differential
Unit
Unbiased Differential
Unit
P
r
e
-
F
i
l
t
e
r
i
n
g
i
1
i
2
i
3
i
N
R
a
t
i
o
M
a
t
c
h
i
n
g
a
n
d
S
c
a
l
i
n
g
P
h
a
s
o
r
E
s
t
i
m
a
t
i
o
n
Differential
Current
Restraining
Current
D
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l
U
n
b
i
a
s
e
d
D
I
F
1
D
I
F
2
Directional
Element
Saturation
Detector
L
O
G
I
C
i
n
p
u
t
c
u
r
r
e
n
t
s
I
1
I
2
I
3
I
N
I
D
I
R
DIF
L
DIF
UNB
DIF
H
SAT
DIR
1 2 3
4
5
10
6
7
8
9
11
DIF
BIASED
836723A1.CDR
8.2 DYNAMIC BUS REPLICA 8 THEORY OF OPERATION
8
8.2DYNAMIC BUS REPLICA 8.2.1 DYNAMIC BUS REPLICA MECHANISM
The B30 provides protection for one bus differential zone. The bus differential zone of the B30 allows for protecting bus
sections that include circuits that are switchable between different bus sections. Proper relay operation is achieved by
associating a status signal with each input current. This mechanism is referred to as a dynamic bus replica.
The dynamic bus zone is programmed as a number of source-status pairs. The Sources feature of the UR is a convenient
and flexible mechanism for associating input currents and voltages with protection and control elements.
The Source mechanism permits summing physical input currents and assigning the resulting sum to a Source. It is not rec-
ommended to use this aspect of the Source mechanism for the bus differential protection. If two or more physical currents
are summed using the Source mechanism, and then used as an input to the differential protection element, the restraining
current calculated by the relay may not reflect external fault currents properly. Consequently, the relay would lack sufficient
bias during certain external faults. Also, the directional principle and saturation detector may not work properly. This is not a
limitation of the B30, but misapplication of Sources in conjunction with the biased differential principle.
Normally, each Source defining the input to the B30's bus differential zone should be associated with a single physical cur-
rent transformer bank. The only situation when two or more currents may be summed up into a single Source before enter-
ing into the bus zone is when the currents are purely load currents and cannot produce any fault current in any
circumstances.
The status signal of a given source-status pair of the dynamic bus replica is a FlexLogic operand created to indicate
whether or not the associated circuit (current) is connected to the protected bus zone. Normally, the status signals are to be
created from input contacts wired to appropriate auxiliary contacts of switches and/or breakers.
EXAMPLE 1:
The following figure shows an example of a circuit that could be connected to two separate bus sections. It is assumed that
each section is protected individually by two B30s. Consider the B30 as protecting the Bus Section 1. The current signals
are connected to the relay using a CT bank, say F1, and assigned to a Source, say SRC 1. The status signal of the switch
is brought into the relay as an input contact, say U7a. The input contact can be used directly (say, Cont Ip 1 On), or further
processed using the FlexLogic for contact discrepancy filtering or extra security. The pair SRC 1 - Cont Ip 1 On defines
the input to the Bus Zone 1.
Figure 82: DYNAMIC BUS REPLICA MECHANISM
If a given circuit cannot be connected to any power system element other than the protected bus, then its status signal
should be fixed using the FlexLogic On constant.
BUS SECTION 1
BUS SECTION 2
836724A3.CDR
U7a Cont Ip 1 On
FLEXLOGIC
TM
BUS ZONE 1A STATUS
BUS
Z1
B30
BUS ZONE 1A SOURCE
SRC 1
SOURCES
F1
8 THEORY OF OPERATION 8.2 DYNAMIC BUS REPLICA
8
8.2.2 CT RATIO MATCHING
The B30 allows for using CTs with various rated secondary currents and transformation ratios. Scaling to a common base is
performed internally by the relay. The maximum allowable ratio mismatch is 32:1. For proper setting of the differential char-
acteristic, it is imperative to understand the common base used by the relay.
The B30 scales the secondary currents to the maximum primary current among the CTs defining a given bus differential
zone: 1 per unit corresponds to the highest rated primary current.
The scaling base is selected automatically by the relay during the configuration phase and is not affected by the dynamic
aspect of the bus differential zone. This means that even though the circuit containing the CT with the maximum rated pri-
mary current is not connected to a given bus zone at a given time, the scaling base does not change.
EXAMPLE 2:
Assume the CTs installed in the circuit defining the BUS ZONE 1 have the following ratings:
1A CT: 600:5
1B CT: 500:1
1C CT: 600:5
1D CT: 1000:5
1E CT: 500:1
1F CT: 600:5
The maximum of 600, 500, 600, 1000, 500, and 600 is 1000 A which is therefore selected as the base upon configuration
of the BUS ZONE 1. 1 per unit (pu) represents 1000A primary.
Note that independently from the ratios and rated secondary currents, the per unit values of the differential current retain
their original meaning regardless of the distribution of the differential current between individual circuits. Assume, for exam-
ple, that the differential current is fed by the inputs 1A and 1B exclusively, and consider two situations:
The 1A input supplies 1kA primary, and the 1B input supplies 2kA primary. The currents are in phase. The pu current of
the 1A source is 1000 A : (600:5) : 5A/pu = 1.67 pu. The pu current of the 1B source is 2000 A : (500:1) : 1A/pu = 4.00
pu. The pu differential current is (1000A + 2000A) : 1000A = 3.00 pu.
The 1A input supplies 2kA primary, and the 1B input supplies 1kA primary. The currents are in phase. The pu current of
the 1A source is 2000 A : (600:5) : 5A/pu = 3.33 pu. The pu current of the 1B source is 1000 A : (500:1) : 1A/pu = 2.00
pu. The pu differential current is (1000A + 2000A) : 1000A = 3.00 pu.
8.3 DIFFERENTIAL PRINCIPLE 8 THEORY OF OPERATION
8
8.3DIFFERENTIAL PRINCIPLE 8.3.1 BIASED DIFFERENTIAL CHARACTERISTIC
The B30 uses a dual-slope dual-breakpoint operating characteristic as shown in the figure below.
The PICKUP setting is provided to cope with spurious differential signals when the bus carries a light load and there is no
effective restraining signal.
The first breakpoint (LOW BPNT) is provided to specify the limit of guaranteed linear operation of the CTs in the most unfa-
vorable conditions such as high residual magnetism left in the magnetic cores or multiple autoreclosure shots. This point
defines the upper limit for the application of the first slope (LOW SLOPE).
The second breakpoint (HIGH BPNT) is provided to specify the limits of operation of the CTs without any substantial satura-
tion. This point defines the lower limit for the application of the second slope (HIGH SLOPE).
Figure 83: BIASED OPERATING CHARACTERISTIC
The higher slope used by the B30 acts as an actual percentage bias regardless of the value of the restraining signal. This is
so because the boundary of the operating characteristic in the higher slope region is a straight line intersecting the origin of
the differential - restraining plane. The advantage of having a constant bias specified by the HIGH SLOPE setting creates an
obstacle of a discontinuity between the first and second slopes. This is overcome by using a smooth approximation (cubic
spline) of the characteristic between the lower and higher breakpoints. Consequently, the characteristic ensures:
a constant percentage bias of LOW SLOPE for restraining currents below the lower breakpoint of LOW BPNT,
a constant percentage bias of HIGH SLOPE for restraining currents above the higher breakpoint of HIGH BPNT, and
a smooth transition from the bias of LOW SLOPE to HIGH SLOPE between the breakpoints.
d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l
restraining
LOW
SLOPE
OPERATE
BLOCK
Ir
|Id|
HIGH
SLOPE
L
O
W
B
P
N
T
H
I
G
H
B
P
N
T
PICKUP
836720A1.CDR
8 THEORY OF OPERATION 8.3 DIFFERENTIAL PRINCIPLE
8
8.3.2 DIFFERENTIAL AND RESTRAINING CURRENTS
The differential current is produced as a sum of the phasors of the input currents of a differential bus zone taking into
account the status signals of the currents, i.e. applying the dynamic bus replica of the protected zone. The differential cur-
rent is scaled to the maximum rated primary current as explained in Section 8.1 Introduction. The scaling must be taken
into account when setting the PICKUP value of the biased differential characteristic and the HIGH SET operating point of the
unbiased differential function.
The restraining current is produced as a maximum of the magnitudes of the phasors of the zone input currents taking into
account the status signals of the currents, i.e. applying the dynamic bus replica of the protected bus zone. The restraining
current is scaled to the maximum rated primary current as explained in Section 8.1 Introduction. The scaling must be taken
into account when setting the breakpoints of the biased differential characteristic.
The maximum of definition of the restraining signal biases the relay toward dependability without jeopardizing security as
the relay uses additional means to cope with CT saturation on external faults. An additional benefit of this approach is that
the restraining signal always represents a physical compared to an average or sum of current flowing through the CT
that is most likely to saturate during given external fault. This brings more meaning to the breakpoint settings of the operat-
ing characteristic.
The following example is provided with respect to the breakpoint settings.
EXAMPLE 3:
Proceed with the previous example (see page 82) and assume that taking into account the relevant factors such as prop-
erties of the CTs themselves, resistance of the leads and burden of the CTs, the following primary currents are guaranteed
to be transformed without significant saturation:
1A CT: 6.0 kA
1B CT: 7.5 kA
1C CT: 5.0 kA
1D CT: 13.0 kA
1E CT: 8.0 kA
1F CT: 9.0 kA
As having the lowest primary current guaranteeing operation without saturation, the CT associated with the 1C input is
most exposed to saturation. During an external fault on the 1C circuit, the 1C CT will carry the fault current contributed by
potentially all the remaining circuits. The fault current is higher than any contributing current, and therefore, the current of
the 1C CT will become the restraining signal for the biased differential characteristic for external faults on the 1C circuit.
Consequently, the higher breakpoint of the differential characteristic (HIGH BPNT) should be set not higher than
5000A : 1000A = 5 pu (1000A is the base unit; see page 82 for the example).
The same approach applies to the setting of the lower breakpoint, LOW BPNT.
8.3 DIFFERENTIAL PRINCIPLE 8 THEORY OF OPERATION
8
8.3.3 ENHANCED SECURITY
In order to enhance the performance of the B30, the differential characteristic is divided into two regions having diverse
operating modes as shown in following diagram.
The first region applies to comparatively low differential currents and has been introduced to deal with CT saturation on low-
current external faults. Certain distant external faults may cause CT saturation due to extremely long time constants of the
DC component or multiple autoreclosure shots. The saturation, however, is difficult to detect in such cases. Additional secu-
rity via the directional check is permanently applied to this region without regard to the saturation detector.
Figure 84: TWO REGIONS OF DIFFERENTIAL CHARACTERISTIC
The second region includes the remaining portion of the differential characteristic and applies to comparatively high differ-
ential currents. If, during an external fault, the spurious differential current is high enough so that the differential-restraining
current trajectory enters the second region, then saturation is guaranteed to be detected by the saturation detector.
The B30 operates in the 2-out-of-2 mode in the first region of the differential characteristic. Both differential and directional
principles (see Sections 8.3 Differential Principle and 8.4 Directional Principle) must confirm an internal fault in order for the
biased differential element to operate.
The relay operates in the dynamic 1-out-of-2 / 2-out-of-2 mode in the second region of the differential characteristic. If the
saturation detector (see Section 8.5 Saturation Detector) does not detect CT saturation, the differential protection principle
alone is capable of operating the biased differential element. If CT saturation is detected, both differential and directional
principles must confirm an internal fault in order for the biased differential element to operate.
Because of diverse operating modes in the first and second regions of the differential characteristic, the user gains double
control over the dependability and security issues. The first level includes slopes and breakpoints of the characteristic with
regard to the amount of the bias. The second level includes control over the split between the first and second regions of
the characteristic.
The unbiased differential element responds to the differential current alone. The saturation detector and directional element
do not apply to the unbiased differential element.
d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l
restraining
Region 1
(low differential
currents)
Region 2
(high differential
currents)
836725A1.CDR
8 THEORY OF OPERATION 8.4 DIRECTIONAL PRINCIPLE
8
8.4DIRECTIONAL PRINCIPLE 8.4.1 CURRENT DIRECTIONAL PROTECTION
For better security, the B30 uses the current directional protection principle to dynamically supervise the main current differ-
ential function. The directional principle is in effect permanently for low differential currents (Region 1 in Figure 84: Two
Regions of Differential Characteristic) and is switched on dynamically for large differential currents (Region 2 in the same
figure) by the saturation detector (see Section 8.5: Saturation Detector) upon detecting CT saturation.
The directional principle responds to a relative direction of the fault currents. This means that a reference signal, such as
bus voltage, is not required. The directional principle declares that
if all of the fault currents flow in one direction, the fault is internal, or
if at least one fault current flows in an opposite direction compared with the sum of the remaining currents, the fault is
external.
The directional principle is implemented in two stages.
First, based on the magnitude of a given current, it is determined whether the current is a fault current. If so, its relative
phase relation has to be considered. The angle check must not be initiated for the load currents as the direction will be out
of the bus even during internal faults. The auxiliary comparator of this stage applies an adaptable threshold. The threshold
is a fraction of the restraining current.
Second, for and only for the selected fault currents, the phase angle between a given current and the sum of all the
remaining currents is checked. The sum of all the remaining currents is the differential current less the current under con-
sideration. Therefore, for each, say the pth, current to be considered, the angle between the and phasors is to be
checked.
Ideally, during external faults, the said angle is close to 180 (see below); and during internal faults - close to 0 degrees.
Figure 85: DIRECTIONAL PRINCIPLE OPERATION DURING EXTERNAL FAULTS
Figure 86: DIRECTIONAL PRINCIPLE OPERATION DURING INTERNAL FAULTS
The B30 implementation calculates the maximum angle for the considered currents and compares it against a fixed thresh-
old of 90. The flag indicating whether the directional protection principle is satisfied is available as the FlexLogic oper-
and BUS 1(2) DIR.
I
P
I
D
I
P
836726A2.CDR
BLOCK
OPERATE
BLOCK
p D
p
I I
I
real
p D
p
I I
I
imag
I
p
I
D
- I
p
External Fault Conditions
OPERATE
836727A2.CDR
BLOCK
BLOCK
p D
p
I I
I
real
p D
p
I I
I
imag
I
p
I
D
- I
p
Internal Fault Conditions
OPERATE
OPERATE
8.5 SATURATION DETECTOR 8 THEORY OF OPERATION
8
8.5SATURATION DETECTOR 8.5.1 CT SATURATION DETECTION
The saturation detector of the B30 takes advantage of the fact that any CT operates correctly for a short period of time even
under very large primary currents that would subsequently cause a very deep saturation. As a result of that, in the case of
an external fault, the differential current stays very low during the initial period of linear operation of the CTs while the
restraining signal develops rapidly. Once one or more CTs saturate, the differential current will increase. The restraining sig-
nal, however, yields by at least a few milliseconds. During internal faults, both the differential and restraining currents
develop simultaneously. This creates characteristic patterns for the differential - restraining trajectory as depicted below.
Figure 87: CT SATURATION DETECTION INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL FAULT PATTERNS
The CT saturation condition is declared by the saturation detector when the magnitude of the restraining signal becomes
larger than the higher breakpoint (HIGH BPNT) and at the same time the differential current is below the first slope (LOW
SLOPE). The said condition is of a transient nature and requires a seal-in. A special logic in the form of a state machine is
used for this purpose as depicted in Figure 88: State Machine for Saturation Detector.
As the phasor estimator introduces a delay into the measurement process, the aforementioned saturation test would fail to
detect CT saturation occurring very fast. In order to cope with very fast CT saturation, another condition is checked that
uses relations between the signals at the waveform level. The basic principle is similar to that described above. Addition-
ally, the sample-based stage of the saturation detector uses the time derivative of the restraining signal (di/dt) to better
trace the saturation pattern shown in the above diagram.
The saturation detector is capable of detecting saturation occurring in approximately 2 ms into a fault. It is worth emphasiz-
ing that the saturation detector, although having no dedicated settings, uses the main differential characteristic for proper
operation. This aspect must be kept in mind when setting the characteristic as its parameters must retain their original
meaning.
The operation of the saturation detector is available as the FlexLogic operand BUS 1(2) SAT.
Figure 88: STATE MACHINE FOR SATURATION DETECTOR
836728A1.CDR
d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l
restraining
OPERATE
BLOCK
I
N
T
E
R
N
A
L
F
A
U
L
T
P
A
T
T
E
R
N
E
X
T
E
R
N
A
L
F
A
U
L
T
P
A
T
T
E
R
N
EXTERNAL FAULT PATTERN
NORMAL
SAT := 0
EXTERNAL
FAULT
SAT := 1
EXTERNAL
FAULT and CT
SATURATION
SAT := 1
The differential
characteristic
entered
The differential-
restraining trajectory
out of the differential
characteristic for a
certain period of time
saturation
condition
The differential
current below the
first slope for a
certain period of
time
836729A1.CDR
8 THEORY OF OPERATION 8.6 OUTPUT LOGIC AND EXAMPLES
8
8.6OUTPUT LOGIC AND EXAMPLES 8.6.1 OUTPUT LOGIC
The biased differential characteristic uses the output logic shown below.
For low differential signals, the biased differential element operates on the 2-out-of-2 basis utilizing both the differential and
directional principles.
For high differential signals, the directional principle is included only if demanded by the saturation detector (dynamic 1-out-
of-2 / 2-out-of-2 mode). Typically, the directional principle is slower, and by avoiding using it when possible, the B30 gains
speed.
The dynamic inclusion/exclusion of the directional principle is not applied for the low differential currents but is included per-
manently only because it is comparatively difficult to reliably detect CT saturation occurring when the currents are small, i.e.
saturation due to extremely long time constant of the DC component or due to multiple autoreclosure actions.
Figure 89: BIASED DIFFERENTIAL OUTPUT LOGIC
8.6.2 INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL FAULT EXAMPLE
Two examples of relay operation are presented: an external fault with heavy CT saturation and an internal fault.
The protected bus includes six circuits connected to CT banks F1, F5, M1, M5, U1 and U5, respectively. The circuits F1,
F5, M1, M5 and U5 are capable of feeding some fault current; the U1 circuit supplies a load. The F1, F5 and U5 circuits are
significantly stronger than the F5 and M1 connections.
The M5 circuit contains the weakest (most prone to saturation) CT of the bus.
Figure 8-10 presents the bus currents and the most important logic signals for the case of an external fault. Despite very
fast and severe CT saturation, the B30 remains stable.
Figure 8-11 presents the same signals but for the case of an internal fault. The B30 trips in 10 ms (fast form-C output con-
tact).
836730A1.CDR
DIF
L
DIR
SAT
DIF
H
OR
AND
AND
OR
biased bus
differential
DIF
BIASED
8.6 OUTPUT LOGIC AND EXAMPLES 8 THEORY OF OPERATION
8
Figure 810: EXTERNAL FAULT EXAMPLE
8
3
6
7
3
5
A
1
.
C
D
R
T
h
e
b
u
s
d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l
p
r
o
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
e
l
e
m
e
n
t
p
i
c
k
s
u
p
d
u
e
t
o
h
e
a
v
y
C
T
s
a
t
u
r
a
t
i
o
n
T
h
e
C
T
s
a
t
u
r
a
t
i
o
n
f
l
a
g
i
s
s
e
t
s
a
f
e
l
y
b
e
f
o
r
e
t
h
e
p
i
c
k
u
p
f
l
a
g
T
h
e
e
l
e
m
e
n
t
d
o
e
s
n
o
t
m
a
l
o
p
e
r
a
t
e
T
h
e
d
i
r
e
c
t
i
o
n
a
l
f
l
a
g
i
s
n
o
t
s
e
t
0
.
0
6
0
.
0
7
0
.
0
8
0
.
0
9
0
.
1
0
.
1
1
0
.
1
2
-
2
0
0
-
1
5
0
-
1
0
0
-
5
0 0
5
0
1
0
0
1
5
0
2
0
0
~
1
m
s
D
e
s
p
i
t
e
h
e
a
v
y
C
T
s
a
t
u
r
a
t
i
o
n
t
h
e
e
x
t
e
r
n
a
l
f
a
u
l
t
c
u
r
r
e
n
t
i
s
s
e
e
n
i
n
t
h
e
o
p
p
o
s
i
t
e
d
i
r
e
c
t
i
o
n
8 THEORY OF OPERATION 8.6 OUTPUT LOGIC AND EXAMPLES
8
Figure 811: INTERNAL FAULT EXAMPLE
8
3
6
7
3
6
A
1
.
C
D
R
T
h
e
b
u
s
d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l
p
r
o
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
e
l
e
m
e
n
t
p
i
c
k
s
u
p
T
h
e
e
l
e
m
e
n
t
o
p
e
r
a
t
e
s
i
n
1
0
m
s
T
h
e
d
i
r
e
c
t
i
o
n
a
l
f
l
a
g
i
s
s
e
t
A
l
l
t
h
e
f
a
u
l
t
c
u
r
r
e
n
t
s
a
r
e
s
e
e
n
i
n
o
n
e
d
i
r
e
c
t
i
o
n
T
h
e
s
a
t
u
r
a
t
i
o
n
f
l
a
g
i
s
n
o
t
s
e
t
-
n
o
d
i
r
e
c
t
i
o
n
a
l
d
e
c
i
s
i
o
n
r
e
q
u
i
r
e
d
8.6 OUTPUT LOGIC AND EXAMPLES 8 THEORY OF OPERATION
8
9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 9.1 OVERVIEW
9
9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 9.1OVERVIEW 9.1.1 INTRODUCTION
The B30 is a high-speed low-impedance microprocessor-based current differential relay for power system busbars. The
relay is limited to six circuits. The B30 incorporates the dynamic bus replica mechanism that allows for protecting buses
with circuits interconnectable between various sections but with single current measurement points.
As explained in the Theory of Operation chapter, the relay uses a dual-slope dual-breakpoint differential characteristic with
the restraint signal created as the maximum among the magnitudes of the circuit connected to the protected bus. The low-
impedance operating principle is enhanced by the use of the Saturation Detector and a current directional principle.
This chapter provides an example of setting calculations for a sample bus. The selected example includes various bus con-
figurations to clarify a number of typical situations. Both the bus configuration and numerical data used are not meant to
reflect any specific utility practice or design standards.
It is also assumed that the CTs have been selected without considering a B30 application, but the B30 settings are to be
calculated for proper relay application. The CT data used in this example are kept to a minimum and in a generic form. The
CT data does not reflect any particular notation or national standards.
The analysis provided in this chapter has been performed with the following goals:
The limits of linear operation of the CTs considering zero remanent flux have been determined in order to select the
high breakpoint settings of the biased differential characteristic.
The limits of linear operation of the CTs considering a remanent flux of 80% have been determined in order to select
the low breakpoint settings of the biased differential characteristic.
Saturation of the CTs has been analyzed in order to select the higher slope of the biased differential characteristic and
the high set differential overcurrent setting.
The analysis tools and safety margins applied are examples only and do not reflect any particular protection philosophy.
Typically, for the CT saturation related calculations, it is sufficient to consider the weakest (most prone to saturation) CT
connected to the bus and the total bus fault current combined with the longest time constant among all the circuits con-
nected to the bus. This chapter provides more detailed analysis (see the Slopes and High Set Threshold section) in order to
illustrate the idea of using setting groups to enhance the B30 performance when the bus configuration changes (see the
Enhancing Relay Performance section).
9.1.2 SAMPLE BUSBAR AND DATA
The following figure shows a double bus arrangement with North and South buses. This station has five circuits (C-1
through C-5) and a tiebreaker (B-7). Circuit C-1 is connected to the North bus; circuits C-2, C-3 and C-4 can be routed to
either bus via switches S-1 through S-6; circuit C-5 can be connected to either bus via breakers B-5 and B-6.
Figure 91: SAMPLE BUS CONFIGURATION
836731A2.CDR
NORTH BUS
SOUTH BUS
CT-8
B-5
B-6
CT-5
CT-6
S-5
S-6
B-4 CT-4
S-3
S-4
B-3 CT-3
S-1
S-2
B-2 CT-2
CT-1
B-1
C-1 C-2 C-4
C-3 C-5
CT-7
B-7
9.1 OVERVIEW 9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS
9
The following table shows the assumed short circuit contributions of the connected circuits and their DC time constants.
The basic CT data is presented in the table below. The magnetizing characteristics of the three different types of CTs used
in this example are shown in the following figure.
Figure 92: APPROXIMATE CT MAGNETIZING CHARACTERISTICS
Table 91: BASIC FAULT DATA OF THE CONNECTED CIRCUIT
CIRCUIT I
FAULT
(KA) T
DC
(MS)
C-1 0.00 N/A
C-2 0.00 N/A
C-3 6.00 5
C-4 5.00 30
C-5 3.00 40
Table 92: BASIC CT DATA
CT RATIO V
SAT
(V) R
CTSEC
() LEADS (M)
CT-1 600:5 144 0.34 210
CT-2 600:5 144 0.34 205
CT-3 1200:5 288 0.64 200
CT-4 1000:5 240 0.54 200
CT-5, CT-6 1000:5 240 0.54 180
CT-7, CT-8 1200:5 288 0.64 200
836732A4.CDR
9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 9.2 ZONING AND DYNAMIC BUS REPLICA
9
9.2ZONING AND DYNAMIC BUS REPLICA 9.2.1 DESCRIPTION
The figures in this section show the adopted protection zoning for the two bus sections.
To provide the bus differential zoning as shown in the figures, eight currents need to be measured. Consequently, the pro-
tection cannot be accomplished by one B30. However, as each bus has not more than six connections, two B30s can be
used.
9.2.2 NORTH BUS ZONE
With reference to the following diagram, the North bus differential zone is bounded by the following CTs: CT-1, CT-2 (if S-1
closed), CT-3 (if S-3 closed), CT-4 (if S-5 closed), CT-5 and CT-8. The North bus protection should operate the following
breakers: B-1, B-2 (if S-1 closed), B-3 (if S-3 closed), B-4 (if S-5 closed), B-5 and B-7.
Consequently, the B30 for the North bus should be wired and configured as follows:
CT-1 currents should be configured as SRC 1 and used as the source 1A of the bus differential zone 1 together with
the FlexLogic
On constant for the status.

CT-2 currents should be configured as SRC 2 and used as the source 1B of the bus differential zone 1 together with
the status of the S-1 switch.
CT-3 currents should be configured as SRC 3 and used as the source 1C of the bus differential zone 1 together with
CT-4 currents should be configured as SRC 4 and used as the source 1D of the bus differential zone 1 together with
CT-5 currents should be configured as SRC 5 and used as the source 1E of the bus differential zone 1 together with
the FlexLogic

CT-8 currents should be configured as SRC 6 and used as the source 1F of the bus differential zone 1 together with
the FlexLogic

The trip signal should be routed directly to the B-1, B-5 and B-7 breakers while it should be supervised by the status of
S-1, S-3 and S-5 for the B-2, B-3 and B-4 breakers, respectively.
Depending on utility practice, extra security may be required with respect to the status signals. This may include bringing in
both the normally opened and normally closed contacts of a switch as well as status of a peer switch (S-1 and S-2, for
example). If this is the case, the required security filtering should be accomplished using FlexLogic
and a single (final)

status operand should be indicated for the status signal when setting the bus differential zone.
Figure 93: NORTH BUS ZONE
836733A1.CDR
NORTH BUS
SOUTH BUS
CT-7
CT-8
B-7
B-5
B-6
CT-5
CT-6
S-5
S-6
B-4 CT-4
S-3
S-4
B-3 CT-3
S-1
S-2
B-2 CT-2
CT-1
B-1
C-1 C-2 C-4
C-3 C-5
9.2 ZONING AND DYNAMIC BUS REPLICA 9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS
9
9.2.3 SOUTH BUS ZONE
The South bus differential zone is bounded by the following CTs: CT-2 (if S-2 closed), CT-3 (if S-4 closed), CT-4 (if S-6
closed), CT-6 and CT-7. The South bus protection should operate the following breakers: B-2 (if S-2 closed), B-3 (if S-4
closed), B-4 (if S-6 closed), B-6 and B-7.
Consequently, the second B30 for the South bus should be wired and configured as follows:
CT-2 currents should be configured as SRC 1 and used as the source 1A of the bus differential zone 1 together with
CT-3 currents should be configured as SRC 2 and used as the source 1B of the bus differential zone 1 together with
CT-4 currents should be configured as SRC 3 and used as the source 1C of the bus differential zone 1 together with
CT-6 currents should be configured as SRC 4 and used as the source 1D of the bus differential zone 1 together with
the FlexLogic On constant for the status.
CT-7 currents should be configured as SRC 5 and used as the source 1E of the bus differential zone 1 together with
the FlexLogic On constant for the status.
The trip signal should be routed directly to the B-6 and B-7 breakers while it should be supervised by the status of S-2,
S-4 and S-6 for the B-2, B-3 and B-4 breakers, respectively.
Figure 94: SOUTH BUS ZONE
836734A1.CDR
NORTH BUS
SOUTH BUS
CT-7
CT-8
B-7
B-5
B-6
CT-5
CT-6
S-5
S-6
B-4 CT-4
S-3
S-4
B-3 CT-3
S-1
S-2
B-2 CT-2
CT-1
B-1
C-1 C-2 C-4
C-3 C-5
9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 9.3 BIASED CHARACTERISTIC BREAKPOINTS
9
9.3BIASED CHARACTERISTIC BREAKPOINTS 9.3.1 DESCRIPTION
The limits of linear operation of the CTs need to be found in order to set the breakpoints of the biased differential character-
istic. The settings for the North and South bus relays are analyzed simultaneously from this point on as the two differential
zones share some CTs and the results of computations apply to both the relays.
For microprocessor-based relays it is justified to assume the burden of the CTs to be resistive. The limits of the linear oper-
ation of a CT, neglecting the effects of the DC component and residual magnetism, can be approximated as follows:
(EQ 9.1)
where: I
max
is the maximum secondary current transformed without saturation (AC component only, no
residual magnetism),
R
s
is the total burden resistance,
V
sat
is the saturation voltage of the CT.
The total burden resistance depends on both the fault type and connection of the CTs. For single-line-to-ground faults and
CTs connected in Wye, the burden resistance is calculated as:
(EQ 9.2)
where: R
lead
is the lead resistance (one way, hence the factor of 2)
R
CTsec
is the secondary CT resistance
R
relay
is the relay input resistance.
Assuming 0.003 /m lead resistance and approximating the B30 input resistance for the 5A input CTs as 0.2 VA / (5 A)
2
or
0.008 , the limits of the linear operation of the CTs have been calculated and presented in the Limits of Linear Operations
of the CTs table.
9.3.2 HIGH BREAKPOINT
As an external fault may happen on any of the connected circuits, threatening saturation of any of the CTs, the minimum
value of the linear operation limit should be taken as the HIGH BPNT setting. The limit of linear operation that neglects both
the residual magnetism and the effect of the DC component should be the base for setting the higher breakpoint of the
biased differential characteristic.
The B30 requires the breakpoints to be entered as pu values. The relay uses the largest primary current of the CTs bound-
ing the bus differential zone as a base for the pu settings. Both the North and South buses have the largest primary current
of the CTs of 1200 A (CT-7 and CT-8), thus upon configuration of the relays, 1200 A is automatically selected as base for
the pu quantities. With a given I
base
current, the limits of linear operation have been recalculated to pu values as follows:
(EQ 9.3)
The third and fourth columns of the above table have the following significance.
Table 93: LIMITS OF LINEAR OPERATIONS OF THE CTS
CT R
S
() I
MAX
(A SEC) I
MAX
(PU)
(NO REMANENCE)
I
MAX
(PU)
(80% REMANENCE)
CT-1 1.61 89.55 8.96 1.79
CT-2 1.58 91.25 9.13 1.83
CT-3 1.85 155.84 31.17 6.23
CT-4 1.75 137.30 22.88 4.58
CT-5, CT-6 1.63 147.42 24.57 4.91
CT-7, CT-8 1.85 155.84 31.17 6.23
I
max
V
sat
R
s
---------- =
R
s
2R
l ead
R
CTsec
R
rel ay
+ + =
I
max pu ( )
I
max secondary ( )
I
base
----------------------------------- CT ratio =
9.3 BIASED CHARACTERISTIC BREAKPOINTS 9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS
9
If an external fault occurs on circuit C-1, CT-1 will carry the fault current. As the fault current is higher than any of the other
currents, the current supplied by CT-1 will be used as the restraint signal. CT-1 is guaranteed to saturate if the current
exceeds 89.55 A secondary, or 17.9 times its rated current, or 8.96 pu of the bus differential zone. Consequently, consider-
ing CT-1, the value of 8.96 pu should be used as the higher breakpoint of the characteristic.
Considering CTs that could be connected (depending on the positions of the switches) to the North bus, the HIGH BPNT for
the North bus zone should be selected as the minimum of (8.96, 9.13, 31.17, 22.88, 24.57, 31.17), or 8.96 pu.
Considering CTs that could be connected (depending on the positions of the switches) to the South bus, the HIGH BPNT for
the South bus zone should be selected as the minimum of (9.13, 31.17, 22.88, 24.57, 31.17), or 9.13 pu.
9.3.3 LOW BREAKPOINT
The DC component in the primary current may saturate a given CT even with the AC current below the suggested value of
the higher breakpoint. The relay copes with this threat by using the Saturation Detector and applying a 2-out-of-2 operating
principle upon detecting saturation.
The residual magnetism (remanence) left in the core of a CT can limit the linear operation of the CT significantly. It is justi-
fied to assume that the residual flux could be as high as 80% of the saturation level leaving only 20% to accommodate the
flux component created by the primary current. This phenomenon may be reflected by reducing the saturation voltage in
the calculations by the factor of 100% / 20%, or 5. This, in turn, is equivalent to reducing the limit of linear operation by the
factor of 5, hence the last column in the Limits of Linear Operations of the CTs table.
For example, if the residual flux left in the core of the CT-1 is as high as 80% of its saturation level, the CT will saturate at
17.92 A secondary, or 3.58 times its rated current, or at 1.79 pu of the bus differential zone.
The reduced limit of linear operation should be used as the lower breakpoint of the biased differential characteristic (the
LOW BPNT setting). In this way the interval spanning from the lower to higher breakpoints covers the indistinct area of possi-
ble saturation due to the random factor of residual magnetism.
The LOW BPNT should be set at 1.79 pu for the North bus zone, and at 1.83 pu for the South bus zone.
A combination of very high residual magnetism and a DC component with a long time constant may saturate a given CT
even with the AC current below the suggested value of the lower breakpoint. The relay copes with this threat by using a 2-
out-of-2 operating mode for low differential currents.
9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 9.4 SLOPES AND HIGH SET THRESHOLD
9
9.4SLOPES AND HIGH SET THRESHOLD 9.4.1 DESCRIPTION
To set the higher slope and threshold of the high set (unbiased) differential operation, external faults must be analyzed.
Consider an external fault for the North bus relay. It is justified to assume bus configurations that give maximum stress to
the maximum number of CTs. For this purpose we will assume the tie breaker, B-7 closed; all the circuitry capable of sup-
plying the fault current to be in service; moreover, they are connected to the South bus in order to analyze the CT-7 and CT-
8 carrying the fault current.
9.4.2 EXTERNAL FAULTS ON C-1
The table below presents the results of analysis of an external fault on circuit C-1 (C-1 is connected to the North bus; C-3,
C-4, and C-5 are connected to the South bus).
For security reasons, it has been assumed that the fault current being a sum of several contributors (C-3, C-4, and C-5 in
this case) has a time constant of the DC component of the maximum among the time constants of the contributors. The
fault current is supplied from circuits C-3, C-4, and C-5 connected to the South bus, thus through CT-3, CT-4, and CT-6.
The current passes through the tie breaker threatening saturation of CT-7 and CT-8.
By comparing the secondary currents (column 3 in the table below) with the limits of linear operation for the CTs (column 4
in the Limits of Linear Operations of the CTs table earlier), it is concluded that CT-1 will saturate during this fault, producing
a spurious differential signal for the North bus zone differential protection. All other CTs will not saturate due to the AC com-
ponents. The amount of the spurious differential current (magnetizing current of CT-1) can be calculated using the burden,
magnetizing characteristic and primary current of the noted CT by solving the following equations:
(EQ 9.4)
For I
s
= 116.67 A, R
s
= 1.61 and the characteristic shown earlier in the Approximate CT Magnetizing Characteristics fig-
ure, the solution is I
magnetizing
= 29.73 A, I
relay
= 112.8 A.
The magnetizing current of the saturated CT-1 will appear to the differential element protecting the North bus as a differen-
tial signal of 29.73 A, while the restraint signal will be the maximum of the bus currents (112.8 A in this case). Conse-
quently, the higher slope of the characteristic should not be lower than 29.73 A / 112.8 A, or 26%, and the pick up of the
high set differential elements should not be lower than 29.73 A, or 2.97 pu.
The CTs identified as operating in the linear mode as far as the AC components are considered may, however, saturate due
to the DC components. Saturation will not occur if , where is radian system frequency (2f).
If the above condition is violated, saturation will occur but not before:
Columns 6 and 7 of the table below summarize the DC saturation threat for the fault on C-1. CT-4, CT-6, CT-7, and CT-8
may saturate due to the DC components and may generate spurious differential signal for both the North and South bus
relays depending on the bus configuration. The saturation will not occur before 4.7 ms and will be detected by the Satura-
tion Detector.
The transient saturation of the CTs due to the DC component may be neglected when setting the slopes of the characteris-
tic as the saturation will be detected and the relay will use the current directional principle. It must however, be taken into
account when setting the high set (unbiased) differential element.
Table 94: EXTERNAL FAULT CALCULATIONS ON C-1
CT I
FAULT
(KA) I
FAULT
(A SEC) T
DC
(MS) AC
SATURATION
DC
SATURATION
T
SAT
(MS)
CT-1 14.0 116.67 40 Yes Yes N/A
CT-2 0 0.00 N/A No No N/A
CT-3 6.0 25.00 5 No No N/A
CT-4 5.0 25.00 30 No Yes 15.19
CT-6 3.0 15.00 40 No Yes 35.25
CT-7, CT-8 14.0 58.33 40 No Yes 4.70
I
rel ay
I
s
2
I
magneti zi ng
2
=
I
rel ay
R
s
V
magneti zi ng
=
V
sat
I
s
R
s
1 T
dc
+ ( ) >
T
sat
T
dc
1
V
sat
I
s
R
s
( ) 1
T
dc
----------------------------------------
\ .
| |
ln =
9.4 SLOPES AND HIGH SET THRESHOLD 9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS
9
The following table presents the results of analysis of an external fault on circuit C-2 (C-2 is connected to the North bus; C-
3, C-4 and C-5 are connected to the South bus).
By comparing the secondary currents (column 3 in the following table) with the limits of linear operation for the CTs (column
4 shown earlier in the Limits of Linear Operations of the CTs table) it is concluded that CT-2 will saturate during this fault
producing a spurious differential signal. All other CTs will not saturate due to the AC components. The amount of the spuri-
ous differential current (magnetizing current of CT-2) can be calculated using the burden, magnetizing characteristic and
the primary current of the said CT.
For I
s
= 116.67 A, R
s
= 1.23 and the characteristic shown earlier in the Approximate CT Magnetizing Characteristics fig-
ure, the solution is I
magnetizing
= 27.69 A, I
relay
= 113.3 A.
The magnetizing current of the saturated CT-2 will appear to the differential element protecting the North bus as a differen-
tial signal of 27.69 A, while the restraint signal will be the maximum of the bus currents (113.3 A). Consequently, the higher
slope of the characteristic should not be lower than 27.69 A / 113.3 A, or 24% and the pick up of the high-set differential
elements should not be lower than 27.69 A, or 2.77 pu.
Columns 6 and 7 of the following table summarize the DC saturation threat for the fault on C-2. CT-4, CT-6, CT-7, and CT-
8 may saturate due to the DC components and may generate spurious differential signal for both the North and South bus
tion Detector.
4 and C-5 are connected to the South bus).
in the Limits of Linear Operations of the CTs table shown earlier), it is concluded that none of the CTs will saturate due to
the AC currents during this fault.
Columns 6 and 7 of the table below summarize the DC saturation threat for the fault on C-3. CT-3, CT-4, CT-6, CT-7, and
CT-8 may saturate due to the DC components and may generate a spurious differential signal for both the North and South
bus relays depending on the bus configuration. The saturation will not occur before 11.18 ms and will be detected by the
Saturation Detector.
CT I
FAULT
(KA) I
FAULT
(A SEC) T
DC
(MS) AC
SATURATION
DC
SATURATION
T
SAT
(MS)
CT-2 14.0 116.67 40 Yes Yes N/A
CT-3 6.0 25.00 5 No No N/A
CT-4 5.0 25.00 30 No Yes 15.19
CT-6 3.0 15.00 40 No Yes 35.25
CT-7, CT-8 14.0 58.33 40 No Yes 4.70
Table 96: CALCULATIONS FOR THE EXTERNAL FAULTS ON C-3
CT I
FAULT
(KA) I
FAULT
(A SEC) T
DC
(MS) AC
SATURATION
DC
SATURATION
T
SAT
(MS)
CT-3 8.0 33.33 40 No Yes 11.18
CT-4 5.0 25.00 30 No Yes 15.19
CT-6 3.0 15.00 40 No Yes 35.25
CT-7, CT-8 8.0 33.33 40 No Yes 11.18
9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 9.4 SLOPES AND HIGH SET THRESHOLD
9
8 may saturate due to the DC components and may generate a spurious differential signal for both the North and South bus
tion Detector.
8 may saturate due to the DC components and may generate a spurious differential signal for both the North and South bus
tion Detector.
CT I
FAULT
(KA) I
FAULT
(A SEC) T
DC
(MS) AC
SATURATION
DC
SATURATION
T
SAT
(MS)
CT-3 6.0 25.00 5 No No N/A
CT-4 9.0 45.00 40 No Yes 5.85
CT-6 3.0 15.00 40 No Yes 35.25
CT-7, CT-8 9.0 37.50 40 No Yes 9.40
CT I
FAULT
(KA) I
FAULT
(A SEC) T
DC
(MS) AC
SATURATION
DC
SATURATION
T
SAT
(MS)
CT-3 6.0 25.00 5 No No N/A
CT-4 5.0 25.00 30 No Yes 15.19
CT-5 11.0 55.00 30 No Yes 4.83
CT-7, CT-8 11.0 45.83 30 No Yes 7.16
9.5 BUS DIFFERENTIAL SETTINGS 9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS
9
9.5BUS DIFFERENTIAL SETTINGS 9.5.1 DESCRIPTION
Taking the previous analysis from this chapter into account, the settings have been calculated as shown in below.
Table 99: NORTH BUS DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION SETTINGS
SETTING VALUE COMMENTS
PICKUP 0.1 pu Default value. Lower or higher values may be entered upon security/dependability
requirements. The pu value is for the base of 1200A. This means the actual pickup is
120 A primary.
LOW SLOPE 25% Default value. Lower or higher values may be entered upon security/dependability
requirements.
LOW BPNT 1.79 pu None of the CTs will saturate for ac currents below 1.79 pu even with 80% remanence.
The dc component, however, combined with the remanence may saturate some CTs
even for currents below 1.79 pu. The B30 copes with saturation using the current
directional principle.
HIGH SLOPE 60% Default value. Lower or higher values may be entered upon security/dependability
requirements. The value of 60% ensures that the differential characteristic alone
(without the directional principle) will work correctly under ac saturation of the CTs
(26% of spurious differential during the fault on C-1 saturating CT-1).
HIGH BPNT 8.96 None of the CTs will saturate for ac currents below 8.96 pu. The dc component,
however, may saturate some CTs even for currents below 8.96 pu. The B30 copes with
saturation using the current directional principle.
HIGH SET 5.94 The maximum spurious differential current is 2.97 pu. Due to limited accuracy of
analysis and the effect of dc saturation a security factor of 2 has been adopted. The
highest internal fault current is 14kA, or 11.67 pu giving a good chance to clear a
number of faults by the unbiased differential operation.
Table 910: SOUTH BUS DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION SETTINGS
SETTING VALUE COMMENTS
PICKUP 0.1 pu Default value. Lower or higher values may be entered upon security/dependability
requirements. The pu value is for the base of 1200A. This means the actual pickup is
120 A primary.
LOW SLOPE 25% Default value. Lower or higher values may be entered upon security/dependability
requirements.
LOW BPNT 1.83 pu None of the CTs will saturate for ac currents below 1.83 pu even with 80% remanence.
The dc component, however, combined with the remanence may saturate some CTs
even for currents below 1.83 pu. The B30 copes with saturation using the current
directional principle.
HIGH SLOPE 60% Default value. Lower or higher values may be entered upon security/dependability
requirements. The value of 60% ensures that the differential characteristic alone
(without the directional principle) will work correctly under ac saturation of the CTs
(24% of spurious differential during the fault on C-2 saturating CT-2).
HIGH BPNT 9.13 pu None of the CTs will saturate for ac currents below 9.13 pu. The dc component,
however, may saturate some CTs even for currents below 9.13 pu. The B30 copes with
saturation using the current directional principle.
HIGH SET 5.54 The maximum spurious differential current is 2.77 pu. Due to limited accuracy of
analysis and the effect of dc saturation a security factor of 2 has been adopted. The
highest internal fault current is 14kA, or 11.67 pu giving a good chance to clear a
number of faults by the unbiased differential operation.
9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 9.6 ENHANCING RELAY PERFORMANCE
9
9.6ENHANCING RELAY PERFORMANCE 9.6.1 USING SETTING GROUPS
In the example of the South bus, CT-2 is the weakest (most prone to saturation) CT dictating values of some settings. How-
ever, CT-2 may not be a part of the South bus protection zone if the S-2 switch is opened. As the position of the switch must
be provided for the dynamic bus replica, the status of the switch may be re-used to control the setting groups and apply
more sensitive settings if the weakest CT is not part of the bus zone at a given time. For example, if the S-2 switch is
opened while the S-6 switch is closed, the CT-4 becomes the weakest CT connected to the South bus. The higher break-
point (HIGH BPNT) could be increased to 22.88 pu (fourth column of the Limits of Linear Operations of the CTs table). The
lower breakpoint (LOW BPNT) could be increased to 4.58 pu (fifth column of the Limits of Linear Operations of the CTs table).
The higher slope (HIGH SLOPE) could be decreased as no AC saturation is possible for the South bus CTs (see the external
fault calculation tables for each circuit).
The concept could be implemented by using:
FlexLogic
to process the status signals in order to identify the weakest CT.

Setting Groups to switch dynamically from one setting group to another (adaptive settings).
This approach may be extended even further for buses that do not require the dynamic bus replica mechanism. This could
include approximation of the total bus fault current using positions of all switches and breakers and optimizing the settings
depending on the amount of stress imposed on the CTs in any particular bus configuration.
9.6 ENHANCING RELAY PERFORMANCE 9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS
9
GE Multilin B30 Bus Differential Relay A-1
APPENDIX A A.1 PARAMETERS
A
Appendices APPENDIX A FLEXANALOG PARAMETERS
A.1PARAMETERS
Table A1: FLEXANALOG DATA ITEMS (Sheet 1 of 11)
ADDR DATA ITEM FLEXANALOG NAME
6144 SRC 1 Phase A Current RMS SRC 1 Ia RMS
6146 SRC 1 Phase B Current RMS SRC 1 Ib RMS
6148 SRC 1 Phase C Current RMS SRC 1 Ic RMS
6150 SRC 1 Neutral Current RMS SRC 1 In RMS
6152 SRC 1 Phase A Current Magnitude SRC 1 Ia Mag
6154 SRC 1 Phase A Current Angle SRC 1 Ia Angle
6155 SRC 1 Phase B Current Magnitude SRC 1 Ib Mag
6157 SRC 1 Phase B Current Angle SRC 1 Ib Angle
6158 SRC 1 Phase C Current Magnitude SRC 1 Ic Mag
6160 SRC 1 Phase C Current Angle SRC 1 Ic Angle
6161 SRC 1 Neutral Current Magnitude SRC 1 In Mag
6163 SRC 1 Neutral Current Angle SRC 1 In Angle
6164 SRC 1 Ground Current RMS SRC 1 Ig RMS
6166 SRC 1 Ground Current Magnitude SRC 1 Ig Mag
6168 SRC 1 Ground Current Angle SRC 1 Ig Angle
6169 SRC 1 Zero Seq. Current Magnitude SRC 1 I_0 Mag
6171 SRC 1 Zero Sequence Current Angle SRC 1 I_0 Angle
6172 SRC 1 Pos. Seq. Current Magnitude SRC 1 I_1 Mag
6174 SRC 1 Pos. Seq. Current Angle SRC 1 I_1 Angle
6175 SRC 1 Neg. Seq. Current Magnitude SRC 1 I_2 Mag
6177 SRC 1 Neg. Seq. Current Angle SRC 1 I_2 Angle
6178 SRC 1 Differential Gnd Current Mag. SRC 1 Igd Mag
6180 SRC 1 Diff. Gnd. Current Angle SRC 1 Igd Angle
6238 SRC 2 Positive Seq. Current Angle SRC 2 I_1 Angle
6241 SRC 2 Negative Seq. Current Angle SRC 2 I_2 Angle
6244 SRC 2 Diff. Gnd Current Angle SRC 2 Igd Angle
6308 SRC 3 Differential Gnd Current Angle SRC 3 Igd Angle
6363 SRC 4 Zero Seq. Current Angle SRC 4 I_0 Angle
6364 SRC 4 Positive Seq. Current Mag. SRC 4 I_1 Mag
6367 SRC 4 Negative Seq. Current Mag. SRC 4 I_2 Mag
A-2 B30 Bus Differential Relay GE Multilin
A.1 PARAMETERS APPENDIX A
A
6656 SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage RMS SRC 1 Vag RMS
6658 SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage RMS SRC 1 Vbg RMS
6660 SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage RMS SRC 1 Vcg RMS
6662 SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage Magnitude SRC 1 Vag Mag
6664 SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage Angle SRC 1 Vag Angle
6665 SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage Magnitude SRC 1 Vbg Mag
6667 SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage Angle SRC 1 Vbg Angle
6668 SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage Magnitude SRC 1 Vcg Mag
6670 SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage Angle SRC 1 Vcg Angle
6671 SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage RMS SRC 1 Vab RMS
6673 SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage RMS SRC 1 Vbc RMS
6675 SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage RMS SRC 1 Vca RMS
6677 SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage Magnitude SRC 1 Vab Mag
6679 SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage Angle SRC 1 Vab Angle
6680 SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage Magnitude SRC 1 Vbc Mag
6682 SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage Angle SRC 1 Vbc Angle
6683 SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage Magnitude SRC 1 Vca Mag
6685 SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage Angle SRC 1 Vca Angle
6686 SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage RMS SRC 1 Vx RMS
6688 SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage Magnitude SRC 1 Vx Mag
6690 SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage Angle SRC 1 Vx Angle
6691 SRC 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Mag. SRC 1 V_0 Mag
6693 SRC 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Angle SRC 1 V_0 Angle
6694 SRC 1 Positive Seq. Voltage Mag. SRC 1 V_1 Mag
6696 SRC 1 Positive Seq. Voltage Angle SRC 1 V_1 Angle
6697 SRC 1 Negative Seq. Voltage Mag. SRC 1 V_2 Mag
6699 SRC 1 Negative Seq. Voltage Angle SRC 1 V_2 Angle
6755 SRC 2 Zero Seq. Voltage Magnitude SRC 2 V_0 Mag
A
7168 SRC 1 Three Phase Real Power SRC 1 P
7170 SRC 1 Phase A Real Power SRC 1 Pa
7172 SRC 1 Phase B Real Power SRC 1 Pb
7174 SRC 1 Phase C Real Power SRC 1 Pc
7176 SRC 1 Three Phase Reactive Power SRC 1 Q
7178 SRC 1 Phase A Reactive Power SRC 1 Qa
A
7180 SRC 1 Phase B Reactive Power SRC 1 Qb
7182 SRC 1 Phase C Reactive Power SRC 1 Qc
7184 SRC 1 Three Phase Apparent Power SRC 1 S
7186 SRC 1 Phase A Apparent Power SRC 1 Sa
7188 SRC 1 Phase B Apparent Power SRC 1 Sb
7190 SRC 1 Phase C Apparent Power SRC 1 Sc
7192 SRC 1 Three Phase Power Factor SRC 1 PF
7193 SRC 1 Phase A Power Factor SRC 1 Phase A PF
7194 SRC 1 Phase B Power Factor SRC 1 Phase B PF
7195 SRC 1 Phase C Power Factor SRC 1 Phase C PF
7552 SRC 1 Frequency SRC 1 Frequency
7680 SRC 1 Demand Ia SRC 1 Demand Ia
7682 SRC 1 Demand Ib SRC 1 Demand Ib
7684 SRC 1 Demand Ic SRC 1 Demand Ic
7686 SRC 1 Demand Watt SRC 1 Demand Watt
7688 SRC 1 Demand Var SRC 1 Demand var
7690 SRC 1 Demand Va SRC 1 Demand Va
A
9472 Bus Diff IA Magnitude Bus 1 Diff A Mag
9474 Bus Diff IA Angle Bus 1 Diff A Ang
9475 Bus Diff IB Magnitude Bus 1 Diff B Mag
9477 Bus Diff IB Angle Bus 1 Diff B Ang
9478 Bus Diff IC Magnitude Bus 1 Diff C Mag
9480 Bus Diff IC Angle Bus 1 Diff C Ang
9481 Bus Rest IA Magnitude Bus 1 Rest A Mag
9483 Bus Rest IA Angle Bus 1 Rest A Ang
9484 Bus Rest IB Magnitude Bus 1 Rest B Mag
9486 Bus Rest IB Angle Bus 1 Rest B Ang
9487 Bus Rest IC Magnitude Bus 1 Rest C Mag
9489 Bus Rest IC Angle Bus 1 Rest C Ang
9493 Bus Max CT Primary Bus Max CT Primary
13504 DCMA Inputs 1 Value DCMA Inputs 1 Value
13552 RTD Inputs 1 Value RTD Inputs 1 Value
A
32768 Tracking Frequency Tracking Frequency
39425 FlexElement 1 Actual FlexElement 1 Value
40971 Current Setting Group Active Setting Group
GE Multilin B30 Bus Differential Relay B-1
APPENDIX B B.1 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL
B
APPENDIX B MODBUS COMMUNICATIONSB.1MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL B.1.1 INTRODUCTION
The UR-series relays support a number of communications protocols to allow connection to equipment such as personal
computers, RTUs, SCADA masters, and programmable logic controllers. The Modicon Modbus RTU protocol is the most
basic protocol supported by the UR. Modbus is available via RS232 or RS485 serial links or via ethernet (using the Mod-
bus/TCP specification). The following description is intended primarily for users who wish to develop their own master com-
munication drivers and applies to the serial Modbus RTU protocol. Note that:
The UR always acts as a slave device, meaning that it never initiates communications; it only listens and responds to
requests issued by a master computer.
For Modbus
, a subset of the Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) protocol format is supported that allows extensive monitor-
ing, programming, and control functions using read and write register commands.
B.1.2 PHYSICAL LAYER
The Modbus
RTU protocol is hardware-independent so that the physical layer can be any of a variety of standard hard-
ware configurations including RS232 and RS485. The relay includes a faceplate (front panel) RS232 port and two rear ter-
minal communications ports that may be configured as RS485, fiber optic, 10BaseT, or 10BaseF. Data flow is half-duplex in
all configurations. See Chapter 3 for details on wiring.
Each data byte is transmitted in an asynchronous format consisting of 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and possibly 1 parity
bit. This produces a 10 or 11 bit data frame. This can be important for transmission through modems at high bit rates (11 bit
data frames are not supported by many modems at baud rates greater than 300).
The baud rate and parity are independently programmable for each communications port. Baud rates of 300, 1200, 2400,
4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, or 115200 bps are available. Even, odd, and no parity are avail-
able. Refer to the Communications section of Chapter 5 for further details.
The master device in any system must know the address of the slave device with which it is to communicate. The relay will
not act on a request from a master if the address in the request does not match the relays slave address (unless the
address is the broadcast address see below).
A single setting selects the slave address used for all ports, with the exception that for the faceplate port, the relay will
accept any address when the Modbus
RTU protocol is used.

B.1.3 DATA LINK LAYER
Communications takes place in packets which are groups of asynchronously framed byte data. The master transmits a
packet to the slave and the slave responds with a packet. The end of a packet is marked by dead-time on the communica-
tions line. The following describes general format for both transmit and receive packets. For exact details on packet format-
ting, refer to subsequent sections describing each function code.
SLAVE ADDRESS: This is the address of the slave device that is intended to receive the packet sent by the master
and to perform the desired action. Each slave device on a communications bus must have a unique address to prevent
bus contention. All of the relays ports have the same address which is programmable from 1 to 254; see Chapter 5 for
details. Only the addressed slave will respond to a packet that starts with its address. Note that the faceplate port is an
exception to this rule; it will act on a message containing any slave address.
A master transmit packet with slave address 0 indicates a broadcast command. All slaves on the communication link
take action based on the packet, but none respond to the master. Broadcast mode is only recognized when associated
with Function Code 05h. For any other function code, a packet with broadcast mode slave address 0 will be ignored.
Table B1: MODBUS PACKET FORMAT
DESCRIPTION SIZE
SLAVE ADDRESS 1 byte
FUNCTION CODE 1 byte
DATA N bytes
CRC 2 bytes
DEAD TIME 3.5 bytes transmission time
B-2 B30 Bus Differential Relay GE Multilin
B.1 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL APPENDIX B
B
FUNCTION CODE: This is one of the supported functions codes of the unit which tells the slave what action to per-
form. See the Supported Function Codes section for complete details. An exception response from the slave is indi-
cated by setting the high order bit of the function code in the response packet. See the Exception Responses section
for further details.
DATA: This will be a variable number of bytes depending on the function code. This may include actual values, set-
tings, or addresses sent by the master to the slave or by the slave to the master.
CRC: This is a two byte error checking code. The RTU version of Modbus
includes a 16-bit cyclic redundancy check

(CRC-16) with every packet which is an industry standard method used for error detection. If a Modbus slave device
receives a packet in which an error is indicated by the CRC, the slave device will not act upon or respond to the packet
thus preventing any erroneous operations. See the CRC-16 Algorithm section for details on calculating the CRC.
DEAD TIME: A packet is terminated when no data is received for a period of 3.5 byte transmission times (about 15 ms
at 2400 bps, 2 ms at 19200 bps, and 300 s at 115200 bps). Consequently, the transmitting device must not allow gaps
between bytes longer than this interval. Once the dead time has expired without a new byte transmission, all slaves
start listening for a new packet from the master except for the addressed slave.
B.1.4 CRC-16 ALGORITHM
The CRC-16 algorithm essentially treats the entire data stream (data bits only; start, stop and parity ignored) as one contin-
uous binary number. This number is first shifted left 16 bits and then divided by a characteristic polynomial
(11000000000000101B). The 16 bit remainder of the division is appended to the end of the packet, MSByte first. The
resulting packet including CRC, when divided by the same polynomial at the receiver will give a zero remainder if no trans-
mission errors have occurred. This algorithm requires the characteristic polynomial to be reverse bit ordered. The most sig-
nificant bit of the characteristic polynomial is dropped, since it does not affect the value of the remainder.
A C programming language implementation of the CRC algorithm will be provided upon request.
Table B2: CRC-16 ALGORITHM
SYMBOLS: --> data transfer
A 16 bit working register
Alow low order byte of A
Ahigh high order byte of A
CRC 16 bit CRC-16 result
i,j loop counters
(+) logical EXCLUSIVE-OR operator
N total number of data bytes
Di i-th data byte (i = 0 to N-1)
G 16 bit characteristic polynomial = 1010000000000001 (binary) with MSbit dropped and bit order reversed
shr (x) right shift operator (th LSbit of x is shifted into a carry flag, a '0' is shifted into the MSbit of x, all other bits
are shifted right one location)
ALGORITHM: 1. FFFF (hex) --> A
2. 0 --> i
3. 0 --> j
4. Di (+) Alow --> Alow
5. j + 1 --> j
6. shr (A)
7. Is there a carry? No: go to 8; Yes: G (+) A --> A and continue.
8. Is j = 8? No: go to 5; Yes: continue
9. i + 1 --> i
10. Is i = N? No: go to 3; Yes: continue
11. A --> CRC
APPENDIX B B.2 MODBUS FUNCTION CODES
B
B.2MODBUS FUNCTION CODES B.2.1 SUPPORTED FUNCTION CODES
Modbus
officially defines function codes from 1 to 127 though only a small subset is generally needed. The relay supports
some of these functions, as summarized in the following table. Subsequent sections describe each function code in detail.
B.2.2 READ ACTUAL VALUES OR SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 03/04H)
This function code allows the master to read one or more consecutive data registers (actual values or settings) from a relay.
Data registers are always 16 bit (two byte) values transmitted with high order byte first. The maximum number of registers
that can be read in a single packet is 125. See the Modbus Memory Map table for exact details on the data registers.
Since some PLC implementations of Modbus
only support one of function codes 03h and 04h, the relay interpretation
allows either function code to be used for reading one or more consecutive data registers. The data starting address will
determine the type of data being read. Function codes 03h and 04h are therefore identical.
The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master device requesting 3
register values starting at address 4050h from slave device 11h (17 decimal); the slave device responds with the values 40,
300, and 0 from registers 4050h, 4051h, and 4052h, respectively.
FUNCTION CODE MODBUS DEFINITION GE MULTILIN DEFINITION
HEX DEC
03 3 Read Holding Registers Read Actual Values or Settings
04 4 Read Holding Registers Read Actual Values or Settings
05 5 Force Single Coil Execute Operation
06 6 Preset Single Register Store Single Setting
10 16 Preset Multiple Registers Store Multiple Settings
Table B3: MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE
MASTER TRANSMISSION SLAVE RESPONSE
PACKET FORMAT EXAMPLE (HEX) PACKET FORMAT EXAMPLE (HEX)
SLAVE ADDRESS 11 SLAVE ADDRESS 11
FUNCTION CODE 04 FUNCTION CODE 04
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - high 40 BYTE COUNT 06
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - low 50 DATA #1 - high 00
NUMBER OF REGISTERS - high 00 DATA #1 - low 28
NUMBER OF REGISTERS - low 03 DATA #2 - high 01
CRC - low A7 DATA #2 - low 2C
CRC - high 4A DATA #3 - high 00
DATA #3 - low 00
CRC - low 0D
CRC - high 60
B.2 MODBUS FUNCTION CODES APPENDIX B
B
B.2.3 EXECUTE OPERATION (FUNCTION CODE 05H)
This function code allows the master to perform various operations in the relay. Available operations are shown in the Sum-
mary of Operation Codes table below.
The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master device requesting the
slave device 11H (17 dec) to perform a reset. The high and low Code Value bytes always have the values FF and 00
respectively and are a remnant of the original Modbus
definition of this function code.

B.2.4 STORE SINGLE SETTING (FUNCTION CODE 06H)
This function code allows the master to modify the contents of a single setting register in an relay. Setting registers are
always 16 bit (two byte) values transmitted high order byte first. The following table shows the format of the master and
slave packets. The example shows a master device storing the value 200 at memory map address 4051h to slave device
11h (17 dec).
OPERATION CODE - high 00 OPERATION CODE - high 00
OPERATION CODE - low 01 OPERATION CODE - low 01
CODE VALUE - high FF CODE VALUE - high FF
CODE VALUE - low 00 CODE VALUE - low 00
CRC - low DF CRC - low DF
CRC - high 6A CRC - high 6A
Table B5: SUMMARY OF OPERATION CODES FOR FUNCTION 05H
OPERATION
CODE (HEX)
DEFINITION DESCRIPTION
0000 NO OPERATION Does not do anything.
0001 RESET Performs the same function as the faceplate RESET key.
0005 CLEAR EVENT RECORDS Performs the same function as the faceplate CLEAR EVENT RECORDS menu
command.
0006 CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY Clears all oscillography records.
1000 to 101F VIRTUAL IN 1-32 ON/OFF Sets the states of Virtual Inputs 1 to 32 either ON or OFF.
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - high 40 DATA STARTING ADDRESS - high 40
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - low 51 DATA STARTING ADDRESS - low 51
DATA - high 00 DATA - high 00
DATA - low C8 DATA - low C8
CRC - low CE CRC - low CE
CRC - high DD CRC - high DD
APPENDIX B B.2 MODBUS FUNCTION CODES
B
B.2.5 STORE MULTIPLE SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 10H)
This function code allows the master to modify the contents of a one or more consecutive setting registers in a relay. Setting
registers are 16-bit (two byte) values transmitted high order byte first. The maximum number of setting registers that can be
stored in a single packet is 60. The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows
a master device storing the value 200 at memory map address 4051h, and the value 1 at memory map address 4052h to
slave device 11h (17 decimal).
B.2.6 EXCEPTION RESPONSES
Programming or operation errors usually happen because of illegal data in a packet. These errors result in an exception
response from the slave. The slave detecting one of these errors sends a response packet to the master with the high order
bit of the function code set to 1.
The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master device sending the
unsupported function code 39h to slave device 11.
PACKET FORMAT EXAMPLE (HEX) PACKET FORMAT EXMAPLE (HEX)
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - hi 40 DATA STARTING ADDRESS - hi 40
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - lo 51 DATA STARTING ADDRESS - lo 51
NUMBER OF SETTINGS - hi 00 NUMBER OF SETTINGS - hi 00
NUMBER OF SETTINGS - lo 02 NUMBER OF SETTINGS - lo 02
BYTE COUNT 04 CRC - lo 07
DATA #1 - high order byte 00 CRC - hi 64
DATA #1 - low order byte C8
DATA #2 - high order byte 00
DATA #2 - low order byte 01
CRC - low order byte 12
CRC - high order byte 62
FUNCTION CODE 39 FUNCTION CODE B9
CRC - low order byte CD ERROR CODE 01
CRC - high order byte F2 CRC - low order byte 93
CRC - high order byte 95
B.3 FILE TRANSFERS APPENDIX B
B
B.3FILE TRANSFERS B.3.1 OBTAINING RELAY FILES VIA MODBUS
a) DESCRIPTION
The UR relay has a generic file transfer facility, meaning that you use the same method to obtain all of the different types of
files from the unit. The Modbus registers that implement file transfer are found in the "Modbus File Transfer (Read/Write)"
and "Modbus File Transfer (Read Only)" modules, starting at address 3100 in the Modbus Memory Map. To read a file from
the UR relay, use the following steps:
1. Write the filename to the "Name of file to read" register using a write multiple registers command. If the name is shorter
than 80 characters, you may write only enough registers to include all the text of the filename. Filenames are not case
sensitive.
2. Repeatedly read all the registers in "Modbus File Transfer (Read Only)" using a read multiple registers command. It is
not necessary to read the entire data block, since the UR relay will remember which was the last register you read. The
"position" register is initially zero and thereafter indicates how many bytes (2 times the number of registers) you have
read so far. The "size of..." register indicates the number of bytes of data remaining to read, to a maximum of 244.
3. Keep reading until the "size of..." register is smaller than the number of bytes you are transferring. This condition indi-
cates end of file. Discard any bytes you have read beyond the indicated block size.
4. If you need to re-try a block, read only the "size of.." and "block of data", without reading the position. The file pointer is
only incremented when you read the position register, so the same data block will be returned as was read in the pre-
vious operation. On the next read, check to see if the position is where you expect it to be, and discard the previous
block if it is not (this condition would indicate that the UR relay did not process your original read request).
The UR relay retains connection-specific file transfer information, so files may be read simultaneously on multiple Modbus
connections.
b) OTHER PROTOCOLS
All the files available via Modbus may also be retrieved using the standard file transfer mechanisms in other protocols (for
example, TFTP or MMS).
c) COMTRADE, OSCILLOGRAPHY, AND DATA LOGGER FILES
Oscillography files are formatted using the COMTRADE file format per IEEE PC37.111 Draft 7c (02 September 1997). The
files may be obtained in either text or binary COMTRADE format.
d) READING OSCILLOGRAPHY FILES
Familiarity with the oscillography feature is required to understand the following description. Refer to the Oscillography sec-
tion in Chapter 5 for additional details.
The Oscillography Number of Triggers register is incremented by one every time a new oscillography file is triggered (cap-
tured) and cleared to zero when oscillography data is cleared. When a new trigger occurs, the associated oscillography file
is assigned a file identifier number equal to the incremented value of this register; the newest file number is equal to the
Oscillography_Number_of_Triggers register. This register can be used to determine if any new data has been captured by
periodically reading it to see if the value has changed; if the number has increased then new data is available.
The Oscillography Number of Records register specifies the maximum number of files (and the number of cycles of data
per file) that can be stored in memory of the relay. The Oscillography Available Records register specifies the actual num-
ber of files that are stored and still available to be read out of the relay.
Writing Yes (i.e. the value 1) to the Oscillography Clear Data register clears oscillography data files, clears both the Oscil-
lography Number of Triggers and Oscillography Available Records registers to zero, and sets the Oscillography Last
Cleared Date to the present date and time.
To read binary COMTRADE oscillography files, read the following filenames:
OSCnnnn.CFG and OSCnnn.DAT
Replace nnn with the desired oscillography trigger number. For ASCII format, use the following file names
OSCAnnnn.CFG and OSCAnnn.DAT
APPENDIX B B.3 FILE TRANSFERS
B
e) READING EVENT RECORDER FILES
To read the entire event recorder contents in ASCII format (the only available format), use the following filename:
EVT.TXT
To read from a specific record to the end of the log, use the following filename:
EVTnnn.TXT (replace nnn with the desired starting record number)
To read from a specific record to another specific record, use the following filename:
EVT.TXT xxxxx yyyyy (replace xxxxx with the starting record number and yyyyy with the ending record number)
B.3.2 MODBUS PASSWORD OPERATION
The COMMAND password is set up at memory location 4000. Storing a value of 0 removes COMMAND password protec-
tion. When reading the password setting, the encrypted value (zero if no password is set) is returned. COMMAND security
is required to change the COMMAND password. Similarly, the SETTING password is set up at memory location 4002.
These are the same settings and encrypted values found in the SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" PASSWORD SECURITY
menu via the keypad. Enabling password security for the faceplate display will also enable it for Modbus, and vice-versa.
To gain COMMAND level security access, the COMMAND password must be entered at memory location 4008. To gain
SETTING level security access, the SETTING password must be entered at memory location 400A. The entered SETTING
password must match the current SETTING password setting, or must be zero, to change settings or download firmware.
COMMAND and SETTING passwords each have a 30-minute timer. Each timer starts when you enter the particular pass-
word, and is re-started whenever you use it. For example, writing a setting re-starts the SETTING password timer and
writing a command register or forcing a coil re-starts the COMMAND password timer. The value read at memory location
4010 can be used to confirm whether a COMMAND password is enabled or disabled (0 for Disabled). The value read at
memory location 4011 can be used to confirm whether a SETTING password is enabled or disabled.
COMMAND or SETTING password security access is restricted to the particular port or particular TCP/IP connection on
which the entry was made. Passwords must be entered when accessing the relay through other ports or connections, and
the passwords must be re-entered after disconnecting and re-connecting on TCP/IP.
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING APPENDIX B
B
B.4MEMORY MAPPING B.4.1 MODBUS MEMORY MAP
Table B9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 1 of 31)
ADDR REGISTER NAME RANGE UNITS STEP FORMAT DEFAULT
Product Information (Read Only)
0000 UR Product Type 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
0002 Product Version 0 to 655.35 --- 0.01 F001 1
Product Information (Read Only -- Written by Factory)
0010 Serial Number --- --- --- F203 0
0020 Manufacturing Date 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F050 0
0022 Modification Number 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
0040 Order Code --- --- --- F204 Order Code x
0090 Ethernet MAC Address --- --- --- F072 0
0093 Reserved (13 items) --- --- --- F001 0
00A0 CPU Module Serial Number --- --- --- F203 (none)
00B0 CPU Supplier Serial Number --- --- --- F203 (none)
00C0 Ethernet Sub Module Serial Number (8 items) --- --- --- F203 (none)
Self Test Targets (Read Only)
0200 Self Test States (2 items) 0 to 4294967295 0 1 F143 0
Front Panel (Read Only)
0204 LED Column x State (10 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F501 0
0220 Display Message --- --- --- F204 (none)
0248 Last Key Pressed 0 to 47 --- 1 F530 0 (None)
Keypress Emulation (Read/Write)
0280 Simulated keypress -- write zero before each keystroke 0 to 42 --- 1 F190 0 (No key -- use
between real keys)
Virtual Input Commands (Read/Write Command) (32 modules)
0400 Virtual Input 1 State 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
0401 ...Repeated for module number 2
040A ...Repeated for module number 11
040B ...Repeated for module number 12
040C ...Repeated for module number 13
040D ...Repeated for module number 14
040E ...Repeated for module number 15
040F ...Repeated for module number 16
APPENDIX B B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
B
Digital Counter States (Read Only Non-Volatile) (8 modules)
0800 Digital Counter 1 Value -2147483647 to
2147483647
--- 1 F004 0
0802 Digital Counter 1 Frozen -2147483647 to
2147483647
--- 1 F004 0
0804 Digital Counter 1 Frozen Time Stamp 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F050 0
0806 Digital Counter 1 Frozen Time Stamp us 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
FlexStates (Read Only)
0900 FlexState Bits (16 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Element States (Read Only)
1000 Element Operate States (64 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F502 0
User Displays Actuals (Read Only)
1080 Formatted user-definable displays (16 items) --- --- --- F200 (none)
Modbus User Map Actuals (Read Only)
1200 User Map Values (256 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Element Targets (Read Only)
14C0 Target Sequence 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
14C1 Number of Targets 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Element Targets (Read/Write)
14C2 Target to Read 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Element Targets (Read Only)
14C3 Target Message --- --- --- F200 .
Digital I/O States (Read Only)
1500 Contact Input States (6 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1508 Virtual Input States (2 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1510 Contact Output States (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1518 Contact Output Current States (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1520 Contact Output Voltage States (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1528 Virtual Output States (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1530 Contact Output Detectors (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
Remote Input/Output States (Read Only)
1540 Remote Device 1 States 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1542 Remote Input States (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1550 Remote Devices Online 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
Remote Device Status (Read Only) (16 modules)
1551 Remote Device 1 StNum 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
1553 Remote Device 1 SqNum 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
B
Platform Direct Input/Output States (Read Only)
15C0 Direct Input States (6 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
15C8 Direct Outputs Average Message Return Time 1 0 to 65535 ms 1 F001 0
15C9 Direct Outputs Average Message Return Time 2 0 to 65535 ms 1 F001 0
15CA Direct Inputs/Outputs Unreturned Message Count - Ch. 1 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
15CB Direct Inputs/Outputs Unreturned Message Count - Ch. 2 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
15D0 Direct Device States 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
15D1 Reserved 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
15D2 Direct Inputs/Outputs CRC Fail Count 1 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
15D3 Direct Inputs/Outputs CRC Fail Count 2 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Ethernet Fibre Channel Status (Read/Write)
1610 Ethernet Primary Fibre Channel Status 0 to 2 --- 1 F134 0 (Fail)
1611 Ethernet Secondary Fibre Channel Status 0 to 2 --- 1 F134 0 (Fail)
Source Current (Read Only) (6 modules)
1800 Phase A Current RMS 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1802 Phase B Current RMS 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1804 Phase C Current RMS 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1806 Neutral Current RMS 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1808 Phase A Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
180A Phase A Current Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
180B Phase B Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
180D Phase B Current Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
180E Phase C Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1810 Phase C Current Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1811 Neutral Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1813 Neutral Current Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1814 Ground Current RMS 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1816 Ground Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1818 Ground Current Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1819 Zero Sequence Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
181B Zero Sequence Current Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
181C Positive Sequence Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
181E Positive Sequence Current Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
181F Negative Sequence Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1821 Negative Sequence Current Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1822 Differential Ground Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1824 Differential Ground Current Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1825 Reserved (27 items) --- --- --- F001 0
18C0 ...Repeated for module number 4
Source Voltage (Read Only) (6 modules)
1A00 Phase AG Voltage RMS 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A02 Phase BG Voltage RMS 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
B
1A04 Phase CG Voltage RMS 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A06 Phase AG Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A08 Phase AG Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1A09 Phase BG Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A0B Phase BG Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1A0C Phase CG Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A0E Phase CG Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1A0F Phase AB or AC Voltage RMS 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A11 Phase BC or BA Voltage RMS 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A13 Phase CA or CB Voltage RMS 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A15 Phase AB or AC Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A17 Phase AB or AC Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1A18 Phase BC or BA Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A1A Phase BC or BA Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1A1B Phase CA or CB Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A1D Phase CA or CB Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1A1E Auxiliary Voltage RMS 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A20 Auxiliary Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A22 Auxiliary Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1A23 Zero Sequence Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A25 Zero Sequence Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1A26 Positive Sequence Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A28 Positive Sequence Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1A29 Negative Sequence Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A2B Negative Sequence Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1A2C Reserved (20 items) --- --- --- F001 0
1A40 ...Repeated for module number 2
1AC0 ...Repeated for module number 4
1B00 ...Repeated for module number 5
Source Frequency (Read Only) (6 modules)
1D80 Frequency 2 to 90 Hz 0.01 F001 0
1D81 ...Repeated for module number 2
Passwords Unauthorized Access (Read/Write Command)
2230 Reset Unauthorized Access 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
Bus Actuals (Read Only)
2500 Bus Differential IA Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
2502 Bus Differential IA Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
2503 Bus Differential IB Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
2505 Bus Differential IB Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
2506 Bus Differential IC Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
2508 Bus Differential IC Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
2509 Bus Differential Rest IA Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
250B Bus Differential Rest IA Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
250C Bus Differential Rest IB Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
250E Bus Differential Rest IB Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
250F Bus Differential Rest IC Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
2511 Bus Differential Rest IC Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
2515 Bus Maximum CT Primary 0 to 50000 --- 1 F060 1
B
2517 Reserved (9 items) --- --- --- F001 0
Expanded FlexStates (Read Only)
2B00 FlexStates, one per register (256 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
Expanded Digital Input/Output states (Read Only)
2D00 Contact Input States, one per register (96 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
2D80 Contact Output States, one per register (64 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
2E00 Virtual Output States, one per register (64 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
Expanded Remote Input/Output Status (Read Only)
2F00 Remote Device States, one per register (16 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F155 0 (Offline)
2F80 Remote Input States, one per register (64 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
Oscillography Values (Read Only)
3000 Oscillography Number of Triggers 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
3001 Oscillography Available Records 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
3002 Oscillography Last Cleared Date 0 to 400000000 --- 1 F050 0
3004 Oscillography Number Of Cycles Per Record 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Oscillography Commands (Read/Write Command)
3005 Oscillography Force Trigger 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
3011 Oscillography Clear Data 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
User Programmable Fault Report Commands (Read/Write Command)
3060 User Fault Report Clear 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
User Programmable Fault Report Actuals (Read Only)
3070 Newest Record Number 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
3071 Cleared Date 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F050 0
3073 Report Date (10 items) 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F050 0
User Programmable Fault Report (Read/Write Setting) (2 modules)
3090 Fault Report 1 Fault Trigger 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
3091 Fault Report 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
3092 Fault Report 1 Prefault Trigger 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
3093 Fault Report Analog Channel 1 (32 items) 0 to 65536 --- 1 F600 0
30B3 Fault Report 1 Reserved (5 items) --- --- --- F001 0
Modbus File Transfer (Read/Write)
3100 Name of file to read --- --- --- F204 (none)
Modbus File Transfer (Read Only)
3200 Character position of current block within file 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
3202 Size of currently-available data block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
3203 Block of data from requested file (122 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Event Recorder (Read Only)
3400 Events Since Last Clear 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
3402 Number of Available Events 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
3404 Event Recorder Last Cleared Date 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F050 0
Event Recorder (Read/Write Command)
3406 Event Recorder Clear Command 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
DCMA Input Values (Read Only) (24 modules)
34C0 DCMA Inputs 1 Value -9999.999 to 9999.999 --- 0.001 F004 0
34CA ...Repeated for module number 6
34CC ...Repeated for module number 7
34CE ...Repeated for module number 8
B
34DA ...Repeated for module number 14
34DC ...Repeated for module number 15
34DE ...Repeated for module number 16
34E0 ...Repeated for module number 17
34EA ...Repeated for module number 22
34EC ...Repeated for module number 23
34EE ...Repeated for module number 24
RTD Input Values (Read Only) (48 modules)
34F0 RTD Inputs 1 Value -32768 to 32767 C 1 F002 0
34F1 ...Repeated for module number 2
34FA ...Repeated for module number 11
34FB ...Repeated for module number 12
34FC ...Repeated for module number 13
34FD ...Repeated for module number 14
34FE ...Repeated for module number 15
34FF ...Repeated for module number 16
B
Expanded Direct Input/Output Status (Read Only)
3560 Direct Device States, one per register (8 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F155 0 (Offline)
3570 Direct Input States, one per register (96 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
Passwords (Read/Write Command)
4000 Command Password Setting 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
Passwords (Read/Write Setting)
4002 Setting Password Setting 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
Passwords (Read/Write)
4008 Command Password Entry 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
400A Setting Password Entry 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
Passwords (Read Only)
4010 Command Password Status 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
4011 Setting Password Status 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
User Display Invoke (Read/Write Setting)
4040 Invoke and Scroll Through User Display Menu Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
LED Test (Read/Write Setting)
4048 LED Test Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
4049 LED Test Control 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
Preferences (Read/Write Setting)
4050 Flash Message Time 0.5 to 10 s 0.1 F001 10
4051 Default Message Timeout 10 to 900 s 1 F001 300
4052 Default Message Intensity 0 to 3 --- 1 F101 0 (25%)
4053 Screen Saver Feature 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
4054 Screen Saver Wait Time 1 to 65535 min 1 F001 30
4055 Current Cutoff Level 0.002 to 0.02 pu 0.001 F001 20
4056 Voltage Cutoff Level 0.1 to 1 V 0.1 F001 10
Communications (Read/Write Setting)
407E COM1 minimum response time 0 to 1000 ms 10 F001 0
407F COM2 minimum response time 0 to 1000 ms 10 F001 0
4080 Modbus Slave Address 1 to 254 --- 1 F001 254
4083 RS485 Com1 Baud Rate 0 to 11 --- 1 F112 8 (115200)
4084 RS485 Com1 Parity 0 to 2 --- 1 F113 0 (None)
4085 RS485 Com2 Baud Rate 0 to 11 --- 1 F112 8 (115200)
4086 RS485 Com2 Parity 0 to 2 --- 1 F113 0 (None)
4087 IP Address 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 56554706
4089 IP Subnet Mask 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 4294966272
408B Gateway IP Address 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 56554497
408D Network Address NSAP --- --- --- F074 0
4097 Default GSSE Update Time 1 to 60 s 1 F001 60
409A DNP Port 0 to 4 --- 1 F177 0 (NONE)
409B DNP Address 0 to 65519 --- 1 F001 1
409C DNP Client Addresses (2 items) 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
40A0 TCP Port Number for the Modbus protocol 1 to 65535 --- 1 F001 502
40A1 TCP/UDP Port Number for the DNP Protocol 1 to 65535 --- 1 F001 20000
40A2 TCP Port Number for the IEC 61850 Protocol 1 to 65535 --- 1 F001 102
B
40A3 TCP Port Number for the HTTP (Web Server) Protocol 1 to 65535 --- 1 F001 80
40A4 Main UDP Port Number for the TFTP Protocol 1 to 65535 --- 1 F001 69
40A5 Data Transfer UDP Port Numbers for the TFTP Protocol
(zero means automatic) (2 items)
0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
40A7 DNP Unsolicited Responses Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
40A8 DNP Unsolicited Responses Timeout 0 to 60 s 1 F001 5
40A9 DNP Unsolicited Responses Max Retries 1 to 255 --- 1 F001 10
40AA DNP Unsolicited Responses Destination Address 0 to 65519 --- 1 F001 1
40AB Ethernet Operation Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F192 0 (Half-Duplex)
40AC DNP User Map Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
40AD DNP Number of Sources used in Analog points list 1 to 6 --- 1 F001 1
40AE DNP Current Scale Factor 0 to 8 --- 1 F194 2 (1)
40AF DNP Voltage Scale Factor 0 to 8 --- 1 F194 2 (1)
40B0 DNP Power Scale Factor 0 to 8 --- 1 F194 2 (1)
40B1 DNP Energy Scale Factor 0 to 8 --- 1 F194 2 (1)
40B2 DNP Other Scale Factor 0 to 8 --- 1 F194 2 (1)
40B3 DNP Current Default Deadband 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 30000
40B4 DNP Voltage Default Deadband 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 30000
40B5 DNP Power Default Deadband 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 30000
40B6 DNP Energy Default Deadband 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 30000
40B7 DNP Other Default Deadband 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 30000
40B8 DNP IIN Time Sync Bit Period 1 to 10080 min 1 F001 1440
40B9 DNP Message Fragment Size 30 to 2048 --- 1 F001 240
40BA DNP Client Address 3 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
40BC DNP Client Address 4 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
40BE DNP Client Address 5 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
40C0 DNP Communications Reserved (8 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
40C8 IEC 61850 Logical Device Name --- --- --- F203 IECDevice
40D0 GSSE Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
40D1 Reserved (15 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
40E0 TCP Port Number for the IEC 60870-5-104 Protocol 1 to 65535 --- 1 F001 2404
40E1 IEC 60870-5-104 Protocol Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
40E2 IEC 60870-5-104 Protocol Common Address of ASDU 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
40E3 IEC 60870-5-104 Protocol Cyclic Data Trans. Period 1 to 65535 s 1 F001 60
40E4 IEC 60870-5-104 Sources used in M_ME_NC_1 point list 1 to 6 --- 1 F001 1
40E5 IEC 60870-5-104 Current Default Threshold 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 30000
40E6 IEC 60870-5-104 Voltage Default Threshold 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 30000
40E7 IEC 60870-5-104 Power Default Threshold 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 30000
40E8 IEC 60870-5-104 Energy Default Threshold 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 30000
40E9 IEC 60870-5-104 Other Default Threshold 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 30000
40EA IEC 60870-5-104 Client Address (5 items) 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
40FE IEC 60870-5-104 Communications Reserved (2 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
4100 DNP Binary Input Block of 16 Points (58 items) 0 to 58 --- 1 F197 0 (Not Used)
4140 DNP Object 1 Default Variation 1 to 2 --- 1 F001 2
4142 DNP Object 20 Default Variation 0 to 3 --- 1 F523 0 (1)
Simple Network Time Protocol (Read/Write Setting)
4168 Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
4169 Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) Server IP Address 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
B
416B Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) UDP Port Number 1 to 65535 --- 1 F001 123
Clock (Read/Write Command)
41A0 Real Time Clock Set Time 0 to 235959 --- 1 F050 0
Clock (Read/Write Setting)
41A2 SR Date Format 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F051 0
41A4 SR Time Format 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F052 0
41A6 IRIG-B Signal Type 0 to 2 --- 1 F114 0 (None)
41A7 Clock Events Enable / Disable 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
Oscillography (Read/Write Setting)
41C0 Oscillography Number of Records 1 to 64 --- 1 F001 15
41C1 Oscillography Trigger Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F118 0 (Auto. Overwrite)
41C2 Oscillography Trigger Position 0 to 100 % 1 F001 50
41C3 Oscillography Trigger Source 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
41C4 Oscillography AC Input Waveforms 0 to 4 --- 1 F183 2 (16 samples/cycle)
41D0 Oscillography Analog Channel n (16 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F600 0
4200 Oscillography Digital Channel n (63 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
Trip and Alarm LEDs (Read/Write Setting)
4260 Trip LED Input FlexLogic Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
4261 Alarm LED Input FlexLogic Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
User Programmable LEDs (Read/Write Setting) (48 modules)
4280 FlexLogic Operand to Activate LED 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
4281 User LED type (latched or self-resetting) 0 to 1 --- 1 F127 1 (Self-Reset)
42AA ...Repeated for module number 22
42AC ...Repeated for module number 23
42AE ...Repeated for module number 24
42BA ...Repeated for module number 30
42BC ...Repeated for module number 31
42BE ...Repeated for module number 32
B
42CA ...Repeated for module number 38
42CC ...Repeated for module number 39
42CE ...Repeated for module number 40
42DA ...Repeated for module number 46
42DE ...Repeated for module number 48
Installation (Read/Write Setting)
43E0 Relay Programmed State 0 to 1 --- 1 F133 0 (Not Programmed)
43E1 Relay Name --- --- --- F202 Relay-1
User Programmable Self Tests (Read/Write Setting)
4441 User Programmable Detect Ring Break Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
4442 User Programmable Direct Device Off Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
4443 User Programmable Remote Device Off Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
4444 User Programmable Primary Ethernet Fail Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
4445 User Programmable Secondary Ethernet Fail Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
4446 User Programmable Battery Fail Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
4447 User Programmable SNTP Fail Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
4448 User Programmable IRIG-B Fail Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
CT Settings (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules)
4480 Phase CT Primary 1 to 65000 A 1 F001 1
4481 Phase CT Secondary 0 to 1 --- 1 F123 0 (1 A)
4482 Ground CT Primary 1 to 65000 A 1 F001 1
4483 Ground CT Secondary 0 to 1 --- 1 F123 0 (1 A)
VT Settings (Read/Write Setting) (3 modules)
4500 Phase VT Connection 0 to 1 --- 1 F100 0 (Wye)
4501 Phase VT Secondary 50 to 240 V 0.1 F001 664
4502 Phase VT Ratio 1 to 24000 :1 1 F060 1
4504 Auxiliary VT Connection 0 to 6 --- 1 F166 1 (Vag)
4505 Auxiliary VT Secondary 50 to 240 V 0.1 F001 664
4506 Auxiliary VT Ratio 1 to 24000 :1 1 F060 1
Source Settings (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules)
4580 Source Name --- --- --- F206 SRC 1"
4583 Source Phase CT 0 to 63 --- 1 F400 0
4584 Source Ground CT 0 to 63 --- 1 F400 0
4585 Source Phase VT 0 to 63 --- 1 F400 0
4586 Source Auxiliary VT 0 to 63 --- 1 F400 0
B
Power System (Read/Write Setting)
4600 Nominal Frequency 25 to 60 Hz 1 F001 60
4601 Phase Rotation 0 to 1 --- 1 F106 0 (ABC)
4602 Frequency And Phase Reference 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
4603 Frequency Tracking Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
Flexcurves A and B (Read/Write Settings)
4800 FlexCurve A (120 items) 0 to 65535 ms 1 F011 0
48F0 FlexCurve B (120 items) 0 to 65535 ms 1 F011 0
Modbus User Map (Read/Write Setting)
4A00 Modbus Address Settings for User Map (256 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
User Displays Settings (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)
4C00 User display 1 top line text --- --- --- F202
4C0A User display 1 bottom line text --- --- --- F202
4C14 Modbus addresses of displayed items (5 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
4C19 Reserved (7 items) --- --- --- F001 0
4CA0 ...Repeated for module number 6
4CC0 ...Repeated for module number 7
4CE0 ...Repeated for module number 8
4DA0 ...Repeated for module number 14
4DC0 ...Repeated for module number 15
4DE0 ...Repeated for module number 16
User Programmable Pushbuttons (Read/Write Setting) (12 modules)
4E00 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Function 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 2 (Disabled)
4E01 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Top Line --- --- --- F202 (none)
4E0B User Programmable Pushbutton 1 On Text --- --- --- F202 (none)
4E15 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Off Text --- --- --- F202 (none)
4E1F User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Drop-Out Time 0 to 60 s 0.05 F001 0
4E20 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
4E21 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
4E22 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Reserved (2 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
4E6C ...Repeated for module number 4
4EB4 ...Repeated for module number 6
4ED8 ...Repeated for module number 7
4EFC ...Repeated for module number 8
4F8C ...Repeated for module number 12
B
Flexlogic (Read/Write Setting)
5000 FlexLogic Entry (512 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 16384
Flexlogic Timers (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)
5800 Timer 1 Type 0 to 2 --- 1 F129 0 (millisecond)
5801 Timer 1 Pickup Delay 0 to 60000 --- 1 F001 0
5802 Timer 1 Dropout Delay 0 to 60000 --- 1 F001 0
5803 Timer 1 Reserved (5 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Phase Time Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (6 modules)
5900 Phase TOC 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5901 Phase TOC 1 Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
5902 Phase TOC 1 Input 0 to 1 --- 1 F122 0 (Phasor)
5903 Phase TOC 1 Pickup 0 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1000
5904 Phase TOC 1 Curve 0 to 16 --- 1 F103 0 (IEEE Mod Inv)
5905 Phase TOC 1 Multiplier 0 to 600 --- 0.01 F001 100
5906 Phase TOC 1 Reset 0 to 1 --- 1 F104 0 (Instantaneous)
5907 Phase TOC 1 Voltage Restraint 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5908 Phase TOC 1 Block For Each Phase (3 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
590B Phase TOC 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
590C Phase TOC 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
590D Reserved (3 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
B
Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (12 modules)
5A00 Phase IOC1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5A01 Phase IOC1 Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
5A02 Phase IOC1 Pickup 0 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1000
5A03 Phase IOC1 Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0
5A04 Phase IOC1 Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0
5A05 Phase IOC1 Block For Each Phase (3 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
5A08 Phase IOC1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
5A09 Phase IOC1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5A0A Reserved (6 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
5AA0 ...Repeated for module number 11
5AB0 ...Repeated for module number 12
Neutral Time Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (6 modules)
5B00 Neutral TOC1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5B01 Neutral TOC1 Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
5B02 Neutral TOC1 Input 0 to 1 --- 1 F122 0 (Phasor)
5B03 Neutral TOC1 Pickup 0 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1000
5B04 Neutral TOC1 Curve 0 to 16 --- 1 F103 0 (IEEE Mod Inv)
5B05 Neutral TOC1 Multiplier 0 to 600 --- 0.01 F001 100
5B06 Neutral TOC1 Reset 0 to 1 --- 1 F104 0 (Instantaneous)
5B07 Neutral TOC1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
5B08 Neutral TOC1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
5B09 Neutral TOC1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5B0A Reserved (6 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (12 modules)
5C00 Neutral IOC1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5C01 Neutral IOC1 Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
5C02 Neutral IOC1 Pickup 0 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1000
5C03 Neutral IOC1 Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0
5C04 Neutral IOC1 Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0
5C05 Neutral IOC1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
5C06 Neutral IOC1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
5C07 Neutral IOC1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5C08 Reserved (8 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
B
5CA0 ...Repeated for module number 11
5CB0 ...Repeated for module number 12
Ground Time Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (6 modules)
5D00 Ground TOC1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5D01 Ground TOC1 Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
5D02 Ground TOC1 Input 0 to 1 --- 1 F122 0 (Phasor)
5D03 Ground TOC1 Pickup 0 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1000
5D04 Ground TOC1 Curve 0 to 16 --- 1 F103 0 (IEEE Mod Inv)
5D05 Ground TOC1 Multiplier 0 to 600 --- 0.01 F001 100
5D06 Ground TOC1 Reset 0 to 1 --- 1 F104 0 (Instantaneous)
5D07 Ground TOC1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
5D08 Ground TOC1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
5D09 Ground TOC1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5D0A Reserved (6 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (12 modules)
5E00 Ground IOC1 Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
5E01 Ground IOC1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5E02 Ground IOC1 Pickup 0 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1000
5E03 Ground IOC1 Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0
5E04 Ground IOC1 Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0
5E05 Ground IOC1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
5E06 Ground IOC1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
5E07 Ground IOC1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5E08 Reserved (8 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
5EA0 ...Repeated for module number 11
5EB0 ...Repeated for module number 12
Bus Configuration (Read/Write Setting)
6500 Bus Zone xA Source (6 items) 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
6506 Bus Zone xA Status (6 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
Bus Differential (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (4 modules)
6520 Bus Zone 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
6521 Bus Zone 1 Pickup 0.05 to 2 pu 0.001 F001 100
6522 Bus Zone 1 Low Slope 15 to 100 % 1 F001 25
6523 Bus Zone 1 Low Breakpoint 1 to 30 pu 0.01 F001 200
6524 Bus Zone 1 High Slope 50 to 100 % 1 F001 60
B
6525 Bus Zone 1 High Breakpoint 1 to 30 pu 0.01 F001 800
6526 Bus Zone 1 High Set 0.1 to 99.99 pu 0.01 F001 1500
6527 Bus Zone 1 Seal In 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 400
6528 Bus Zone 1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
6529 Bus Zone 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
652A Bus Zone 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
CT Trouble (Read/Write Setting) (4 modules)
65A0 CT Trouble 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
65A1 CT Trouble 1 Pickup 0.02 to 2 pu 0.001 F001 100
65A2 CT Trouble 1 Delay 1 to 60 s 0.1 F001 100
65A3 CT Trouble 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
65A4 CT Trouble 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
65AA ...Repeated for module number 3
65AF ...Repeated for module number 4
Phase Undervoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules)
7000 Phase UV1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7001 Phase UV1 Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
7002 Phase UV1 Pickup 0 to 3 pu 0.001 F001 1000
7003 Phase UV1 Curve 0 to 1 --- 1 F111 0 (Definite Time)
7004 Phase UV1 Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 100
7005 Phase UV1 Minimum Voltage 0 to 3 pu 0.001 F001 100
7006 Phase UV1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
7007 Phase UV1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
7008 Phase UV1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7009 Phase UV Measurement Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F186 0 (Phase to Ground)
700A Reserved (6 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
DCMA Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (24 modules)
7300 DCMA Inputs 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7301 DCMA Inputs 1 ID --- --- --- F205 DCMA I 1"
7307 DCMA Inputs 1 Reserved 1 (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
730B DCMA Inputs 1 Units --- --- --- F206 mA
730E DCMA Inputs 1 Range 0 to 6 --- 1 F173 6 (4 to 20 mA)
730F DCMA Inputs 1 Minimum Value -9999.999 to 9999.999 --- 0.001 F004 4000
7311 DCMA Inputs 1 Maximum Value -9999.999 to 9999.999 --- 0.001 F004 20000
7313 DCMA Inputs 1 Reserved (5 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
B
RTD Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (48 modules)
7540 RTD Inputs 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7541 RTD Inputs 1 ID --- --- --- F205 RTD Ip 1
7547 RTD Inputs 1 Reserved 1 (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
754B RTD Inputs 1 Type 0 to 3 --- 1 F174 0 (100 Ohm Platinum)
754C RTD Inputs 1 Reserved 2 (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
B
Neutral Overvoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (3 modules)
7F00 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7F01 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
7F02 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Pickup 0 to 1.25 pu 0.001 F001 300
7F03 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Pickup Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 100
7F04 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 100
7F05 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
7F06 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
7F07 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7F08 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Reserved (8 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Auxiliary Overvoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (3 modules)
7F30 Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7F31 Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
7F32 Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Pickup 0 to 3 pu 0.001 F001 300
7F33 Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Pickup Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 100
7F34 Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 100
7F35 Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
7F36 Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
7F37 Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7F38 Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Reserved (8 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Frequency (Read Only)
8000 Tracking Frequency 2 to 90 Hz 0.01 F001 0
EGD Fast Production Status (Read Only)
83E0 EGD Fast Producer Exchange 1 Signature 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
83E1 EGD Fast Producer Exchange 1 Configuration Time 0 to 4294967295 --- --- F003 0
83E3 EGD Fast Producer Exchange 1 Size 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
EGD Slow Production Status (Read Only) (2 modules)
83F0 EGD Slow Producer Exchange 1 Signature 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
83F1 EGD Slow Producer Exchange 1 Configuration Time 0 to 4294967295 --- --- F003 0
83F3 EGD Slow Producer Exchange 1 Size 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
EGD Fast Production (Read/Write Setting)
8400 EGD Fast Producer Exchange 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
8401 EGD Fast Producer Exchange 1 Destination 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
8403 EGD Fast Producer Exchange 1 Data Rate 50 to 1000 ms 50 F001 1000
8404 EGD Fast Producer Exchange 1 Data Item 1 (20 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
8418 Reserved (80 items) --- --- --- F001 0
EGD Slow Production (Read/Write Setting) (2 modules)
8500 EGD Slow Producer Exchange 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
8501 EGD Fast Producer Exchange 1 Destination 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
8503 EGD Slow Producer Exchange 1 Data Rate 500 to 1000 ms 50 F001 1000
8504 EGD Slow Producer Exchange 1 Data Item 1 (50 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
B
8536 Reserved (50 items) --- --- --- F001 0
FlexState Settings (Read/Write Setting)
8800 FlexState Parameters (256 items) --- --- --- F300 0
FlexElement (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)
9000 FlexElement 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
9001 FlexElement 1 Name --- --- --- F206 FxE 1
9004 FlexElement 1 InputP 0 to 65535 --- 1 F600 0
9005 FlexElement 1 InputM 0 to 65535 --- 1 F600 0
9006 FlexElement 1 Compare 0 to 1 --- 1 F516 0 (LEVEL)
9007 FlexElement 1 Input 0 to 1 --- 1 F515 0 (SIGNED)
9008 FlexElement 1 Direction 0 to 1 --- 1 F517 0 (OVER)
9009 FlexElement 1 Hysteresis 0.1 to 50 % 0.1 F001 30
900A FlexElement 1 Pickup -90 to 90 pu 0.001 F004 1000
900C FlexElement 1 DeltaT Units 0 to 2 --- 1 F518 0 (Milliseconds)
900D FlexElement 1 DeltaT 20 to 86400 --- 1 F003 20
900F FlexElement 1 Pickup Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 0
9010 FlexElement 1 Reset Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 0
9011 FlexElement 1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
9012 FlexElement 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
9013 FlexElement 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
DCMA Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (24 modules)
9300 DCMA Outputs 1 Source 0 to 65535 --- 1 F600 0
9301 DCMA Outputs 1 Range 0 to 2 --- 1 F522 0 (-1 to 1 mA)
9302 DCMA Output 1 Minimum -90 to 90 pu 0.001 F004 0
9304 DCMA Outputs 1 Maximum -90 to 90 pu 0.001 F004 1000
B
FlexElement Actuals (Read Only) (16 modules)
9A01 FlexElement Actual -2147483.647 to
2147483.647
--- 0.001 F004 0
9A0B ...Repeated for module number 6
9A0D ...Repeated for module number 7
9A0F ...Repeated for module number 8
9A1B ...Repeated for module number 14
9A1D ...Repeated for module number 15
9A1F ...Repeated for module number 16
Setting Groups (Read/Write Setting)
A000 Setting Group for Modbus Comms (0 means group 1) 0 to 5 --- 1 F001 0
A001 Setting Groups Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
A002 FlexLogic to Activate Groups 2 through 8 (5 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
A009 Setting Group Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
A00A Setting Group Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
Setting Groups (Read Only)
A00B Current Setting Group 0 to 5 --- 1 F001 0
Selector Switch Actuals (Read Only)
A400 Selector 1 Position 1 to 7 --- 1 F001 0
A401 Selector 2 Position 1 to 7 --- 1 F001 1
Selector Switch (Read/Write Setting) (2 modules)
A410 Selector 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
A411 Selector 1 Range 1 to 7 --- 1 F001 7
A412 Selector 1 Timeout 3 to 60 s 0.1 F001 50
A413 Selector 1 Step Up 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
A414 Selector 1 Step Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F083 0 (Time-out)
A415 Selector 1 Acknowledge 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
A416 Selector 1 Bit0 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
A419 Selector 1 Bit Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F083 0 (Time-out)
A41A Selector 1 Bit Acknowledge 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
A41B Selector 1 Power Up Mode 0 to 2 --- 1 F084 0 (Restore)
A41C Selector 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
A41D Selector 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
B
A41E Selector 1 Reserved (10 items) --- --- 1 F001 0
A428 ...Repeated for module number 2
Flexcurves C and D (Read/Write Setting)
AC00 FlexCurve C (120 items) 0 to 65535 ms 1 F011 0
AC78 FlexCurve D (120 items) 0 to 65535 ms 1 F011 0
Non Volatile Latches (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)
AD00 Latch 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
AD01 Latch 1 Type 0 to 1 --- 1 F519 0 (Reset Dominant)
AD02 Latch 1 Set 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
AD03 Latch 1 Reset 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
AD04 Latch 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
AD05 Latch 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
AD06 Latch 1 Reserved (4 items) --- --- --- F001 0
AD0A ...Repeated for module number 2
AD14 ...Repeated for module number 3
AD1E ...Repeated for module number 4
AD3C ...Repeated for module number 7
AD5A ...Repeated for module number 10
AD6E ...Repeated for module number 12
AD8C ...Repeated for module number 15
Digital Elements (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)
B000 Digital Element 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
B001 Digital Element 1 Name --- --- --- F203 Dig Element 1
B015 Digital Element 1 Input 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
B016 Digital Element 1 Pickup Delay 0 to 999999.999 s 0.001 F003 0
B018 Digital Element 1 Reset Delay 0 to 999999.999 s 0.001 F003 0
B01A Digital Element 1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
B01B Digital Element 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
B01C Digital Element 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
B01D Digital Element 1 Reserved (3 items) --- --- --- F001 0
B020 ...Repeated for module number 2
B0A0 ...Repeated for module number 6
B0C0 ...Repeated for module number 7
B0E0 ...Repeated for module number 8
B
Digital Counter (Read/Write Setting) (8 modules)
B300 Digital Counter 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
B301 Digital Counter 1 Name --- --- --- F205 Counter 1"
B307 Digital Counter 1 Units --- --- --- F206 (none)
B30A Digital Counter 1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
B30B Digital Counter 1 Up 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
B30C Digital Counter 1 Down 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
B30D Digital Counter 1 Preset -2147483647 to
2147483647
--- 1 F004 0
B30F Digital Counter 1 Compare -2147483647 to
2147483647
--- 1 F004 0
B311 Digital Counter 1 Reset 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
B312 Digital Counter 1 Freeze/Reset 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
B313 Digital Counter 1 Freeze/Count 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
B314 Digital Counter 1 Set To Preset 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
B315 Digital Counter 1 Reserved (11 items) --- --- --- F001 0
Contact Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (96 modules)
C000 Contact Input 1 Name --- --- --- F205 Cont Ip 1
C006 Contact Input 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
C007 Contact Input 1 Debounce Time 0 to 16 ms 0.5 F001 20
C008 ...Repeated for module number 2
C0A0 ...Repeated for module number 21
C0B0 ...Repeated for module number 23
C0C0 ...Repeated for module number 25
C0D0 ...Repeated for module number 27
C0E0 ...Repeated for module number 29
B
C0F0 ...Repeated for module number 31
B
Contact Input Thresholds (Read/Write Setting)
C600 Contact Input x Threshold (24 items) 0 to 3 --- 1 F128 1 (33 Vdc)
Virtual Inputs Global Settings (Read/Write Setting)
C680 Virtual Inputs SBO Timeout 1 to 60 s 1 F001 30
Virtual Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)
C690 Virtual Input 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
C691 Virtual Input 1 Name --- --- --- F205 Virt Ip 1
C69B Virtual Input 1 Programmed Type 0 to 1 --- 1 F127 0 (Latched)
C69C Virtual Input 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
C69D Virtual Input 1 IEC 61850 SBOClass 1 to 2 --- 1 F001 1
C69E Virtual Input 1 IEC 61850 SBOEna 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
C69F Virtual Input 1 Reserved --- --- --- F001 0
B
Virtual Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (64 modules)
CC90 Virtual Output 1 Name --- --- --- F205 Virt Op 1
CC9A Virtual Output 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
CC9B Virtual Output 1 Reserved (5 items) --- --- --- F001 0
CCA0 ...Repeated for module number 2
CCB0 ...Repeated for module number 3
CCC0 ...Repeated for module number 4
CCD0 ...Repeated for module number 5
CCE0 ...Repeated for module number 6
CCF0 ...Repeated for module number 7
CD00 ...Repeated for module number 8
CDA0 ...Repeated for module number 18
CDB0 ...Repeated for module number 19
CDC0 ...Repeated for module number 20
CDD0 ...Repeated for module number 21
CDE0 ...Repeated for module number 22
CDF0 ...Repeated for module number 23
CE00 ...Repeated for module number 24
CEA0 ...Repeated for module number 34
CEB0 ...Repeated for module number 35
CEC0 ...Repeated for module number 36
CED0 ...Repeated for module number 37
CEE0 ...Repeated for module number 38
CEF0 ...Repeated for module number 39
CF00 ...Repeated for module number 40
B
CFA0 ...Repeated for module number 50
CFB0 ...Repeated for module number 51
CFC0 ...Repeated for module number 52
CFD0 ...Repeated for module number 53
CFE0 ...Repeated for module number 54
CFF0 ...Repeated for module number 55
D000 ...Repeated for module number 56
Mandatory (Read/Write Setting)
D280 Test Mode Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
Mandatory (Read/Write)
D281 Force VFD and LED 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
Mandatory (Read/Write Setting)
D282 Test Mode Initiate 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 1
Mandatory (Read/Write Command)
D283 Clear All Relay Records Command 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
Contact Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (64 modules)
D290 Contact Output 1 Name --- --- --- F205 Cont Op 1"
D29A Contact Output 1 Operation 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
D29B Contact Output 1 Seal In 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
D29C Latching Output 1 Reset 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
D29D Contact Output 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
D29E Latching Output 1 Type 0 to 1 --- 1 F090 0 (Operate-dominant)
D29F Reserved --- --- --- F001 0
D2A0 ...Repeated for module number 2
D2B0 ...Repeated for module number 3
D2C0 ...Repeated for module number 4
D2D0 ...Repeated for module number 5
D2E0 ...Repeated for module number 6
D2F0 ...Repeated for module number 7
B
Reset (Read/Write Setting)
D800 FlexLogic operand which initiates a reset 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
Control Pushbuttons (Read/Write Setting) (7 modules)
D810 Control Pushbuttons 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
D811 Control Pushbuttons 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
D81A ...Repeated for module number 6
D81C ...Repeated for module number 7
Clear Records (Read/Write Setting)
D821 Clear User Fault Reports operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
D822 Clear Event Records operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
B
D823 Clear Oscillography operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
D82F Clear Unauthorized Access operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
D831 Clear Platform Direct Input/Output Statistics operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
D832 Clear Relay Records Reserved (18 items) --- --- --- F001 0
Force Contact Inputs (Read/Write Setting)
D8B0 Force Contact Input x State (96 items) 0 to 2 --- 1 F144 0 (Disabled)
Force Contact Outputs (Read/Write Setting)
D910 Force Contact Output x State (64 items) 0 to 3 --- 1 F131 0 (Disabled)
Direct Inputs/Outputs (Read/Write Setting)
DB40 Direct Device ID 1 to 16 --- 1 F001 1
DB41 Direct I/O Channel 1 Ring Configuration Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
DB42 Platform Direct I/O Data Rate 64 to 128 kbps 64 F001 64
DB43 Direct I/O Channel 2 Ring Configuration Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
DB44 Platform Direct I/O Crossover Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
Direct input/output commands (Read/Write Command)
DB48 Direct input/output clear counters command 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
Direct inputs (Read/Write Setting) (96 modules)
DB50 Direct Input 1 Device Number 0 to 16 --- 1 F001 0
DB51 Direct Input 1 Number 0 to 96 --- 1 F001 0
DB52 Direct Input 1 Default State 0 to 3 --- 1 F086 0 (Off)
DB53 Direct Input 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
DB54 ...Repeated for module number 2
DB5C ...Repeated for module number 4
DBA0 ...Repeated for module number 21
DBAC ...Repeated for module number 24
DBB0 ...Repeated for module number 25
DBBC ...Repeated for module number 28
DBC0 ...Repeated for module number 29
DBCC ...Repeated for module number 32
Platform Direct Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (96 modules)
DD00 Direct Output 1 Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
B
DD01 Direct Output 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
DD02 ...Repeated for module number 2
DD0A ...Repeated for module number 6
DD0C ...Repeated for module number 7
DD0E ...Repeated for module number 8
Direct Input/Output Alarms (Read/Write Setting)
DE00 Direct Input/Output Channel 1 CRC Alarm Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
DE01 Direct I/O Channel 1 CRC Alarm Message Count 100 to 10000 --- 1 F001 600
DE02 Direct Input/Output Channel 1 CRC Alarm Threshold 1 to 1000 --- 1 F001 10
DE03 Direct Input/Output Channel 1 CRC Alarm Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
DE04 Reserved (4 items) 1 to 1000 --- 1 F001 10
DE08 Direct Input/Output Channel 2 CRC Alarm Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
DE09 Direct I/O Channel 2 CRC Alarm Message Count 100 to 10000 --- 1 F001 600
DE0A Direct Input/Output Channel 2 CRC Alarm Threshold 1 to 1000 --- 1 F001 10
DE0B Direct Input/Output Channel 2 CRC Alarm Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
DE0C Reserved (4 items) 1 to 1000 --- 1 F001 10
DE10 Direct I/O Ch 1 Unreturned Messages Alarm Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
DE11 Direct I/O Ch 1 Unreturned Messages Alarm Msg Count 100 to 10000 --- 1 F001 600
DE12 Direct I/O Ch 1 Unreturned Messages Alarm Threshold 1 to 1000 --- 1 F001 10
DE13 Direct I/O Ch 1 Unreturned Messages Alarm Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
DE14 Reserved (4 items) 1 to 1000 --- 1 F001 10
DE18 Direct IO Ch 2 Unreturned Messages Alarm Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
DE19 Direct I/O Ch 2 Unreturned Messages Alarm Msg Count 100 to 10000 --- 1 F001 600
DE1A Direct I/O Ch 2 Unreturned Messages Alarm Threshold 1 to 1000 --- 1 F001 10
DE1B Direct I/O Channel 2 Unreturned Messages Alarm Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
DE1C Reserved (4 items) 1 to 1000 --- 1 F001 10
B
Remote Devices (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)
E000 Remote Device 1 ID --- --- --- F202 Remote Device 1
E00A ...Repeated for module number 2
E014 ...Repeated for module number 3
E01E ...Repeated for module number 4
E03C ...Repeated for module number 7
E05A ...Repeated for module number 10
E06E ...Repeated for module number 12
Remote Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (64 modules)
E100 Remote Input 1 Device 1 to 16 --- 1 F001 1
E101 Remote Input 1 Bit Pair 0 to 64 --- 1 F156 0 (None)
E102 Remote Input 1 Default State 0 to 3 --- 1 F086 0 (Off)
E103 Remote Input 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
B
E1A0 ...Repeated for module number 41
E1AC ...Repeated for module number 44
E1B0 ...Repeated for module number 45
E1BC ...Repeated for module number 48
E1C0 ...Repeated for module number 49
E1CC ...Repeated for module number 52
E1D0 ...Repeated for module number 53
E1DC ...Repeated for module number 56
E1E0 ...Repeated for module number 57
E1EC ...Repeated for module number 60
E1F0 ...Repeated for module number 61
E1FC ...Repeated for module number 64
Remote Output DNA Pairs (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)
E600 Remote Output DNA 1 Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
E601 Remote Output DNA 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
E602 Remote Output DNA 1 Reserved (2 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
B
Remote Output UserSt Pairs (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)
E680 Remote Output UserSt 1 Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
E681 Remote Output UserSt 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
E682 Remote Output UserSt 1 Reserved (2 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
E6AC ...Repeated for module number 12
E6BC ...Repeated for module number 16
E6CC ...Repeated for module number 20
E6DC ...Repeated for module number 24
E6EC ...Repeated for module number 28
E6FC ...Repeated for module number 32
B
B.4.2 DATA FORMATS
F001
UR_UINT16 UNSIGNED 16 BIT INTEGER
F002
UR_SINT16 SIGNED 16 BIT INTEGER
F003
UR_UINT32 UNSIGNED 32 BIT INTEGER (2 registers)
High order word is stored in the first register.
Low order word is stored in the second register.
F004
UR_SINT32 SIGNED 32 BIT INTEGER (2 registers)
High order word is stored in the first register/
Low order word is stored in the second register.
F005
UR_UINT8 UNSIGNED 8 BIT INTEGER
F006
UR_SINT8 SIGNED 8 BIT INTEGER
F011
UR_UINT16 FLEXCURVE DATA (120 points)
A FlexCurve is an array of 120 consecutive data points (x, y) which
are interpolated to generate a smooth curve. The y-axis is the user
defined trip or operation time setting; the x-axis is the pickup ratio
and is pre-defined. Refer to format F119 for a listing of the pickup
ratios; the enumeration value for the pickup ratio indicates the off-
set into the FlexCurve base address where the corresponding time
value is stored.
F012
DISPLAY_SCALE DISPLAY SCALING
(unsigned 16-bit integer)
MSB indicates the SI units as a power of ten. LSB indicates the
number of decimal points to display.
Example: Current values are stored as 32 bit numbers with three
decimal places and base units in Amps. If the retrieved value is
12345.678 A and the display scale equals 0x0302 then the dis-
played value on the unit is 12.35 kA.
F040
UR_UINT48 48-BIT UNSIGNED INTEGER
F050
UR_UINT32 TIME and DATE (UNSIGNED 32 BIT INTEGER)
Gives the current time in seconds elapsed since 00:00:00 January
1, 1970.
F051
UR_UINT32 DATE in SR format (alternate format for F050)
First 16 bits are Month/Day (MM/DD/xxxx). Month: 1=January,
2=February,...,12=December; Day: 1 to 31 in steps of 1
Last 16 bits are Year (xx/xx/YYYY): 1970 to 2106 in steps of 1
F052
UR_UINT32 TIME in SR format (alternate format for F050)
First 16 bits are Hours/Minutes (HH:MM:xx.xxx).
Hours: 0=12am, 1=1am,...,12=12pm,...23=11pm;
Minutes: 0 to 59 in steps of 1
Last 16 bits are Seconds (xx:xx:.SS.SSS): 0=00.000s,
1=00.001,...,59999=59.999s)
F060
FLOATING_POINT IEEE FLOATING POINT (32 bits)
F070
HEX2 2 BYTES - 4 ASCII DIGITS
F071
F072
F073
F074
F083
ENUMERATION: SELECTOR MODES
0 = Time-Out, 1 = Acknowledge
F084
ENUMERATION: SELECTOR POWER UP
0 = Restore, 1 = Synchronize, 2 = Sync/Restore
F086
ENUMERATION: DIGITAL INPUT DEFAULT STATE
0 = Off, 1 = On, 2= Latest/Off, 3 = Latest/On
B
F090
ENUMERATION: LATCHING OUTPUT TYPE
0 = Operate-dominant, 1 = Reset-dominant
F100
ENUMERATION: VT CONNECTION TYPE
0 = Wye; 1 = Delta
F101
ENUMERATION: MESSAGE DISPLAY INTENSITY
0 = 25%, 1 = 50%, 2 = 75%, 3 = 100%
F102
ENUMERATION: DISABLED/ENABLED
0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled
F103
ENUMERATION: CURVE SHAPES
F104
ENUMERATION: RESET TYPE
0 = Instantaneous, 1 = Timed, 2 = Linear
F105
ENUMERATION: LOGIC INPUT
0 = Disabled, 1 = Input 1, 2 = Input 2
F106
ENUMERATION: PHASE ROTATION
0 = ABC, 1 = ACB
F108
ENUMERATION: OFF/ON
0 = Off, 1 = On
F109
ENUMERATION: CONTACT OUTPUT OPERATION
0 = Self-reset, 1 = Latched, 2 = Disabled
F110
ENUMERATION: CONTACT OUTPUT LED CONTROL
0 = Trip, 1 = Alarm, 2 = None
F111
ENUMERATION: UNDERVOLTAGE CURVE SHAPES
0 = Definite Time, 1 = Inverse Time
F112
ENUMERATION: RS485 BAUD RATES
F113
ENUMERATION: PARITY
0 = None, 1 = Odd, 2 = Even
F114
ENUMERATION: IRIG-B SIGNAL TYPE
0 = None, 1 = DC Shift, 2 = Amplitude Modulated
F117
ENUMERATION: NUMBER OF OSCILLOGRAPHY RECORDS
0 = 172 cycles, 1 = 336 cycles, 2 = 718 cycles, 3 = 159 cycles
F118
ENUMERATION: OSCILLOGRAPHY MODE
0 = Automatic Overwrite, 1 = Protected
bitmask curve shape bitmask curve shape
0 IEEE Mod Inv 9 IAC Inverse
1 IEEE Very Inv 10 IAC Short Inv
2 IEEE Ext Inv 11 I2t
3 IEC Curve A 12 Definite Time
4 IEC Curve B 13 FlexCurve A
5 IEC Curve C 14 FlexCurve B
6 IEC Short Inv 15 FlexCurve C
7 IAC Ext Inv 16 FlexCurve D
8 IAC Very Inv
bitmask value bitmask value bitmask value
0 300 4 9600 8 115200
1 1200 5 19200 9 14400
2 2400 6 38400 10 28800
3 4800 7 57600 11 33600
B
F119
ENUMERATION: FLEXCURVE PICKUP RATIOS
F122
ENUMERATION: ELEMENT INPUT SIGNAL TYPE
0 = Phasor, 1 = RMS
F123
ENUMERATION: CT SECONDARY
0 = 1 A, 1 = 5 A
F124
ENUMERATION: LIST OF ELEMENTS
mask value mask value mask value mask value
0 0.00 30 0.88 60 2.90 90 5.90
1 0.05 31 0.90 61 3.00 91 6.00
2 0.10 32 0.91 62 3.10 92 6.50
3 0.15 33 0.92 63 3.20 93 7.00
4 0.20 34 0.93 64 3.30 94 7.50
5 0.25 35 0.94 65 3.40 95 8.00
6 0.30 36 0.95 66 3.50 96 8.50
7 0.35 37 0.96 67 3.60 97 9.00
8 0.40 38 0.97 68 3.70 98 9.50
9 0.45 39 0.98 69 3.80 99 10.00
10 0.48 40 1.03 70 3.90 100 10.50
11 0.50 41 1.05 71 4.00 101 11.00
12 0.52 42 1.10 72 4.10 102 11.50
13 0.54 43 1.20 73 4.20 103 12.00
14 0.56 44 1.30 74 4.30 104 12.50
15 0.58 45 1.40 75 4.40 105 13.00
16 0.60 46 1.50 76 4.50 106 13.50
17 0.62 47 1.60 77 4.60 107 14.00
18 0.64 48 1.70 78 4.70 108 14.50
19 0.66 49 1.80 79 4.80 109 15.00
20 0.68 50 1.90 80 4.90 110 15.50
21 0.70 51 2.00 81 5.00 111 16.00
22 0.72 52 2.10 82 5.10 112 16.50
23 0.74 53 2.20 83 5.20 113 17.00
24 0.76 54 2.30 84 5.30 114 17.50
25 0.78 55 2.40 85 5.40 115 18.00
26 0.80 56 2.50 86 5.50 116 18.50
27 0.82 57 2.60 87 5.60 117 19.00
28 0.84 58 2.70 88 5.70 118 19.50
29 0.86 59 2.80 89 5.80 119 20.00
bitmask element
16 Phase Time Overcurrent 1
17 Phase Time Overcurrent 2
24 Phase Directional Overcurrent 1
25 Phase Directional Overcurrent 2
32 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1
48 Neutral Time Overcurrent 1
64 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1
80 Ground Time Overcurrent 1
133 Bus Zone 1
144 Phase Undervoltage 1
145 Phase Undervoltage 2
148 Auxiliary Overvoltage 1
156 Neutral Overvoltage 1
180 Load Enchroachment
190 Power Swing Detect
251 CT Trouble 1
336 Setting Group
337 Reset
385 Selector 1
386 Selector 2
390 Control Pushbutton 1
400 FlexElement 1
401 FlexElement 2
402 FlexElement 3
403 FlexElement 4
404 FlexElement 5
405 FlexElement 6
406 FlexElement 7
407 FlexElement 8
420 Non-volatile Latch 1
bitmask element
B
F125
ENUMERATION: ACCESS LEVEL
0 = Restricted; 1 = Command, 2 = Setting, 3 = Factory Service
F126
ENUMERATION: NO/YES CHOICE
0 = No, 1 = Yes
F127
ENUMERATION: LATCHED OR SELF-RESETTING
0 = Latched, 1 = Self-Reset
F128
ENUMERATION: CONTACT INPUT THRESHOLD
0 = 17 V DC, 1 = 33 V DC, 2 = 84 V DC, 3 = 166 V DC
F129
ENUMERATION: FLEXLOGIC TIMER TYPE
0 = millisecond, 1 = second, 2 = minute
F130
ENUMERATION: SIMULATION MODE
0 = Off. 1 = Pre-Fault, 2 = Fault, 3 = Post-Fault
F131
ENUMERATION: FORCED CONTACT OUTPUT STATE
0 = Disabled, 1 = Energized, 2 = De-energized, 3 = Freeze
F133
ENUMERATION: PROGRAM STATE
0 = Not Programmed, 1 = Programmed
F134
ENUMERATION: PASS/FAIL
0 = Fail, 1 = OK, 2 = n/a
F135
ENUMERATION: GAIN CALIBRATION
0 = 0x1, 1 = 1x16
F136
ENUMERATION: NUMBER OF OSCILLOGRAPHY RECORDS
0 = 31 x 8 cycles, 1 = 15 x 16 cycles, 2 = 7 x 32 cycles
3 = 3 x 64 cycles, 4 = 1 x 128 cycles
F138
ENUMERATION: OSCILLOGRAPHY FILE TYPE
0 = Data File, 1 = Configuration File, 2 = Header File
512 Digital Element 1
544 Digital Counter 1
680 User-Programmable Pushbutton 1
bitmask element
B
F140
ENUMERATION: CURRENT, SENS CURRENT, VOLTAGE,
DISABLED
0 = Disabled, 1 = Current 46 A, 2 = Voltage 280 V, 3 = Current
4.6 A, 4 = Current 2 A, 5 = Notched 4.6 A, 6 = Notched 2 A
F141
ENUMERATION: SELF TEST ERROR
F142
ENUMERATION: EVENT RECORDER ACCESS FILE TYPE
0 = All Record Data, 1 = Headers Only, 2 = Numeric Event Cause
F143
UR_UINT32: 32 BIT ERROR CODE (F141 specifies bit number)
A bit value of 0 = no error, 1 = error
F144
ENUMERATION: FORCED CONTACT INPUT STATE
0 = Disabled, 1 = Open, 2 = Closed
F145
ENUMERATION: ALPHABET LETTER
F146
ENUMERATION: MISC. EVENT CAUSES
bitmask error
0 Any Self Tests
1 IRIG-B Failure
2 DSP Error
4 No DSP Interrupts
5 Unit Not Calibrated
9 Prototype Firmware
10 Flexlogic Error Token
11 Equipment Mismatch
13 Unit Not Programmed
14 System Exception
15 Latching Out Error
18 SNTP Failure
19 Battery Failure
20 Primary Ethernet Failure
21 Secondary Ethernet Failure
22 EEPROM Data Error
23 SRAM Data Error
24 Program Memory
25 Watchdog Error
26 Low On Memory
27 Remote Device Off
28 Direct Device Off
29 Direct Ring Break
30 Any Minor Error
31 Any Major Error
bitmask type bitmask type bitmask type bitmask type
0 null 7 G 14 N 21 U
1 A 8 H 15 O 22 V
2 B 9 I 16 P 23 W
3 C 10 J 17 Q 24 X
4 D 11 K 18 R 25 Y
5 E 12 L 19 S 26 Z
6 F 13 M 20 T
bitmask definition
0 Events Cleared
1 Oscillography Triggered
2 Date/time Changed
3 Default Settings Loaded
4 Test Mode On
5 Test Mode Off
6 Power On
7 Power Off
8 Relay In Service
9 Relay Out Of Service
10 Watchdog Reset
11 Oscillography Clear
12 Reboot Command
13 Led Test Initiated
14 Flash Programming
15 Fault Report Trigger
16 User Programmable Fault Report Trigger
B
F151
ENUMERATION: RTD SELECTION
F152
ENUMERATION: SETTING GROUP
0 = Active Group, 1 = Group 1, 2 = Group 2, 3 = Group 3
4 = Group 4, 5 = Group 5, 6 = Group 6
F155
ENUMERATION: REMOTE DEVICE STATE
0 = Offline, 1 = Online
F156
ENUMERATION: REMOTE INPUT BIT PAIRS
F166
ENUMERATION: AUXILIARY VT CONNECTION TYPE
0 = Vn, 1 = Vag, 2 = Vbg, 3 = Vcg, 4 = Vab, 5 = Vbc, 6 = Vca
F167
ENUMERATION: SIGNAL SOURCE
0 = SRC 1, 1 = SRC 2, 2 = SRC 3, 3 = SRC 4,
4 = SRC 5, 5 = SRC 6
F168
ENUMERATION: INRUSH INHIBIT FUNCTION
0 = Disabled, 1 = Adapt. 2nd, 2 = Trad. 2nd
F170
ENUMERATION: LOW/HIGH OFFSET and GAIN
TRANSDUCER INPUT/OUTPUT SELECTION
0 = LOW, 1 = HIGH
F171
ENUMERATION: TRANSDUCER CHANNEL INPUT TYPE
0 = dcmA IN, 1 = Ohms IN, 2 = RTD IN, 3 = dcmA OUT
bitmask RTD# bitmask RTD# bitmask RTD#
0 NONE 17 RTD 17 33 RTD 33
1 RTD 1 18 RTD 18 34 RTD 34
2 RTD 2 19 RTD 19 35 RTD 35
3 RTD 3 20 RTD 20 36 RTD 36
4 RTD 4 21 RTD 21 37 RTD 37
5 RTD 5 22 RTD 22 38 RTD 38
6 RTD 6 23 RTD 23 39 RTD 39
7 RTD 7 24 RTD 24 40 RTD 40
8 RTD 8 25 RTD 25 41 RTD 41
9 RTD 9 26 RTD 26 42 RTD 42
10 RTD 10 27 RTD 27 43 RTD 43
11 RTD 11 28 RTD 28 44 RTD 44
12 RTD 12 29 RTD 29 45 RTD 45
13 RTD 13 30 RTD 30 46 RTD 46
14 RTD 14 31 RTD 31 47 RTD 47
15 RTD 15 32 RTD 32 48 RTD 48
16 RTD 16
bitmask RTD# bitmask RTD# bitmask RTD#
0 NONE 22 DNA-22 44 UserSt-12
1 DNA-1 23 DNA-23 45 UserSt-13
10 DNA-10 32 DNA-32 54 UserSt-22
11 DNA-11 33 UserSt-1 55 UserSt-23
21 DNA-21 43 UserSt-11
B
F172
ENUMERATION: SLOT LETTERS
F173
ENUMERATION: TRANSDUCER DCMA I/O RANGE
F174
ENUMERATION: TRANSDUCER RTD INPUT TYPE
0 = 100 Ohm Platinum, 1 = 120 Ohm Nickel,
2 = 100 Ohm Nickel, 3 = 10 Ohm Copper
F175
ENUMERATION: PHASE LETTERS
0 = A, 1 = B, 2 = C
F177
ENUMERATION: COMMUNICATION PORT
0 = None, 1 = COM1-RS485, 2 = COM2-RS485,
3 = Front Panel-RS232, 4 = Network
F180
ENUMERATION: PHASE/GROUND
0 = PHASE, 1 = GROUND
F181
ENUMERATION: ODD/EVEN/NONE
0 = ODD, 1 = EVEN, 2 = NONE
F183
ENUMERATION: AC INPUT WAVEFORMS
F185
ENUMERATION: PHASE A,B,C, GROUND SELECTOR
0 = A, 1 = B, 2 = C, 3 = G
F186
ENUMERATION: MEASUREMENT MODE
0 = Phase to Ground, 1 = Phase to Phase
F190
ENUMERATION: SIMULATED KEYPRESS
F192
ENUMERATION: ETHERNET OPERATION MODE
0 = Half-Duplex, 1 = Full-Duplex
bitmask slot bitmask slot bitmask slot bitmask slot
0 F 4 K 8 P 12 U
1 G 5 L 9 R 13 V
2 H 6 M 10 S 14 W
3 J 7 N 11 T 15 X
bitmask dcmA I/O range
0 0 to 1 mA
1 0 to 1 mA
2 1 to 1 mA
3 0 to 5 mA
4 0 to 10 mA
5 0 to 20 mA
6 4 to 20 mA
bitmask definition
0 Off
1 8 samples/cycle
2 16 samples/cycle
3 32 samples/cycle
4 64 samples/cycle
bitmsk keypress bitmsk keypress
0 ---
use between real keys
21 Escape
22 Enter
1 1 23 Reset
2 2 24 User 1
3 3 25 User 2
4 4 26 User 3
5 5 27 User-programmable key 1
11 Decimal Pt 33 User-programmable key 7
12 Plus/Minus 34 User-programmable key 8
13 Value Up 35 User-programmable key 9
14 Value Down 36 User-programmable key 10
15 Message Up 37 User-programmable key 11
16 Message Down 38 User-programmable key 12
17 Message Left 39 User 4 (control pushbutton)
18 Message Right 40 User 5 (control pushbutton)
19 Menu 41 User 6 (control pushbutton)
20 Help 42 User 7 (control pushbutton)
B
F194
ENUMERATION: DNP SCALE
A bitmask of 0 = 0.01, 1 = 0.1, 2 = 1, 3 = 10, 4 = 100, 5 = 1000,
6 = 10000, 7 = 100000, 8 = 0.001
F197
ENUMERATION: DNP BINARY INPUT POINT BLOCK
F199
ENUMERATION: DISABLED/ENABLED/CUSTOM
0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled, 2 = Custom
F200
TEXT40: 40-CHARACTER ASCII TEXT
20 registers, 16 Bits: 1st Char MSB, 2nd Char. LSB
F201
TEXT8: 8-CHARACTER ASCII PASSCODE
F202
F203
F204
F205
F206
F207
bitmask Input Point Block
0 Not Used
1 Virtual Inputs 1 to 16
2 Virtual Inputs 17 to 32
3 Virtual Outputs 1 to 16
7 Contact Inputs 1 to 16
13 Contact Outputs 1 to 16
17 Remote Inputs 1 to 16
18 Remote Inputs 17 to 32
19 Remote Devs 1 to 16
20 Elements 1 to 16
21 Elements 17 to 32
55 LED States 1 to 16
56 LED States 17 to 32
57 Self Tests 1 to 16
58 Self Tests 17 to 32
bitmask Input Point Block
B
F208
F222
ENUMERATION: TEST ENUMERATION
0 = Test Enumeration 0, 1 = Test Enumeration 1
F300
UR_UINT16: FLEXLOGIC BASE TYPE (6-bit type)
The FlexLogic BASE type is 6 bits and is combined with a 9 bit
descriptor and 1 bit for protection element to form a 16 bit value.
The combined bits are of the form: PTTTTTTDDDDDDDDD,
where P bit if set, indicates that the FlexLogic type is associated
with a protection element state and T represents bits for the BASE
type, and D represents bits for the descriptor.
The values in square brackets indicate the base type with P prefix
[PTTTTTT] and the values in round brackets indicate the descrip-
tor range.
[0] Off(0) this is boolean FALSE value
[0] On (1)This is boolean TRUE value
[2] CONTACT INPUTS (1 - 96)
[3] CONTACT INPUTS OFF (1-96)
[4] VIRTUAL INPUTS (1-64)
[6] VIRTUAL OUTPUTS (1-64)
[10] CONTACT OUTPUTS VOLTAGE DETECTED (1-64)
[11] CONTACT OUTPUTS VOLTAGE OFF DETECTED (1-64)
[12] CONTACT OUTPUTS CURRENT DETECTED (1-64)
[13] CONTACT OUTPUTS CURRENT OFF DETECTED (1-64)
[14] REMOTE INPUTS (1-32)
[28] INSERT (Via Keypad only)
[32] END
[34] NOT (1 INPUT)
[36] 2 INPUT XOR (0)
[38] LATCH SET/RESET (2 inputs)
[40] OR (2 to 16 inputs)
[42] AND (2 to 16 inputs)
[44] NOR (2 to 16 inputs)
[46] NAND (2 to 16 inputs)
[48] TIMER (1 to 32)
[50] ASSIGN VIRTUAL OUTPUT (1 to 64)
[52] SELF-TEST ERROR (see F141 for range)
[56] ACTIVE SETTING GROUP (1 to 6)
[62] MISCELLANEOUS EVENTS (see F146 for range)
[64 to 127] ELEMENT STATES
F400
UR_UINT16: CT/VT BANK SELECTION
F500
UR_UINT16: PACKED BITFIELD
First register indicates input/output state with bits 0(MSB)-15(LSB)
corresponding to input/output state 1-16. The second register indi-
cates input/output state with bits 0-15 corresponding to input/out-
put state 17-32 (if required) The third register indicates input/
output state with bits 0-15 corresponding to input/output state 33-
48 (if required). The fourth register indicates input/output state with
bits 0-15 corresponding to input/output state 49-64 (if required).
The number of registers required is determined by the specific
data item. A bit value of 0 = Off, 1 = On
F501
UR_UINT16: LED STATUS
Low byte of register indicates LED status with bit 0 representing
the top LED and bit 7 the bottom LED. A bit value of 1 indicates
the LED is on, 0 indicates the LED is off.
F502
BITFIELD: ELEMENT OPERATE STATES
Each bit contains the operate state for an element. See the F124
format code for a list of element IDs. The operate bit for element ID
X is bit [X mod 16] in register [X/16].
F504
BITFIELD: 3-PHASE ELEMENT STATE
F505
BITFIELD: CONTACT OUTPUT STATE
0 = Contact State, 1 = Voltage Detected, 2 = Current Detected
F506|
BITFIELD: 1 PHASE ELEMENT STATE
0 = Pickup, 1 = Operate
F507
BITFIELD: COUNTER ELEMENT STATE
0 = Count Greater Than, 1 = Count Equal To, 2 = Count Less Than
bitmask bank selection
0 Card 1 Contact 1 to 4
bitmask element state
0 Pickup
1 Operate
2 Pickup Phase A
3 Pickup Phase B
4 Pickup Phase C
5 Operate Phase A
6 Operate Phase B
7 Operate Phase C
B
F509
BITFIELD: SIMPLE ELEMENT STATE
0 = Operate
F511
BITFIELD: 3-PHASE SIMPLE ELEMENT STATE
0 = Operate, 1 = Operate A, 2 = Operate B, 3 = Operate C
F515
ENUMERATION ELEMENT INPUT MODE
0 = SIGNED, 1 = ABSOLUTE
F516
ENUMERATION ELEMENT COMPARE MODE
0 = LEVEL, 1 = DELTA
F518
ENUMERATION: FLEXELEMENT UNITS
0 = Milliseconds, 1 = Seconds, 2 = Minutes
F519
ENUMERATION: NON-VOLATILE LATCH
0 = Reset-Dominant, 1 = Set-Dominant
F522
ENUMERATION: TRANSDUCER DCMA OUTPUT RANGE
0 = 1 to 1 mA; 1 = 0 to 1 mA; 2 = 4 to 20 mA
F523
ENUMERATION: DNP OBJECTS 20, 22, AND 23 DEFAULT
VARIATION
F524
ENUMERATION: DNP OBJECT 21 DEFAULT VARIATION
F525
ENUMERATION: DNP OBJECT 32 DEFAULT VARIATION
F530
ENUMERATION: FRONT PANEL INTERFACE KEYPRESS
F600
UR_UINT16: FLEXANALOG PARAMETER
Corresponds to the modbus address of the value used when this
parameter is selected. Only certain values may be used as Flex-
Analogs (basically all metering quantities used in protection)
bitmask Default Variation
0 1
1 2
2 5
3 6
0 1
1 2
2 9
3 10
0 1
1 2
2 3
3 4
4 5
5 7
bitmask keypress bitmask keypress
0 None 22 Value Down
1 Menu 23 Reset
2 Message Up 24 User 1
3 7
~
25 User 2
4 8 26 User 3
5 9 31 User PB 1
6 Help 32 User PB 2
7 Message Left 33 User PB 3
8 4 34 User PB 4
9 5 35 User PB 5
10 6 36 User PB 6
11 Escape 37 User PB 7
12 Message Right 38 User PB 8
13 1 39 User PB 9
14 2 40 User PB 10
15 3 41 User PB 11
16 Enter 42 User PB 12
17 Message Down 44 User 4
18 0 45 User 5
19 Decimal 46 User 6
20 +/ 47 User 7
21 Value Up
GE Multilin B30 Bus Differential Relay C-1
APPENDIX C C.1 IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL
C
APPENDIX C IEC 60870-5-104 COMMS.C.1IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL C.1.1 INTEROPERABILITY DOCUMENT
This document is adapted from the IEC 60870-5-104 standard. For ths section the boxes indicate the following: used
in standard direction; not used; cannot be selected in IEC 60870-5-104 standard.
1. SYSTEM OR DEVICE:
System Definition
Controlling Station Definition (Master)
Controlled Station Definition (Slave)
2. NETWORK CONFIGURATION:
Point-to-Point Multipoint
Multiple Point-to-Point Multipoint Star
3. PHYSICAL LAYER
Transmission Speed (control direction):
Transmission Speed (monitor direction):
4. LINK LAYER
Unbalanced Interchange
Circuit V.24/V.28 Standard:
Circuit V.24/V.28 Recommended
if >1200 bits/s:
Balanced Interchange Circuit
X.24/X.27:
100 bits/sec.
200 bits/sec.
300 bits/sec.
600 bits/sec.
1200 bits/sec.
2400 bits/sec.
4800 bits/sec.
9600 bits/sec.
2400 bits/sec.
4800 bits/sec.
9600 bits/sec.
19200 bits/sec.
38400 bits/sec.
56000 bits/sec.
64000 bits/sec.
Circuit V.24/V.28 Standard:
Circuit V.24/V.28 Recommended
if >1200 bits/s:
Balanced Interchange Circuit
X.24/X.27:
100 bits/sec.
200 bits/sec.
300 bits/sec.
600 bits/sec.
1200 bits/sec.
2400 bits/sec.
4800 bits/sec.
9600 bits/sec.
2400 bits/sec.
4800 bits/sec.
9600 bits/sec.
19200 bits/sec.
38400 bits/sec.
56000 bits/sec.
64000 bits/sec.
Link Transmission Procedure: Address Field of the Link:
Balanced Transmision
Unbalanced Transmission
Not Present (Balanced Transmission Only)
One Octet
Two Octets
Structured
Unstructured
Frame Length (maximum length, number of octets): Not selectable in companion IEC 60870-5-104 standard
C-2 B30 Bus Differential Relay GE Multilin

C.1 IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL APPENDIX C
C
When using an unbalanced link layer, the following ADSU types are returned in class 2 messages (low priority) with the
indicated causes of transmission:
The standard assignment of ADSUs to class 2 messages is used as follows:
A special assignment of ADSUs to class 2 messages is used as follows:
5. APPLICATION LAYER
Transmission Mode for Application Data:
Mode 1 (least significant octet first), as defined in Clause 4.10 of IEC 60870-5-4, is used exclusively in this companion
stanadard.
Common Address of ADSU:
One Octet
Two Octets
Information Object Address:
One Octet Structured
Two Octets Unstructured
Three Octets
Cause of Transmission:
One Octet
Two Octets (with originator address). Originator address is set to zero if not used.
Maximum Length of APDU: 253 (the maximum length may be reduced by the system.
Selection of standard ASDUs:
For the following lists, the boxes indicate the following: used in standard direction; not used; cannot be
selected in IEC 60870-5-104 standard.
Process information in monitor direction
<1> := Single-point information M_SP_NA_1
<2> := Single-point information with time tag M_SP_TA_1
<3> := Double-point information M_DP_NA_1
<4> := Double-point information with time tag M_DP_TA_1
<5> := Step position information M_ST_NA_1
<6> := Step position information with time tag M_ST_TA_1
<7> := Bitstring of 32 bits M_BO_NA_1
<8> := Bitstring of 32 bits with time tag M_BO_TA_1
<9> := Measured value, normalized value M_ME_NA_1
<10> := Measured value, normalized value with time tag M_NE_TA_1
<11> := Measured value, scaled value M_ME_NB_1
<12> := Measured value, scaled value with time tag M_NE_TB_1
<13> := Measured value, short floating point value M_ME_NC_1
<14> := Measured value, short floating point value with time tag M_NE_TC_1
<15> := Integrated totals M_IT_NA_1
<16> := Integrated totals with time tag M_IT_TA_1
<17> := Event of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TA_1
<18> := Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TB_1
<19> := Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TC_1
<20> := Packed single-point information with status change detection M_SP_NA_1

C
Either the ASDUs of the set <2>, <4>, <6>, <8>, <10>, <12>, <14>, <16>, <17>, <18>, and <19> or of the set
<30> to <40> are used.
Process information in control direction
Either the ASDUs of the set <45> to <51> or of the set <58> to <64> are used.
System information in monitor direction
System information in control direction
<21> := Measured value, normalized value without quantity descriptor M_ME_ND_1
<30> := Single-point information with time tag CP56Time2a M_SP_TB_1
<31> := Double-point information wiht time tag CP56Time2a M_DP_TB_1
<32> := Step position information with time tag CP56Time2a M_ST_TB_1
<33> := Bitstring of 32 bits with time tag CP56Time2a M_BO_TB_1
<34> := Measured value, normalized value with time tag CP56Time2a M_ME_TD_1
<35> := Measured value, scaled value with time tag CP56Time2a M_ME_TE_1
<36> := Measured value, short floating point value with time tag CP56Time2a M_ME_TF_1
<37> := Integrated totals with time tag CP56Time2a M_IT_TB_1
<38> := Event of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a M_EP_TD_1
<39> := Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a M_EP_TE_1
<40> := Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a M_EP_TF_1
<45> := Single command C_SC_NA_1
<46> := Double command C_DC_NA_1
<47> := Regulating step command C_RC_NA_1
<48> := Set point command, normalized value C_SE_NA_1
<49> := Set point command, scaled value C_SE_NB_1
<50> := Set point command, short floating point value C_SE_NC_1
<51> := Bitstring of 32 bits C_BO_NA_1
<58> := Single command with time tag CP56Time2a C_SC_TA_1
<59> := Double command with time tag CP56Time2a C_DC_TA_1
<60> := Regulating step command with time tag CP56Time2a C_RC_TA_1
<61> := Set point command, normalized value with time tag CP56Time2a C_SE_TA_1
<62> := Set point command, scaled value with time tag CP56Time2a C_SE_TB_1
<63> := Set point command, short floating point value with time tag CP56Time2a C_SE_TC_1
<64> := Bitstring of 32 bits with time tag CP56Time2a C_BO_TA_1
<70> := End of initialization M_EI_NA_1
<100> := Interrogation command C_IC_NA_1
<101> := Counter interrogation command C_CI_NA_1
<102> := Read command C_RD_NA_1
<103> := Clock synchronization command (see Clause 7.6 in standard) C_CS_NA_1
<104> := Test command C_TS_NA_1
<105> := Reset process command C_RP_NA_1
<106> := Delay acquisition command C_CD_NA_1
<107> := Test command with time tag CP56Time2a C_TS_TA_1

C
Parameter in control direction
File transfer
Type identifier and cause of transmission assignments
(station-specific parameters)
In the following table:
Shaded boxes are not required.
Black boxes are not permitted in this companion standard.
Blank boxes indicate functions or ASDU not used.
X if only used in the standard direction
<110> := Parameter of measured value, normalized value PE_ME_NA_1
<111> := Parameter of measured value, scaled value PE_ME_NB_1
<112> := Parameter of measured value, short floating point value PE_ME_NC_1
<113> := Parameter activation PE_AC_NA_1
<120> := File Ready F_FR_NA_1
<121> := Section Ready F_SR_NA_1
<122> := Call directory, select file, call file, call section F_SC_NA_1
<123> := Last section, last segment F_LS_NA_1
<124> := Ack file, ack section F_AF_NA_1
<125> := Segment F_SG_NA_1
<126> := Directory (blank or X, available only in monitor [standard] direction) C_CD_NA_1
TYPE IDENTIFICATION CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION
NO. MNEMONIC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
20
to
36
37
to
41
44 45 46 47
<1> M_SP_NA_1 X X X X X
<2> M_SP_TA_1
<3> M_DP_NA_1
<4> M_DP_TA_1
<5> M_ST_NA_1
<6> M_ST_TA_1
<7> M_BO_NA_1
<8> M_BO_TA_1
P
E
R
I
O
D
I
C
,

C
Y
C
L
I
C
B
A
C
K
G
R
O
U
N
D

S
C
A
N
S
P
O
N
T
A
N
E
O
U
S
I
N
I
T
I
A
L
I
Z
E
D
R
E
Q
U
E
S
T

O
R

R
E
Q
U
E
S
T
E
D
A
C
T
I
V
A
T
I
O
N
A
C
T
I
V
A
T
I
O
N

C
O
N
F
I
R
M
A
T
I
O
N
D
E
A
C
T
I
V
A
T
I
O
N
D
E
A
C
T
I
V
A
T
I
O
N

C
O
N
F
I
R
M
A
T
I
O
N
A
C
T
I
V
A
T
I
O
N

T
E
R
M
I
N
A
T
I
O
N
R
E
T
U
R
N

I
N
F
O

C
A
U
S
E
D

B
Y

L
O
C
A
L

C
M
D
F
I
L
E

T
R
A
N
S
F
E
R
I
N
T
E
R
R
O
G
A
T
E
D

B
Y

G
R
O
U
P

<
N
U
M
B
E
R
>
R
E
Q
U
E
S
T

B
Y

G
R
O
U
P

<
N
>

C
O
U
N
T
E
R

R
E
Q
U
N
K
N
O
W
N

T
Y
P
E

I
D
E
N
T
I
F
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
U
N
K
N
O
W
N

C
A
U
S
E

O
F

T
R
A
N
S
M
I
S
S
I
O
N
U
N
K
N
O
W
N

C
O
M
M
O
N

A
D
D
R
E
S
S

O
F

A
D
S
U
U
N
K
N
O
W
N

I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N

O
B
J
E
C
T

A
D
D
R
U
N
K
N
O
W
N

I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N

O
B
J
E
C
T

A
D
D
R
C
<9> M_ME_NA_1
<10> M_ME_TA_1
<11> M_ME_NB_1
<12> M_ME_TB_1
<13> M_ME_NC_1 X X X X
<14> M_ME_TC_1
<15> M_IT_NA_1 X X
<16> M_IT_TA_1
<17> M_EP_TA_1
<18> M_EP_TB_1
<19> M_EP_TC_1
<20> M_PS_NA_1
<21> M_ME_ND_1
<30> M_SP_TB_1 X X X
<31> M_DP_TB_1
<32> M_ST_TB_1
<33> M_BO_TB_1
<34> M_ME_TD_1
<35> M_ME_TE_1
<36> M_ME_TF_1
<37> M_IT_TB_1 X X
<38> M_EP_TD_1
<39> M_EP_TE_1
<40> M_EP_TF_1
<45> C_SC_NA_1 X X X X X
<46> C_DC_NA_1
<47> C_RC_NA_1
<48> C_SE_NA_1
<49> C_SE_NB_1
NO. MNEMONIC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
20
to
36
37
to
41
44 45 46 47
P
E
R
I
O
D
I
C
,

C
Y
C
L
I
C
B
A
C
K
G
R
O
U
N
D

S
C
A
N
S
P
O
N
T
A
N
E
O
U
S
I
N
I
T
I
A
L
I
Z
E
D
R
E
Q
U
E
S
T

O
R

R
E
Q
U
E
S
T
E
D
A
C
T
I
V
A
T
I
O
N
A
C
T
I
V
A
T
I
O
N

C
O
N
F
I
R
M
A
T
I
O
N
D
E
A
C
T
I
V
A
T
I
O
N
D
E
A
C
T
I
V
A
T
I
O
N

C
O
N
F
I
R
M
A
T
I
O
N
A
C
T
I
V
A
T
I
O
N

T
E
R
M
I
N
A
T
I
O
N
R
E
T
U
R
N

I
N
F
O

C
A
U
S
E
D

B
Y

L
O
C
A
L

C
M
D
F
I
L
E

T
R
A
N
S
F
E
R
I
N
T
E
R
R
O
G
A
T
E
D

B
Y

G
R
O
U
P

<
N
U
M
B
E
R
>
R
E
Q
U
E
S
T

B
Y

G
R
O
U
P

<
N
>

C
O
U
N
T
E
R

R
E
Q
U
N
K
N
O
W
N

T
Y
P
E

I
D
E
N
T
I
F
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
U
N
K
N
O
W
N

C
A
U
S
E

O
F

T
R
A
N
S
M
I
S
S
I
O
N
U
N
K
N
O
W
N

C
O
M
M
O
N

A
D
D
R
E
S
S

O
F

A
D
S
U
U
N
K
N
O
W
N

I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N

O
B
J
E
C
T

A
D
D
R
U
N
K
N
O
W
N

I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N

O
B
J
E
C
T

A
D
D
R
C
<50> C_SE_NC_1
<51> C_BO_NA_1
<58> C_SC_TA_1 X X X X X
<59> C_DC_TA_1
<60> C_RC_TA_1
<61> C_SE_TA_1
<62> C_SE_TB_1
<63> C_SE_TC_1
<64> C_BO_TA_1
<70> M_EI_NA_1*) X
<100> C_IC_NA_1 X X X X X
<101> C_CI_NA_1 X X X
<102> C_RD_NA_1 X
<103> C_CS_NA_1 X X X
<104> C_TS_NA_1
<105> C_RP_NA_1 X X
<106> C_CD_NA_1
<107> C_TS_TA_1
<110> P_ME_NA_1
<111> P_ME_NB_1
<112> P_ME_NC_1 X X X
<113> P_AC_NA_1
<120> F_FR_NA_1
<121> F_SR_NA_1
<122> F_SC_NA_1
<123> F_LS_NA_1
<124> F_AF_NA_1
<125> F_SG_NA_1
<126> F_DR_TA_1*)
NO. MNEMONIC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
20
to
36
37
to
41
44 45 46 47
P
E
R
I
O
D
I
C
,

C
Y
C
L
I
C
B
A
C
K
G
R
O
U
N
D

S
C
A
N
S
P
O
N
T
A
N
E
O
U
S
I
N
I
T
I
A
L
I
Z
E
D
R
E
Q
U
E
S
T

O
R

R
E
Q
U
E
S
T
E
D
A
C
T
I
V
A
T
I
O
N
A
C
T
I
V
A
T
I
O
N

C
O
N
F
I
R
M
A
T
I
O
N
D
E
A
C
T
I
V
A
T
I
O
N
D
E
A
C
T
I
V
A
T
I
O
N

C
O
N
F
I
R
M
A
T
I
O
N
A
C
T
I
V
A
T
I
O
N

T
E
R
M
I
N
A
T
I
O
N
R
E
T
U
R
N

I
N
F
O

C
A
U
S
E
D

B
Y

L
O
C
A
L

C
M
D
F
I
L
E

T
R
A
N
S
F
E
R
I
N
T
E
R
R
O
G
A
T
E
D

B
Y

G
R
O
U
P

<
N
U
M
B
E
R
>
R
E
Q
U
E
S
T

B
Y

G
R
O
U
P

<
N
>

C
O
U
N
T
E
R

R
E
Q
U
N
K
N
O
W
N

T
Y
P
E

I
D
E
N
T
I
F
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
U
N
K
N
O
W
N

C
A
U
S
E

O
F

T
R
A
N
S
M
I
S
S
I
O
N
U
N
K
N
O
W
N

C
O
M
M
O
N

A
D
D
R
E
S
S

O
F

A
D
S
U
U
N
K
N
O
W
N

I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N

O
B
J
E
C
T

A
D
D
R
U
N
K
N
O
W
N

I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N

O
B
J
E
C
T

A
D
D
R
C
6. BASIC APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
Station Initialization:
Remote initialization
Cyclic Data Transmission:
Cyclic data transmission
Read Procedure:
Read procedure
Spontaneous Transmission:
Spontaneous transmission
Double transmission of information objects with cause of transmission spontaneous:
The following type identifications may be transmitted in succession caused by a single status change of an information
object. The particular information object addresses for which double transmission is enabled are defined in a project-
specific list.
Single point information: M_SP_NA_1, M_SP_TA_1, M_SP_TB_1, and M_PS_NA_1
Double point information: M_DP_NA_1, M_DP_TA_1, and M_DP_TB_1
Step position information: M_ST_NA_1, M_ST_TA_1, and M_ST_TB_1
Bitstring of 32 bits: M_BO_NA_1, M_BO_TA_1, and M_BO_TB_1 (if defined for a specific project)
Measured value, normalized value: M_ME_NA_1, M_ME_TA_1, M_ME_ND_1, and M_ME_TD_1
Measured value, scaled value: M_ME_NB_1, M_ME_TB_1, and M_ME_TE_1
Measured value, short floating point number: M_ME_NC_1, M_ME_TC_1, and M_ME_TF_1
Station interrogation:
Clock synchronization:
Clock synchronization (optional, see Clause 7.6)
Command transmission:
Direct command transmission
Direct setpoint command transmission
Select and execute command
Select and execute setpoint command
C_SE ACTTERM used
No additional definition
Short pulse duration (duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation)
Long pulse duration (duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation)
Persistent output
Supervision of maximum delay in command direction of commands and setpoint commands
Maximum allowable delay of commands and setpoint commands: 10 s
Global
Group 1 Group 5 Group 9 Group 13

C
Transmission of integrated totals:
Mode A: Local freeze with spontaneous transmission
Mode B: Local freeze with counter interrogation
Mode C: Freeze and transmit by counter-interrogation commands
Mode D: Freeze by counter-interrogation command, frozen values reported simultaneously
Counter read
Counter freeze without reset
Counter freeze with reset
Counter reset
General request counter
Request counter group 1
Parameter loading:
Threshold value
Smoothing factor
Low limit for transmission of measured values
High limit for transmission of measured values
Parameter activation:
Activation/deactivation of persistent cyclic or periodic transmission of the addressed object
Test procedure:
Test procedure
File transfer:
File transfer in monitor direction:
Transparent file
Transmission of disturbance data of protection equipment
Transmission of sequences of events
Transmission of sequences of recorded analog values
File transfer in control direction:
Transparent file
Background scan:
Background scan
Acquisition of transmission delay:
Acquisition of transmission delay

C
Definition of time outs:
Maximum range of values for all time outs: 1 to 255 s, accuracy 1 s
Maximum number of outstanding I-format APDUs k and latest acknowledge APDUs (w):
Maximum range of values k: 1 to 32767 (2
15
1) APDUs, accuracy 1 APDU
Maximum range of values w: 1 to 32767 APDUs, accuracy 1 APDU
Recommendation: w should not exceed two-thirds of k.
Portnumber:
RFC 2200 suite:
RFC 2200 is an official Internet Standard which describes the state of standardization of protocols used in the Internet
as determined by the Internet Architecture Board (IAB). It offers a broad spectrum of actual standards used in the Inter-
net. The suitable selection of documents from RFC 2200 defined in this standard for given projects has to be chosen
by the user of this standard.
Ethernet 802.3
Serial X.21 interface
Other selection(s) from RFC 2200 (list below if selected)
PARAMETER DEFAULT
VALUE
REMARKS SELECTED
VALUE
t
0
30 s Timeout of connection establishment 120 s
t
1
15 s Timeout of send or test APDUs 15 s
t
2
10 s Timeout for acknowlegements in case of no data messages t
2
< t
1
10 s
t
3
20 s Timeout for sending test frames in case of a long idle state 20 s
PARAMETER DEFAULT
VALUE
REMARKS SELECTED
VALUE
k 12 APDUs Maximum difference receive sequence number to send state variable 12 APDUs
w 8 APDUs Latest acknowledge after receiving w I-format APDUs 8 APDUs
PARAMETER VALUE REMARKS
Portnumber 2404 In all cases

C
C.1.2 IEC 60870-5-104 POINTS
Only Source 1 data points are shown in the following table. If the NUMBER OF SOURCES IN MMENC LIST setting is increased,
data points for subsequent sources will be added to the list immediately following the Source 1 data points.
Table C1: IEC 60870-5-104 POINTS (Sheet 1 of 3)
POINT DESCRIPTION UNITS
M_ME_NC_1 Points
2000 SRC 1 Phase A Current RMS A
2001 SRC 1 Phase B Current RMS A
2002 SRC 1 Phase C Current RMS A
2003 SRC 1 Neutral Current RMS A
2004 SRC 1 Phase A Current Magnitude A
2005 SRC 1 Phase A Current Angle degrees
2006 SRC 1 Phase B Current Magnitude A
2007 SRC 1 Phase B Current Angle degrees
2008 SRC 1 Phase C Current Magnitude A
2009 SRC 1 Phase C Current Angle degrees
2010 SRC 1 Neutral Current Magnitude A
2011 SRC 1 Neutral Current Angle degrees
2012 SRC 1 Ground Current RMS A
2013 SRC 1 Ground Current Magnitude A
2014 SRC 1 Ground Current Angle degrees
2015 SRC 1 Zero Sequence Current Magnitude A
2016 SRC 1 Zero Sequence Current Angle degrees
2017 SRC 1 Positive Sequence Current Magnitude A
2018 SRC 1 Positive Sequence Current Angle degrees
2019 SRC 1 Negative Sequence Current Magnitude A
2020 SRC 1 Negative Sequence Current Angle degrees
2021 SRC 1 Differential Ground Current Magnitude A
2022 SRC 1 Differential Ground Current Angle degrees
2023 SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage RMS V
2024 SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage RMS V
2025 SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage RMS V
2026 SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage Magnitude V
2027 SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage Angle degrees
2028 SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage Magnitude V
2029 SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage Angle degrees
2030 SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage Magnitude V
2031 SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage Angle degrees
2032 SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage RMS V
2033 SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage RMS V
2034 SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage RMS V
2035 SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage Magnitude V
2036 SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage Angle degrees
2037 SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage Magnitude V
2038 SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage Angle degrees
2039 SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage Magnitude V
2040 SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage Angle degrees
2041 SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage RMS V
2042 SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage Magnitude V
2043 SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage Angle degrees
2044 SRC 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Magnitude V
2045 SRC 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Angle degrees
2046 SRC 1 Positive Sequence Voltage Magnitude V
2047 SRC 1 Positive Sequence Voltage Angle degrees
2048 SRC 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Magnitude V
2049 SRC 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Angle degrees
2050 SRC 1 Frequency Hz
2051 Bus Diff IA Magnitude A
2052 Bus Diff IA Angle degrees
2053 Bus Diff IB Magnitude A
2054 Bus Diff IB Angle degrees
2055 Bus Diff IC Magnitude A
2056 Bus Diff IC Angle degrees
2057 Bus Rest IA Magnitude A
2058 Bus Rest IA Angle degrees
2059 Bus Rest IB Magnitude A
2060 Bus Rest IB Angle degrees
2061 Bus Rest IC Magnitude A
2062 Bus Rest IC Angle degrees
2063 Bus Max CT Primary none
2064 DCMA Inputs 1 Value none
2068 RTD Inputs 1 Value degreesC
2072 Tracking Frequency Hz
2073 FlexElement 1 Actual none
2081 Current Setting Group none
P_ME_NC_1 Points
5000 -
5080
Threshold values for M_ME_NC_1 points -
M_SP_NA_1 Points
100 - 115 Virtual Input States[0] -
116 - 131 Virtual Input States[1] -
132 - 147 Virtual Output States[0] -
C
196 - 211 Contact Input States[0] -
292 - 307 Contact Output States[0] -
356 - 371 Remote Input 1 States[0] -
372 - 387 Remote Input 1 States[1] -
388 - 403 Remote Device 1 States -
404 - 419 LED Column 1 State[0] -
420 - 435 LED Column 1 State[1] -
C_SC_NA_1 Points
1100 -
1115
Virtual Input States[0] - No Select Required -
1116 -
1131
Virtual Input States[1] - Select Required -
M_IT_NA_1 Points
4000 Digital Counter 1 Value -
C
GE Multilin B30 Bus Differential Relay D-1
APPENDIX D D.1 DNP PROTOCOL
D
APPENDIX D DNP COMMUNICATIONSD.1DNP PROTOCOL D.1.1 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
The following table provides a Device Profile Document in the standard format defined in the DNP 3.0 Subset Definitions
Document.
Table D1: DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE (Sheet 1 of 3)
(Also see the IMPLEMENTATION TABLE in the following section)
Vendor Name: General Electric Multilin
Device Name: UR Series Relay
Highest DNP Level Supported:
For Requests: Level 2
For Responses: Level 2
Device Function:
Master
Slave
Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the Highest DNP Levels Supported (the complete
list is described in the attached table):
Binary Inputs (Object 1)
Binary Input Changes (Object 2)
Binary Outputs (Object 10)
Binary Counters (Object 20)
Frozen Counters (Object 21)
Counter Change Event (Object 22)
Frozen Counter Event (Object 23)
Analog Inputs (Object 30)
Analog Input Changes (Object 32)
Analog Deadbands (Object 34)
Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets):
Transmitted: 292
Received: 292
Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets):
Transmitted: 240
Received: 2048
Maximum Data Link Re-tries:
None
Fixed at 2
Configurable
Maximum Application Layer Re-tries:
None
Configurable
Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation:
Never
Always
Sometimes
Configurable
D-2 B30 Bus Differential Relay GE Multilin

D.1 DNP PROTOCOL APPENDIX D
D
Requires Application Layer Confirmation:
Never
Always
When reporting Event Data
When sending multi-fragment responses
Sometimes
Configurable
Timeouts while waiting for:
Data Link Confirm: None Fixed at 3 s Variable Configurable
Complete Appl. Fragment: None Fixed at ____ Variable Configurable
Application Confirm: None Fixed at 4 s Variable Configurable
Complete Appl. Response: None Fixed at ____ Variable Configurable
Others:
Transmission Delay: No intentional delay
Inter-character Timeout: 50 ms
Need Time Delay: Configurable (default = 24 hrs.)
Select/Operate Arm Timeout: 10 s
Binary input change scanning period: 8 times per power system cycle
Packed binary change process period: 1 s
Analog input change scanning period: 500 ms
Counter change scanning period: 500 ms
Frozen counter event scanning period: 500 ms
Unsolicited response notification delay: 500 ms
Unsolicited response retry delay configurable 0 to 60 sec.
Sends/Executes Control Operations:
WRITE Binary Outputs Never Always Sometimes Configurable
SELECT/OPERATE Never Always Sometimes Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE Never Always Sometimes Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE NO ACK Never Always Sometimes Configurable
Count > 1 Never Always Sometimes Configurable
Pulse On Never Always Sometimes Configurable
Pulse Off Never Always Sometimes Configurable
Latch On Never Always Sometimes Configurable
Latch Off Never Always Sometimes Configurable
Queue Never Always Sometimes Configurable
Clear Queue Never Always Sometimes Configurable
Explanation of Sometimes: Object 12 points are mapped to UR Virtual Inputs. The persistence of Virtual Inputs is
determined by the VIRTUAL INPUT X TYPE settings. Both Pulse On and Latch On operations perform the same func-
tion in the UR; that is, the appropriate Virtual Input is put into the On state. If the Virtual Input is set to Self-Reset,
it will reset after one pass of FlexLogic. The On/Off times and Count value are ignored. Pulse Off and Latch Off
operations put the appropriate Virtual Input into the Off state. Trip and Close operations both put the appropriate
Virtual Input into the On state.

D
Reports Binary Input Change Events when no
specific variation requested:
Never
Only time-tagged
Only non-time-tagged
Configurable
Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change Events when no
specific variation requested:
Never
Binary Input Change With Time
Binary Input Change With Relative Time
Configurable (attach explanation)
Sends Unsolicited Responses:
Never
Configurable
Only certain objects
Sometimes (attach explanation)
ENABLE/DISABLE unsolicited Function
codes supported
Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses:
Never
When Device Restarts
When Status Flags Change
No other options are permitted.
Default Counter Object/Variation:
No Counters Reported
Default Object: 20
Default Variation: 1
Point-by-point list attached
Counters Roll Over at:
No Counters Reported
16 Bits (Counter 8)
32 Bits (Counters 0 to 7, 9)
Other Value: _____
Point-by-point list attached
Sends Multi-Fragment Responses:
Yes
No

D
D.1.2 DNP IMPLEMENTATION
The following table identifies the variations, function codes, and qualifiers supported by the B30 in both request messages
and in response messages. For static (non-change-event) objects, requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be
responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. Static object requests sent with qualifiers 17 or 28 will be responded with qualifiers 17 or
28. For change-event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.
Table D2: IMPLEMENTATION TABLE (Sheet 1 of 4)
OBJECT REQUEST RESPONSE
OBJECT
NO.
VARIATION
NO.
DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
CODES (DEC)
QUALIFIER
CODES (HEX)
FUNCTION
CODES (DEC)
QUALIFIER
CODES (HEX)
1 0 Binary Input (Variation 0 is used to request
default variation)
1 (read)
22 (assign class)
00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited quantity)
17, 28 (index)
1 Binary Input 1 (read)
22 (assign class)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
2 Binary Input with Status 1 (read)
22 (assign class)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
2 0 Binary Input Change (Variation 0 is used to
request default variation)
1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
1 Binary Input Change without Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
129 (response)
130 (unsol. resp.)
17, 28 (index)
2 Binary Input Change with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
129 (response
130 (unsol. resp.)
17, 28 (index)
3
(parse only)
Binary Input Change with Relative Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
10 0 Binary Output Status (Variation 0 is used to
request default variation)
1 (read) 00, 01(start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
2 Binary Output Status 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
12 1 Control Relay Output Block 3 (select)
4 (operate)
5 (direct op)
6 (dir. op, noack)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
129 (response) echo of request
20 0 Binary Counter
(Variation 0 is used to request default
variation)
1 (read)
7 (freeze)
8 (freeze noack)
9 (freeze clear)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
22 (assign class)
00, 01(start-stop)
06(no range, or all)
07, 08(limited quantity)
17, 28(index)
1 32-Bit Binary Counter 1 (read)
7 (freeze)
8 (freeze noack)
9 (freeze clear)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
22 (assign class)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
Note 1: A default variation refers to the variation responded when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans. The default varia-
tions for object types 1, 2, 20, 21, 22, 23, 30, and 32 are selected via relay settings. Refer to the Communications section in Chapter 5
for details. This optimizes the class 0 poll data size.
Note 2: For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded when a request is sent with qualifiers 17 or 28, respec-
tively. Otherwise, static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01 (for change-
event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.)
Note 3: Cold restarts are implemented the same as warm restarts the B30 is not restarted, but the DNP process is restarted.
D
20
contd
2 16-Bit Binary Counter 1 (read)
7 (freeze)
8 (freeze noack)
9 (freeze clear)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
22 (assign class)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
5 32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag 1 (read)
7 (freeze)
8 (freeze noack)
9 (freeze clear)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
22 (assign class)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
6 16-Bit Binary Counter without Flag 1 (read)
7 (freeze)
8 (freeze noack)
9 (freeze clear)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
22 (assign class)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
21 0 Frozen Counter
variation)
1 (read)
22 (assign class)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
1 32-Bit Frozen Counter 1 (read)
22 (assign class)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
2 16-Bit Frozen Counter 1 (read)
22 (assign class)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
9 32-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag 1 (read)
22 (assign class)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
10 16-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag 1 (read)
22 (assign class)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
22 0 Counter Change Event (Variation 0 is used
to request default variation)
1 32-Bit Counter Change Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
129 (response)
130 (unsol. resp.)
17, 28 (index)
2 16-Bit Counter Change Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
129 (response)
130 (unsol. resp.)
17, 28 (index)
5 32-Bit Counter Change Event with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
129 (response)
130 (unsol. resp.)
17, 28 (index)
6 16-Bit Counter Change Event with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
129 (response)
130 (unsol. resp.)
17, 28 (index)
23 0 Frozen Counter Event (Variation 0 is used
1 32-Bit Frozen Counter Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
129 (response)
130 (unsol. resp.)
17, 28 (index)
2 16-Bit Frozen Counter Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
129 (response)
130 (unsol. resp.)
17, 28 (index)
OBJECT
NO.
VARIATION
NO.
CODES (DEC)
QUALIFIER
CODES (HEX)
FUNCTION
CODES (DEC)
QUALIFIER
CODES (HEX)
D
23
contd
5 32-Bit Frozen Counter Event with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
129 (response)
130 (unsol. resp.)
17, 28 (index)
6 16-Bit Frozen Counter Event with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
129 (response)
130 (unsol. resp.)
17, 28 (index)
30 0 Analog Input (Variation 0 is used to request
default variation)
1 (read)
22 (assign class)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
1 32-Bit Analog Input 1 (read)
22 (assign class)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
2 16-Bit Analog Input 1 (read)
22 (assign class)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
3 32-Bit Analog Input without Flag 1 (read)
22 (assign class)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
4 16-Bit Analog Input without Flag 1 (read)
22 (assign class)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
5 short floating point 1 (read)
22 (assign class)
00, 01 (start-stop)
06(no range, or all)
07, 08(limited quantity)
17, 28(index)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
32 0 Analog Change Event (Variation 0 is used
1 32-Bit Analog Change Event without Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
129 (response)
130 (unsol. resp.)
17, 28 (index)
2 16-Bit Analog Change Event without Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
129 (response)
130 (unsol. resp.)
17, 28 (index)
3 32-Bit Analog Change Event with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
129 (response)
130 (unsol. resp.)
17, 28 (index)
4 16-Bit Analog Change Event with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
129 (response)
130 (unsol. resp.)
17, 28 (index)
5 short floating point Analog Change Event
without Time
129 (response)
130 (unsol. resp.)
17, 28 (index)
7 short floating point Analog Change Event
with Time
129 (response)
130 (unsol. resp.)
17, 28 (index)
34 0 Analog Input Reporting Deadband
variation)
1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
1 16-bit Analog Input Reporting Deadband
(default see Note 1)
17, 28 (index)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
2 (write) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
OBJECT
NO.
VARIATION
NO.
CODES (DEC)
QUALIFIER
CODES (HEX)
FUNCTION
CODES (DEC)
QUALIFIER
CODES (HEX)
D
34
contd
2 32-bit Analog Input Reporting Deadband 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
2 (write) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
3 Short floating point Analog Input Reporting
Deadband
17, 28 (index)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
50 0 Time and Date 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
1 Time and Date
(default see Note 1)
1 (read)
2 (write)
00, 01 (start-stop)
07 (limited qty=1)
08 (limited quantity)
17, 28 (index)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
52 2 Time Delay Fine 129 (response) 07 (limited quantity)
(quantity = 1)
60 0 Class 0, 1, 2, and 3 Data 1 (read)
20 (enable unsol)
21 (disable unsol)
22 (assign class)
1 Class 0 Data 1 (read)
22 (assign class)
20 (enable unsol)
21 (disable unsol)
22 (assign class)
20 (enable unsol)
21 (disable unsol)
22 (assign class)
20 (enable unsol)
21 (disable unsol)
22 (assign class)
80 1 Internal Indications 2 (write) 00 (start-stop)
(index must =7)
--- No Object (function code only)
see Note 3
13 (cold restart)
--- No Object (function code only) 14 (warm restart)
--- No Object (function code only) 23 (delay meas.)
OBJECT
NO.
VARIATION
NO.
CODES (DEC)
QUALIFIER
CODES (HEX)
FUNCTION
CODES (DEC)
QUALIFIER
CODES (HEX)
D.2 DNP POINT LISTS APPENDIX D
D
D.2DNP POINT LISTS D.2.1 BINARY INPUTS
The following table lists both Binary Counters (Object 20) and Frozen Counters (Object 21). When a freeze function is per-
formed on a Binary Counter point, the frozen value is available in the corresponding Frozen Counter point.
BINARY INPUT POINTS
Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1
Change Event Object Number: 2
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 22 (assign class)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with status)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input Change with Time)
Change Event Scan Rate: 8 times per power system cycle
Change Event Buffer Size: 1000
Table D3: BINARY INPUTS (Sheet 1 of 10)
point name/description change
event class
0 Virtual Input 1 2
1 Virtual Input 2 2
2 Virtual Input 3 2
3 Virtual Input 4 2
4 Virtual Input 5 2
5 Virtual Input 6 2
6 Virtual Input 7 2
7 Virtual Input 8 2
8 Virtual Input 9 2
9 Virtual Input 10 2
32 Virtual Output 1 2
event class
APPENDIX D D.2 DNP POINT LISTS
D
96 Contact Input 1 1
event class
event class
D
192 Contact Output 1 1
event class
event class
D
256 Remote Input 1 1
288 Remote Device 1 1
event class
304 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 1
305 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 2 1
320 Phase Time Overcurrent 1 1
352 Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 1
437 Bus Differential 1
448 Phase Undervoltage 1 1
449 Phase Undervoltage 2 1
452 Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 1
460 Neutral Overvoltage 1 1
555 CT Trouble 1
640 Setting Group 1
641 Reset 1
689 Selector Switch 1 1
690 Selector Switch 2 1
694 Control Pushbutton 1 1
704 FlexElement 1 1
705 FlexElement 2 1
706 FlexElement 3 1
707 FlexElement 4 1
708 FlexElement 5 1
709 FlexElement 6 1
710 FlexElement 7 1
event class
D
711 FlexElement 8 1
724 Non-Volatile Latch 1 1
816 Digital Element 1 1
848 Digital Counter 1 1
864 LED State 1 (IN SERVICE) 1
865 LED State 2 (TROUBLE) 1
866 LED State 3 (TEST MODE) 1
867 LED State 4 (TRIP) 1
868 LED State 5 (ALARM) 1
869 LED State 6 (PICKUP) 1
event class
880 LED State 9 (VOLTAGE) 1
881 LED State 10 (CURRENT) 1
882 LED State 11 (FREQUENCY) 1
883 LED State 12 (OTHER) 1
884 LED State 13 (PHASE A) 1
885 LED State 14 (PHASE B) 1
886 LED State 15 (PHASE C) 1
887 LED State 16 (NTL/GROUND) 1
898 SNTP FAILURE 1
899 BATTERY FAIL 1
900 PRI ETHERNET FAIL 1
901 SEC ETHERNET FAIL 1
902 EEPROM DATA ERROR 1
903 SRAM DATA ERROR 1
904 PROGRAM MEMORY 1
905 WATCHDOG ERROR 1
906 LOW ON MEMORY 1
907 REMOTE DEVICE OFF 1
908 DIRECT DEVICE OFF
909 DIRECT RING BREAK
910 ANY MINOR ERROR 1
911 ANY MAJOR ERROR 1
912 ANY SELF-TESTS 1
913 IRIG-B FAILURE 1
914 DSP ERROR 1
916 NO DSP INTERUPTS 1
917 UNIT NOT CALIBRATED 1
921 PROTOTYPE FIRMWARE 1
922 FLEXLOGIC ERR TOKEN 1
923 EQUIPMENT MISMATCH 1
925 UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED 1
926 SYSTEM EXCEPTION 1
927 LATCHING OUT ERROR 1
984 User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 1
event class
D
D.2.2 BINARY AND CONTROL RELAY OUTPUTS
Supported Control Relay Output Block fields: Pulse On, Pulse Off, Latch On, Latch Off, Paired Trip, Paired Close.
BINARY OUTPUT STATUS POINTS
Object Number: 10
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Default Variation reported when Variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output Status)
CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT BLOCKS
Object Number: 12
Request Function Codes supported: 3 (select), 4 (operate), 5 (direct operate), 6 (direct operate, noack)
Table D4: BINARY/CONTROL OUTPUTS
POINT NAME/DESCRIPTION
0 Virtual Input 1
1 Virtual Input 2
2 Virtual Input 3
3 Virtual Input 4
4 Virtual Input 5
5 Virtual Input 6
6 Virtual Input 7
7 Virtual Input 8
8 Virtual Input 9
9 Virtual Input 10
10 Virtual Input 11
11 Virtual Input 12
12 Virtual Input 13
13 Virtual Input 14
14 Virtual Input 15
15 Virtual Input 16
16 Virtual Input 17
17 Virtual Input 18
18 Virtual Input 19
19 Virtual Input 20
20 Virtual Input 21
21 Virtual Input 22
22 Virtual Input 23
23 Virtual Input 24
24 Virtual Input 25
25 Virtual Input 26
26 Virtual Input 27
27 Virtual Input 28
28 Virtual Input 29
29 Virtual Input 30
30 Virtual Input 31
31 Virtual Input 32
D
D.2.3 COUNTERS
The following table lists both Binary Counters (Object 20) and Frozen Counters (Object 21). When a freeze function is per-
formed on a Binary Counter point, the frozen value is available in the corresponding Frozen Counter point.
A counter freeze command has no meaning for counters 8 and 9. B30 Digital Counter values are represented as 32-bit inte-
gers. The DNP 3.0 protocol defines counters to be unsigned integers. Care should be taken when interpreting negative
counter values.
BINARY COUNTERS
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 7 (freeze), 8 (freeze noack), 9 (freeze and clear),
10 (freeze and clear, noack), 22 (assign class)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Binary Counter with Flag)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Counter Change Event without time)
Default Class for all points: 2
FROZEN COUNTERS
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Frozen Counter with Flag)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Frozen Counter Event without time)
Default Class for all points: 2
Table D5: BINARY AND FROZEN COUNTERS
POINT
INDEX
NAME/DESCRIPTION
0 Digital Counter 1
1 Digital Counter 2
2 Digital Counter 3
3 Digital Counter 4
4 Digital Counter 5
5 Digital Counter 6
6 Digital Counter 7
7 Digital Counter 8
8 Oscillography Trigger Count
9 Events Since Last Clear
D
D.2.4 ANALOG INPUTS
The following table lists Analog Inputs (Object 30). It is important to note that 16-bit and 32-bit variations of analog inputs
are transmitted through DNP as signed numbers. Even for analog input points that are not valid as negative values, the
maximum positive representation is 32767 for 16-bit values and 2147483647 for 32-bit values. This is a DNP requirement.
The deadbands for all Analog Input points are in the same units as the Analog Input quantity. For example, an Analog Input
quantity measured in volts has a corresponding deadband in units of volts. This is in conformance with DNP Technical Bul-
letin 9809-001 Analog Input Reporting Deadband. Relay settings are available to set default deadband values according to
data type. Deadbands for individual Analog Input Points can be set using DNP Object 34.
When using the B30 in DNP systems with limited memory, the Analog Input Points below may be replaced with a user-
definable list. This user-definable list uses the same settings as the Modbus User Map and can be configured with the Mod-
bus User Map settings. When used with DNP, each entry in the Modbus User Map represents the starting Modbus address
of a data item available as a DNP Analog Input point. To enable use of the Modbus User Map for DNP Analog Input points,
set the USER MAP FOR DNP ANALOGS setting to Enabled (this setting is in the PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !"
DNP PROTOCOL menu). The new DNP Analog points list can be checked via the DNP Analog Input Points List webpage,
accessible from the Device Information menu webpage.
After changing the USER MAP FOR DNP ANALOGS setting, the relay must be powered off and then back on for the set-
ting to take effect.
Only Source 1 data points are shown in the following table. If the NUMBER OF SOURCES IN ANALOG LIST setting is increased,
data points for subsequent sources will be added to the list immediately following the Source 1 data points.
Units for Analog Input points are as follows:
Current: A (amps)
Voltage: V (volts)
Real Power: W (watts)
Reactive Power: var (vars)
Apparent Power: VA (volt-amps)
Energy Wh, varh (watt-hours, var-hours)
Frequency: Hz (hertz)
Angle: degrees
Ohm Input: ohms
RTD Input: C (degrees Celsius)
NOTE
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 2 (write, deadbands only), 22 (assign class)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Analog Input)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Analog Change Event without Time)
Change Event Scan Rate: defaults to 500 ms
Default Class for all Points: 1
D
Table D6: DNP ANALOG INPUT POINTS (Sheet 1 of 2)
POINT DESCRIPTION
0 SRC 1 Phase A Current RMS
1 SRC 1 Phase B Current RMS
2 SRC 1 Phase C Current RMS
3 SRC 1 Neutral Current RMS
4 SRC 1 Phase A Current Magnitude
5 SRC 1 Phase A Current Angle
6 SRC 1 Phase B Current Magnitude
7 SRC 1 Phase B Current Angle
8 SRC 1 Phase C Current Magnitude
9 SRC 1 Phase C Current Angle
10 SRC 1 Neutral Current Magnitude
11 SRC 1 Neutral Current Angle
12 SRC 1 Ground Current RMS
13 SRC 1 Ground Current Magnitude
14 SRC 1 Ground Current Angle
15 SRC 1 Zero Sequence Current Magnitude
16 SRC 1 Zero Sequence Current Angle
17 SRC 1 Positive Sequence Current Magnitude
18 SRC 1 Positive Sequence Current Angle
19 SRC 1 Negative Sequence Current Magnitude
20 SRC 1 Negative Sequence Current Angle
21 SRC 1 Differential Ground Current Magnitude
22 SRC 1 Differential Ground Current Angle
23 SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage RMS
24 SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage RMS
25 SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage RMS
26 SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage Magnitude
27 SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage Angle
28 SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage Magnitude
29 SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage Angle
30 SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage Magnitude
31 SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage Angle
32 SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage RMS
33 SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage RMS
34 SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage RMS
35 SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage Magnitude
36 SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage Angle
37 SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage Magnitude
38 SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage Angle
39 SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage Magnitude
40 SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage Angle
41 SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage RMS
42 SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage Magnitude
43 SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage Angle
44 SRC 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Magnitude
45 SRC 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Angle
46 SRC 1 Positive Sequence Voltage Magnitude
47 SRC 1 Positive Sequence Voltage Angle
48 SRC 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Magnitude
49 SRC 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Angle
50 SRC 1 Frequency
51 Bus Diff IA Magnitude
52 Bus Diff IA Angle
53 Bus Diff IB Magnitude
54 Bus Diff IB Angle
55 Bus Diff IC Magnitude
56 Bus Diff IC Angle
57 Bus Rest IA Magnitude
58 Bus Rest IA Angle
59 Bus Rest IB Magnitude
60 Bus Rest IB Angle
61 Bus Rest IC Magnitude
62 Bus Rest IC Angle
63 Bus Max CT Primary
64 DCMA Inputs 1 Value
68 RTD Inputs 1 Value
72 Tracking Frequency
73 FlexElement 1 Actual
81 Current Setting Group
Table D6: DNP ANALOG INPUT POINTS (Sheet 2 of 2)
POINT DESCRIPTION
GE Multilin B30 Bus Differential Relay E-1
APPENDIX E E.1 CHANGE NOTES
E
APPENDIX E MISCELLANEOUSE.1CHANGE NOTES E.1.1 REVISION HISTORY
E.1.2 CHANGES TO THE B30 MANUAL
Table E1: REVISION HISTORY
MANUAL P/N B30 REVISION RELEASE DATE ECO
1601-0109-B1 2.4x 08 September 2000 N/A
1601-0109-B2 2.4x 03 November 2000 URB-001
1601-0109-B3 2.6x 09 March 2001 URB-002
1601-0109-B4 2.8x 26 September 2001 URB-003
1601-0109-B5 2.9x 03 December 2001 URB-004
1601-0109-B6 2.6x 27 February 2004 URX-120
1601-0109-C1 3.0x 02 July 2002 URB-007
1601-0109-C2 3.1x 30 August 2002 URB-008
1601-0109-C3 3.0x 18 November 2002 URB-009
1601-0109-C4 3.1x 18 November 2002 URB-010
1601-0109-C5 3.0x 11 February 2003 URB-012
1601-0109-C6 3.1x 11 February 2003 URB-013
1601-0109-D1 3.2x 11 February 2003 URB-015
1601-0109-D2 3.2x 02 June 2003 URX-084
1601-0109-E1 3.3x 01 May 2003 URX-080
1601-0109-E2 3.3x 29 May 2003 URX-083
1601-0109-F1 3.4x 10 December 2003 URX-111
1601-0109-F2 3.4x 09 February 2004 URX-115
1601-0109-G1 4.0x 23 March 2004 URX-123
1601-0109-G2 4.0x 17 May 2004 URX-136
1601-0109-H1 4.2x 30 June 2004 URX-145
1601-0109-H2 4.2x 23 July 2004 URX-151
1601-0109-J1 4.4x 15 September 2004 URX-156
1601-0109-J2 4.4x 05 January 2005 URX-173
Table E2: MAJOR UPDATES FOR B30 MANUAL REVISION J2
PAGE
(J1)
PAGE
(J2)
CHANGE DESCRIPTION
Title Title Update Manual part number to 1601-0109-J2
3-17 3-17 Update Updated RS485 SERIAL CONNECTION diagram to 827757A7
Table E3: MAJOR UPDATES FOR B30 MANUAL REVISION J1
PAGE
(H2)
PAGE
(J1)
CHANGE DESCRIPTION
Title Title Update Manual part number to 1601-0109-J1
5-14 --- Remove Removed UCA/MMS PROTOCOL sub-section
--- 5-14 Add Added IEC 61850 PROTOCOL sub-section
5-100 5-100 Update Updated VIRTUAL INPUTS sub-section
B-8 B-8 Update Updated MODBUS MEMORY MAP for firrmware revision 4.4x
C-1 --- Remove Removed UCA/MMS COMMUNICATIONS appendix
E-2 B30 Bus Differential Relay GE Multilin
E.1 CHANGE NOTES APPENDIX E
E
Table E4: MAJOR UPDATES FOR B30 MANUAL REVISION H2
PAGE
(H1)
PAGE
(H2)
CHANGE DESCRIPTION
Title Title Update Manual part number to 1601-0109-H2
3-20 3-20 Update Updated CHANNEL COMMUNICATIONS OPTIONS table
Table E5: MAJOR UPDATES FOR B30 MANUAL REVISION H1
PAGE
(G2)
PAGE
(H1)
CHANGE DESCRIPTION
Title Title Update Manual part number to 1601-0109-H1
1-12 1-13 Update Updated COMMISSIONING section
2-3 2-3 Update Updated B30 ORDER CODES table
3-6 3-6 Update Updated FORM-A CONTACT FUNCTIONS diagram to 827821A5
5-12 5-12 Update Updated DNP PROTOCOL sub-section to reflect new settings
B-8 B-8 Update Updated MODBUS MEMORY MAP for firmware release 4.2x
Table E6: MAJOR UPDATES FOR B30 MANUAL REVISION G2
PAGE
(G1)
PAGE
(G2)
CHANGE DESCRIPTION
Title Title Update Manual part number to 1601-0109-G2
3-4 3-4 Update Updated TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM to 836773A2
Table E7: MAJOR UPDATES FOR B30 MANUAL REVISION G1
PAGE
(F2)
PAGE
(G1)
CHANGE DESCRIPTION
Title Title Update Manual part number to 1601-0109-G1
2-3 2-3 Update Updated B30 ORDER CODES table
2-4 2-4 Update Updated ORDER CODES FOR REPLACEMENT MODULES table
2-8 2-8 Add Added dcmA and IRIG-B outputs specifications to OUTPUTS section
3-2 3-2 Update Updated MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION section to reflect new hardware
3-5 3-5 Update Updated DIELECTRIC STRENGTH section
3-6 3-6 Update Updated CT/VT MODULES section for new hardware
3-14 3-14 Update Updated drawings and description in TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS section
3-15 3-16 Update Updated drawings and description in CPU COMMUNICATIONS PORTS section
3-17 3-18 Update Updated IRIG-B section to indicate updated functionality
5-16 5-17 Update Updated REAL TIME CLOCK section
5-49 5-49 Update Updated FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS table
5-60 5-60 Update Updated FLEXELEMENT SCHEME LOGIC diagram to 842004A3
5-61 5-61 Update Updated FLEXELEMENT INPUT MODE SETTING diagram to 842706A2
5-110 5-110 Add Added DCMA OUTPUTS section
B-8 B-8 Update Updated MODBUS MEMORY MAP for firmware release 4.0x
APPENDIX E E.1 CHANGE NOTES
E
Table E8: MAJOR UPDATES FOR B30 MANUAL REVISION F2
PAGE
(F1)
PAGE
(F2)
CHANGE DESCRIPTION
Title Title Update Manual part number to 1601-0109-F2
3-14 3-14 Update Updated TRANSDUCER I/O MODULE WIRING diagram to 827831A9-X1.
5-8 5-8 Update Updated DISPLAY PROPERTIES section.
5-74 5-75 Update Updated PHASE TOC1 SCHEME LOGIC diagram to 827072A4.
5-75 5-76 Update Updated PHASE IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC diagram to 827033A6.
5-82 5-82 Update Updated PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE1 SCHEME LOGIC diagram to 827039AB.
Table E9: MAJOR UPDATES FOR B30 MANUAL REVISION F1
PAGE
(E2)
PAGE
(F1)
CHANGE DESCRIPTION
Title Title Update Manual part number to 1601-0109-F1
1-5 1-5 Update Updated software installation procedure.
2-3 2-3 Update Updated ORDER CODES table to add the 67 Digital I/O option.
2-4 2-4 Update Updated ORDER CODES FOR REPLACEMENT MODULES table to add the 67 Module option.
3-9 3-9 Update Updated DIGITAL I/O MODULE ASSIGNMENTS table to add the 67 module.
3-11 3-11 Update Updated the DIGITAL I/O MODULE WIRING diagram to show the 67 module.
B-8 B-8 Update Updated MODBUS MEMORY MAP to reflect new firmware 3.4x
E.2 ABBREVIATIONS APPENDIX E
E
E.2ABBREVIATIONS E.2.1 STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS
A..................... Ampere
AC.................. Alternating Current
A/D................. Analog to Digital
AE .................. Accidental Energization, Application Entity
AMP ............... Ampere
ANG ............... Angle
ANSI............... American National Standards Institute
AR.................. Automatic Reclosure
ASDU............. Application-layer Service Data Unit
ASYM............. Asymmetry
AUTO............. Automatic
AUX................ Auxiliary
AVG................ Average
BER................ Bit Error Rate
BF................... Breaker Fail
BFI.................. Breaker Failure Initiate
BKR................ Breaker
BLK ................ Block
BLKG.............. Blocking
BPNT.............. Breakpoint of a characteristic
BRKR............. Breaker
CAP................ Capacitor
CC.................. Coupling Capacitor
CCVT ............. Coupling Capacitor Voltage Transformer
CFG................ Configure / Configurable
.CFG............... Filename extension for oscillography files
CHK................ Check
CHNL ............. Channel
CLS................ Close
CLSD.............. Closed
CMND ............ Command
CMPRSN........ Comparison
CO.................. Contact Output
COM............... Communication
COMM............ Communications
COMP ............ Compensated, Comparison
CONN............. Connection
CONT............. Continuous, Contact
CO-ORD......... Coordination
CPU................ Central Processing Unit
CRC ............... Cyclic Redundancy Code
CRT, CRNT .... Current
CSA................ Canadian Standards Association
CT .................. Current Transformer
CVT................ Capacitive Voltage Transformer
D/A................. Digital to Analog
DC (dc)........... Direct Current
DD.................. Disturbance Detector
DFLT .............. Default
DGNST........... Diagnostics
DI.................... Digital Input
DIFF ............... Differential
DIR................. Directional
DISCREP ....... Discrepancy
DIST............... Distance
DMD............... Demand
DNP................ Distributed Network Protocol
DPO ............... Dropout
DSP................ Digital Signal Processor
dt .................... Rate of Change
DTT ................ Direct Transfer Trip
DUTT.............. Direct Under-reaching Transfer Trip
ENCRMNT ..... Encroachment
EPRI............... Electric Power Research Institute
.EVT ............... Filename extension for event recorder files
EXT ................ Extension, External
F..................... Field
FAIL................ Failure
FD .................. Fault Detector
FDH................ Fault Detector high-set
FDL ................ Fault Detector low-set
FLA................. Full Load Current
FO.................. Fiber Optic
FREQ............. Frequency
FSK................ Frequency-Shift Keying
FTP................ File Transfer Protocol
FxE ................ FlexElement
FWD............... Forward
G.................... Generator
GE.................. General Electric
GND............... Ground
GNTR............. Generator
GOOSE.......... General Object Oriented Substation Event
GPS ............... Global Positioning System
HARM............ Harmonic / Harmonics
HCT ............... High Current Time
HGF ............... High-Impedance Ground Fault (CT)
HIZ................. High-Impedance and Arcing Ground
HMI ................ Human-Machine Interface
HTTP ............. Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
HYB ............... Hybrid
I ...................... Instantaneous
I_0.................. Zero Sequence current
I_1.................. Positive Sequence current
I_2.................. Negative Sequence current
IA ................... Phase A current
IAB................. Phase A minus B current
IB ................... Phase B current
IBC................. Phase B minus C current
IC................... Phase C current
ICA................. Phase C minus A current
ID................... Identification
IED................. Intelligent Electronic Device
IEC................. International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE............... Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
IG................... Ground (not residual) current
Igd.................. Differential Ground current
IN................... CT Residual Current (3Io) or Input
INC SEQ........ Incomplete Sequence
INIT................ Initiate
INST............... Instantaneous
INV................. Inverse
I/O.................. Input/Output
IOC ................ Instantaneous Overcurrent
IOV................. Instantaneous Overvoltage
IRIG ............... Inter-Range Instrumentation Group
ISO................. International Standards Organization
IUV................. Instantaneous Undervoltage
K0 .................. Zero Sequence Current Compensation
kA................... kiloAmpere
kV................... kiloVolt
LED................ Light Emitting Diode
LEO................ Line End Open
LFT BLD ........ Left Blinder
LOOP............. Loopback
LPU................ Line Pickup
LRA................ Locked-Rotor Current
LTC ................ Load Tap-Changer
M.................... Machine
mA ................. MilliAmpere
MAG............... Magnitude
MAN............... Manual / Manually
MAX............... Maximum
MIC................ Model Implementation Conformance
MIN................ Minimum, Minutes
MMI ................ Man Machine Interface
MMS .............. Manufacturing Message Specification
MRT............... Minimum Response Time
MSG............... Message
MTA................ Maximum Torque Angle
MTR............... Motor
MVA ............... MegaVolt-Ampere (total 3-phase)
MVA_A........... MegaVolt-Ampere (phase A)
MVA_B........... MegaVolt-Ampere (phase B)
MVA_C........... MegaVolt-Ampere (phase C)
APPENDIX E E.2 ABBREVIATIONS
E
MVAR............. MegaVar (total 3-phase)
MVAR_A......... MegaVar (phase A)
MVAR_B......... MegaVar (phase B)
MVAR_C ........ MegaVar (phase C)
MVARH .......... MegaVar-Hour
MW................. MegaWatt (total 3-phase)
MW_A ............ MegaWatt (phase A)
MW_B ............ MegaWatt (phase B)
MW_C............ MegaWatt (phase C)
MWH.............. MegaWatt-Hour
N..................... Neutral
N/A, n/a .......... Not Applicable
NEG............... Negative
NMPLT ........... Nameplate
NOM............... Nominal
NSAP ............. Network Service Access Protocol
NTR................ Neutral
O.................... Over
OC, O/C ......... Overcurrent
O/P, Op........... Output
OP.................. Operate
OPER............. Operate
OPERATG...... Operating
O/S................. Operating System
OSI ................. Open Systems Interconnect
OSB................ Out-of-Step Blocking
OUT................ Output
OV.................. Overvoltage
OVERFREQ... Overfrequency
OVLD ............. Overload
P..................... Phase
PC.................. Phase Comparison, Personal Computer
PCNT ............. Percent
PF................... Power Factor (total 3-phase)
PF_A.............. Power Factor (phase A)
PF_B.............. Power Factor (phase B)
PF_C.............. Power Factor (phase C)
PFLL............... Phase and Frequency Lock Loop
PHS................ Phase
PICS............... Protocol Implementation & Conformance
Statement
PKP................ Pickup
PLC................ Power Line Carrier
POS................ Positive
POTT.............. Permissive Over-reaching Transfer Trip
PRESS........... Pressure
PRI ................. Primary
PROT............. Protection
PSEL.............. Presentation Selector
pu ................... Per Unit
PUIB............... Pickup Current Block
PUIT............... Pickup Current Trip
PUSHBTN...... Pushbutton
PUTT.............. Permissive Under-reaching Transfer Trip
PWM.............. Pulse Width Modulated
PWR............... Power
QUAD............. Quadrilateral
R..................... Rate, Reverse
RCA................ Reach Characteristic Angle
REF................ Reference
REM............... Remote
REV................ Reverse
RI.................... Reclose Initiate
RIP................. Reclose In Progress
RGT BLD........ Right Blinder
ROD............... Remote Open Detector
RST................ Reset
RSTR ............. Restrained
RTD................ Resistance Temperature Detector
RTU................ Remote Terminal Unit
RX (Rx) .......... Receive, Receiver
s ..................... second
S..................... Sensitive
SAT.................CT Saturation
SBO................Select Before Operate
SCADA ...........Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
SEC ................Secondary
SEL.................Select / Selector / Selection
SENS..............Sensitive
SEQ................Sequence
SIR..................Source Impedance Ratio
SNTP..............Simple Network Time Protocol
SRC................Source
SSB.................Single Side Band
SSEL...............Session Selector
STATS.............Statistics
SUPN..............Supervision
SUPV..............Supervise / Supervision
SV...................Supervision, Service
SYNC..............Synchrocheck
SYNCHCHK....Synchrocheck
T......................Time, transformer
TC...................Thermal Capacity
TCP.................Transmission Control Protocol
TCU ................Thermal Capacity Used
TD MULT ........Time Dial Multiplier
TEMP..............Temperature
TFTP...............Trivial File Transfer Protocol
THD ................Total Harmonic Distortion
TMR................Timer
TOC................Time Overcurrent
TOV ................Time Overvoltage
TRANS............Transient
TRANSF .........Transfer
TSEL...............Transport Selector
TUC ................Time Undercurrent
TUV.................Time Undervoltage
TX (Tx)............Transmit, Transmitter
U.....................Under
UC...................Undercurrent
UCA................Utility Communications Architecture
UDP................User Datagram Protocol
UL ...................Underwriters Laboratories
UNBAL............Unbalance
UR...................Universal Relay
URC................Universal Recloser Control
.URS...............Filename extension for settings files
UV...................Undervoltage
V/Hz................Volts per Hertz
V_0 .................Zero Sequence voltage
V_1 .................Positive Sequence voltage
V_2 .................Negative Sequence voltage
VA...................Phase A voltage
VAB.................Phase A to B voltage
VAG ................Phase A to Ground voltage
VARH..............Var-hour voltage
VB...................Phase B voltage
VBA.................Phase B to A voltage
VBG................Phase B to Ground voltage
VC...................Phase C voltage
VCA ................Phase C to A voltage
VCG................Phase C to Ground voltage
VF...................Variable Frequency
VIBR ...............Vibration
VT...................Voltage Transformer
VTFF...............Voltage Transformer Fuse Failure
VTLOS............Voltage Transformer Loss Of Signal
WDG...............Winding
WH..................Watt-hour
w/ opt ..............With Option
WRT................With Respect To
X .....................Reactance
XDUCER.........Transducer
XFMR..............Transformer
Z......................Impedance, Zone
E.3 WARRANTY APPENDIX E
E
E.3WARRANTY E.3.1 GE MULTILIN WARRANTY
GE MULTILIN RELAY WARRANTY
General Electric Multilin Inc. (GE Multilin) warrants each relay it manufactures to be free from
defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of 24 months from
date of shipment from factory.
In the event of a failure covered by warranty, GE Multilin will undertake to repair or replace the relay
providing the warrantor determined that it is defective and it is returned with all transportation
charges prepaid to an authorized service centre or the factory. Repairs or replacement under war-
ranty will be made without charge.
Warranty shall not apply to any relay which has been subject to misuse, negligence, accident,
incorrect installation or use not in accordance with instructions nor any unit that has been altered
outside a GE Multilin authorized factory outlet.
GE Multilin is not liable for special, indirect or consequential damages or for loss of profit or for
expenses sustained as a result of a relay malfunction, incorrect application or adjustment.
For complete text of Warranty (including limitations and disclaimers), refer to GE Multilin Standard
Conditions of Sale.
GE Multilin B30 Bus Differential Relay i
INDEX
I
N
D
E
X
Index
Numerics
10BASE-F
communications options................................................. 3-16
description .................................................................... 3-17
interface........................................................................ 3-27
redundant option ........................................................... 3-16
settings ......................................................................... 5-11
specifications .................................................................. 2-9
A
ABBREVIATIONS............................................................... E-4
AC CURRENT INPUTS .......................................2-7, 3-6, 5-37
AC VOLTAGE INPUTS ................................................ 2-7, 3-7
ACTIVATING THE RELAY ........................................1-12, 4-10
ACTIVE SETTING GROUP ............................................... 5-66
ACTUAL VALUES
product information........................................................ 6-15
status.............................................................................. 6-3
ALARM LEDs ................................................................... 5-24
ALTITUDE ....................................................................... 2-10
ANSI DEVICE NUMBERS................................................... 2-1
APPLICATION EXAMPLES
breaker trip circuit integrity ............................................ 5-94
busbar ............................................................................ 9-1
contact inputs .............................................................. 5-100
setting groups ............................................................... 9-11
slopes ............................................................................. 9-7
zoning ............................................................................. 9-3
APPROVALS ................................................................... 2-11
ARCHITECTURE ............................................................. 5-49
AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE
FlexLogic operands .................................................... 5-51
logic.............................................................................. 5-85
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-24
settings ......................................................................... 5-85
specifications .................................................................. 2-5
AUXILIARY VOLTAGE CHANNEL....................................... 3-7
AUXILIARY VOLTAGE METERING ................................... 6-11
B
BANKS ............................................................. 5-6, 5-37, 5-38
BATTERY FAIL .................................................................. 7-4
BIASED DIFFERENTIAL CHARACTERISTIC....................... 8-4
BINARY INPUT POINTS..................................................... D-8
BINARY OUTPUT POINTS ............................................... D-13
BLOCK DIAGRAM.............................................................. 1-3
BLOCK SETTING............................................................... 5-4
BREAKER-AND-A-HALF SCHEME ..................................... 5-6
BRIGHTNESS.................................................................... 5-8
BUS DIFFERENTIAL
actual values ................................................................. 6-10
characteristic................................................................. 5-67
logic.............................................................................. 5-69
Modbus registers .................................................. B-11, B-21
settings .................................................................5-66, 5-68
specifications .................................................................. 2-5
theory of operation .......................................................... 8-1
BUS REPLICA MECHANISM .............................................. 8-2
BUS ZONE
actual values ................................................................. 6-10
settings ......................................................................... 5-48
BUSBAR EXAMPLE............................................................ 9-1
C
C37.94 COMMUNICATIONS .................................... 3-28, 3-29
CE APPROVALS .............................................................. 2-11
CHANGES TO MANUAL ...................................... E-1, E-2, E-3
CHANNEL COMMUNICATION .......................................... 3-20
CHANNELS
banks ................................................................... 5-37, 5-38
CIRCUIT MONITORING APPLICATIONS........................... 5-92
CLEANING....................................................................... 2-11
CLEAR RECORDS ...................................................... 5-9, 7-2
CLEAR RELAY RECORDS
Modbus registers .......................................................... B-33
settings ........................................................................... 5-9
CLOCK
setting date and time........................................................ 7-2
settings ......................................................................... 5-19
COMMANDS MENU............................................................ 7-1
COMMUNICATIONS
10BASE-F ................................................... 3-16, 3-17, 5-11
channel ......................................................................... 3-20
connecting to the UR................................................. 1-7, 1-8
CRC-16 error checking .................................................... B-2
dnp................................................................ 5-12, 5-19, D-1
EGD .............................................................................. 5-17
G.703 ............................................................................ 3-23
half duplex...................................................................... B-1
HTTP............................................................................. 5-15
IEC 60870-5-104 protocol ............................................... 5-16
IEC 61850 .......................................................... 5-14, 5-107
inter-relay communications ............................................. 2-10
Modbus .................................................. 5-11, 5-19, B-1, B-3
network ......................................................................... 5-11
overview........................................................................ 1-10
RS232 ........................................................................... 3-15
RS485 ......................................................... 3-16, 3-17, 5-10
settings ............................. 5-11, 5-12, 5-14, 5-16, 5-17, 5-19
specifications.......................................................... 2-9, 2-10
UCA/MMS......................................................... 5-105, 5-106
web server ..................................................................... 5-15
COMTRADE ...................................................................... B-6
CONDUCTED RFI ............................................................ 2-11
CONTACT INFORMATION.................................................. 1-1
CONTACT INPUTS
actual values ................................................................... 6-3
dry connections ............................................................. 3-13
FlexLogic operands..................................................... 5-53
Modbus registers ................................. B-9, B-12, B-28, B-30
module assignments ........................................................ 3-9
settings ......................................................................... 5-99
specifications................................................................... 2-7
thresholds ..................................................................... 5-99
wet connections ............................................................. 3-13
wiring ............................................................................ 3-11
CONTACT OUTPUTS
actual values ................................................................... 6-4
Modbus registers .......................................... B-9, B-12, B-32
module assignments ........................................................ 3-9
ii B30 Bus Differential Relay GE Multilin
INDEX
I
N
D
E
X
settings ....................................................................... 5-102
wiring ............................................................................ 3-11
CONTROL ELEMENTS..................................................... 5-86
CONTROL POWER
description....................................................................... 3-6
specifications................................................................... 2-9
CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS
settings ......................................................................... 5-25
specifications................................................................... 2-6
COUNTERS
actual values ................................................................... 6-5
settings ......................................................................... 5-95
CRC ALARM .................................................................... 5-35
CRC-16 ALGORITHM ........................................................ B-2
CRITICAL FAILURE RELAY......................................... 2-8, 3-5
CSA APPROVAL .............................................................. 2-11
CT BANKS
settings ......................................................................... 5-37
CT INPUTS ........................................................ 3-7, 5-6, 5-37
CT RATIO MATCHING ....................................................... 8-3
CT TROUBLE
logic ..................................................................... 5-97, 5-98
settings ......................................................................... 5-97
specifications................................................................... 2-5
CT WIRING........................................................................ 3-7
CURRENT BANK ............................................................. 5-37
CURRENT METERING
actual values ................................................................. 6-10
specifications................................................................... 2-7
CURVES
definite time.......................................................... 5-74, 5-82
FlexCurves........................................................ 5-41, 5-74
I2T ................................................................................ 5-74
IAC ............................................................................... 5-73
IEC ............................................................................... 5-72
IEEE ............................................................................. 5-71
inverse time undervoltage .............................................. 5-82
types ............................................................................. 5-70
D
DATA FORMATS, MODBUS ............................................. B-39
DATE................................................................................. 7-2
DCMA INPUTS................................................................. 6-13
Modbus registers ..................................................B-12, B-22
settings ....................................................................... 5-112
specifications................................................................... 2-7
DCMA OUTPUTS
description..................................................................... 3-14
settings ....................................................................... 5-113
specifications................................................................... 2-9
DEFINITE TIME CURVE .......................................... 5-74, 5-82
DESIGN............................................................................. 1-3
DEVICE ID..................................................................... 5-105
DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT ......................................... D-1
DIELECTRIC STRENGTH.......................................... 2-11, 3-5
DIFFERENTIAL
application of settings ...................................................... 9-7
biased ............................................................................. 8-4
bus............................................... 2-5, 5-48, 5-66, 5-68, 6-10
restraining currents ......................................................... 8-5
DIGITAL COUNTERS
actual values................................................................... 6-5
FlexLogic operands .....................................................5-51
logic ..............................................................................5-96
Modbus registers.................................................... B-9, B-28
settings ..........................................................................5-95
DIGITAL ELEMENTS
application example........................................................5-93
logic ..............................................................................5-92
Modbus registers........................................................... B-27
settings ..........................................................................5-92
DIGITAL INPUTS
see entry for CONTACT INPUTS
DIGITAL OUTPUTS
see entry for CONTACT OUTPUTS
DIMENSIONS .................................................................... 3-1
DIRECT DEVICES
actual values................................................................... 6-7
settings ........................................................................ 5-108
DIRECT I/O
see also DIRECT INPUTS and DIRECT OUTPUTS
application example........................................... 5-109, 5-110
configuration examples ........................ 5-22, 5-31, 5-35, 5-36
settings ..................................... 5-22, 5-31, 5-35, 5-36, 5-108
DIRECT INPUTS
actual values................................................................... 6-6
clearing counters............................................................. 7-2
Modbus registers................................ B-10, B-14, B-34, B-35
settings ........................................................................ 5-108
specifications .................................................................. 2-8
DIRECT OUTPUTS
clearing counters............................................................. 7-2
Modbus registers......................................... B-10, B-34, B-35
settings ........................................................................ 5-109
DIRECTIONAL PRINCIPLE ................................................ 8-7
DISPLAY ............................................................ 1-10, 4-7, 5-8
DNA-1 BIT PAIR ............................................................. 5-107
DNP COMMUNICATIONS
binary counters ............................................................. D-14
binary input points ........................................................... D-8
binary output points ....................................................... D-13
control relay output blocks ............................................. D-13
device profile document ................................................... D-1
frozen counters ............................................................. D-14
implementation table ....................................................... D-4
settings ..........................................................................5-12
user map .......................................................................5-14
DUPLEX, HALF ................................................................. B-1
E
EGD PROTOCOL
actual values................................................................... 6-7
settings ..........................................................................5-17
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE ........................................2-11
ELEMENTS ....................................................................... 5-3
ENERVISTA UR SETUP
creating a site list ............................................................ 4-1
event recorder ................................................................. 4-2
GE Multilin B30 Bus Differential Relay iii
INDEX
I
N
D
E
X
firmware upgrades ........................................................... 4-2
installation ...................................................................... 1-5
introduction ..................................................................... 4-1
oscillography ................................................................... 4-2
overview ......................................................................... 4-1
requirements ................................................................... 1-5
EQUATIONS
definite time curve .................................................5-74, 5-82
FlexCurve .................................................................. 5-74
It curves....................................................................... 5-74
IAC curves .................................................................... 5-73
IEC curves .................................................................... 5-72
IEEE curves .................................................................. 5-71
ETHERNET
actual values ................................................................... 6-6
configuration ................................................................... 1-7
settings ......................................................................... 5-11
specifications .................................................................. 2-9
EVENT CAUSE INDICATORS............................................. 4-5
EVENT RECORDER
actual values ................................................................. 6-14
clearing .................................................................... 5-9, 7-2
Modbus ........................................................................... B-7
specifications .................................................................. 2-7
via enerVista software ..................................................... 4-2
EVENTS SETTING............................................................. 5-4
EXCEPTION RESPONSES................................................. B-5
F
F485 ............................................................................... 1-10
FACEPLATE ...................................................................... 3-1
FACEPLATE PANELS ................................................. 4-4, 4-6
FAST FORM-C RELAY....................................................... 2-8
FAST TRANSIENT TESTING............................................ 2-11
FAX NUMBERS ................................................................. 1-1
FEATURES........................................................................ 2-1
FIRMWARE REVISION .................................................... 6-15
FIRMWARE UPGRADES .................................................... 4-2
FLASH MESSAGES ........................................................... 5-8
FLEX STATE PARAMETERS
actual values ................................................................... 6-5
settings ......................................................................... 5-28
specifications .................................................................. 2-6
FLEXANALOG PARAMETER LIST ...................................... A-1
FLEXCURVES
equation........................................................................ 5-74
settings ......................................................................... 5-41
specifications .................................................................. 2-6
table ............................................................................. 5-41
FLEXELEMENTS
actual values ................................................................. 6-12
direction ........................................................................ 5-63
hysteresis ..................................................................... 5-63
pickup ........................................................................... 5-63
scheme logic ................................................................. 5-62
settings ........................................................ 5-61, 5-62, 5-64
specifications .................................................................. 2-6
FLEXLOGIC
editing with enerVista UR Setup ....................................... 4-1
equation editor ............................................................... 5-60
evaluation...................................................................... 5-55
example ............................................................... 5-49, 5-56
example equation........................................................... 5-86
gate characteristics ........................................................ 5-54
operands .............................................................. 5-50, 5-51
operators ....................................................................... 5-55
rules .............................................................................. 5-55
specifications................................................................... 2-6
timers ............................................................................ 5-60
worksheet ...................................................................... 5-57
FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR .................................. 5-60
FLEXLOGIC TIMERS
settings ......................................................................... 5-60
FORCE CONTACT INPUTS ............................................ 5-117
FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS......................................... 5-118
FORCE TRIGGER ............................................................ 6-14
FORM-A RELAY
high impedance circuits .................................................... 3-9
outputs ............................................................ 3-8, 3-9, 3-13
specifications................................................................... 2-8
FORM-C RELAY
outputs ................................................................... 3-8, 3-13
specifications................................................................... 2-8
FREQUENCY METERING
actual values ................................................................. 6-11
settings ......................................................................... 5-39
specifications................................................................... 2-7
FREQUENCY TRACKING ........................................ 5-39, 6-12
FREQUENCY, NOMINAL .................................................. 5-38
FUNCTION SETTING ......................................................... 5-4
FUSE................................................................................. 2-8
G
G.703 .................................................... 3-22, 3-23, 3-24, 3-27
GE TYPE IAC CURVES .................................................... 5-73
GROUND CURRENT METERING...................................... 6-11
GROUND IOC
logic .............................................................................. 5-81
settings ......................................................................... 5-81
GROUND TIME OVERCURRENT
see entry for GROUND TOC
GROUND TOC
logic .............................................................................. 5-80
settings ......................................................................... 5-80
specifications................................................................... 2-5
GROUPED ELEMENTS .................................................... 5-66
GSSE .................... 5-14, 5-105, 5-106, 5-107, 5-108, 6-5, B-15
H
HALF-DUPLEX .................................................................. B-1
HTTP PROTOCOL............................................................ 5-15
HUMIDITY........................................................................ 2-10
I
I2T CURVES .................................................................... 5-74
iv B30 Bus Differential Relay GE Multilin
INDEX
I
N
D
E
X
IAC CURVES ................................................................... 5-73
IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL
interoperability document ................................................ C-1
settings ......................................................................... 5-16
IEC 61850
device ID..................................................................... 5-105
DNA2 assignments ...................................................... 5-107
remote device settings ................................................. 5-105
remote inputs .............................................................. 5-106
settings ......................................................................... 5-14
UserSt-1 bit pair .......................................................... 5-108
IEC CURVES ................................................................... 5-72
IED.................................................................................... 1-2
IED SETUP ........................................................................ 1-5
IEEE C37.94 COMMUNICATIONS ........................... 3-28, 3-29
IEEE CURVES ................................................................. 5-71
IMPORTANT CONCEPTS ................................................... 1-4
IN SERVICE INDICATOR .......................................... 1-12, 7-3
INPUTS
AC current .............................................................. 2-7, 5-37
AC voltage ............................................................. 2-7, 5-38
contact inputs ...................................... 2-7, 3-11, 5-99, 5-117
dcmA inputs ........................................................... 2-7, 3-14
direct inputs..................................................................... 2-8
IRIG-B.................................................................... 2-7, 3-18
remote inputs ............................................. 2-7, 5-105, 5-106
RTD inputs ............................................................. 2-7, 3-14
virtual .......................................................................... 5-101
INSPECTION CHECKLIST.................................................. 1-1
INSTALLATION
communications ............................................................. 3-16
contact inputs/outputs .................................... 3-9, 3-11, 3-12
CT inputs......................................................................... 3-7
RS485 ........................................................................... 3-17
settings ......................................................................... 5-36
VT inputs ......................................................................... 3-6
INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT
see PHASE, GROUND, and NEUTRAL IOC entries
INSULATION RESISTANCE.............................................. 2-11
INTELLIGENT ELECTRONIC DEVICE................................. 1-2
INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS .................................. 2-10
INTRODUCTION ................................................................ 1-2
INVERSE TIME UNDERVOLTAGE .................................... 5-82
IOC
see PHASE, GROUND, and NEUTRAL IOC entries
IP ADDRESS ................................................................... 5-11
IRIG-B
connection..................................................................... 3-18
settings ......................................................................... 5-19
specifications............................................................ 2-7, 2-9
ISO-9000 REGISTRATION ............................................... 2-11
K
KEYPAD ................................................................... 1-11, 4-7
L
LAMPTEST ........................................................................ 7-2
LASER MODULE.............................................................. 3-21
LATCHING OUTPUTS
application example ...........................................5-103, 5-104
settings ....................................................................... 5-102
specifications .................................................................. 2-8
LED INDICATORS ....................................... 4-4, 4-5, 4-6, 5-24
LED TEST
FlexLogic operand.......................................................5-53
settings ..........................................................................5-22
specifications .................................................................. 2-6
LINK POWER BUDGET.....................................................2-10
LOGIC GATES .................................................................5-55
LOST PASSWORD ............................................................ 5-7
M
MAINTENANCE COMMANDS............................................. 7-2
MANUFACTURING DATE .................................................6-15
MEMORY MAP DATA FORMATS ..................................... B-39
MENU HEIRARCHY ................................................... 1-11, 4-8
MENU NAVIGATION ........................................... 1-11, 4-7, 4-8
METERING
conventions .................................................................... 6-8
current ............................................................................ 2-7
frequency........................................................................ 2-7
voltage............................................................................ 2-7
METERING CONVENTIONS .............................................. 6-8
MODBUS
event recorder ................................................................. B-7
exception responses........................................................ B-5
execute operation............................................................ B-4
flex state parameters ......................................................5-28
function code 03/04h ....................................................... B-3
function code 05h ............................................................ B-4
function code 06h ............................................................ B-4
function code 10h ............................................................ B-5
introduction ..................................................................... B-1
memory map data formats ............................................. B-39
obtaining files ................................................................. B-6
oscillography................................................................... B-6
passwords ...................................................................... B-7
read/write settings/actual values ...................................... B-3
settings ................................................................. 5-11, 5-19
store multiple settings ..................................................... B-5
store single setting .......................................................... B-4
supported function codes ................................................. B-3
user map ...................................................... 5-19, B-9, B-18
MODEL INFORMATION ....................................................6-15
MODIFICATION FILE NUMBER.........................................6-15
MODULES
communications .............................................................3-16
contact inputs/outputs .................................... 3-9, 3-11, 3-12
CT .................................................................................. 3-7
CT/VT ...................................................................... 3-6, 5-6
direct inputs/outputs .......................................................3-21
insertion.......................................................................... 3-2
order codes..................................................................... 2-4
ordering .......................................................................... 2-4
power supply................................................................... 3-5
transducer I/O ................................................................3-14
VT .................................................................................. 3-7
withdrawal ...................................................................... 3-2
MOUNTING ....................................................................... 3-1
N
NAMEPLATE ..................................................................... 1-1
NEUTRAL INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT
see entry for NEUTRAL IOC
GE Multilin B30 Bus Differential Relay v
INDEX
I
N
D
E
X
NEUTRAL IOC
logic.............................................................................. 5-79
settings ......................................................................... 5-79
specifications .................................................................. 2-5
NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE
logic.............................................................................. 5-85
settings ......................................................................... 5-84
specifications .................................................................. 2-5
NEUTRAL TIME OVERCURRENT
see entry for NEUTRAL TOC
NEUTRAL TOC
logic.............................................................................. 5-78
settings ......................................................................... 5-78
specifications .................................................................. 2-5
NON-VOLATILE LATCHES
settings ......................................................................... 5-65
specifications .................................................................. 2-6
O
ONE SHOTS.................................................................... 5-55
OPERATING TEMPERATURE .......................................... 2-10
OPERATING TIMES........................................................... 2-5
ORDER CODES..................................................2-3, 6-15, 7-2
ORDER CODES, UPDATING.............................................. 7-2
ORDERING ......................................................... 2-2, 2-3, 2-4
OSCILLATORY TRANSIENT TESTING ............................. 2-11
OSCILLOGRAPHY
actual values ................................................................. 6-14
clearing .................................................................... 5-9, 7-2
Modbus ........................................................................... B-6
settings ......................................................................... 5-20
specifications .................................................................. 2-7
via COMTRADE............................................................... B-6
via enerVista software ..................................................... 4-2
OUTPUT LOGIC ................................................................ 8-9
OUTPUTS
contact outputs............................................. 3-9, 3-11, 5-102
control power .................................................................. 2-9
critical failure relay .......................................................... 2-8
Fast Form-C relay ........................................................... 2-8
Form-A relay ............................................. 2-8, 3-8, 3-9, 3-13
Form-C relay ....................................................2-8, 3-8, 3-13
IRIG-B ............................................................................ 2-9
latching outputs .....................................................2-8, 5-102
remote outputs .................................................. 5-107, 5-108
virtual outputs ............................................................. 5-104
OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES...................................... 5-70
OVERCURRENT CURVES
definite time .................................................................. 5-74
FlexCurves ................................................................ 5-74
I2T................................................................................ 5-74
IAC ............................................................................... 5-73
IEC ............................................................................... 5-72
IEEE ............................................................................. 5-71
OVERVOLTAGE
auxiliary ................................................................. 2-5, 5-85
neutral ................................................................... 2-5, 5-84
P
PANEL CUTOUT ................................................................ 3-1
PARITY............................................................................ 5-10
PASSWORD SECURITY ..................................................... 5-7
PASSWORDS
changing ....................................................................... 4-11
lost password ......................................................... 4-11, 5-7
Modbus .......................................................................... B-7
Modbus registers ................................................. B-11, B-14
overview........................................................................ 1-12
security ........................................................................... 5-7
settings ........................................................................... 5-7
PC SOFTWARE
see entry for ENERVISTA UR SETUP
PERMISSIVE FUNCTIONS ............................................... 5-82
PER-UNIT QUANTITY ........................................................ 5-3
PHASE ANGLE METERING ................................................ 6-8
PHASE CURRENT METERING ......................................... 6-10
PHASE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT
see entry for PHASE IOC
PHASE IOC
logic .............................................................................. 5-77
specifications................................................................... 2-5
PHASE ROTATION .......................................................... 5-39
PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT
see entry for PHASE TOC
PHASE TOC
logic .............................................................................. 5-76
settings ......................................................................... 5-75
specifications................................................................... 2-5
PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE
logic .............................................................................. 5-84
settings ......................................................................... 5-83
specifications................................................................... 2-5
PHONE NUMBERS............................................................. 1-1
POWER SUPPLY
description....................................................................... 3-5
low range ........................................................................ 2-8
specifications................................................................... 2-8
POWER SYSTEM
PREFERENCES
PRODUCT INFORMATION ........................................ 6-15, B-8
PRODUCT SETUP ............................................................. 5-7
PRODUCTION TESTS ...................................................... 2-11
PROTECTION ELEMENTS ................................................. 5-3
PU QUANTITY ................................................................... 5-3
PUSHBUTTONS, USER-PROGRAMMABLE
see USER-PROGRAMMBLE PUSHBUTTONS
R
REAL TIME CLOCK
settings ......................................................................... 5-19
REAR TERMINAL ASSIGNMENTS ...................................... 3-3
RECLOSER CURVES .............................................. 5-44, 5-74
vi B30 Bus Differential Relay GE Multilin
INDEX
I
N
D
E
X
REDUNDANT 10BASE-F .................................................. 3-16
RELAY ACTIVATION........................................................ 4-10
RELAY ARCHITECTURE .................................................. 5-49
RELAY MAINTENANCE...................................................... 7-2
RELAY NAME .................................................................. 5-36
RELAY NOT PROGRAMMED............................................ 1-12
REMOTE DEVICES
actual values ................................................................... 6-4
device ID..................................................................... 5-105
settings ....................................................................... 5-105
statistics .......................................................................... 6-5
REMOTE INPUTS
actual values ................................................................... 6-3
settings ....................................................................... 5-106
specifications................................................................... 2-7
REMOTE OUTPUTS
DNA-1 bit pair .............................................................. 5-107
UserSt-1 bit pair .......................................................... 5-108
REPLACEMENT MODULES................................................ 2-4
RESETTING.......................................................... 5-53, 5-108
RESTRAINING CURRENTS................................................ 8-5
REVISION HISTORY ......................................................... E-1
RFI SUSCEPTIBILITY ...................................................... 2-11
RFI, CONDUCTED ........................................................... 2-11
RMS CURRENT ................................................................. 2-7
RMS VOLTAGE.................................................................. 2-7
RS232
configuration ................................................................... 1-8
specifications................................................................... 2-9
wiring ............................................................................ 3-15
RS422
configuration ................................................................. 3-25
timing ............................................................................ 3-26
two-channel application.................................................. 3-25
with fiber interface ......................................................... 3-27
RS485
communications ............................................................. 3-16
description..................................................................... 3-17
specifications................................................................... 2-9
RTD INPUTS
actual values ................................................................. 6-13
settings ....................................................................... 5-113
specifications................................................................... 2-7
S
SALES OFFICE.................................................................. 1-1
SATURATION DETECTOR ................................................. 8-8
SCAN OPERATION ............................................................ 1-4
SECURITY......................................................................... 8-6
SELECTOR SWITCH
actual values ................................................................... 6-5
application example ....................................................... 5-91
logic .............................................................................. 5-91
settings ......................................................................... 5-87
specifications................................................................... 2-6
timing ................................................................... 5-89, 5-90
SELF-TESTS
description ...................................................................... 7-3
error messages ............................................................... 7-4
Modbus registers............................................................. B-8
SERIAL NUMBER .............................................................6-15
SERIAL PORTS
settings ..........................................................................5-10
SETTING GROUPS ............................... 5-52, 5-66, 5-86, B-26
SETTINGS, CHANGING..................................................... 4-9
SIGNAL SOURCES
description ...................................................................... 5-5
metering ........................................................................6-10
SIGNAL TYPES ................................................................. 1-3
SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM ............................................. 2-1, 2-2
SITE LIST, CREATING ...................................................... 4-1
SNTP PROTOCOL
settings ..........................................................................5-17
SOFTWARE
installation ...................................................................... 1-5
SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE............................................ 1-4
SOFTWARE, PC
see entry for enerVista UR Setup
SOURCE FREQUENCY ....................................................6-12
SOURCE TRANSFER SCHEMES ......................................5-82
SOURCES
description ...................................................................... 5-5
example use of ...............................................................5-40
metering ........................................................................6-10
settings ..........................................................................5-39
SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................. 2-5
ST TYPE CONNECTORS ..................................................3-17
STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS ........................................... E-4
STATUS INDICATORS....................................................... 4-4
SURGE IMMUNITY ...........................................................2-11
SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS METERING ...................... 6-8
SYSTEM FREQUENCY .....................................................5-38
SYSTEM SETUP ..............................................................5-37
T
TARGET MESSAGES ........................................................ 7-3
TARGET SETTING ............................................................ 5-4
TARGETS MENU............................................................... 7-3
TCP PORT NUMBER ........................................................5-15
TEMPERATURE, OPERATING..........................................2-10
TERMINALS ...................................................................... 3-3
TESTING
force contact inputs ...................................................... 5-117
force contact outputs .................................................... 5-118
lamp test ......................................................................... 7-2
self-test error messages .................................................. 7-3
THEORY OF OPERATION ................................................. 8-1
TIME ................................................................................. 7-2
TIME OVERCURRENT
see PHASE, NEUTRAL, and GROUND TOC entries
TIMERS ...........................................................................5-60
TOC
ground ...........................................................................5-80
neutral ...........................................................................5-78
phase ............................................................................5-75
specifications .................................................................. 2-5
TRACKING FREQUENCY ....................................... 6-12, B-24
GE Multilin B30 Bus Differential Relay vii
INDEX
I
N
D
E
X
TRANSDUCER I/O
actual values ................................................................. 6-13
settings ............................................................. 5-112, 5-113
specifications .................................................................. 2-7
wiring ............................................................................ 3-14
TRIP LEDs ...................................................................... 5-24
TROUBLE INDICATOR ............................................. 1-12, 7-3
TYPE TESTS ................................................................... 2-11
TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM.............................................. 3-4
U
UL APPROVAL ................................................................ 2-11
UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS
commands ...................................................................... 5-9
resetting.......................................................................... 7-2
UNDERVOLTAGE
phase..................................................................... 2-5, 5-83
UNDERVOLTAGE CHARACTERISTICS ............................ 5-82
UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED .............................................. 5-36
UNPACKING THE RELAY .................................................. 1-1
UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM................................. 5-36
UPDATING ORDER CODE ................................................. 7-2
URPC
USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
example ........................................................................ 5-30
invoking and scrolling .................................................... 5-29
settings .................................................................5-29, 5-30
specifications .................................................................. 2-6
USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT
actual values ................................................................. 6-14
clearing .................................................................... 5-9, 7-2
settings ......................................................................... 5-19
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDs
custom labeling ............................................................... 4-6
defaults ........................................................................... 4-5
description ...................................................................... 4-5
settings ......................................................................... 5-24
specifications .................................................................. 2-6
USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS
settings ......................................................................... 5-27
specifications................................................................... 2-6
USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS
settings ......................................................................... 5-25
USERST-1 BIT PAIR ...................................................... 5-108
V
VIBRATION TESTING ...................................................... 2-11
VIRTUAL INPUTS
actual values ................................................................... 6-3
commands ....................................................................... 7-1
logic ............................................................................ 5-101
Modbus registers ................................................... B-8, B-30
settings ....................................................................... 5-101
VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
actual values ................................................................... 6-4
settings ....................................................................... 5-104
VOLTAGE BANKS ............................................................ 5-38
VOLTAGE DEVIATIONS ................................................... 2-11
VOLTAGE ELEMENTS ..................................................... 5-82
VOLTAGE METERING
specifications................................................................... 2-7
values ........................................................................... 6-11
VOLTAGE RESTRAINT CHARACTERISTIC....................... 5-75
VT INPUTS ........................................................ 3-7, 5-6, 5-38
VT WIRING ........................................................................ 3-7
W
WARRANTY ...................................................................... E-6
WEB SERVER PROTOCOL .............................................. 5-15
WEBSITE........................................................................... 1-1
WIRING DIAGRAM ............................................................. 3-4
Z
ZERO SEQUENCE CORE BALANCE .................................. 3-7
ZONING............................................................................. 9-3
viii B30 Bus Differential Relay GE Multilin
INDEX
I
N
D
E
X

Manual B30

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual B30

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual B30

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

B30 Bus Differential Relay

UR Series Instruction Manual

RTU protocol. The RS485 ports may be connected to system computers

DIRECT DEVICE 16On

DIRECT DEVICE 16Off

Flag is set, logic=1

Flag is set, logic=1

Digital Counter 8 output is more than comparison value

Dig Element 16 PKP

Digital Element 16 is picked up

FlexElement 8 has picked up

Non-Volatile Latch 16 is ON (Logic = 1)

SETTING GROUP ACT 6

Setting Group 6 is active

(will not appear unless ordered)

(will not appear unless ordered)

(will not appear unless ordered)

(will not appear unless ordered)

(will not appear unless ordered)

(will not appear unless ordered)

Flag is set, logic=1

Flag is set, logic=1

Flag is set, logic=1

Flag is set, logic=1

Flag is set, logic=1

REMOTE DEVICE 16 Off

Flag is set, logic=1

Operates on the 16 previous parameters.

16 input AND gate

Operates on the 16 previous parameters.

16 input NOR gate

Operates on the 16 previous parameters.

16 input NAND gate

Operates on the 16 previous parameters.

Timer set with FlexLogic Timer 32 settings.

Assigns previous FlexLogic parameter to Virtual

# CONTACT INPUT xxx

MAX VAL MIN VAL

Table 71: TARGET MESSAGE PRIORITY STATUS

On constant for the status.

On constant for the status.

On constant for the status.

and a single (final)

to process the status signals in order to identify the weakest CT.

RTU protocol is used.

includes a 16-bit cyclic redundancy check

definition of this function code.

C-2 B30 Bus Differential Relay GE Multilin

GE Multilin B30 Bus Differential Relay C-3

C-4 B30 Bus Differential Relay GE Multilin

C-8 B30 Bus Differential Relay GE Multilin

GE Multilin B30 Bus Differential Relay C-9

C-10 B30 Bus Differential Relay GE Multilin

D-2 B30 Bus Differential Relay GE Multilin

D-4 B30 Bus Differential Relay GE Multilin

You might also like

Pfad - The Proxy pFad of © 2024 Garber Painting. All rights reserved.